The books in the LRC are arranged by topic using Library of Congress classification system. Here are a few call number ranges to explore:
Arts Management
NX 760 Administration of the Arts. Administrators. Arts boards Including arts administration training General works, Special regions or countries, United States
NX 765 General works
NX 767.A-Z Local, A-Z
NX 768.A-Z Special Administrators, A-Z
NX 770.A-Z Other regions or countries, A-Z
Under each country:
.x General
.x2A-.x2Z Local, A-Z
.x3A-.x3Z Special administrators, A-Z
For Subject searches using the Worldcat Discover, try:
To do Keyword searches, you can either use add terms or use phrases.
Searching for Arts Management?
Test out arts AND management or "arts management" as searches and see what you can find.
The Arts Management program provides an encompassing education in the management of arts, culture, and creative industry sectors. Proficiencies of budding arts managers are built upon arts and cultural understanding and a grounding in the arts ecosystem and technologies, institutions and businesses that run on art and its production and presentation, towards the skillful creation of spaces for dialogue and formation and engagement of audiences through various critical and creative platforms.
This subject guide gathers in one place carefully evaluated and selected resources on Arts Management Program available and accessible at the LRC and its subscribed databases. Books (both print and electronic) are categorized per course; while journals, magazines, online databases are recommended for the entire Arts Management program.
QUICK LINKS
Current Studies in Anthropology
AMANTRO forms part of an arts management seminar series which emphasizes current trends, challenges, best practices, and contemporary ecosystem of the creative industries and complex nature of culture and heritage landscape, conservation, and sustainability of communities relevant to arts management.
30-second anthropology : the 50 most important ideas in the study of being human, each explained in half a minute by
30-second anthropology explores humanity through 50 key biological and social topics, revealing how we have evolved from chimp-like ancestors to being able to send rockets to Mars. The human brain is the most complex organ in the known universe and has allowed us to use tools and develop amzing technologies to manage our planet and ou rlives. Being human is also about how we interact, and here you can discover how we organize our communities, why rituals and ceremonies are important to us, and why we have developed diverse and complex belief systerm. 30-second Anthropology is the fastest way to understand what it measn to be human.
Art's Agency and Art History by
Art's Agency and Art History re-articulates the relationshipof the anthropology of art to key methodological and theoreticalapproaches in art history, sociology, and linguistics. Explores important concepts and perspectives in theanthropology of art Includes nine groundbreaking case studies by an internationallyrenowned group of art historians and art theorists Covers a wide range of periods, including Bronze-Age China,Classical Greece, Rome, and Mayan, as well as the modern Westernworld Features an introductory essay by leading experts, which helpsclarify issues in the field Includes numerous illustrations
Becoming art : exploring cross-cultural categories by
Thirty years ago Australian Aboriginal art was little more than a footnote to world art. Today, it is considered to be an important contemporary art movement, often promoted as being connected to a deep cultural past. Becoming Art provides a new analysis of the shifting cultural and social contexts that surround the production of Aboriginal art. Transcending the boundaries between anthropology and art history, the book draws on arguments from both disciplines to provide a unique interdisciplinary perspective that places the artists themselves at the centre of the argument.Western art history has traditionally regarded Aboriginal art as distanced from time and place. Becoming Art uses the recent history of Aboriginal art to challenge some of the presuppositions of western art discourse and western art worlds. It argues for a more cross-cultural perspective on world art history.
Classic Readings in Cultural Anthropology by
Concise, inexpensive, and accessible, CLASSIC READINGS IN CULTURAL ANTHROPOLOGY, Fourth Edition, provides an excellent introduction to the field of anthropology and the contributions it makes to understanding the world around us.
A Companion to Heritage Studies by
A Companion to Heritage Studies is a comprehensive, state-of-the-art survey of the interdisciplinary study of cultural heritage. Outlines the key themes of research, including cultural preservation, environmental protection, world heritage and tourism, ethics, and human rights Accessibly organized into a substantial framework-setting essay by the editors followed by three sections on expanding, using and abusing, and recasting heritage Provides a cutting-edge guide to emerging trends in the field that is that is global in scope, cross-cultural in focus and critical in approach Features contributions from an international array of scholars, including some with extensive experience in heritage practice through UNESCO World Heritage Centre, ICOMOS, and national heritage systems
Culture Sketches: Case Studies in Anthropology by
Ideal for any cultural anthropology course, this brief collection of ethnographic case studies exposes students to 15 different cultures. The groups selected are peoples whose traditional cultures are uniquely their own. Each has distinctive patterns and practices; each has faced the challenge of an encroaching world, with differing results. Moreover, they often provide the prime illustrations of important concepts in introductory anthropology course including Azande witchcraft, Ju/’hoansi egalitarianism, Trobriand kula exchange, and Minangkabau matriliny. As such, this volume can stand alone as an introduction to central ethnographic concepts through these 15 societies, or serve as a valuable companion to anthropology texts. Many of the peoples presented are involved in the diaspora; some struggle to preserve old ways in new places. All sketches follow a logical, consistent organization that makes it easy for students to understand major themes such as history, subsistence, sociopolitical organization, belief systems, marriage, kinship, and contemporary issues.
Design anthropology : theory and practice by
Design is a key site of cultural production and change in contemporary society. Anthropologists have been involved in design projects for several decades but only recently a new field of inquiry has emerged which aims to integrate the strengths of design thinking and anthropological research. This book is written by anthropologists who actively participate in the development of design anthropology. Comprising both cutting-edge explorations and theoretical reflections, it provides a much-needed introduction to the concepts, methods, practices and challenges of the new field. Design Anthropology moves from observation and interpretation to collaboration, intervention and co-creation. Its practitioners participate in multidisciplinary design teams working towards concrete solutions for problems that are sometimes ill-defined. The authors address the critical potential of design anthropology in a wide range of design activities across the globe and query the impact of design on the discipline of anthropology. This volume will appeal to new and experienced practitioners in the field as well as to students of anthropology, innovation, science and technology studies, and a wide range of design studies focusing on user participation, innovation, and collaborative research.
Making : anthropology, archaeology, art and architecture by
Making creates knowledge, builds environments and transforms lives. Anthropology, archaeology, art and architecture are all ways of making, and all are dedicated to exploring the conditions and potentials of human life. In this exciting book, Tim Ingold ties the four disciplines together in a way that has never been attempted before. In a radical departure from conventional studies that treat art and architecture as compendia of objects for analysis, Ingold proposes an anthropology and archaeology not of but with art and architecture. He advocates a way of thinking through making in which sentient practitioners and active materials continually answer to, or 'correspond', with one another in the generation of form. Making offers a series of profound reflections on what it means to create things, on materials and form, the meaning of design, landscape perception, animate life, personal knowledge and the work of the hand. It draws on examples and experiments ranging from prehistoric stone tool-making to the building of medieval cathedrals, from round mounds to monuments, from flying kites to winding string, from drawing to writing. The book will appeal to students and practitioners alike, with interests in social and cultural anthropology, archaeology, architecture, art and design, visual studies and material culture.
Object atlas : fieldwork in the museum by
Object Atlas presents objects from the Weltkulturen Museum's ethnographic collection alongside new works produced by eight artists who lived and worked in the museum's laboratory during 2011: Alf Bayrle, Helke Bayrle, Thomas Bayrle, Marc Camille Chaimowicz, Sunah Choi, Antje Majewski, Otobong Nkanga, Simon Popper and Hans-J rgen Heinrichs.
Race/Gender/Class/Media by
- Provides a thorough, detailed introduction to the key concepts of the issues of race, gender, class and the media in a succinct and accessible format. - Addresses current debates surrounding these cultural issues, particularly as represented in and by the media, making it a uniquely timely book. - Includes alternate tables of contents to give instructors flexibility in course building as well as pedagogical features such as an 'It's Your Turn' feature, discussion questions, and activities after each reading and suggested further resources to help students grapples with the concepts discussed. - Thoroughly updated edition features almost entirely new content.
The Routledge Companion to Landscape Studies by
Landscape is a vital, synergistic concept which opens up ways of thinking about many of the problems which beset our contemporary world, such as climate change, social alienation, environmental degradation, loss of biodiversity and destruction of heritage. As a concept, landscape does not respect disciplinary boundaries. Indeed, many academic disciplines have found the concept so important, it has been used as a qualifier that delineates whole sub-disciplines: landscape ecology, landscape planning, landscape archaeology, and so forth. In other cases, landscape studies progress under a broader banner, such as heritage studies or cultural geography. Yet it does not always mean the same thing in all of these contexts. The Routledge Companion to Landscape Studies offers the first comprehensive attempt to explore research directions into the many uses and meanings of ¿landscape¿. The Companion contains thirty-nine original contributions from leading scholars within the field, which have been divided into four parts: Experiencing Landscape; Landscape Culture and Herita≥ Landscape, Society and Justice; and Design and Planning for Landscape. Topics covered range from phenomenological approaches to landscape, to the consideration of landscape as a repository of human culture; from ideas of identity and belonging, to issues of power and hegemony; and from discussions of participatory planning and design to the call for new imaginaries in a time of global and environmental crisis. Each contribution explores the future development of different conceptual and theoretical approaches, as well as recent empirical contributions to knowledge and understanding. Collectively, they encourage dialogue across disciplinary barriers and reflection upon the implications of research findings for local, national and international policy in relation to landscape.¿ This Companion provides up-to-date critical reviews of state of the art perspectives across this multifaceted field, embracing disciplines such as anthropology, archaeology, cultural studies, geography, landscape planning, landscape architecture, countryside management, forestry, heritage studies, ecology, and fine art. It serves as an invaluable point of reference for scholars, researchers and graduate students alike, engaging in the field of landscape studies.
World art : an introduction to the art in artefacts by
What do we mean by 'art'? As a category of objects, the concept belongs to a Western cultural tradition, originally European and now increasingly global, but how useful is it for understanding other traditions? To understand art as a universal human value, we need to look at how the concept was constructed in order to reconstruct it through an understanding of the wider world. Western art values have a pervasive influence upon non-Western cultures and upon Western attitudes to them. This innovative yet accessible new text explores the ways theories of art developed as Western knowledge of the world expanded through exploration and trade, conquest, colonisation and research into other cultures, present and past. It considers the issues arising from the historical relationships which brought diverse artistic traditions together under the influence of Western art values, looking at how art has been used by colonisers and colonised in the cses of collecting and commerce, cultural hegemony and tonomous identities.World Art questions conventional Western assumptions from an anthropological perspective which allows comparison between cultures. It treats art as a property of artefacts rather than a category of objects, reclaiming the idea of 'world art' from the 'art world'. This book is essential reading for all students on anthropology of art courses as well as students of museum studies and art history, based on a wide range of case studies and supported by learning featur
Current Studies in Anthropology
AMANTRO forms part of an arts management seminar series which emphasizes current trends, challenges, best practices, and contemporary ecosystem of the creative industries and complex nature of culture and heritage landscape, conservation, and sustainability of communities relevant to arts management.
The Art of Anthropology / the Anthropology of Art by
The Art of Anthropology/The Anthropology of Art brings together thirteen essays, all of which were presented at the March 2011 annual meeting of the Southern Anthropological Society (SAS) in Richmond, Virginia. Collectively, the essays in this volume explore not only art through the lens of anthropology but also anthropology through the lens of art. Given that art is a social phenomenon, the contributors to this volume interpret the complex relationships between art and anthropology as a means of fashioning novelty, continuity, and expression in everyday life. They further explore this connection by reifying customs and traditions through texts, textures, and events, thereby shaping the very artistic skills acquired by experience, study, and observation into something culturally meaningful. In this book, the contributors revisit older debates within the discipline about the relationship between anthropology’s messages and the rhetoric that conveys those messages in new ways. They ask how and why anthropology is persuasive and how artful forms of anthropology in the media and the classroom shape and shift public understandings of the human world. The papers in this volume are organized into four groups: Textual Art, Art Valuation, Critical Art, and Art and Anthropology in Our Classroom and Colleges. Brandon D. Lundy is an assistant professor of anthropology at Kennesaw State University.
Astonishment and evocation : the spell of culture in art and anthropology by
All societies are shaped by arts, media, and other persuasive practices that can awe, captivate, enchant or otherwise seem to cast a spell on the audience. Likewise, scholarship itself often is driven by a sense of wonder and a willingness to be open to what lies beyond the obvious. This book broadens and deepens this perspective. Inspired by Stephen Tyler's view of ethnography as an art of evocation, international scholars from the fields of aesthetics, anthropology, and rhetoric explore the spellbinding power of elusive meanings as people experience them in daily life and while gazing at works of art, watching films or studying other cultures. The book is divided into three parts covering the evocative power of visual art, the immersion in ritual and performance, and the reading, writing, and interpretation of texts. Taken as a whole, the contributions to the book demonstrate how astonishment and evocation deserve an important place in the conceptual repertoire of the human sciences.
Dancing cultures : globalization, tourism and identity in the anthropology of dance by
Dance is more than an aesthetic of life - dance embodies life. This is evident from the social history of jive, the marketing of trans-national ballet, ritual healing dances in Italy or folk dances performed for tourists in Mexico, Panama and Canada. Dance often captures those essential dimensions of social life that cannot be easily put into words. What are the flows and movements of dance carried by migrants and tourists? How is dance used to shape nationalist ideology? What are the connections between dance and ethnicity, gender, health, globalization and nationalism, capitalism and post-colonialism? Through innovative and wide-ranging case studies, the contributors explore the central role dance plays in culture as leisure commodity, cultural heritage, cultural aesthetic or cathartic social movement.
Making by
Making creates knowledge, builds environments and transforms lives. Anthropology, archaeology, art and architecture are all ways of making, and all are dedicated to exploring the conditions and potentials of human life. In this exciting book, Tim Ingold ties the four disciplines together in a way that has never been attempted before. In a radical departure from conventional studies that treat art and architecture as compendia of objects for analysis, Ingold proposes an anthropology and archaeology not of but with art and architecture. He advocates a way of thinking through making in which sentient practitioners and active materials continually answer to, or 'correspond', with one another in the generation of form. Making offers a series of profound reflections on what it means to create things, on materials and form, the meaning of design, landscape perception, animate life, personal knowledge and the work of the hand. It draws on examples and experiments ranging from prehistoric stone tool-making to the building of medieval cathedrals, from round mounds to monuments, from flying kites to winding string, from drawing to writing. The book will appeal to students and practitioners alike, with interests in social and cultural anthropology, archaeology, architecture, art and design, visual studies and material culture.
Making and growing : anthropological studies of organisms and artefacts by
Making and Growing brings together the latest work in the fields of anthropology and material culture studies to explore the differences - and the relation - between making things and growing things, and between things that are made and things that grow. Though the former are often regarded as artefacts and the latter as organisms, the book calls this distinction into question, examining the implications for our understanding of materials, design and creativity.
New Perspectives in Iconology by
Visual studies emerged in the context of a growing awareness of the impact of visual media on society and culture; from the 1990s onwards, art historians no longer had an exclusive patent on the study of the visual medium. This volume follows the developments in the iconological methods in visual arts and offers a platform for collaboration between individuals and institutions interested in the evolution of iconological interpretation. Sharing lectures, ideas, methods, and old and current research on iconology, this account promotes the further study and exploration of making, meaning, and migration of images in art history.
A new way of thinking : generative anthropology in religion, philosophy, art by 
Religion and Architecture in Premodern Indonesia by
In Religions and Architecture in Premodern Indonesia Gaudenz Domenig presents a new approach to the study of indigenous religions and their influence on vernacular architecture in Indonesia.
Style and Meaning by
Anthropology's engagement with art has a complex and uneven history. While material culture, 'decorative art', and art styles were of major significance for founding figures such as Alfred Haddon and Franz Boas, art became marginal as the discipline turned towards social analysis in the 1920s. This book addresses a major moment of renewal in the anthropology of art in the 1960s and 1970s. British anthropologist Anthony Forge (1929-1991), trained in Cambridge, undertook fieldwork among the Abelam of Papua New Guinea in the late 1950s and 1960s, and wrote influentially, especially about issues of style and meaning in art. His powerful, questioning-raising arguments addressed basic issues, asking why so much art was produced in some regions, and why was it so socially important? Fifty years later, art has renewed global significance, and anthropologists are again considering both its local expressions among Indigenous peoples and its new global circulation. In this context, Forge's arguments have renewed relevance: they help scholars and students understand the genealogies of current debates, and remind us of fundamental questions that remain unanswered. This volume brings together Forge's most important writings on the anthropology of art, published over a thirty year period, together with six assessments of his legacy, including extended reappraisals of Sepik ethnography, by distinguished anthropologists from Australia, Germany, Switzerland and the United Kingdom. Anthony Forge was born in London in 1929. A student at Downing College, Cambridge, he studied anthropology with Edmund Leach, and went on to undertake research with Raymond Firth at the London School of Economics. Over 1958-63 he undertook several periods of fieldwork among the Abelam of the Sepik region of Papua New Guinea, made major collections for the Museum der Kulturen, Basel, and went on to write a series of essays which were enormously influential for the anthropology of art and for studies of Melanesia. He was appointed Foundation Professor of Anthropology at the Australian National University in 1974 and taught there until his death in 1991.
The Zen Arts : an Anthropological Study of the Culture of Aesthetic Form in Japan. by
The tea ceremony and the martial arts are intimately linked in the popular and historical imagination with Zen Buddhism, and Japanese culture. They are commonly interpreted as religio-aesthetic pursuits which express core spiritual values through bodily gesture and the creation of highly valued objects. Ideally, the experience of practising the Zen arts culminates in enlightenment. This book challenges that long-held view and proposes that the Zen arts should be understood as part of a literary and visual history of representing Japanese culture through the arts. Cox argues that these texts and images emerged fully as systems for representing the arts during the modern period, produced within Japan as a form of cultural nationalism and outside Japan as part of an orientalist discourse. Practitioners' experiences are in fact rarely referred to in terms of Zen or art, but instead are spatially and socially grounded. Combining anthropological description with historical criticism, Cox shows that the Zen arts are best understood in terms of a dynamic relationship between an aesthetic discourse on art and culture and the social and embodied experiences of those who participate in them.
AMCRITM forms part of an arts management seminar series which emphasizes current trends, challenges, best practices, and contemporary ecosystem of the creative industries and complex nature of culture and heritage landscape, conservation, and sustainability of communities relevant to arts management.
Art and Ethics in a Material World by
In this book, McMahon argues that a reading of Kant's body of work in the light of a pragmatist theory of meaning and language (which arguably is a Kantian legacy) leads one to put community reception ahead of individual reception in the order of aesthetic relations. A core premise of the book is that neo-pragmatism draws attention to an otherwise overlooked aspect of Kant's "Critique of Aesthetic Judgment," and this is the conception of community which it sets forth. While offering an interpretation of Kant's aesthetic theory, the book focuses on the implications of Kant's third critique for contemporary art. McMahon draws upon Kant and his legacy in pragmatist theories of meaning and language to argue that aesthetic judgment is a version of moral judgment: a way to cultivate attitudes conducive to community, which plays a pivotal role in the evolution of language, meaning, and knowledge.
Art As Biblical Commentary by
Art as Biblical Commentary is not just about biblical art but, more importantly, about biblical exegesis and the contributions visual criticism as an exegetical tool can make to biblical exegesis and commentary. Using a range of texts and numerous images, J. Cheryl Exum asks what works of art can teach us about the biblical text. 'Visual criticism' is her term for an approach that addresses this question by focusing on the narrativity of images reading them as if, like texts, they have a story to tell and asking what light an image's 'story' can shed on the biblical narrator's story. In Part I, Exum elaborates on her approach and offers a personal testimony to the value of visual criticism. Part 2 examines in detail the story of Hagar in Genesis 16 and 21. Part 3 contains chapters on erotic looking and voyeuristic gazing in the stories of Bathsheba, Susanna, Joseph and Potiphar's wife and the Song of Songs; on the distribution of renown among Jael, Deborah and Barak; on the Bible's notorious women, Eve and Delilah; and on the sacrificed female body in the stories of the Levite's wife (Judges 19) and Mary the mother of Jesus.
Art As Enterprise by
Art is produced, circulated, consumed and disseminated within an economic system - it depends on money for its creation, for the livelihood of its makers, and for its distribution. In this sense, art can be understood as an enterprising activity. However, profit-making is rarely the primary goal of artists, and indeed the entanglement of art with enterprise generates significant aesthetic, conceptual, philosophical and ethical challenges for contemporary art practice. Social enterprise has emerged from this complex terrain with the promise of an alternative model of economic organisation in the arts. Grace McQuilten and Anthony White argue that artists can, and have, engaged critically in the commercial market, by way of this model. Art as Enterprise brings a fresh perspective to the debate about the roles of contemporary art in consumer capitalist society.
Art fundamentals : theory and practice by
The original textbook that set the standard for art foundations courses across the country, Art Fundamentals has guided generations of students through both the essential elements of art and the rich and varied history of their uses. We have organized Art Fundamentals to assist with "knowing" and "feeling" the fundamental concepts of refined creation. Our intent is to stimulate without locking students into a restricted mind-set or mechanical copying of ideas.
The Arts in Education by
Do the arts improve academic achievement? What does it mean to 'teach' art? What should the balance of classic and pop be in the music curriculum? Should we encourage young children on the stage? How do we judge whether what a child produces is good? How do we justify the arts in the curriculum? What should be the balance between form and content when teaching art? The arts in education inspire considerable commitment and passion. However, this is not always matched by clarity of understanding. In this book Mike Fleming introduces the reader to key theoretical questions associated with arts education and clearly explains how these are related to practice. It offers an authoritative account of how ideas relevant to education are addressed by key authors in aesthetics, art theory and cultural studies. Covering all aspects of arts education, the book considers: definitions and theories of art influences on teaching the arts researching the arts teaching and learning creativity assessment. Throughout the book there are examples of practice to illustrate key ideas and a discussion of useful background texts with a summary of content and arguments for further exploration. Written by a leading authority in the field, it is essential reading for students on Arts PGCE and M Level courses, teachers of the arts and policy developers that require more understanding and insight into their practice.
Art theory : an historical introduction by
Indispensable reading for both art lovers and students, ArtTheory, 2nd Edition explores Western thought about art fromancient times to the post-modern period. Wide-ranging andexceptionally balanced in its analysis, Art History relatestheory to the practice as well as to the intellectual andcultural-historical currents of each period. This new edition expands the original to include more indepthcoverage of contemporary art. Newly updated bibliography and suggestions for furtherreading Six chapters covering the major periods of Western art history:Antiquity and the Middle Ages, the early modern period (Renaissanceand Baroque), the Enlightenment, the nineteenth century, earlytwentieth-century modernism, and postmodernism. Geared to the needs of the general reader and beginningstudents
A Companion to Modern Art by
A Companion to Modern Art presents a series of original essays by international and interdisciplinary authors who offer a comprehensive overview of the origins and evolution of artistic works, movements, approaches, influences, and legacies of Modern Art. Presents a contemporary debate and dialogue rather than a seamless consensus on Modern Art Aims for reader accessibility by highlighting a plurality of approaches and voices in the field Presents Modern Art's foundational philosophic ideas and practices, as well as the complexities of key artists such as Cezanne and Picasso, and those who straddled the modern and contemporary Looks at the historical reception of Modern Art, in addition to the latest insights of art historians, curators, and critics to artists, educators, and more
Contemporary Perspectives on Art and International Development by
Visual artists, craftspeople, musicians, and performers have been supported by the development community for at least twenty years, yet there has been little grounded and critical research into the practices and politics of that support. This new Routledge book remedies that omission and brings together varied perspectives from artists, policy-makers, and researchers working in the Pacific, Africa, Latin America, and Europe to explore the challenges and opportunities of supporting the arts in the development context. The book offers a series of grounded analyses which cover: strategies for the sustainability of arts enterprises; innovative evaluation methods; theoretical engagements with questions of art, agency, and social change; artists' entanglements with legal and structural frameworks; processes of cultural mapping; and the artist/donor interface. The creative economy is increasingly recognized as a driver of development and this book also investigates the contribution made by the arts to the processes of international development, and considers how those processes can best be supported by development agencies. Contemporary Perspectives on Art and International Development gives scholars of Development Studies, Social and Cultural Geography, Anthropology, Cultural Policy, Cultural Studies, and Global Studies a contextually and thematically diverse range of insights into this emerging research field.
Digital design theory : readings from the field by
Digital Design Theory bridges the gap between the discourse of print design and interactive experience by examining the impact of computation on the field of design. As graphic design moves from the creation of closed, static objects to the development of open, interactive frameworks, designers seek to understand their own rapidly shifting profession. Helen Armstrong's carefully curated introduction to groundbreaking primary texts, from the 1960s to the present, provides the background necessary for an understanding of digital design vocabulary and thought. Accessible essays from designers and programmers are by influential figures such as Ladislav Sutnar, Bruno Munari, Wim Crouwel, Sol LeWitt, Muriel Cooper, Zuzana Licko, Rudy VanderLans, John Maeda, Paola Antonelli, Luna Maurer, and Keetra Dean Dixon. Their topics range from graphic design's fascination with programmatic design, to early strivings for an authentic digital aesthetic, to the move from object-based design and to experience-based design. Accompanying commentary assesses the relevance of each excerpt to the working and intellectual life of designers.
Gardner's art through the ages : a concise global history by
GARDNER'S ART THROUGH THE AGES: A CONCISE GLOBAL HISTORY, 4th Edition provides you with a comprehensive, beautifully illustrated tour of the world's great artistic traditions, and, with MindTap, all of the online study tools you need to excel in your art history course! Easy to read and understand, the fourth edition includes new artists and provides a rich cultural backdrop for each of the covered periods and geographical locations.
The Global Contemporary Art World by
The final installment in the critically-acclaimed trilogy on globalization and art explores the growing dominance of Asian centers of art This book takes readers on a fascinating journey around five Asian centers of contemporary art and its myriad institutions, agents, forms, materials, and languages, while posing vital questions about the political economy of culture and the power of visual art in a multi-polar world. He analyzes the financial powerhouse of Art Basel Hong Kong, new media art in South Korea, the place of the Kochi Biennale within contemporary art in India, transnational art and art education in China, and the geo-politics of art patronage in Palestine, and he develops a highly original synthesis of theoretical perspectives and empirical research. Drawing on detailed case studies and personal insights gained from his extensive experience of the contemporary art scene in Asia, Professor Harris examines the evolving relationship between the western centers of art practice, collection, and validation and the emerging "peripheries" of Asian Tiger societies with burgeoning art centers. And he arrives at the somewhat controversial conclusion that dominance of the art world is rapidly slipping away from Europe and North America. The Global Contemporary Art World is essential reading for undergraduates and postgraduate students in modern and contemporary art, art history, art theory and criticism, cultural studies, the sociology of culture, and globalization studies. It is also a vital resource for research students, academics, and professionals in the art world.
History of Illustration by
Winner of the 2019 CHOICE Award "The authoritative book on the origins, history, and influence of illustration. Bravo!" David Brinley, University of Delaware, USA History of Illustration covers image-making and print history from around the world, spanning from the ancient to the modern. Hundreds of color images show illustrations within their social, cultural, and technical context, while they are ordered from the past to the present. Readers will be able to analyze images for their displayed techniques, cultural standards, and ideas to appreciate the art form. This essential guide is the first history of illustration written by an international team of illustration historians, practitioners, and educators.
Journalism, Technology and Cultural Practice by
Presents a new perspective on journalism history and development, exploring and emphasising how the role of technology has impacted on cultural practices in the industry. Clearly and chronological structured to highlight key cultural shift in relation to a range of journalism technologies including print, radio, television and digital developments. Engages with central critical and theoretical discussions in journalism studies in relation to ideas of profit, control, consumption and contribution, and the perceptions of journalist's role in wider society.
A new way of seeing : the history of art in 57 works by
An exciting new criticalvoice explores what it isthat makes great art greatthrough an illuminatinganalysis of the world'sartistic masterpieces. From a carved mammoth tusk (ca. 40,000 BCE) to Bosch's Garden of Earthly Delights (1505-1510) to Duchamp's Fountain (1917), a remarkable lexicon of astonishing imagery has imprinted itself onto the cultural consciousness of the past 40,000 years. Author Kelly Grovier devotes himself to illuminating these and more than fifty other seminal works in this radical new history of art. Stepping away from biography, style, and the chronology of "isms" that preoccupies most of art history, A New Way of Seeing invites a new interaction with art, one in which we learn from the artworks and not just about them. Grovier identifies that part of the artwork that bridges the divide between art and life and elevates its value beyond the visual to the vital. This book challenges the sensibility that conceives of artists as brands and the works they create as nothing more than material commodities to hoard, hide, and flip for profit. Lavishly illustrated with many of the most breathtaking and enduring artworks ever created, Kelly Grovier casts fresh light on these famous works by daring to isolate a single, and often overlooked, detail responsible for its greatness and power to move.
Perception and Agency in Shared Spaces of Contemporary Art by
This book examines the interconnections between art, phenomenology, and cognitive studies. Contributors question the binary oppositions generally drawn between visuality and agency, sensing and thinking, phenomenal art and politics, phenomenology and structuralism, and subjective involvement and social belonging. Instead, they foreground the many ways that artists ask us to consider how we sense, think, and act in relation to a work of art.
Plastic capitalism : contemporary art and the drive to waste by
An argument for the centrality of the visual culture of waste--as seen in works by international contemporary artists--to the study of our ecological condition. Ecological crisis has driven contemporary artists to engage with waste in its most non-biodegradable forms: plastics, e-waste, toxic waste, garbage hermetically sealed in landfills. In this provocative and original book, Amanda Boetzkes links the increasing visualization of waste in contemporary art to the rise of the global oil economy and the emergence of ecological thinking. Often, when art is analyzed in relation to the political, scientific, or ecological climate, it is considered merely illustrative. Boetzkes argues that art is constitutive of an ecological consciousness, not simply an extension of it. The visual culture of waste is central to the study of the ecological condition. Boetzkes examines a series of works by an international roster of celebrated artists, including Thomas Hirschhorn, Francis Alÿs, Song Dong, Tara Donovan, Agnès Varda, Gabriel Orozco, and Mel Chin, among others, mapping waste art from its modernist origins to the development of a new waste imaginary generated by contemporary artists. Boetzkes argues that these artists do not offer a predictable or facile critique of consumer culture. Bearing this in mind, she explores the ambivalent relationship between waste (both aestheticized and reviled) and a global economic regime that curbs energy expenditure while promoting profitable forms of resource consumption.
Sacrificial Bodies by
Sacrificial Bodies is a comprehensive study on how the act of heroic sacrifice against foreign aggression has been transformed into a means of liberating generations of Filipinos from all forms of oppression, through the iconic pose and location of Guillermo Tolentino's sculpture, the Oblation, within the University of the Philippines (UP) campus. The book chronicles the ideas, philosophies, and genealogy of this statue from the turn of the century to the present, combining approaches in anthropology, art history, political science, and literary theory in fleshing out the various meanings and implications of this pose. Irrevocably tied to the student body and faculty of UP, the Oblation's sacrificial symbolism was also meant to cover a national audience, and teach us how to redeem ourselves by undertaking the same process of suffering, death, and resurrection that its primary model, the Passion of Christ, imprinted upon the cultural memory of colonial-era Filipinos. By tracing this idea through the various icons and images of the Oblation, the book also reveals how ambivalent and context-specific this assertion has been ingrained, imagined, and re-experienced by generations of practitioners in Philippine visual culture.
Seeing differently : a history and theory identification and the visual arts by
Seeing Differently offers a history and theory of ideas about identity in relation to visual arts discourses and practices in Euro-American culture, from early modern beliefs that art is an expression of an individual, the painted image a "world picture" expressing a comprehensive and coherent point of view, to the rise of identity politics after WWII in the art world and beyond. The book is both a history of these ideas (for example, tracing the dominance of a binary model of self and other from Hegel through classic 1970s identity politics) and a political response to the common claim in art and popular political discourse that we are "beyond" or "post-" identity. In challenging this latter claim, Seeing Differently critically examines how and why we "identify" works of art with an expressive subjectivity, noting the impossibility of claiming we are "post-identity" given the persistence of beliefs in art discourse and broader visual culture about who the subject "is," and offers a new theory of how to think this kind of identification in a more thoughtful and self-reflexive way. Ultimately, Seeing Differently offers a mode of thinking identification as a "queer feminist durational" process that can never be fully resolved but must be accounted for in thinking about art and visual culture. Queer feminist durationality is a mode of relational interpretation that affects both "art" and "interpreter," potentially making us more aware of how we evaluate and give value to art and other kinds of visual culture.
Supercommunity : diabolical togetherness beyond contemporary art by
I am the supercommunity, and you are only starting to recognize me. I grew out of something that used to be humanity. Some have compared me to angry crowds in public squares; others compare me to wind and atmosphere, or to software. Invited to exhibit at the 56th Venice Biennale, e-flux journal produced a single issue over a four-month span, publishing an article a day both online and on-site at Venice. In essays, poems, short stories, and plays, artists and theorists trace the negative collective that is the subject of contemporary life, in which art, the internet, and globalization have shed their utopian guises but persist as naked power, in the face of apocalyptic ecological disaster and against the claims of the social commons. I convert care to cruelty, and cruelty back to care. I convert political desires to economic flows and data, and then I convert them back again. I convert revolutions to revelations. I don 't want, I want to leave, and then disperse myself everywhere and all the time.
Television Studies in Queer Times by
An accessible collection for students studying gender, queer studies and media examines a range of genres including documentary, reality tv and drama mobilizes new 'queer tools' for studying television
Video art theory : a comparative approach by
Video Art Theory: A Comparative Approach demonstrates howvideo art functions on the basis of a comparative media approach,providing a crucial understanding of video as a medium incontemporary art and of the visual mediations we encounter in dailylife. A critical investigation of the visual media and selected videoartworks which contributes to the understanding of video as amedium in contemporary art The only study specifically devoted to theorizing the medium ofvideo from the perspective of prominent characteristics whichresult from how video works deal with time, space, representation,and narrative The text has emerged out of the author?s own lectures andseminars on video art Offers a comparative approach which students find especiallyuseful, offering new perspectives
Visual Typologies from the Early Modern to the Contemporary by
Visual Typologies from the Early Modern to the Contemporaryinvestigates the pictorial representation of types from the sixteenth to the twenty- first century. Originating in longstanding visual traditions, including street crier prints and costume albums, these images share certain conventions as they seek to convey knowledge about different peoples. The genre of the type became widespread in the early modern period, developing into a global language of identity. The chapters explore diverse pictorial representations of types, customs, and dress in numerous media, including paintings, prints, postcards, photographs, and garments. Together, they reveal that the activation of typological strategies, including seriality, repetition, appropriation, and subversion has produced a universal and dynamic pictorial language. Typological images highlight the tensions between the local and the international, the specific and the communal, and similarity and difference inherent in the construction of identity. The first full- length study to treat these images as a broader genre, Visual Typologiesgives voice to a marginalized form of representation. Together, the chapters debunk the classification of such images as unmediated and authentic representations, offering fresh methodological frameworks to consider their meanings locally and globally, and establishing common ground about the operations of objects that sought to shape, embody, or challenge individual and collective identities.
Writing the modern : selected texts on art & art history in Singapore, Malaysia & Southeast Asia, 1973-2015 by
Published by the Singapore Art Museum T. K. Sabapathy has been writing on the art of Southeast Asia for more than four decades, as a critic, curator, and art historian. He is a penetrating critic and ardent advocate for the art and artists of Singapore and Malaysia. His art historical methods, critical documentation, deep dialogue with artists, and detailed explication of their works have set the course of art discourse in the region. Writing the Modern is the first collection of Sabapathy's work, featuring pieces that represent the scope and depth of his output and highlight his most important and influential writings. At the same time, it is a survey of the vast changes in the landscape of art in the region over the period. Sabapathy chronicles the shift in Asian art from a predominantly nationalist/modernist mode to a global contemporary style. Those new to his work will find this the ideal introduction to his oeuvre. And his longtime fans will find this book the perfect opportunity for review and renewed consideration of his work. Ultimately, it's a collection sure to fuel a new generation of modern and contemporary art writing, research, and exhibition making.
AMCRITM forms part of an arts management seminar series which emphasizes current trends, challenges, best practices, and contemporary ecosystem of the creative industries and complex nature of culture and heritage landscape, conservation, and sustainability of communities relevant to arts management.
After unique- ness : a history of film and video art in circulation by
Images have never been as freely circulated as they are today. They have also never been so tightly controlled. As with the birth of photography, digital reproduction has created new possibilities for the duplication and consumption of images, offering greater dissemination and access. But digital reproduction has also stoked new anxieties concerning authenticity and ownership. From this contemporary vantage point, After Uniqueness traces the ambivalence of reproducibility through the intersecting histories of experimental cinema and the moving image in art, examining how artists, filmmakers, and theorists have found in the copy a utopian promise or a dangerous inauthenticity-or both at once. From the sale of film in limited editions on the art market to the downloading of bootlegs, from the singularity of live cinema to video art broadcast on television, Erika Balsom investigates how the reproducibility of the moving image has been embraced, rejected, and negotiated by major figures including Stan Brakhage, Leo Castelli, and Gregory Markopoulos. Through a comparative analysis of selected distribution models and key case studies, she demonstrates how the question of image circulation is central to the history of film and video art. After Uniqueness shows that distribution channels are more than neutral pathways; they determine how we encounter, interpret, and write the history of the moving image as an art form.
Art and design : history, theory, practice by
"This book is a selection of papers at the Art and Design Symposium at the Dunedin School of Art over two days 16-17 October 2015."--Acknowledgements.
Art Beyond Borders by
This book presents and analyzes artistic interactions between 1945 and 1989, both within the Soviet bloc and between it and the Western bloc. During the Cold War the exchange of artistic ideas and products united Europe's avant-garde in a most remarkable way. Through the Iron Curtain and through the national borders there was a constant flow of artists, artworks, artistic ideas and practices. But the geography of these exchanges still needs to be defined. How were networks, centres, peripheries (local, national and international), scales and distances constructed? What were the relations between the officially promoted socialist realism and the (neo)avant-garde tendencies? The slowly expanding literature on the art of Eastern Europe in western European languages provides a great deal of factual knowledge about a vast cultural space mostly through the prism of stereotypes and in national compartments. By discussing artworks, studying the writings on art, reconstructing trajectories and artists' strategies, as well as the influence of political authorities, art dealers and art critics, the essays in Art beyond Borders compose a transnational history of arts in the Soviet satellite countries. Key words: 1. Art and society--Communist countries. 2. Art--Foreign influences--Communist countries--20th century. 3. Art, European--20th century. 4. Cultural relations--History--20th century.
Art in World History by
A guide to the establishment of the library which covers materials acquisition, the organization and usage of the library's collection to provide a variety of services and the use of automation. This book aims to instruct the librarian on managing the small library effectively.
The Art of History by
A significant trend in the study of Greek and Roman historiographers is to accept that their works are to a degree both science and fiction. As scholarly interest broadens, in addition to evaluating ancient historians on the basis of the reliability of the information they record, and verifying the narratives against various elements of the material (inscriptions, excavations, numismatics), new studies are beginning to elaborate on the stylistic and narrative qualities of the texts themselves. The present volume offers a fine collection of essays that on the whole emphasize the literary dimensions of the ancient Greek and Roman historians. Offering narratological, linguistic, and theoretical approaches to historiography, the contributors of the book elaborate on the intersections between historiography and other literary genres, the literary manipulation of military events and the criteria of selectivity, the reception of ancient historical texts in other genres, time and space in historical narrative, and plenty of other relevant topics. The shared belief of the authors is that there is a close interrelation between the literary features and the scientific value of ancient Greek and Roman historiography.
Classical art : a life history from antiquity to the present by
How did the statues of ancient Greece wind up dictating art history in the West? How did the material culture of the Greeks and Romans come to be seen as "classical" and as "art"? What does "classical art" mean across time and place? In this ambitious, richly illustrated book, art historian and classicist Caroline Vout provides an original history of how classical art has been continuously redefined over the millennia as it has found itself in new contexts and cultures. All of this raises the question of classical art's future. What we call classical art did not simply appear in ancient Rome, or in the Renaissance, or in the eighteenth-century Academy. Endlessly repackaged and revered or rebuked, Greek and Roman artifacts have gathered an amazing array of values, both positive and negative, in each new historical period, even as these objects themselves have reshaped their surroundings. Vout shows how this process began in antiquity, as Greeks of the Hellenistic period transformed the art of fifth-century Greece, and continued through the Roman empire, Constantinople, European court societies, the neoclassical English country house, and the nineteenth century, up to the modern museum. A unique exploration of how each period of Western culture has transformed Greek and Roman antiquities and in turn been transformed by them, this book revolutionizes our understanding of what classical art has meant and continues to mean.
A Companion to Modern Art by
A Companion to Modern Art presents a series of original essays by international and interdisciplinary authors who offer a comprehensive overview of the origins and evolution of artistic works, movements, approaches, influences, and legacies of Modern Art. Presents a contemporary debate and dialogue rather than a seamless consensus on Modern Art Aims for reader accessibility by highlighting a plurality of approaches and voices in the field Presents Modern Art's foundational philosophic ideas and practices, as well as the complexities of key artists such as Cezanne and Picasso, and those who straddled the modern and contemporary Looks at the historical reception of Modern Art, in addition to the latest insights of art historians, curators, and critics to artists, educators, and more
Enchanted Objects : Visual Art in Contemporary Fiction by
Addressing current debates in museum studies, cultural studies, art history, and literary criticism, Enchanted Objects develops an extensive theory of how contemporary literature engages with and relates to aesthetic objects.
Finding voice : a visual arts approach to engaging social change by
In Finding Voice, Kim Berman demonstrates how she was able to use visual arts training in disenfranchised communities as a tool for political and social transformation in South Africa. Using her own fieldwork as a case study, Berman shows how hands-on work in the arts with learners of all ages and backgrounds can contribute to economic stability by developing new skills, as well as enhancing public health and gender justice within communities. Berman's work, and the community artwork her book documents, present the visual arts as a crucial channel for citizens to find their individual voices and to become agents for change in the arenas of human rights and democracy.
The Global Contemporary Art World by
The final installment in the critically-acclaimed trilogy on globalization and art explores the growing dominance of Asian centers of art This book takes readers on a fascinating journey around five Asian centers of contemporary art and its myriad institutions, agents, forms, materials, and languages, while posing vital questions about the political economy of culture and the power of visual art in a multi-polar world. He analyzes the financial powerhouse of Art Basel Hong Kong, new media art in South Korea, the place of the Kochi Biennale within contemporary art in India, transnational art and art education in China, and the geo-politics of art patronage in Palestine, and he develops a highly original synthesis of theoretical perspectives and empirical research. Drawing on detailed case studies and personal insights gained from his extensive experience of the contemporary art scene in Asia, Professor Harris examines the evolving relationship between the western centers of art practice, collection, and validation and the emerging "peripheries" of Asian Tiger societies with burgeoning art centers. And he arrives at the somewhat controversial conclusion that dominance of the art world is rapidly slipping away from Europe and North America. The Global Contemporary Art World is essential reading for undergraduates and postgraduate students in modern and contemporary art, art history, art theory and criticism, cultural studies, the sociology of culture, and globalization studies. It is also a vital resource for research students, academics, and professionals in the art world.
A History of Art History by
An authoritative history of art history from its medieval origins to its modern predicaments In this wide-ranging and authoritative book, the first of its kind in English, Christopher Wood tracks the evolution of the historical study of art from the late middle ages through the rise of the modern scholarly discipline of art history. Synthesizing and assessing a vast array of writings, episodes, and personalities, this original and accessible account of the development of art-historical thinking will appeal to readers both inside and outside the discipline. The book shows that the pioneering chroniclers of the Italian Renaissance--Lorenzo Ghiberti and Giorgio Vasari--measured every epoch against fixed standards of quality. Only in the Romantic era did art historians discover the virtues of medieval art, anticipating the relativism of the later nineteenth century, when art history learned to admire the art of all societies and to value every work as an index of its times. The major art historians of the modern era, however--Jacob Burckhardt, Aby Warburg, Heinrich Wölfflin, Erwin Panofsky, Meyer Schapiro, and Ernst Gombrich--struggled to adapt their work to the rupture of artistic modernism, leading to the current predicaments of the discipline. Combining erudition with clarity, this book makes a landmark contribution to the understanding of art history.
Industry and intelligence : contemporary art since 1820 by
The conceptual artist Liam Gillick writes a holistic genealogy of contemporary art, arguing that we need to appreciate its engagement with history, even when it seems apathetic or blind to current events. Rather than focus on dominant works or special cases, Gillick takes a broad view of artistic creation from 1820 to today, underscoring the industry and intelligence of artists as they have responded to incremental developments in science, politics, and technology.
Re-Assessing the Global Turn in Medieval Art History by
Study of the migration of motifs, materials, personnel, and finished objects in Eurasia has a long pedigree in medieval art history, and the broadening attention to material culture as an alternative to purely textually based historical accounts has been integral to reshaping the conception of an interconnected medieval world. The growth in debates concerning the concept of "the global" throughout art history, and the more complex picture of Eurasian and African societies and material culture that has emerged in the past two decades has highlighted challenges to traditional art historical narratives, specializations, and scholarly training. And while these problems affect Byzantine, Islamic, Western medieval, and East Asian art history, there has been little conversation among scholars in these fields. A cutting-edge work on global medieval art, this volume offers a starting point for conversations among scholars working on multiple cultural regions.
Situating Global Art by
In recent years, the term global art has become a catchphrase in contemporary art discourses. Going beyond additive notions of canon expansion, this volume encourages a differentiated inquiry into the complex aesthetic, cultural, historical, political, epistemological and socio-economic implications of both the term global art itself and the practices it subsumes. Focusing on diverse examples of art, curating, historiography and criticism, the contributions not only take into account (new) hegemonies and exclusions but also the shifting conditions of transcultural art production, circulation and reception.
Philippine Culture and Society
AMCULTR forms part of an arts management seminar series which emphasizes current trends, challenges, best practices, and contemporary ecosystem of the creative industries and complex nature of culture and heritage landscape, conservation, and sustainability of communities relevant to arts management.
Cases on arts and culture management in the Philippine setting by Contemporary Philippine culture : selected papers on arts and education by 
Educating in the arts : the Asian experience : twenty-four essays by
Written by leaders in a wide range of creative fields and from all corners of the Asian region, this collection of essays presents arts and education programs which reflect traditional and contemporary practices. The volume aims to encourage the use of the arts in developing international understanding, celebrating cultural diversity, building cultural bridges and creating cross-cultural dialogue throughout the Asian region.
Elites and Ilustrados in Philippine Culture by
This book examines how Filipino literature has intervened in the intellectual and popular debates on the historical origins, ascendancy, power, and legitimacy of the elites. Writers like Jose Rizal, Nick Joaquin, Ninotchka Rosca, Miguel Syjuco, and Ramon Guillermo are unsparing in their criticism of elite authorship of the Philippines' past and present woes while seeking to recuperate the critical stance represented by the ilustrado. The book highlights a number of figures--the "middle sector" or "middle element" in Manila and other urban areas, Manila men and musicians, overseas Filipino workers, intellectuals, and Fil-foreigners--whose emergence as social forces points to the ongoing redefinition of the elites and the transformation of Philippine society, politics, and economy.
Encyclopedia of Philippine art by Halakhak : national humor in Philippine popular cultural forms by 
Interrogations in Philippine Cultural History by
These articles interrogate diverse issues in Philippine cultural history: the place of Nick Joaquin in the nation's historiography; the debate on the class position of Andres Bonifacio and the revolutionary outbreak of 1896; the state of regional literary studies and the case of Filipino crime fiction; and Philippine electoral politics as seen in the cracked mirror of Pascual Racuyal's career. The book ends with the author's reflections on the past four decades of Philippine cultural studies.
Keywords : essays on Philippine media cultures and neocolonialisms by
These essays form a conjectural historiography of how aspects of Philippine media shape and are shaped by various political, economic, and cultural infrastructures. As a whole, the collection renders visibly the forms, contents, and substantiations of the experiences of Philippine necolonialisms and media cultures. Drawing from Raymond Williams's seminal and innovative work, Keywords, the essays trace the origin and development of key terms, concepts, and words that have influenced and are influenced by Philippine media in the nation's transnational experience with neocolonialism.
Philippine art and culture by
Part of the Art and Culture Series published by Baglan Art and Culture Initiatives, Inc.
Philippine modernities : music, performing arts, and language, 1880 to 1941 by Sacrificial bodies : the oblation and the political aesthetics of masculine representations in Philippine visual cultures by
Sacrificial Bodies is a comprehensive study on how the act of heroic sacrifice against foreign aggression has been transformed into a means of liberating generations of Filipinos from all forms of oppression, through the iconic pose and location of Guillermo Tolentino's sculpture, the Oblation, within the University of the Philippines (UP) campus. The book chronicles the ideas, philosophies, and genealogy of this statue from the turn of the century to the present, combining approaches in anthropology, art history, political science, and literary theory in fleshing out the various meanings and implications of this pose. Irrevocably tied to the student body and faculty of UP, the Oblation's sacrificial symbolism was also meant to cover a national audience, and teach us how to redeem ourselves by undertaking the same process of suffering, death, and resurrection that its primary model, the Passion of Christ, imprinted upon the cultural memory of colonial-era Filipinos. By tracing this idea through the various icons and images of the Oblation, the book also reveals how ambivalent and context-specific this assertion has been ingrained, imagined, and re-experienced by generations of practitioners in Philippine visual culture.
Saysay himig : a sourcebook on Philippine music history, 1880-1941 by Stamps of the Philippines : historical and topical collections, 1854-2004. by Philippine Culture and Society
AMCULTR forms part of an arts management seminar series which emphasizes current trends, challenges, best practices, and contemporary ecosystem of the creative industries and complex nature of culture and heritage landscape, conservation, and sustainability of communities relevant to arts management.
Body, Movement, and Culture : Kinesthetic and Visual Symbolism in a Philippine Community by
In Body, Movement, and Culture, Sally Ann Ness provides an original interpretive account of three forms of sinulog dancing practiced in Cebu City in the Philippines: a healing ritual, a dance drama, and a "cultural" exhibition dance. Ness's examination of these dance forms yields rich insights into the cultural predicament of this Philippine city and the way in which kinesthetic and visual symbols interact to create meaning. Ness scrutinizes the patterns of movement, the use of the body and of objects, and the shaping of space common to all three versions of the sinulog. She then relates these elements to the fundamental ways the culture bearers of Cebu City experience their world. For example, she shows how each of the dance forms functions to reinforce class distinctions and to establish a code of authenticated "cultural" action. At the same time, Ness demonstrates, the dances manifest and actualize widely applied notions about the nature of "devotion," "sincerity," "naturalness," and "beauty." Throughout the text, Ness provides a close analysis of movement that is all too often missing from anthropological studies of dance. Most significantly, she works to relate the movements used in dance to everyday movement and to interpret the attitudes and values that are embodied in both choreographed and quotidian movement. Important and illuminating, Body, Movement, and Culture is of particular interest to students and scholars of anthropology, folklore, dance, and Asian studies.
CultureShock! Philippines by
CultureShock Philippines is a survival guide for anyone living, working or wanting to discover life in the Philippines. Settling into a foreign land is never easy, but with this book you will learn to understand the importance of amor-propio, appreciate the Filipino ways and learn about the history and culture of this diverse country. Find out the importance of family to the Filipinos, how to communicate with the locals and learn the appropriate business etiquette. Packed with a resource guide, glossary, contact numbers, website addresses and useful advice, CultureShock Philippines is essential for anyone wanting to fit in and enjoy life in the Philippines.
The Filipino primitive : accumulation and resistance in the American museum by
Nowhere can we appreciate so easily the intertwined nature of the triple forces of knowledge accumulation-capital, colonial, and racial-than in the imperial museum, where the objects of accumulation remain materially, visibly preserved. Sarita See maintains that it is this material collection of artifacts associated with the racial, colonial primitive that forms the foundation of American knowledge production. The Filipino Primitive takes Karl Marx's concept of "primitive accumulation," usually conceived of as an economic process for the acquisition of land and the extraction of labor, and argues that we also must understand it as a project of knowledge accumulation. Taking us through the Philippine collections at the University of Michigan Natural History Museum and the Frank Murphy Memorial Museum, also in Michigan, See reveals these exhibits as both allegory and real case of the primitive accumulation subtending imperial American knowledge, just as the extraction of Filipino labor contributes to American capitalist colonialism. With this understanding of the Filipino foundations of the development of an American accumulative drive toward power and knowledge, we can appreciate the value of Filipino American cultural producers like Carlos Bulosan, Stephanie Syjuco, and Ma-Yi Theater Company who have created incisive parodies of an accumulative epistemology, even as they articulate powerful alternative, anti-accumulative social ecologies.
Puro arte : Filipinos on the stages of empire by
Winner of the 2012 Outstanding Book Award in Cultural Studies, Association for Asian American Studies Puro Arte explores the emergence of Filipino American theater and performance from the early 20th century to the present. It stresses the Filipino performing body's location as it conjoins colonial histories of the Philippines with U.S. race relations and discourses of globalization. Puro arte, translated from Spanish into English, simply means "pure art." In Filipino, puro arte however performs a much more ironic function, gesturing rather to the labor of over-acting, histrionics, playfulness, and purely over-the-top dramatics. In this book, puro arte functions as an episteme, a way of approaching the Filipino/a performing body at key moments in U.S.-Philippine imperial relations, from the 1904 St. Louis World's Fair, early American plays about the Philippines, Filipino patrons in U.S. taxi dance halls to the phenomenon of Filipino/a actors in Miss Saigon. Using this varied archive, Puro Arte turns to performance as an object of study and as a way of understanding complex historical processes of racialization in relation to empire and colonialism.
The way of the cross : suffering selfhoods in the Roman Catholic Philippines by
Every year during Holy Week in the Philippine province of Pampanga, hundreds of men and women undergo acts of excruciating, self-inflicted pain in ways that evoke the Way of the Cross: the torment and crucifixion that Christ endured in the last days of his earthly existence. Because these Passion rituals are officially disavowed by the Filipino Roman Catholic Church, most observers view them as irrational and extremist mimicry of Christ's painful ordeal. Even scholars conventionally depict them as theatrical "spectacle" or macabre examples of Filipino "folk religion." But what conditions enable ritual actors to submit to such extreme pain? What justifications do they give for going against official prohibitions? What outcomes do they seek in channeling Christian piety in this way? This book addresses these questions through its in-depth analyses of three interconnected ritual acts: the pabasa, a days-long communal chanting of Christ's Passion story; the pagdarame, the public self-flagellation of hundreds of devotees; and the pamamaku king krus, in which steel nails are driven through the palms and feet of ritual practitioners as part of a street play performed in front of tens of thousands of spectators. Author Julius Bautista suggests that such ritual acts manifest the embodied physicality of a suffering selfhood that facilitates the expression of heartfelt sentiments of pity, empathy, trust, and bereavement. By emphasizing these outwardly focused human sensibilities as the wellsprings of ritual agency, he demonstrates that Passion rituals are reinterpretations of the very idea and experience of pain, hardship, and suffering and premised on an appeal for a certain kind of divine intimacy. The author draws on a decade of in-depth and often exclusive interviews with a host of local stakeholders--including ritual practitioners, clerics, scholars, and government officials--and his own participation in a Passion play. Ethnographic insight is considered alongside primary and secondary archival sources, including unpublished, locally produced oral historical accounts and a survey of relevant media coverage. The Way of the Cross makes a welcome contribution to the anthropology of religion by examining the unique ontological contexts in which ritual agents experience God's involvement in their lives.
AMDIPLO forms part of an arts management seminar series which emphasizes current trends, challenges, best practices, and contemporary ecosystem of the creative industries and complex nature of culture and heritage landscape, conservation, and sustainability of communities relevant to arts management.
Beyond Babylon : art, trade, and diplomacy in the second millennium B.C. by
This important volume describes the extraordinary art created in the second millennium B.C. for royal palaces, temples, and tombs from Mesopotamia, Syria, and Anatolia to Cyprus, Egypt, and the Aegean. Objects of the highest artistry reflect the development of a sophisticated trade network throughout the eastern Mediterranean region and the resulting fusion of Near Eastern, Aegean, and Egyptian cultural styles. The impact of these far-flung connections is documented in the precious materials sent to royal and temple treasuries and, most dramatically, in objects discovered on merchant shipwrecks off the shores of southern Anatolia. The history of the period and the artistic creativity fostered by interaction among the powers of the ancient Near East, both great and small, are discussed by an international group of scholars in essays and entries on the more than 350 objects included in the exhibition, continuing the fascinating story begun in the landmark catalogue Art of the First Cities (2003).
Byzantine Art and Diplomacy in an Age of Decline by
The Late Byzantine period (1261-1453) is marked by a paradoxical discrepancy between economic weakness and cultural strength. The apparent enigma can be resolved by recognizing that later Byzantine diplomatic strategies, despite or because of diminishing political advantage, relied on an increasingly desirable cultural and artistic heritage. This book reassesses the role of the visual arts in this era by examining the imperial image and the gift as reconceived in the final two centuries of the Byzantine Empire. In particular it traces a series of luxury objects created specifically for diplomatic exchange with such courts as Genoa, Paris and Moscow alongside key examples of imperial imagery and ritual. By questioning how political decline refigured the visual culture of empire, Cecily J. Hilsdale offers a more nuanced and dynamic account of medieval cultural exchange that considers the temporal dimensions of power and the changing fates of empires.
Design Objects and the Museum by
Design Objects and the Museum brings together leading design historians, curators, educators and archivists to consider the place of contemporary design objects within museums. Contributors draw on a wide range of examples from international museums and galleries to consider how design objects can be curated and displayed within and beyond the museum and how they can be understood and interpreted both by 'experts' and by museum visitors.
Diplomacy by design : luxury arts and an "international style" in the ancient Near East, 1400-1200 BCE by
Art and international relations during the Late Bronze Age formed a symbiosis as expanded travel and written communications fostered unprecedented cultural exchange across the Mediterranean. Diplomacy in these new political and imperial relationships was often maintained through the exchange of lavish art objects and luxury goods. The items bestowed during this time shared a repertoire of imagery that modern scholars call the first International Style in the history of art. Marian Feldman's Diplomacy by Design examines the profound connection between art produced during this period and its social context, revealing inanimate objects as catalysts?or even participants?in human dynamics. Feldman's fascinating study shows the ways in which the exchange of these works of art actively mediated and strengthened political relations, intercultural interactions, and economic negotiations. Previous studies of this international style have focused almost exclusively on stylistic attribution at the expense of social contextualization. Written by a specialist in ancient Near Eastern art and archaeology who has excavated and traveled extensively in this area of the world, Diplomacy by Design provides a much broader consideration of the symbolic power of material culture and its centrality in the construction of human relations.
Fragile Diplomacy by
While imported Chinese porcelain had become a valuable commodity in Europe in the seventeenth century, local attempts to produce porcelain long remained unsuccessful. At last the secret of hard-paste porcelain was uncovered, and in 1710 the first European porcelain was manufactured in Saxony. Meissen porcelain, still manufactured today, soon ranked in value with silver and gold. This thorough and lavishly illustrated volume explores the early years of Meissen porcelain and how the princes of Saxony came to use highly prized porcelain pieces as diplomatic gifts for presentation to foreign courts. An eminent team of international contributors examines the trade of Meissen with other nations, from England to Russia. They also investigate the cultural ambience of the Dresden Court, varying tastes of the markets, the wide range of porcelain objects, and their designers and makers. Individual chapters are devoted to gifts to Denmark, other German courts, the Holy Roman Empire, Italy, France, and other nations. For every Meissen collector or enthusiast, this book will be not only a treasured handbook but also a source of visual delight. Published in association with the Bard Graduate Center for Studies in the Decorative Arts, Design, and Culture Exhibition Schedule: Bard Graduate Center for Studies in the Decorative Arts, Design, and Culture(November 15, 2007 - February 11, 2008)
Heritage Conservation and Japan's Cultural Diplomacy by
Japan's heritage conservation policy and practice, as deployed through its foreign aid programs, has become one of the main means through which post-World War II Japan has sought to mark its presence in the international arena, both globally and regionally. Heritage conservation has been intimately linked to Japan's sense of national identity, in addition to its self-portrayal as a responsible global and regional citizen. This book explores the concepts of heritage, nationalism and Japanese national identity in the context of Japanese and international history since the second half of the nineteenth century. In doing so, it shows how Japan has built on its distinctive approach to conservation to develop a heritage-based strategy, which has been used as part of its cultural diplomacy designed to increase its 'soft power' both globally and within the Asian region. More broadly, Natsuko Akagawa underlines the theoretical nexus between the politics of heritage conservation, cultural diplomacy and national interest, and in turn highlights how issues of heritage conservation practice and policy are crucial to a comprehensive understanding of geo-politics. Heritage Conservation and Japan's Cultural Diplomacy will be of great interest to students, scholars and professionals working in the fields of heritage and museum studies, heritage conservation, international relations and Asian/Japanese studies.
Searching for a Cultural Diplomacy by
Recent studies on the meaning of cultural diplomacy in the twentieth century often focus on the United States and the Cold War, based on the premise that cultural diplomacy was a key instrument of foreign policy in the nation's effort to contain the Soviet Union. As a result, the term "cultural diplomacy" has become one-dimensional, linked to political manipulation and subordination and relegated to the margin of diplomatic interactions. This volume explores the significance of cultural diplomacy in regions other than the United States or "western" countries, that is, regions that have been neglected by scholars so far--Eastern Europe, Asia, and the Middle East. By examining cultural diplomacy in these regions, the contributors show that the function of information and exchange programs differs considerably from area to area depending on historical circumstances and, even more importantly, on the cultural mindsets of the individuals involved.
AMDIPLO forms part of an arts management seminar series which emphasizes current trends, challenges, best practices, and contemporary ecosystem of the creative industries and complex nature of culture and heritage landscape, conservation, and sustainability of communities relevant to arts management.
American-Soviet Cultural Diplomacy : the Bolshoi Ballet's American Premiere by
American-Soviet Cultural Diplomacy: The Bolshoi Ballet's American Premiere is the first full-length examination of a Soviet cultural diplomatic effort. Following the signing of an American-Soviet cultural exchange agreement in the late 1950s, Soviet officials resolved to utilize the Bolshoi Ballet's planned 1959 American tour to awe audiences with Soviet choreographers' great accomplishments and Soviet performers' superb abilities. Relying on extensive research, Cadra Peterson McDaniel examines whether the objectives behind Soviet cultural exchange and the specific aims of the Bolshoi Ballet's 1959 American tour provided evidence of a thaw in American-Soviet relations. Interwoven throughout this study is an examination of the Soviets' competing efforts to create ballets encapsulating Communist ideas while simultaneously reinterpreting pre-revolutionary ballets so that these works were ideologically acceptable. McDaniel investigates the rationale behind the creation of the Bolshoi's repertoire and the Soviet leadership's objectives and interpretation of the tour's success as well as American response to the tour. The repertoire included the four ballets, Romeo and Juliet, Swan Lake, Giselle, and The Stone Flower, and two Highlights Programs, which included excerpts from various pre- and post-revolutionary ballets, operas, and dance suites. How the Americans and the Soviets understood the Bolshoi's success provides insight into how each side conceptualized the role of the arts in society and in political transformation. American-Soviet Cultural Diplomacy: The Bolshoi Ballet's American Premiere demonstrates the ballet's role in Soviet foreign policy, a shift to "artful warfare," and thus emphasizes the significance of studying cultural exchange as a key aspect of Soviet foreign policy and analyzes the continued importance of the arts in twenty-first century Russian politics.
Artists and the Arab Uprisings by
Regional artists can play a positive role in shaping public debate and supporting democratic transition in the Middle East. This report explores the challenges artists have faced since the Arab uprisings, U.S. government programs to support arts in the region, and the wide array of nongovernmental activities to engage Arab artists, offering recommendations to improve support for these artists.
Don't act, just dance : the metapolitics of cold war culture by
At some point in their career, nearly all the dancers who worked with George Balanchine were told "don't act, dear; just dance." The dancers understood this as a warning against melodramatic over-interpretation and an assurance that they had all the tools they needed to do justice to the steps--but its implication that to dance is already to act in a manner both complete and sufficient resonates beyond stage and studio.nbsp; Drawing on fresh archival material, Don't Act, Just Dance places dance at the center of the story of the relationship between Cold War art and politics. Catherine Gunther Kodat takes Balanchine's catch phrase as an invitation to explore the politics of Cold War culture--in particular, to examine the assumptions underlying the role of "apolitical" modernism in U.S. cultural diplomacy. Through close, theoretically informed readings of selected important works--Marianne Moore's "Combat Cultural," dances by George Balanchine, Merce Cunningham, and Yuri Grigorovich, Stanley Kubrick's Spartacus, and John Adams's Nixon in China--Kodat questions several commonly-held beliefs about the purpose and meaning of modernist cultural productions during the Cold War.nbsp; Rather than read the dance through a received understanding of Cold War culture, Don't Act, Just Dance reads Cold War culture through the dance, and in doing so establishes a new understanding of the politics of modernism in the arts of the period.nbsp;
Entangled East and West by
Despite increasing scholarship on the cultural Cold War, focus has been persistently been fixed on superpowers and their actions, missing the important role played by individuals and organizations all over Europe during the Cold War years. This volume focuses on cultural diplomacy and artistic interaction between Eastern and Western Europe after 1945. It aims at providing an essentially European point of view on the cultural Cold War, providing fresh insight into little known connections and cooperation in different artistic fields. Chapters of the volume address photography and architecture, popular as well as classical music, theatre and film, and fine arts. By examining different actors ranging from individuals to organizations such as universities, the volume brings new perspective on the mechanisms and workings of the cultural Cold War. Finally, the volume estimates the pertinence of the Cold War and its influence in post-1991 world. The volume offers an overview on the role culture played in international politics, as well as its role in the Cold War more generally, through interesting examples and case studies.
Hollywood diplomacy : film regulation, foreign relations, and East Asian representations by
Hollywood Diplomacy makes the case that, rather than simply reflect the West's cultural fantasies of an imagined 'Orient,' images of East Asian ethnicities (Chinese, Japanese, and Korean) have long been contested ideological sites where the commercial interests of Hollywood studios and the political mandates of U.S. foreign policy collide, compete against one another, and often become compromised in the process. Hye Seung Chung highlights the mediating capacity of film regulation, presenting it not as an obstacle to artists' freedom of expression, but rather as an enforcer of institutional protection, a facilitator of international relations, and a contributor to 'political correctness' regarding images of racial minorities and foreign nationals. Drawing on archival evidence and film content analysis, Hollywood Diplomacy redefines external censorship or advisory entities (by the Chinese government, the World War II propaganda agency OWI, and the DoD) as productive contributors pushing for increased cultural authenticity and/or more egalitarian racial/ethnic/national images in Hollywood's Orientalist productions. The book is divided into two parts: the first is 'Diplomatic Representations in Classical Hollywood,' which examines films such as Shanghai Express, The Purple Heart, and Bamboo Prison, and the second is 'The War on Terror, Contemporary Hollywood, and Its Global Discontent,' which examines films such as Die Another Day and The Interview.
Making Art Panamerican by
Among the buildings on the National Mall in Washington, D.C., only the Pan American Union (PAU) houses an international organization. The first of many anticipated OC peace palacesOCOconstructed in the early twentieth century, the PAU began with a mission of cultural diplomacy, and after World War II its Visual Arts Section became a leader in the burgeoning hemispheric arts scene, proclaiming Latin AmericaOCOs entr(r)e into the international community as it forged connections between a growing base of middle-class art consumers on one hand and concepts of supranational citizenship and political and economic liberalism on the other. "Making Art Panamerican" situates the ambitious visual arts programs of the PAU within the broader context of hemispheric cultural relations during the cold war. Focusing on the institutional interactions among aesthetic movements, cultural policy, and viewing publics, Claire F. Fox contends that in the postwar years, the PAU Visual Arts Section emerged as a major transfer point of hemispheric American modernist movements and played an important role in the consolidation of Latin American art as a continental object of study. As it traces the careers of individual cultural policymakers and artists who intersected with the PAU in the two postwar decadesOCosuch as Concha Romero James, Charles Seeger, Jos(r) Gmez Sicre, Jos(r) Luis Cuevas, and Rafael SquirruOCothe book also charts the trajectories and displacements of sectors of the U.S. and Latin American intellectual left during a tumultuous interval that spans the Mexican Revolution, the Spanish Civil War, the New Deal, and the early cold war. Challenging the U.S. bias of conventional narratives about Panamericanism and the postwar shift in critical values from realism to abstraction, "Making Art Panamerican" illuminates the institutional dynamics that helped shape aesthetic movements in the critical decades following World War II.
Music in America's Cold War Diplomacy by
During the Cold War, thousands of musicians from the United States traveled the world, sponsored by the U.S. State Department's Cultural Presentations program. Performances of music in many styles--classical, rock 'n' roll, folk, blues, and jazz--competed with those by traveling Soviet and mainland Chinese artists, enhancing the prestige of American culture. These concerts offered audiences around the world evidence of America's improving race relations, excellent musicianship, and generosity toward other peoples. Through personal contacts and the media, musical diplomacy also created subtle musical, social, and political relationships on a global scale. Although born of state-sponsored tours often conceived as propaganda ventures, these relationships were in themselves great diplomatic achievements and constituted the essence of America's soft power. Using archival documents and newly collected oral histories, Danielle Fosler-Lussier shows that musical diplomacy had vastly different meanings for its various participants, including government officials, musicians, concert promoters, and audiences. Through the stories of musicians from Louis Armstrong and Marian Anderson to orchestras and college choirs, Fosler-Lussier deftly explores the value and consequences of "musical diplomacy."
A Theater of Diplomacy by
In A Theater of Diplomacy, Ellen R. Welch argues that theater served not merely as a decorative accompaniment to negotiations, but rather underpinned the practices of embodied representation, performance, and spectatorship that constituted the culture of diplomacy in the early modern period.
Arts Education and Community Outreach
AMEDUCO forms part of an arts management seminar series which emphasizes current trends, challenges, best practices, and contemporary ecosystem of the creative industries and complex nature of culture and heritage landscape, conservation, and sustainability of communities relevant to arts management.
Artists in the archive : creative and curatorial engagements with documents of art and performance by
Artists in the Archive explores the agency and materiality of the archival document through a stunning collection of critical writings and original artworks. It examines the politics and philosophy behind re-using remains, historicising this artistic practice and considering the breadth of ways in which archival materials inform, inflect and influence new works. Taking a fresh look at the relationships between insider know-how and outsider knowledge, Artists in the Archive opens a vital dialogue between a global range of artists and scholars. It seeks to trouble the distinction between artistic practice and scholarly research, offering disciplinary perspectives from experimental theatre, performance art, choreography and dance, to visual art making, archiving and curating.
Arts-Based and Contemplative Practices in Research and Teaching by
This volume presents a scholarly investigation of the ways educators engage in artistic and contemplative practices - and why this matters in education. Arts-based learning and inquiry can function as a powerful catalyst for change by allowing spiritual practices to be present within educational settings, but too often the relationship between art, education and spirituality is ignored. Exploring artistic disciplines such as dance, drama, visual art, music, and writing, and forms such as writing-witnessing, freestyle rap, queer performative autoethnograph, and poetic imagination, this book develops a transformational educational paradigm. Its unique integration of spirituality in and through the arts addresses the contemplative needs of learners and educators in diverse educational and community settings.
The Arts in Education by
Do the arts improve academic achievement? What does it mean to 'teach' art? What should the balance of classic and pop be in the music curriculum? Should we encourage young children on the stage? How do we judge whether what a child produces is good? How do we justify the arts in the curriculum? What should be the balance between form and content when teaching art? The arts in education inspire considerable commitment and passion. However, this is not always matched by clarity of understanding. In this book Mike Fleming introduces the reader to key theoretical questions associated with arts education and clearly explains how these are related to practice. It offers an authoritative account of how ideas relevant to education are addressed by key authors in aesthetics, art theory and cultural studies. Covering all aspects of arts education, the book considers: definitions and theories of art influences on teaching the arts researching the arts teaching and learning creativity assessment. Throughout the book there are examples of practice to illustrate key ideas and a discussion of useful background texts with a summary of content and arguments for further exploration. Written by a leading authority in the field, it is essential reading for students on Arts PGCE and M Level courses, teachers of the arts and policy developers that require more understanding and insight into their practice.
Children and their art : art education for elementary and middle schools by 
Cultural Transformations by
In what ways can teachers build on youth culture to improve learning opportunities in the classroom? In this fascinating and highly readable collection, Korina M. Jocson brings together more than two dozen scholars, artists, educators, and youth workers to illustrate how nondominant youth can be engaged through various social justice arts projects. These projects range not only in type (media, digital art, playwriting, and hip-hop) but also location (California, Wisconsin, New Mexico, Cuba, and Australia, among others) to reflect the wide range of possibilities for tapping into contemporary youth culture. The projects described are part of an emerging field that examines the benefits of youth participation in literary, digital media, and civics-related projects within schools and in a variety of informal environments.
Debates in Art and Design Education by
Debates in Art and Design Education encourages student and practising teachers to engage with contemporary issues and developments in learning and teaching. It introduces key issues, concepts and tensions in order to help art educators develop a critical approach to their practice in response to the changing fields of education and visual culture. Accessible, comprehensive chapters are designed to stimulate thinking and understanding in relation to theory and practice, and help art educators to make informed judgements by arguing from a position based on theoretical knowledge and understanding. Contributing artists, lecturers and teachers debate a wide range of issues including: the latest policy and initiatives in secondary art education the concepts, skills and dispositions that can be developed through art education tensions inherent in developing the inclusive Art and Design classroom partnerships across the visual arts sector creativity in the Art and Design curriculum visual art and globalisation establishing the significance of 'Design' art practice as educational research. Debates in Art and Design Education is for all student and practising teachers interested in furthering their understanding of an exciting, ever-changing field, and supports art educators in articulating how the subject is a vital, engaging and necessary part of the twenty-first century curriculum. Each chapter points to further reading and each section suggests reflective questions to help shape art educators' teaching. In particular, Debates in Art and Design Education encourages art educators to engage in research by providing an essential introduction to critical thinking around contemporary debates.
Delivering authentic arts education by
This practical text helps student teachers develop their confidence, understandings and skills so that they can effectively and authentically teach arts in primary and middle school classrooms. Dinham at Edith Cowan.
Delivering authentic arts education : visual arts, drama, music, dance, media by
Delivering Authentic Arts Education outlines the nature of arts education and the importance it plays in the curriculum. Each chapter discusses how to recognise and build on your existing artistic abilities and skills, to encourage student creativity and vital principles of planning and assessment.
Performative Approaches in Arts Education by
In Performative Approaches in Arts Education, researchers, artists and practitioners from philosophy and the arts elaborate on what performative approaches can contribute to 21st century arts education. Introducing new perspectives on learning, the contributors provide a central international perspective, developing a paradigm in which the artist, teacher and researcher's form of teaching is enmeshed with content, and human agency is entangled with non-human matter. The book explores issues connected to both teaching and learning in the arts, engaging in debates about the value of meaning making in the artistic process, the way social ethos can guide performative approaches and the changes in education that performative approaches can bring. Performative Approaches in Arts Educationwill be of great interest to academics, researchers and post-graduate students in the fields of arts education, philosophy of education and education research methods. It will also appeal to teachers and teacher educators, artists and teaching artists. e fields of arts education, philosophy of education and education research methods. It will also appeal to teachers and teacher educators, artists and teaching artists.
Perspectives on Research Assessment in Architecture, Music and the Arts by
Research in the creative fields of architecture, design, music and the arts has experienced dynamic development for over two decades. The research in these practice- and arts-based fields has become increasingly mature but has also led to various discussions on what constitutes doctoral proficiency in these fields. The term 'doctorateness' is often used when referring to the assessment of the production of doctoral research and the research competence of research students, but in architecture and the arts, the concept of doctorateness has not yet attained a clearly articulated definition. The assessment of quality has been practiced by way of supervising, mentoring and the evaluation of dissertations but much less discussed. This book offers perspectives on how to qualify and assess research in architecture, music and the arts. It creates a broader arena for discussion on doctorateness by establishing a framework for its application to creative fields. The book is grouped into three sections and includes contributions from international experts in the various fields working in Australia, Belgium, Brazil, Canada, Norway, Sweden, Switzerland, Spain, the Netherlands and the UK. The first section offers general frameworks for further conceptualising doctorateness in the fields in question. It is followed by a section that describes and discusses various experiences, concerns and visions on the production and assessment of doctoral research reporting from doctoral programmes in different stages of development. The third section includes future-oriented perspectives on knowledge-building processes, and asks how the ongoing, profound changes in academia could influence the concept of quality in both doctoral process and product. The book presents different perspectives on research assessment practices and developments of relevant criteria in the practice-based and creative fields of architecture and the arts. The contributions propose ways of framing this issue conceptually, show the need for awareness of the specific context and tradition programmes develop and give proposals for various potential trajectories for the future.
Race/Gender/Class/Media by
- Provides a thorough, detailed introduction to the key concepts of the issues of race, gender, class and the media in a succinct and accessible format. - Addresses current debates surrounding these cultural issues, particularly as represented in and by the media, making it a uniquely timely book. - Includes alternate tables of contents to give instructors flexibility in course building as well as pedagogical features such as an 'It's Your Turn' feature, discussion questions, and activities after each reading and suggested further resources to help students grapples with the concepts discussed. - Thoroughly updated edition features almost entirely new content.
The Routledge International Handbook of the Arts and Education by
This International Handbook brings together leading writers on Arts in Education to provide a much-needed, authoritative guide to the main debates in the field and an informed account of contemporary developments in policy and practice. Providing a detailed overview of key concepts and practical challenges, the book combines theoretical insight with specific examples of innovative projects drawing on theoretical, historical and empirical research perspectives to inform understanding. The range of content highlights the breadth of the field, addressing such issues as the importance of community arts and partnership as well as school education, and providing insight into developments in multiple and connecting arts as well as traditional art forms. Topics such as assessment, creativity, cultural diversity, special needs, the arts in early childhood, adult education, arts based research, are all addressed by recognised authorities in each area. The collection of chapters also serves to define the field of arts education, recognising its diversity but highlighting the common elements that provide its identity. The collection addresses generic issues common to all the arts while acknowledging differences and recognising the dangers of over-generalisation. It also includes specific chapters on each of the art forms (visual art, dance, drama, literature, music, media arts) providing a cutting-edge analysis of key contemporary issues in each subject. Bringing together specially commissioned pieces by a range of international authors, this Handbook will make an important contribution to the field of Arts Education.
Spiritual Art and Art Education by
This book is a study of contemporary spirituality as it is practiced in the world today, characterized by its secular and inclusive nature, and applied to art and art education. It identifies the issues facing a formal introduction of contemporary spiritual concepts into a secular and multicultural arts educational environment. Lander begins by separating the notion of "the spiritual" from the study of organized religions. She uses examples of art from different cultures in contemporary spiritual systems, making the study a reference book for contemporary spirituality and spirituality in art education, with usable definitions and practical examples suitable for scholars in art and visual studies, art education, and contemporary spirituality.
Arts Education and Community Outreach
AMEDUCO forms part of an arts management seminar series which emphasizes current trends, challenges, best practices, and contemporary ecosystem of the creative industries and complex nature of culture and heritage landscape, conservation, and sustainability of communities relevant to arts management.
"VIVA" : community arts and popular education in the Americas by
Compelling case studies of groups in Panama, Nicaragua, Mexico, the United States, and Canada using the arts for education, community development, and social movement building.This compelling collection of inspiring case studies from community arts projects in five countries will inform and inspire students, artists, and activists. ¡VIVA! is the product of a five-year transnational research project that integrates place, politics, passion, and praxis. Framed by postcolonial theories of decolonization, the pedagogy of the oppressed articulated by Brazilian educator Paulo Freire, and the burgeoning field of community arts, this collection not only analyzes the dynamic integration of the critical and the creative in social justice movements, it embodies such a praxis. Learn from Central America: Kuna children's art workshops, a community television station in Nicaragua, a cultural marketplace in Guadalajara, Mexico, community mural production in Chiapas; and from North America: arts education in Los Angeles inner-city schools, theater probing ancestral memory, community plays with over one hundred participants, and training programs for young artists in Canada. These practices offer critical hope for movements hungry for new ways of knowing and expressing histories, identities, and aspirations, as well as mobilizing communities for social transformation. Beautifully illustrated with more than one hundred color photographs, the book also includes a DVD with videos that bring the projects to life.Deborah Barndt is Professor and Coordinator of the Community Arts Practice (CAP) Certificate Program and Faculty of Environmental Studies at York University in Toronto. She is the author of Tangled Routes: Women, Work, and Globalization on the Tomato Trail, Second Edition and editor of Wild Fire: Art as Activism.
Art and Design Education in Times of Change by
It has always been the case that the teaching of art has had to deal with social changes. We are currently facing historic challenges and phenomena which we could never have imagined - the global financial crisis, the massive migration flows, and the ubiquitous spread of new technologies in our everyday life. Creative competence is needed for overcoming the disciplinary boundaries and in order to make equal opportunities for education possible in a diverse society. This publication takes a critical look at the role of art and design education amidst these social changes - using theoretical reflection, practical experience, and empirical analysis.
Arts-Based Methods in Education Around the World by
Arts-Based Methods in Education Around the Worldinvestigates arts-based encounters in educational settings in response to a global need for studies that connect the cultural, inter-cultural, cross-cultural, and global elements of arts-based methods in education. In this extraordinary collection, contributions are collected from experts all over the world and involve a multiplicity of arts genres and traditions. These contributions bring together diverse cultural and educational perspectives and include a large variety of artistic genres and research methodologies. The topics covered in the book range from policies to pedagogies, from social impact to philosophical conceptualizations. They are informative on specific topics, but also offer a clear monitoring of the ways in which the general attention to the arts in education evolves through time. Topics include: arts-based education, artistry in teaching, art performance, drama, inspiration, reflection, student participation, culture, arts, and creativity.
The Arts in Education by
The arts in education are currently the subject of considerable controversy. Some people argue that fostering creativity in schools is important; that the arts can provide a substantial contribution to the development of the capacity for creative thought and action; and that therefore the arts should be well represented at all levels of the school curriculum. Some argue that the education system, in fact, leaves pupils incomplete, stultified and uncreative. Others argue that it is the processes of teaching and learning in the arts which are at fault because they are too passive. This book surveys the different sides of the debate and goes on to report on original research which examines just how the arts are taught in schools. It thereby makes a considerable contribution to the debate which has hitherto been incomplete due to a lack of evidence.
Colonized through art : American Indian schools and art education, 1889-1915 by
Colonized through Art explores how the federal government used art education for American Indian children as an instrument for the "colonization of consciousness," hoping to instill the values and ideals of Western society while simultaneously maintaining a political, social, economic, and racial hierarchy. Focusing on the Albuquerque Indian School in New Mexico, the Sherman Institute in Riverside, California, and the world's fairs and local community exhibitions, Marinella Lentis examines how the U.S. government's solution to the "Indian problem" at the end of the nineteenth century emphasized education and assimilation. Educational theories at the time viewed art as the foundation of morality and as a way to promote virtues and personal improvement. These theories made the subject of art a natural tool for policy makers and educators to use in achieving their assimilationist goals of turning student "savages" into civilized men and women. Despite such educational regimes for students, however, indigenous ideas about art oftentimes emerged "from below," particularly from well-known art teachers such as Arizona Swayney and Angel DeCora. Colonized through Art explores how American Indian schools taught children to abandon their cultural heritage and produce artificially "native" crafts that were exhibited at local and international fairs. The purchase of these crafts by the general public turned students' work into commodities and schools into factories.
Perspectives on Art Education by
The training of teachers in arts universities is changing. It is confronted by the great challenge of essential cultural, technological, social and economic changes. The symposium "Perspectives on Art Education" (Vienna, May 28 - 30, 2015) is dedicated to these changes: What does the training need today in terms of artistic practice, research, and communication skills? What explanations do historical and contemporary approaches offer? What new strategies are needed in teaching and learning? How can the diverse approaches to art education in different cultures, embedded in various national structures and school types complement and empower each other andjointly develop?
Talks on Education, Art, and Philosophy [e-Book, PDF] by
The main purpose of this book is to contribute to the intellectual assets of the scholars working in the fields of science, education, fine arts, and humanities. In this regard, this work combines different studies in the fields mentioned above. The very first chapter discusses teaching profession in favor of professionalism and sacredness. The second chapter focuses on foreign experts¿ opinions about the structure of Turkish education system. The following chapter deals with the repercussions of recent Turkish education policies. The fourth chapter presents a provocative debate on the underestimation of scientific theories. The subsequent chapter deeply analyzes the role of the political power on state theatres in Turkey. The relationship between society and art discussed through the theater has been examined in terms of the relationship between the individual and art through automatism movement in the sixth chapter. The last chapter intends to make a connection between meliorism and other conceptual themes like optimism and messianism. Hopefully, reading this work will be an inspirational experience for curious scholars.
Arts Management Electives (History or Theory of Art Form)
These elective courses will provide students foundations of history or theory of their chosen art form to gain interdisciplinary understanding of arts management practices and collaborations.
Art and Resistance in Germany by
In light of the recent rise of right-wing populism in numerous political contexts and in the face of resurgent nationalism, racism, misogyny, homophobia, and demagoguery, this book investigates how historical and contemporary cultural producers have sought to resist, confront, confound, mock, or call out situations of political oppression in Germany, a country which has seen a dramatic range of political extremes during the past century. While the current turn to nationalist populism is global, it is perhaps most disturbing in Germany, given its history with its stormy first democracy in the interwar Weimar Republic; its infamous National Socialist (Nazi) period of the 1930s and 1940s; and its split Cold-War existence, with Marxist-Leninist Totalitarianism in the German Democratic Republic and the Federal Republic of Germany's barely-hidden ties to the Nazi past. Equally important, Germans have long considered art and culture critical to constructions of national identity, which meant that they were frequently implicated in political action. This book therefore examines a range of work by artists from the early twentieth century to the present, work created in an array of contexts and media that demonstrates a wide range of possible resistance.
Art and the Home by
Our homes contain us, but they are also within us. They can represent places to be ourselves, to recollect childhood memories, or to withdraw into adult spaces of intimacy; they can be sites for developing rituals, family relationships, and acting out cultural expectations. Like the personal, social, and cultural elements out of which they are constructed, homes can be not only comforting, but threatening too. The home is a rich theme running through post-war western art, and it continues to engage contemporary artists today - yet it has been the subject of relatively little critical writing. Art and the Home: Comfort, Alienation and the Everyday is the first single-authored, up-to-date book on the subject. Imogen Racz provides a theme-led discussion about how the physical experience of the dwelling space and the psychological complexities of the domestic are manifested in art, focusing mainly on sculpture, installation and object-based practice; discussing the work and ideas of artists as diverse as Louise Bourgeois, Gordon Matta-Clark, George Segal and Cornelia Parker within their artistic and cultural contexts
The Artists Who Will Change the World by
This cutting-edgebook is the essentialguide to what's next incontemporary art, andto the visionaries whoare making it happen. Traditional histories of art have often been confined to a western European framework. But with the birth of contemporary museum culture, the proliferation of art fairs and biennials in regions far and wide, and the advent of digital technologies, new global networks have emerged, fostering a new world map of art, and paving the way for the art of tomorrow. How do we engage with contemporary art in this global, ever-developing context? Senior Curator Omar Kholeif--a respected voice in contemporary art criticism--surveys the most influential figures and works in a series of concise, accessible entries. The Artists Who Will Change the World is an introductory field guide to what the most urgent contemporary artists--Amalia Ulman, Lynette Yiadom Boakye, Hito Steyerl, and others--are producing worldwide. Whether engaging with the aesthetics of technology or the fluid world of politics, their work will influence generations of artists and art lovers to come.
Art Record Covers by
Since the dawn of modernism, visual and music production have had a particularly intimate relationship. From Luigi Russolo's 1913 Futurist manifesto L'Arte dei Rumori (The Art of Noise) to Marcel Duchamp's 1925 double-sided discs Rotoreliefs, the 20th century saw ever more fertile exchange between sounds and shapes, marks and melodies, and different fields of composition and performance. In Francesco Spampinato's unique anthology of artists' record covers, we discover the rhythm of this particular cultural history. The book presents 500 covers and records by visual artists from the 1950s through to today, exploring how modernism, Pop Art, Conceptual Art, postmodernism, and various forms of contemporary art practice have all informed this collateral field of visual production and supported the mass distribution of music with defining imagery that swiftly and suggestively evokes an aural encounter. Along the way, we find Jean-Michel Basquiat's urban hieroglyphs for his own Tartown record label, Banksy's stenciled graffiti for Blur, Damien Hirst's symbolic skull for the Hours, and a skewered Salvador Dalí butterfly on Jackie Gleason's Lonesome Echo. There are insightful analyses and fact sheets alongside the covers listing the artist, performer, album name, label, year of release, and information on the original artwork. Interviews with Tauba Auerbach, Shepard Fairey, Kim Gordon, Christian Marclay, Albert Oehlen, and Raymond Pettibon add personal accounts on the collaborative relationship between artists and musicians.
Clothing art : the visual culture of fashion, 1600-1914 by
An entirely new way of looking at the history of fashion through the eyes of artists There have always been important links between art and clothing. Artists have documented the ever-evolving trends in fashion, popularized certain styles of dress, and at times even designed fashions. This is the first book to explore in depth the fascinating points of contact between art and clothing, and in doing so it constructs a new and innovative history of dress in which the artist plays a central role. Aileen Ribeiro provides an illuminating account of the relationship between artists and clothing from the 17th century, when a more complex and sophisticated attitude to dress first appeared, to the early 20th century, when the boundaries between art and fashion became more fluid: haute couture could be seen as art, and art used textiles and clothes in highly imaginative ways. Her narrative encompasses such themes as the ways in which clothing has helped to define the nation state; how masquerade and dressing up were key subjects in art and life; and how, while many artists found increasing inspiration in high fashion, others became involved in designing "artistic" and reform dress. Sumptuously illustrated, Clothing Art also delves into the ways in which artists represent the clothes they depict in their work, approaches which range from photographic detail, through varying degrees of imaginative reality, to generalized drapery.
David Gill : designing art by
David Gill reveals the famed gallerist's opinions of and influence on the world of art and design. He presents the works of artists, sculptors, and designers he admires, champions, and nurtures, among them Donald Judd, Mattia Bonetti, Zaha Hadid, Grayson Perry, Barnaby Barford, Fredrikson Stallard, Jorge Pardo, and the Campana brothers. Structured chronologically and divided by location, the book includes never-before-seen photographs of Gill's galleries, his award-winning exhibitions, and his own homes: a converted handbag factory south of the River Thames; the 18th-century Albany apartments in London's Mayfair; and a restored palazzo in Malta's Valetta. Seen throughout are the designs of the many world-famous artists he has represented over his 25 years at the forefront of the contemporary art and design world. The book also features a selection of his curated interiors and never-before-published glimpses of the private collections and homes of the numerous internationally renowned collectors with whom Gill regularly collaborates.
Fashionable Art by
Owing to digitization, globalization and mass culture, what is deemed 'desirable' and 'of the moment' in art has increasingly followed the patterns of fashion. While in the past artistic styles were always inflected with signs of their modernity, today biennales and art markets are defined by the next big thing, the next sensation, the next new idea. But how do opinions of what is 'good', 'progressive' and 'cutting edge' guide styles? What is it that makes works of art fashionable and commercial? Fashionable Art critically explores the relationships between art, commerce, taste and cultural value. Each chapter covers a major style or movement, from Chinese and Aboriginal art, Cubism and Pop Art to alternative identity and outsider art, exploring how contemporary art has been shaped since the 1970s. Drawing upon a variety of theoretical frameworks, from Adorno and Bourdieu to Simmel and Zizek, expert visual cultural scholars Geczy and Millner engage with both historical and contemporary debates on this lively topic. Taking a complex view of the meaning of fashion as it relates to art, while also offering critiques of 'art as fashion', Fashionable Art is an original, key text that will be essential reading for students and scholars of art history, fashion studies and material culture.
Figures & faces : the art of jewelry by
A glittering collection of jewelry emulating the human form, from the collection of the Musée des Arts Décoratifs in Paris Jewelry has always been a vehicle for the deepest of human emotions: remembrance, faith, devotion, love, belonging, and mourning. The human figure has long been a source of inspiration and a means of expression for jewelers, and it is perhaps the most intimate and involving of subjects. Following on from the magnificent Flora and Fauna, Figures is the third book in a series devoted to the splendid jewelry collection of the Musée des Arts Décoratifs in Paris. The museum's collection begins in the Byzantine era and ranges through the medieval and Renaissance periods and beyond, with mythological figures and biblical scenes represented on pendants and rings. In the nineteenth century, René Lalique, Alphonse Fouquet, and the Maison Vever produced brooches and necklaces that embodied elegant sophistication and technical brilliance, while in the twentieth century, artists such as Pablo Picasso and Alberto Giacometti joined jewelers like Jean Lurçat, Line Vautrin, and Claude Lalanne in creating works that interpret the body in deeply personal ways. Specially photographed by Jean- Marie del Moral, Figures is packed with striking and witty works of art.
Foundations of Art and Design by
Packed with hundreds of examples of classic and contemporary art, FOUNDATIONS OF ART AND DESIGN, 2E delivers a comprehensive guide to basic design that provides the ideal foundation to design principles. Appealing to readers at every ability level, the text's logical and structured organization moves from micro to macro topics, enabling learners to build on ideas and concepts of design and better understand the material. A running glossary defines key terms in the margins of the text, while two Visual Glossaries at the end of the book focus on styles and mediums. In addition, new "Theory and Practice" boxes help readers more deeply analyze artwork, and "Artists on Art" boxes offer insight from professional artists.
Global Art and the Cold War by
In this readable and highly original book, John J. Curley presents the first synthetic account of global art during the Cold War. Through a careful examination of artworks drawn from America, Europe, Russia and Asia, he demonstrates the inextricable nature of art and politics in this contentious period. He dismantles the usual narrative of American abstract painting versus figurative Soviet Socialist Realism to reveal a much more nuanced, contradictory and ambivalent picture of art making, in which the objects themselves, like spies, dissembled, housed and managed ideological differences.
The Global Art Compass by
A highly original, wide-ranging, and judiciously illustrated exploration of an increasingly global art scene In the past, writers and critics such as Goethe, Ruskin, and Clement Greenberg perpetuated particular ideas about art and even dictated these ideas to the artists themselves. Today, artists no longer have to follow one prevailing theory and the art world is less centralized in particular cities: New York, London, Paris, Berlin, and Beijing all offer rich environments to artists but none are designated as the exclusive center of the art world. In Global Art Compass, Alistair Hicks demonstrates his belief that no single curator, critic, or dealer should monopolize our view of what is happening in the art world today, but that by listening to the artists themselves, we can gradually make out an ever-evolving web of patterns, relationships, and themes. Organized by continent and including extracts from interviews with artists from around the world, the book offers a fresh view of the contemporary art world through artists from France, Albania, Slovakia, Russia, Mexico, Brazil, The United States, China, India, and beyond. The range of artists whose work is explored includes Laure Prouvost, Anri Sala, Roman Ondák , Gabriel Orozco, Sandra Gamarra , Cai Guo-Qiang, and Nandan Ghiya, among many others. The results of Hicks's approach clearly show that the preoccupations of artists in the 21st century are largely universal: that ever-faster communications are balanced by a resistance to globalization; that an awareness of the unprecedented complexity of our world is equaled by a rising skepticism of the systems that impose order on our lives; and that while art is seen by many as a commodity, it also has the power to be a regenerative tool.
The Graphic Design Reader by
The Graphic Design Reader brings together key readings in this ever-changing field to provide an essential resource for students, researchers and practitioners. Taking as its starting point an exploration of the way in which theory and practice and canons and anti-canons have operated within the discipline, the reader brings together writings by important international design critics, including Wendy Siuyi Wong, Dick Hebdige, April Greiman, and Victor Margolin. Extracts are structured into clear thematic sections addressing history; education and the profession; type and typography; critical writing and practice; political and social change; changing visual landscapes, and graphic design futures. Each section has a contextual introduction by the editors outlining key ideas and debates, as well as an annotated guide to further reading and a comprehensive bibliography. The Graphic Design Reader features original visual essays which provide a critical platform for understanding and interpreting graphic design practice, as well as a wealth of illustrations accompanying key historical and contemporary texts from the 1920s to the present day.
Marcel Breuer : 1902-1981 : form giver of the twentieth century by
In 1956, TIME magazine called him one of the defining "form-givers of the 20th century." Today, Marcel Breuer (1902-1981) remains a locus classicus of modernism for architects and designers alike. As a Bauhaus pioneer, even his earliest work was marked by a material restraint; the balance of texture, color, and shape; and a symbiosis of local and global, big and small, rough and smooth. In this essential introductory monograph, we survey Breuer's complete career through some of his most influential projects and ideas, from his landmark tubular furniture to the MoMA Research House to his innovation of "binuclear" housing, splitting living and sleeping areas into separate wings. Along the way, we follow Hungarian-born Breuer's journey to international acclaim, with featured projects from Germany, France, England, Switzerland, and across the United States contributing to his global status as a modernist maestro. About the series Born back in 1985, the Basic Art Series has evolved into the best-selling art book collection ever published. Each book in TASCHEN's Basic Architecture series features: an introduction to the life and work of the architect the major works in chronological order information about the clients, architectural preconditions as well as construction problems and resolutions a list of all the selected works and a map indicating the locations of the best and most famous buildings approximately 120 illustrations (photographs, sketches, drafts, and plans)
New Media Installation by
Recent innovations in access to technology have led to an explosion in the number and variety of interactive art installations. Art pieces that would have been inconceivable twenty years ago are now popping up in galleries and public spaces around the world, expanding the range of human experience in mind-boggling ways. New Media Installation offers a fascinating look into the world of technology-based art installations, with a global selection of artists and works.
New wave clay : ceramic design, art and architecture by
Throughout the twentieth century, ceramics was broadly divided into two sectors.Studio pottery, which was a reaction against the mass-madewares of the industrialrevolution, and fine art by contemporary artists, who just happened touse clay in their practice but rejected many of its traditional codes of practice.The unprecedented surge in popularity of ceramics in the last five years hashelped forge a new type of potter: the ceramic designer. Part-craftsman,part designer,they bridge ceramic craft, collectable design, and fine art. These ceramicistsinclude product designers who use clay as a means of creative expression,and classically trained potters who create design-ledpieces, in addition to interiordecorators, illustrators, and graphic designers.Their collective output includes furniture, decorative objects, murals, andvessels: not art, not craft, but design. The ambition of the book is to show the diversityof this area of creative production and the way in which history, craft,technology, and design are all intersecting in the present day, creating a new typeof designer--anda new type of ceramicist.The book is divided into four thematic chapters and accompanied by writtencontributions on the subject from designers, decorators, and collectors.
Pop Art and Design by
This book offers the first in-depth analysis of the relationship between art and design, which led to the creation of 'pop'. Challenging accepted boundaries and definitions, the authors seek out various commonalities and points of connection between these two exciting areas. Confronting the all-pervasive 'high art / low culture' divide, Pop Art and Design brings a fresh understanding of visual culture during the vibrant 1950s and 60s. This was an era when commercial art became graphic design, illustration was superseded by photography and high fashion became street fashion, all against the backdrop of a rapidly-evolving economic and political landscape, a glamorous youth scene and an effervescent popular culture. The book's central argument is that pop art relied on and drew inspiration from pop design, and vice versa. Massey and Seago assert that this relationship was articulated through the artwork, design, publications and exhibitions of a network of key practitioners. Pop Art and Design provides a case study in the broader inter-relationship between art and design, and constitutes the first interdisciplinary publication on the subject.
Practice by
The first anthology to investigate what contemporary notions of practice mean for art, tracing their development and speculating on where this leads."Practice" is one of the key words of contemporary art, used in contexts ranging from artists' descriptions of their practice to curatorial practice, from social practice to practice-based research. This is the first anthology to investigate what contemporary notions of practice mean for art, tracing their development and speculating on where this leads. Reframing the question of practice offers new ways of reading the history of art and of evaluating particular forms of practice-based art. Once used to denote "doing," as distinct from thinking and making, today the term can convey associations of political action (praxis), professional activity, discipline, or rehearsal, and signal a shift away from the self-enclosed artwork or medium to open-ended actions, series, processes, and projects. Although the turn to practice might promise freedom from finality or eventfulness, it also reflects the neoliberal pressures to train oneself, to perform, and to rehearse a marketable set of skills. This book offers an indispensible guide to the art history and theoretical framework of art-as-practice, clarifying the complex issues at stake in thinking about and enacting practice. Artists surveyed include Arakawa, Rebecca Belmore, AA Bronson, Judy Chicago, Lygia Clark, Andrea Fraser, Madeline Gins, Tehching Hsieh, Mary Kelly, Henri Michaux, Linda M. Montano, Pauline Oliveros, Yoko Ono, Adrian Piper, Raivo Puusemp, Rammellzee, Gerhard Richter, Miriam Schapiro, Carolee Schneemann, Gregory Sholette, Aliza Shvarts, Situationist International, Jonas Staal, Stelarc, Fiona Tan, Min Tanaka, Nadezhda Tolokonnikova, Cecilia Vicuna Writers include Kathy Acker, Giorgio Agamben, Louis Althusser, Hannah Arendt, Alain Badiou, Lauren Berlant, Gregg Bordowitz, Pierre Bourdieu, Julia Bryan-Wilson, Judith Butler, Jennifer Doyle, Okwui Enwezor, Saidiya V. Hartman, Maulana Karenga, Julia Kristeva, Saba Mahmood, Viktor Misiano, Fred Moten, Paul B. Preciado, Lane Relyea, Suely Rolnik, Peter Sloterdijk, Isabelle Stengers, Winnie Won Yin Wong
Textiles of Japan : the Thomas Murray collection at the Minneapolis Institute of Art by
From rugged Japanese firemen's ceremonial robes and austere rural work-wear to colorful, delicately-patterned cotton kimonos, this lavishly illustrated volume explores Japan's rich tradition of textiles. Textiles are an eloquent form of cultural expression and of great importance in the daily life of a people, as well as in their rituals and ceremonies. The traditional clothing and fabrics featured in this book were made and used in the islands of the Japanese archipelago between the late 18th and the mid 20th century. The Thomas Murray collection featured in this book includes daily dress, work-wear, and festival garb and follows the Arts and Crafts philosophy of the Mingei Movement, which saw that modernization would leave behind traditional art forms such as the hand-made textiles used by country people, farmers, and fisherman. It presents subtly patterned cotton fabrics, often indigo dyed from the main islands of Honshu and Kyushu, along with garments of the more remote islands: the graphic bark cloth, nettle fiber, and fish skin robes of the aboriginal Ainu in Hokkaido and Sakhalin to the north, and the brilliantly colored cotton kimonos of Okinawa to the far south. Numerous examples of these fabrics, photographed in exquisite detail, offer insight into Japan's complex textile history as well as inspiration for today's designers and artists. This volume explores the range and artistry of the country's tradition of fiber arts and is an essential resource for anyone captivated by the Japanese aesthetic.
Western Art and the Wider World by
Western Art and the Wider World explores the evolving relationship between the Western canon of art, as it has developed since the Renaissance, and the art and culture of the Islamic world, the Far East, Australasia, Africa and the Americas. Explores the origins, influences, and evolving relationship between the Western canon of art as it has developed since the Renaissance and the art and culture of the Islamic world, the Far East, Australasia, Africa and the Americas Makes the case for 'world art' long before the fashion of globalization Charts connections between areas of study in art that long were considered in isolation, such as the Renaissance encounter with the Ottoman Empire, the influence of Japanese art on the 19th-century French avant-garde and of African art on early modernism, as well as debates about the relation of 'contemporary art' to the past. Written by a well-known art historian and co-editor of the landmark Art in Theory volumes
Women Artists by
A chronological introduction to women artists throughout history, this book provides a rich understanding of key female artists from the Baroque to the present day. In 1971, in an essay that has now become one of the touchstones of feminist art history, Linda Nochlin raised the question heard round the world: "Why have there been no great women artists?" Since the 1970s, as a result of this kind of consciousness-raising, the feminist discourse around art has expanded, addressing forms of activism, the idea of a feminist aesthetic, the female body, sexuality, and representation more largely. The reframing of female contributions to the history of art is still ongoing, and this new addition to the Art Essentials series draws attention to some of its key dimensions. Focusing on fifty diverse women artists from Artemisia Gentileschi through Judy Chicago, Ana Mendieta, and the Guerrilla Girls to Barbara Kruger, Cindy Sherman, and Mona Hatoum, this book equips readers with an understanding of feminist art, as well as an appreciation of its most important figures. This latest addition to the Art Essentials series documents women artists in context to offer readers a rich understanding of key female artists from the Baroque to the present day.
Arts Management Electives (History or Theory of Art Form)
These elective courses will provide students foundations of history or theory of their chosen art form to gain interdisciplinary understanding of arts management practices and collaborations.
Art and design : history, theory, practice by
This book is a selection of essays covering aspects of the history, and contemporary understanding of the fields of art and design and their inter-percolation.Making things has always involved skill and thought. Thought is given to their creation so they are fit for purpose. Where the purpose is aesthetic or intellectual pleasure, the resulting object is often called art. There is, however, often a hierarchy placing "art" somewhere apart from "design." But isn't some art designed? These essays investigate aspects of this dichotomy - from both sides of the supposed divide to discuss the ground.
Art in the Age of Emergence by
This book delivers sensible emergent aesthetics, explaining the processes that happen in human minds when we share ideas as works of art, skewering the orthodoxies of contemporary art with pragmatic wisdom about why representational art thrives in the new millennium. Art in the Age of Emergence has captured the imaginations of thinkers and artists alike. This is an indispensable read for those who want to understand representational art in the 21st Century.
The art of music production : the theory and practice by
The Art of Music Production is the first book to comprehensively analyze and describe the role of the music producer in creating successful music recordings. Now in its fourth edition, it is the definitive guide to the art and business of music production.Author and producer Richard James Burgess distills this complex field by defining the distinct roles of a music producer.The first part of the book outlines the underlying theory of the art of music production. The second focuses on the job's practical aspects, including training, getting into the business, and--most importantly--the musical, financial, and interpersonal relationships producers have with artists and their labels. The book is packed with insights from successful music producers, ranging from the beginnings of recorded sound to today's chart-toppers and across genre lines. It features many revealing anecdotes, encompassing both the daily and overarching career-related challenges that a producer faces. Burgess addresses the changes in the nature of music production brought about by technology and, in particular, the millennial shift that has occurred with digital recording and distribution. His lifelong experience in the recording industry as a studio musician, artist, composer, producer, manager, and marketer, combined with his extensive academic research in the field, brings a unique breadth and depth of understanding to the topic.
Artwash : big oil and the arts by
Shortlisted for the Bread and Roses Prize, 2016* *Shortlisted for the Green Carnation Prize, 2015* * Shortlisted for the Academy of British Cover Design Awards, 2015* Artwash is an intervention into the unsavoury role of the Big Oil company's sponsorship of the arts in Britain. Based on the high profile campaign 'Liberate Tate', Mel Evans targets Chevron, ExxonMobil, BP and Shell's collaboration with institutions such as the Tate in an attempt to end the poisonous relationship forever. Based on years of undercover research, grassroots investigation and activism as well as performance and cultural interventions, Mel Evans draws together the story of the campaign and its journey which has gone from strength to strength. Artwash shows how corporate sponsorship of the arts erases unsightly environmental destruction and obscures the strategies of oil company PR executives who rely on cultural philanthropy. The conclusion sounds a note of hope: major institutions (such as the Southbank Centre) have already agreed to cut sponsorship, and tribunals are happening which are taking these relationships to task. Artists and employees are developing new methods of work which publicly confront the oil companies. Like the anti-tobacco campaign before it, this will be an important cultural and political turn for years to come.
Classical art : a life history from antiquity to the present by
How did the statues of ancient Greece wind up dictating art history in the West? How did the material culture of the Greeks and Romans come to be seen as "classical" and as "art"? What does "classical art" mean across time and place? In this ambitious, richly illustrated book, art historian and classicist Caroline Vout provides an original history of how classical art has been continuously redefined over the millennia as it has found itself in new contexts and cultures. All of this raises the question of classical art's future. What we call classical art did not simply appear in ancient Rome, or in the Renaissance, or in the eighteenth-century Academy. Endlessly repackaged and revered or rebuked, Greek and Roman artifacts have gathered an amazing array of values, both positive and negative, in each new historical period, even as these objects themselves have reshaped their surroundings. Vout shows how this process began in antiquity, as Greeks of the Hellenistic period transformed the art of fifth-century Greece, and continued through the Roman empire, Constantinople, European court societies, the neoclassical English country house, and the nineteenth century, up to the modern museum. A unique exploration of how each period of Western culture has transformed Greek and Roman antiquities and in turn been transformed by them, this book revolutionizes our understanding of what classical art has meant and continues to mean.
Figuring Faith and Female Power in the Art of Rubens by
Figuring Faith and Female Power in the Art of Rubens argues that the Baroque painter, propagandist, and diplomat, Peter Paul Rubens, was not only aware of rapidly shifting religious and cultural attitudes toward women, but actively engaged in shaping them. Today, Rubens's paintings continue to be used -- and abused -- to prescribe and proscribe certain forms of femininity. Repositioning some of the artist's best-known works within seventeenth-century Catholic theology and female court culture, this book provides a feminist corrective to a body of art historical scholarship in which studies of gender and religion are often mutually exclusive. Moving chronologically through Rubens's lengthy career, the author shows that, in relation to the powerful women in his life, Rubens figured the female form as a transhistorical carrier of meaning whose devotional and rhetorical efficacy was heightened rather than diminished by notions of female difference and particularity.
Form as revolt : Carl Einstein and the ground of modern art by
The German writer and art critic Carl Einstein (1885-1940) has long been acknowledged as an important figure in the history of modern art, and yet he is often sidelined as an enigma. In Form as Revolt Sebastian Zeidler recovers Einstein's multifaceted career, offering the first comprehensive intellectual biography of Einstein in English.Einstein first emerged as a writer of experimental prose through his involvement with the anarchist journal Die Aktion. After a few limited forays into art criticism, he burst onto the art scene in 1915 with his book Negro Sculpture, at once a formalist intervention into the contemporary theory and practice of European sculpture and a manifesto for the sophistication of African art. Einstein would go on to publish seminal texts on the cubist paintings of Georges Braque and Pablo Picasso. His contributions to the surrealist magazine Documents (which Einstein cofounded with Georges Bataille), including writings on Picasso and Paul Klee, remain unsurpassed in their depth and complexity.In a series of close visual analyses--illustrated with major works by Braque, Picasso, and Klee--Zeidler retrieves the theoretical resources that Einstein brought to bear on their art. Form as Revolt shows us that to rediscover Einstein's art criticism is to see the work of great modernist artists anew through the eyes of one of the most gifted left-wing formalists of the twentieth century.
Meanings of Abstract Art by
Traditional art is based on conventions of resemblance between the work and that which it is a representation "of". Abstract art, in contrast, either adopts alternative modes of visual representation or reconfigures mimetic convention. This book explores the relation of abstract art to nature (taking nature in the broadest sense--the world of recognisable objects, creatures, organisms, processes, and states of affairs). Abstract art takes many different forms, but there are shared key structural features centered on two basic relations to nature. The first abstracts from nature, to give selected aspects of it a new and extremely unfamiliar appearance. The second affirms a natural creativity that issues in new, autonomous forms that are not constrained by mimetic conventions. (Such creativity is often attributed to the power of the unconscious.) The book covers three categories: classical modernism (Mondrian, Malevich, Kandinsky, Arp, early American abstraction); post-war abstraction (Pollock, Still, Newman, Smithson, Noguchi, Arte Povera, Michaux, postmodern developments); and the broader historical and philosophical scope.
The objective eye : color, form, and reality in the theory of art by
OC The longer you work, the more the mystery deepens of what appearance is, or how what is called appearance can be made in another medium.OCoFrancis Bacon, painter a This, in a nutshell, is the central problem in the theory of art. It has fascinated philosophers from Plato to Wittgenstein. And it fascinates artists and art historians, who have always drawn extensively on philosophical ideas about language and representation, and on ideas about vision and the visible world that have deep philosophical roots. John HymanOCOs "The Objective Eye" is a radical treatment of this problem, deeply informed by the history of philosophy and science, but entirely fresh. The questions tackled here are fundamental ones: Is our experience of color an illusion? How does the metaphysical status of colors differ from that of shapes? What is the difference between a picture and a written text?a Why are some pictures said to be more realistic than others? Is it because they are especially truthful or, on the contrary, because they deceive the eye? a "The Objective Eye" explores the fundamental concepts we use constantly in our most innocent thoughts and conversations about art, as well as in the most sophisticated art theory.a The book progresses from pure philosophy to applied philosophy and ranges from the metaphysics of color to Renaissance perspective, from anatomy in ancient Greece to impressionism in nineteenth-century France. Philosophers, art historians, and students of the arts will find "The Objective Eye" challenging and absorbing. a "
Re-Forming Texts, Music, and Church Art in the Early Modern North by
Our historical understanding of the Reformation in northern Europe has tended to privilege the idea of disruption and innovation over continuity - yet even the most powerful reformation movements drew on and exchanged ideas with earlier cultural and religious practices. This volume attempts to right the balance, bringing together a roster of experts to trace the continuities between the medieval and early modern period in the Nordic realm, while enabling us to see the Reformation and its changes in a new light.
A Realist Theory of Art History by
As the theoretical alignments within academia shift, this book introduces a surprising variety of realism to abolish the old positivist-theory dichotomy that has haunted Art History. Demanding frankly the referential detachment of the objects under study, the book proposes a stratified, multi-causal account of art history that addresses postmodern concerns while saving it from its errors of self-refutation. Building from the very basic distinction between intransitive being and transitive knowing, objects can be affirmed as real while our knowledge of them is held to be fallible. Several focused chapters address basic problems while introducing philosophical reflection into art history. These include basic ontological distinctions between society and culture, general and "special" history, the discontinuity of cultural objects, the importance of definition for special history, scales, facets and fiat objects as forms of historical structure, the nature of evidence and proof, historical truth and controversies. Stressing Critical Realism as the stratified, multi-causal approach needed for productive research today in the academy, this book creates the subject of the ontology of art history and sets aside a theoretical space for metaphysical reflection, thus clarifying the usually muddy distinction between theory, methodology, and historiography in art history.
A Seamless Web by
In recent years, American art scholars have increasingly focused on the importance of cross-cultural exchanges during nineteenth century. As essayist Francois Brunet puts it, mid-nineteenth century landscapes were transnational ... permeated by complex transactions where 'American' originality produced itself not only in imitation of or reaction against 'European' influences, ... but as critical mirroring and incorporating of 'European' images. Articles in this collection make clear that the conversation of cultures went both ways, with American artworks and culture also affecting European artistic and literary practice. Essays explore the transnational origin of many types of American artworks, from stained glass windows, which usually copied their European originals with great exactitude, to paintings and sculptures using distinctly American motifs, such as the Puritan and the cowboy, to distinguish American art students from their Parisian masters. It also examines American cultural icons, particularly the American Indian, appropriated by European writers and artists and philosophers to embody primeval wisdom. A distinguished international group of scholars, including Brunet, Robert Rydell, and Peter Gibian, offer valuable perspectives to the ever-broadening field of transnational cultural studies.
Shaping jazz : cities, labels, and the global emergence of an art form by
There are over a million jazz recordings, but only a few hundred tunes have been recorded repeatedly. Why did a minority of songs become jazz standards? Why do some songs--and not others--get rerecorded by many musicians? Shaping Jazz answers this question and more, exploring the underappreciated yet crucial roles played by initial production and markets--in particular, organizations and geography--in the development of early twentieth-century jazz. Damon Phillips considers why places like New York played more important roles as engines of diffusion than as the sources of standards. He demonstrates why and when certain geographical references in tune and group titles were considered more desirable. He also explains why a place like Berlin, which produced jazz abundantly from the 1920s to early 1930s, is now on jazz's historical sidelines. Phillips shows the key influences of firms in the recording industry, including how record companies and their executives affected what music was recorded, and why major companies would rerelease recordings under artistic pseudonyms. He indicates how a recording's appeal was related to the narrative around its creation, and how the identities of its firm and musicians influenced the tune's long-run popularity. Applying fascinating ideas about market emergence to a music's commercialization, Shaping Jazz offers a unique look at the origins of a groundbreaking art form.
Situating Global Art by
In recent years, the term global art has become a catchphrase in contemporary art discourses. Going beyond additive notions of canon expansion, this volume encourages a differentiated inquiry into the complex aesthetic, cultural, historical, political, epistemological and socio-economic implications of both the term global art itself and the practices it subsumes. Focusing on diverse examples of art, curating, historiography and criticism, the contributions not only take into account (new) hegemonies and exclusions but also the shifting conditions of transcultural art production, circulation and reception.
A Theory of Virtual Agency for Western Art Music by
In his third volume on musical expressive meaning, Robert S. Hatten examines virtual agency in music from the perspectives of movement, gesture, embodiment, topics, tropes, emotion, narrativity, and performance. Distinguished from the actual agency of composers and performers, whose intentional actions either create music as notated or manifest music as significant sound, virtual agency is inferred from the implied actions of those sounds, as they move and reveal tendencies within music-stylistic contexts. From our most basic attributions of sources for perceived energies in music, to the highest realm of our engagement with musical subjectivity, Hatten explains how virtual agents arose as distinct from actual ones, how unspecified actants can take on characteristics of (virtual) human agents, and how virtual agents assume various actorial roles. Along the way, Hatten demonstrates some of the musical means by which composers and performers from different historical eras have staged and projected various levels of virtual agency, engaging listeners imaginatively and interactively within the expressive realms of their virtual and fictional musical worlds.
Video Art Theory by
Video Art Theory: A Comparative Approach demonstrates how video art functions on the basis of a comparative media approach, providing a crucial understanding of video as a medium in contemporary art and of the visual mediations we encounter in daily life. A critical investigation of the visual media and selected video artworks which contributes to the understanding of video as a medium in contemporary art The only study specifically devoted to theorizing the medium of video from the perspective of prominent characteristics which result from how video works deal with time, space, representation, and narrative The text has emerged out of the author's own lectures and seminars on video art Offers a comparative approach which students find especially useful, offering new perspectives
Western Art and the Wider World by
Western Art and the Wider World explores the evolving relationship between the Western canon of art, as it has developed since the Renaissance, and the art and culture of the Islamic world, the Far East, Australasia, Africa and the Americas. Explores the origins, influences, and evolving relationship between the Western canon of art as it has developed since the Renaissance and the art and culture of the Islamic world, the Far East, Australasia, Africa and the Americas Makes the case for 'world art' long before the fashion of globalization Charts connections between areas of study in art that long were considered in isolation, such as the Renaissance encounter with the Ottoman Empire, the influence of Japanese art on the 19th-century French avant-garde and of African art on early modernism, as well as debates about the relation of 'contemporary art' to the past. Written by a well-known art historian and co-editor of the landmark Art in Theory volumes
The Work of Art by
Art making as a way of mediating between inner and outer realities.
Arts Management Electives (Production)
These elective courses will provide students meaningful application of knowledge learned from AMELEC1-3 to various activities, projects, and productions to gain interdisciplinary understanding of arts management practices and collaborations.
Art, Culture and Enterprise by
First published in 1990, this investigative overview of the politics of arts' and cultural funding examines the question of public support for the arts. Looking at both popular commercial forms of culture, including radio, pop music and cinema, and the more traditional highbrow arts such as drama and opera, Art, Culture and Enterprise was the first book of its kind to deal systematically with the politics of contemporary culture. Drawing examples from specific British venues, Justin Lewis shows how innovative projects work in practice, and considers arts marketing and the promotion of culture as an economic strategy. A particularly relevant title in the context of the debate surrounding Arts Council funding, this reissue will prove valuable for artists, administrators and students of media and cultural studies, alongside those with a general interest in the future of public art and culture.
Art, Culture and International Development by
Culture is not simply an explanation of last resort, but is itself a rich, multifaceted and contested concept and set of practices that needs to be expanded, appreciated and applied in fresh ways if it is to be both valued in itself and to be of use in practical development. This innovative book places culture, specifically in the form of the arts, back at the centre of debates in development studies by introducing new ways of conceptualizing art in relation to development. The book shows how the arts and development are related in very practical ways - as means to achieve development goals through visual, dramatic, filmic and craft-inspired ways. It advocates not so much culture and development, but rather for the development of culture. Without a cultural content to economic and social transformation the problems found in much development - up-rooting of cultures, loss of art forms, languages and modes of expression and performance - may only accelerate. Paying attention to the development of the arts as the content of development helps to amend this culturally destructive process. Finally, the book argues for the value of the arts in attaining sustainable cultures, promoting poverty alleviation, encouraging self-empowerment, stimulating creativity and the social imagination, which in turn flow back into wider processes of social transformation. Discussion questions at the end of each chapter make this book ideal to help foster further thinking and debate. This book is an inspiring read for postgraduate students and researchers in the fields of development studies, cultural studies and sociology of development.
Art As Enterprise by
Art is produced, circulated, consumed and disseminated within an economic system - it depends on money for its creation, for the livelihood of its makers, and for its distribution. In this sense, art can be understood as an enterprising activity. However, profit-making is rarely the primary goal of artists, and indeed the entanglement of art with enterprise generates significant aesthetic, conceptual, philosophical and ethical challenges for contemporary art practice. Social enterprise has emerged from this complex terrain with the promise of an alternative model of economic organisation in the arts. Grace McQuilten and Anthony White argue that artists can, and have, engaged critically in the commercial market, by way of this model. Art as Enterprise brings a fresh perspective to the debate about the roles of contemporary art in consumer capitalist society.
The art of mixing : a visual guide to recording, engineering, and production by
David Gibson uses 3D visual representations of sounds in a mix as a tool to explain the dynamics that can be created in a mix. This book provides an in-depth exploration into the aesthetics of what makes a great mix. Gibson's unique approach explains how to map sounds to visuals in order to create a visual framework that can be used to analyze what is going on in any mix. Once you have the framework down, Gibson then uses it to explain the traditions that have be developed over time by great recording engineers for different styles of music and songs. You will come to understand everything that can be done in a mix to create dynamics that affect people in really deep ways. Once you understand what engineers are doing to create the great mixes they do, you can then use this framework to develop your own values as to what you feel is a good mix. Once you have a perspective on what all can be done, you have the power to be truly creative on your own - to create whole new mixing possibilities. It is all about creating art out of technology. This book goes beyond explaining what the equipment does - it explains what to do with the equipment to make the best possible mixes.
Arts, Inc by
In this impassioned and persuasive book, Bill Ivey, the former chairman of the National Endowment for the Arts, assesses the current state of the arts in America and finds cause for alarm. Even as he celebrates our ever-emerging culture and the way it enriches our lives here at home while spreading the dream of democracy around the world, he points to a looming crisis. The expanding footprint of copyright, an unconstrained arts industry marketplace, and a government unwilling to engage culture as a serious arena for public policy have come together to undermine art, artistry, and cultural heritage--the expressive life of America. In eight succinct chapters, Ivey blends personal and professional memoir, policy analysis, and deeply held convictions to explore and define a coordinated vision for art, culture, and expression in American life.
Arts and Entrepreneurship by
Interest in entrepreneurship in the arts has grown in recent years. This book brought together experts and thought leaders from around the world to uncover business success strategies for individuals engaged in the arts worldwide.
Arts Entrepreneurship by
Arts Entrepreneurship: Creating a New Venture in the Artsprovides the essential tools, techniques, and concepts needed to invent, launch, and sustain a business in the creative sector. Building on the reader's artistic talents and interests, the book provides a practical, action-oriented introduction to the business of art, focusing on product design, organizational planning and assessment, customer identification and marketing, fundraising, legal issues, money management, cultural policy, and career development. It also offers examples, exercises, and references that guide entrepreneurs through the key stages of concept creation, business development, and growth. Special attention is paid to topics such as cultural ventures seeking social impact, the emergence of creative placemaking, the opportunities afforded by novel corporate forms, and the role of contemporary technologies in marketing, fundraising, and operations. A hands-on guide to entrepreneurial success, this book is a valuable resource for students of Arts Entrepreneurship programs, courses, and workshops, as well as for early-stage business founders in the creative sector looking for guidance on how to create and sustain their own successful venture.
Baroque Between the Wars by
Baroque between the Wars is a fascinating and new account of the arts in the twenties and thirties. We often think of this time as being dominated by modernism, yet the period saw a dialogue between modern baroque--eclectic, playful, camp, open to influence from popular culture yet in dialogue with the past, and unafraid of the grotesque or surreal--and modernism, which was theory-driven, didactic, exclusive, and essentially neo-classical. Jane Stevenson argues that both baroque and classical forms were equally valid responses to the challenge of modernity, by setting painting and literature in the context of 'minor arts' such as interior design, photography, fashion, ballet, and flower arranging, and by highlighting the social context and sexual politics of creative production. Accessibly written and generously illustrated, the volume focuses on artists, artefacts, clients, places, and publicists to demonstrate how baroque offered a whole way of being modern which was actively subversive of the tenets of modernism and practised by the people modernism habitually defined as not worth listening to, particularly women and homosexuals.
Beyond Price by
Much recent discussion surrounding valuation of the arts and culture, particularly in the policy arena, has been dominated by a concern to identify an economic and financial basis for valuation of art works, arts, activities and more general ways in which we express our culture. Whereas a great deal can be gained from a fuller understanding of the economic value of art, there is a real danger that financial considerations will tend to crowd out all other aspects of value. This book moves beyond the limitations implicit in a narrow economic approach, bringing different disciplinary viewpoints together, opening up a dialogue between scholars about the processes of valuation that they use and exploring differences and identifying common ground between the various viewpoints. The book's common theme - the tension between economic and cultural modes of evaluation - unites the chapters, making it a coherent and unified volume that provides a new and unique perspective on how we value art.
Creative Arts Marketing by
Creative Arts Marketing third edition is a long-awaited update of a classic and influential text. A ground-breaking book when first published, it covers the core concepts of marketing and management as they apply to the arts and heritage industries with a depth that is still unrivalled. With an emphasis on global case studies, practical examples and discussion questions and an author team that draws from rich and varied experiences in the arts management sector, the book serves as a text for students as much as it is a practitioner's guide to industry best practice. Extensively revised to reflect the dramatic changes to this industry, this edition integrates organizational and management subject matter, reflecting the marketing function's deeper involvement in broad organizational issues. This fully updated and revised third edition features: Audience diversity and audience development The impact of digital technologies on the industry An exploration of the increasingly complex relationship between public and private funding for the arts Ethics and sustainability issues for arts marketers Cultural policy changes in the industry Including a brand new companion website, complete with materials for tutors and students for the first time, the return of this important text will be welcomed by students, tutors and professionals in the arts.
Graphic Design for Art, Fashion, Film, Architecture, Photographer, Product Design and Everything in Between by
This collection of groundbreaking campaigns and industry insights from the world's leading design studios shows how today's graphic designers are thinking, collaborating, and breaking the rules. This guide explores ways in which graphic designers can successfully collaborate with other creative professionals and sectors, whether it be a more sophisticated logo for a product, a better-designed lookbook for a fashion brand, or a more intuitive wayfinding system for a museum. The book features exceptionally conceived design solutions across a variety of industries--from architecture and product design to art, fashion, and film. Through dynamic spreads, readers will discover the Berlin-based studio Hort's transformative campaign for Nike; Base's responsive, flexible logo for Munich's Haus der Kunst museum; how design agency Bond worked with ArtRabbit, a website and app that catalogs contemporary art exhibitions, on a clever identity rollout; and how John Haslam, managing director of bespoke paper company G.F Smith, feels about the process of working with designers. Each example illustrates the significance of the graphic designer's role in making a campaign marketable and successful. Insights from clients and the designers themselves reveal the inner workings of the design process. An indispensable reference for the graphic design industry, this visually arresting and informative volume shows how excellence can be achieved when creative minds work together.
Hollywood soundscapes : film sound style, craft and production in the classical era by
The technical crafts of sound in classical Hollywood cinema have, until recently, remained largely 'unsung' by histories of the studio era. Yet film sound - voice, music and sound effects - is a crucial aspect of film style and has been key to engaging and holding audiences since the transition to sound by Hollywood's major studios in 1929. This innovative new text restores sound technicians to Hollywood's creative history. Exploring a range of films from the early sound period (1931) through to the late studio period (1948), and drawing on a wide range of archival sources, the book reveals how Hollywood's sound designers worked and why they worked in the ways that they did. The book demonstrates how sound technicians developed conventions designed to tell stories through sound, placing them within the production cultures of studio era filmmaking, and uncovering a history of collective and collaborative creativity. In doing so, it traces the emergence of a body of highly skilled sound personnel, able to apply expert technical knowledge in the science of sound to the creation of cinematic soundscapes that are alive with mood and sensation.
Intelligent Music Production by
Intelligent Music Production presents the state of the art in approaches, methodologies and systems from the emerging field of automation in music mixing and mastering. This book collects the relevant works in the domain of innovation in music production, and orders them in a way that outlines the way forward: first, covering our knowledge of the music production processes; then by reviewing the methodologies in classification, data collection and perceptual evaluation; and finally by presenting recent advances on introducing intelligence in audio effects, sound engineering processes and music production interfaces. Intelligent Music Production is a comprehensive guide, providing an introductory read for beginners, as well as a crucial reference point for experienced researchers, producers, engineers and developers.
Understanding Design in Film Production by
Great visual storytelling is possible on a minimal budget, but you have to spend a lot of energy thinking and planning.In Understanding Design in Film Production, author Barbara Freedman Doyle demonstrates how to use production design, cinematography, lighting, and locations to create an effective and compelling visual story, even on the tightest of budgets. Featuring in-depth interviews with production designers, set decorators, construction coordinators, cinematographers, costumers, and location managers talking about the techniques of their craft, it provides you with a feel for what everyone on the visual team does, how they think and plan, and how best to utilize the knowledge and skills they offer. This book guides you through how to find, secure, and manage the best locations, how to create and dress a set, and how to make old look new and new look old--all on a tight budget. With insights from experts at the top of their field, sharing how they plan for the real-world application of large-scale ideas, you'll be able to see ways to apply their techniques to your own smaller-scale productions. Understanding Design in Film Productionis a practical, hands-on guide for any aspiring filmmaker who wants to understand the basic principles of visual design in order to create exceptional looking films. ts at the top of their field, sharing how they plan for the real-world application of large-scale ideas, you'll be able to see ways to apply their techniques to your own smaller-scale productions. Understanding Design in Film Productionis a practical, hands-on guide for any aspiring filmmaker who wants to understand the basic principles of visual design in order to create exceptional looking films.
Arts Management Electives (Production)
These elective courses will provide students meaningful application of knowledge learned from AMELEC1-3 to various activities, projects, and productions to gain interdisciplinary understanding of arts management practices and collaborations.
Art and money by
Art and money have much in common. Both are spheres of social activity that carry symbolic values. A coin is simply a piece of metal, stamped with signs to give it symbolic meaning, to give it a value, a value that changes with the vicissitudes of its economic life, or, when no longer legal tender, with its life as a collectable. A painting is a piece of canvas, stretched on a frame to make it taut, which is then covered with pigment, brushed with an image, a sign that gives it value, a value that changes with the vicissitudes of its aesthetic and symbolic life, with its commodity value.
Arts and Crafts by
,,Bewahren Sie nichts in Ihren Häusern auf, was Sie nicht als nützlich erachten oder wirklich schön finden."Allein dieses Zitat von William Morris könnte schon als erklärende Zusammenfassung der Arts and Crafts-Bewegung dienen, die in England eine Reform des Kunstgewerbes hervorrief. Diese von John Ruskin gegründete und von William Morris erst richtig vorangetriebene Bewegung Arts and Crafts brachte revolutionäre Ideen in das viktorianische England. In der Blüte des ,,seelenlosen" Industriezeitalters, in dem Gegenstände standardisiert wurden, forderten die Mitglieder der Arts and Crafts-Bewegung, in die Herstellung einen ästhetischen Aspekt einzubringen. Handwerk und Design wurden somit zum Hauptgegenstand dieser neuen Ideologie. Arts & Crafts beeinflusste nunmehr zahlreiche Stile der ganzen Welt und drückte hauptsächlich dem Design, der Malerei und der Architektur ihren Stempel auf.
Arts Management by
The second edition of Arts Management has been thoroughly revised to provide an updated, comprehensive overview of this fast-changing subject. Arts managers and students alike are offered a lively, sophisticated insight into the artistic, managerial and social responsibilities necessary for those working in the field. With new cases studies and several new chapters, Derrick Chong takes an interdisciplinary approach in examining some of the main impulses informing discussions on the management of arts and cultural organizations. These are highly charged debates, since arts managers are expected to reconcile managerial, economic and aesthetic objectives. Topics include: arts and the State, with reference to the instrumentalism of the arts and culture business and the arts ownership and control of arts organizations arts consumption and consumers, including audience development and arts marketing managing for excellence and artistic integrity financial investing in the arts, namely fine arts funds and theatre angels philosophies of philanthropy Incorporating a deliberately diverse range of sources, Arts Management is essential reading for students on arts management courses and provides valuable insights for managers already facing the management challenges of this field.
Artwash : big oil and the arts by
Shortlisted for the Bread and Roses Prize, 2016* *Shortlisted for the Green Carnation Prize, 2015* * Shortlisted for the Academy of British Cover Design Awards, 2015* Artwash is an intervention into the unsavoury role of the Big Oil company's sponsorship of the arts in Britain. Based on the high profile campaign 'Liberate Tate', Mel Evans targets Chevron, ExxonMobil, BP and Shell's collaboration with institutions such as the Tate in an attempt to end the poisonous relationship forever. Based on years of undercover research, grassroots investigation and activism as well as performance and cultural interventions, Mel Evans draws together the story of the campaign and its journey which has gone from strength to strength. Artwash shows how corporate sponsorship of the arts erases unsightly environmental destruction and obscures the strategies of oil company PR executives who rely on cultural philanthropy. The conclusion sounds a note of hope: major institutions (such as the Southbank Centre) have already agreed to cut sponsorship, and tribunals are happening which are taking these relationships to task. Artists and employees are developing new methods of work which publicly confront the oil companies. Like the anti-tobacco campaign before it, this will be an important cultural and political turn for years to come.
Creative communities : art works in economic development by
Urban and regional planners, elected officials, and other decisionmakers are increasingly focused on what makes places livable. Access to the arts inevitably appears high on that list, but knowledge about how culture and the arts can act as a tool of economic development is sadly lacking. This important sector must be considered not only as a source of amenities or pleasant diversions, but also as a wholly integrated part of local economies. Employing original data produced through both quantitative and qualitative research, Creative Communities provides a greater understanding of how art works as an engine for transforming communities. "Without good data and analysis--much of it grounded in economic theory--we cannot hope to strengthen communities through the arts or to achieve any of the other goals we set for the National Endowment for the Arts, the largest nationwide funder of the arts." --from the Foreword by Rocco Landesman Contributors: Hasan Bakhshi (Nesta UK), Elisa Barbour (University of California, Berkeley), Shiri M. Breznitz (Georgia Institute of Technology), Roland J. Kushner (Muhlenberg College), Rex LaMore (Michigan State University), James Lawton (Michigan State), Neil Lee (Nesta UK), Richard G. Maloney (Boston University), Ann Markusen (University of Minnesota), Juan Mateos-Garcia (Nesta UK), Anne Gadwa Nicodemus (Metris Arts Consulting), Douglas S. Noonan (Indiana University-Purdue University Indianapolis), Peter Pedroni (Williams College), Amber Peruski (Michigan State), Michele Root-Bernstein (Michigan State), Robert Root-Bernstein (Michigan State), Eileen Roraback (Michigan State), Michael Rushton (Indiana University), Lauren Schmitz (New School for Social Research), Jenny Schuetz (University of Southern California), John Schweitzer (Michigan State), Stephen Sheppard (Williams College), Megan VanDyke (Michigan State), Gregory H. Wassall (Northeastern University)
Cultivating Demand for the Arts by
Examines what it means to cultivate demand for the arts, why it is important to do so, how it can be done though broad-based arts learning, and what state arts agencies and other policymakers in both the arts and education can do to make it happen.
Globalized Arts by
Focusing on the confrontation between global politics and symbolic creative expression, J. P. Singh shows how, by integrating themselves into international markets, entertainment industries give rise to far-reaching cultural anxieties and politics. Taking examples from Hollywood, Bollywood, French grand opera, Latin American television, West African music, postcolonial literature, and even the Thai sex trade, he cites not only the attempts to address cultural discomfort but also the efforts to deny entertainment acts as cultural. He connects creative expression to clashes between national identities, and he details the effect of cultural policies, such as institutional patronage and economic incentives, on the making and incorporation of art into the global market. Singh ultimately demonstrateshow these issues affect the debates on cultural trade being waged by the World Trade Organization, UNESCO, and the developing world.
Patronizing the Arts by
What is the role of the arts in American culture? Is art an essential element? If so, how should we support it? Today, as in the past, artists need the funding, approval, and friendship of patrons whether they are individuals, corporations, governments, or nonprofit foundations. But as Patronizing the Arts shows, these relationships can be problematic, leaving artists "patronized"--both supported with funds and personal interest, while being condescended to for vocations misperceived as play rather than serious work. In this provocative book, Marjorie Garber looks at the history of patronage, explains how patronage has elevated and damaged the arts in modern culture, and argues for the university as a serious patron of the arts. With clarity and wit, Garber supports rethinking prejudices that oppose art's role in higher education, rejects assumptions of inequality between the sciences and humanities, and points to similarities between the making of fine art and the making of good science. She examines issues of artistic and monetary value, and transactions between high and popular culture. She even asks how college sports could provide a new way of thinking about arts funding. Using vivid anecdotes and telling details, Garber calls passionately for an increased attention to the arts, not just through government and private support, but as a core aspect of higher education. Compulsively readable, Patronizing the Arts challenges all who value the survival of artistic creation both in the present and future. Some images inside the book are unavailable due to digital copyright restrictions.
Financial Management for Artistic and Creative Industries
AMFINMA introduces students to key financial principles and allows them to apply these in a real-world context of arts organization management. The course is designed as an interactive finance class with several case studies allowing students to bring theory into practice. During the course, students will progress through a series of modules from understanding basic financial principles to applying analysis and ratios in case studies driving financial decisions.
The A-Z of the International Art Market by
It is estimated that there are over 300,000 companies involved in the world's art market, employing around 2.8 million people. But the art world carries a veneer of mystery and secrecy that many people find daunting, and the language used by market insiders can be alienating and confusing to those new to the art market. The A-Z of the International Art Market not only clarifies useful terms and definitions, but also represents a significant contribution to the fast-developing processes of transparency and democratisation in the global art business. Comprising art market terms and core concepts - both historical and contemporary - this book is a long-awaited reference source that offers a unique introduction to a dynamic business sector. The A-Z of the International Art Marketprovides an accessible and thorough insight into critical areas of market practice and custom that anyone involved in the art market will find useful and enlightening.
Art As Enterprise by
Art is produced, circulated, consumed and disseminated within an economic system - it depends on money for its creation, for the livelihood of its makers, and for its distribution. In this sense, art can be understood as an enterprising activity. However, profit-making is rarely the primary goal of artists, and indeed the entanglement of art with enterprise generates significant aesthetic, conceptual, philosophical and ethical challenges for contemporary art practice. Social enterprise has emerged from this complex terrain with the promise of an alternative model of economic organisation in the arts. Grace McQuilten and Anthony White argue that artists can, and have, engaged critically in the commercial market, by way of this model. Art as Enterprise brings a fresh perspective to the debate about the roles of contemporary art in consumer capitalist society.
Art Entrepreneurship by
This pioneering book explores the connections between art and artistic processes and entrepreneurship. The authors expertly identify several areas and issues where research on art and artistic processes can inform and develop the traditional field of entrepreneurship research.Nine original chapters by an international group of scholars take a detailed look at the sources of new art ideas, how they are transformed into tangible objects of art, make their way through often hostile selection environments, and ultimately go on to become valued and accepted by the general public. Making a number of original contributions at the crossroads of art and entrepreneurship, the book speaks to researchers across these fields, practicing artists interested in promoting and gaining acceptance for their work, as well as policymakers concerned with sustained dynamics of the art arena. Entrepreneurship researchers interested in new developments in the field will find this unique book invigorating. It also serves as an invaluable source of inspiration for academics and practitioners interested in social and cultural entrepreneurship.
Arts, Inc by
In this impassioned and persuasive book, Bill Ivey, the former chairman of the National Endowment for the Arts, assesses the current state of the arts in America and finds cause for alarm. Even as he celebrates our ever-emerging culture and the way it enriches our lives here at home while spreading the dream of democracy around the world, he points to a looming crisis. The expanding footprint of copyright, an unconstrained arts industry marketplace, and a government unwilling to engage culture as a serious arena for public policy have come together to undermine art, artistry, and cultural heritage--the expressive life of America. In eight succinct chapters, Ivey blends personal and professional memoir, policy analysis, and deeply held convictions to explore and define a coordinated vision for art, culture, and expression in American life.
Arts and Entrepreneurship by
Interest in entrepreneurship in the arts has grown in recent years. This book brought together experts and thought leaders from around the world to uncover business success strategies for individuals engaged in the arts worldwide.
Arts Entrepreneurship by
Arts Entrepreneurship: Creating a New Venture in the Artsprovides the essential tools, techniques, and concepts needed to invent, launch, and sustain a business in the creative sector. Building on the reader's artistic talents and interests, the book provides a practical, action-oriented introduction to the business of art, focusing on product design, organizational planning and assessment, customer identification and marketing, fundraising, legal issues, money management, cultural policy, and career development. It also offers examples, exercises, and references that guide entrepreneurs through the key stages of concept creation, business development, and growth. Special attention is paid to topics such as cultural ventures seeking social impact, the emergence of creative placemaking, the opportunities afforded by novel corporate forms, and the role of contemporary technologies in marketing, fundraising, and operations. A hands-on guide to entrepreneurial success, this book is a valuable resource for students of Arts Entrepreneurship programs, courses, and workshops, as well as for early-stage business founders in the creative sector looking for guidance on how to create and sustain their own successful venture.
Arts leadership : creating sustainable arts organizations by
The contemporary world faces unprecedented upheaval and change forcing institutions of all types to rethink how they are designed and how they must now function if they are to survive into an uncertain future. The performing arts are no exception; in an era of constant change and technological transformation, arts organizations and their leaders face significant organizational challenges if they are to maintain their relevance. Arts Leadership: Creating Sustainable Arts Organizations provides a contemporary overview of the field of arts leadership, focused on the performing arts. It examines what these challenges are, how they are affecting the performing arts and arts organizations in general and proposes creative ways to reimagine, build and lead sustainable arts organizations in this uncharted environment. With a global perspective drawn from his extensive experience advising arts organizations around the world and based on his own work successfully leading important performing arts organizations in the United States, Foster proposes an innovative approach to organizational design, systems, and structures for arts leaders in the 21st century that is based in ecological thinking and the creative process that is intrinsic to the arts. In disrupting conventional arts leadership practice, the book provides an exceptional tool to understand a unique sector, and is essential reading for students and practitioners across the creative and cultural industries.
Beyond price : value in culture, economics, and the arts by
How do we place a value on a painting, or a piece of music, or a traditional ritual? The market can determine a price in monetary terms for a variety of cultural phenomena, but how much does that tell us about the real value of these things? This book explores the tensions between economic and cultural value from a range of disciplinary viewpoints and provides many new insights into how value is constructed in contemporary society.
Creative Industries by
This text explores the organisation of creative industries, including the visual and performing arts, movies, theatre, sound recordings, and book publishing. In each, artistic inputs are combined with other, hundrum inputs. But the deals that bring these inputs together are inherently problematic artists have a strong views; the muse whispers erratically, and consumer approval remains highly uncertain until all costs have been incurred.
The Creative Industries by
The rise of creative industries requires new thinking in communication, media and cultural studies, media and cultural policy, and the arts and information sectors. The Creative Industries sets the agenda for these debates, providing a richer understanding of the dynamics of cultural markets, creative labor, finance and risk, and how culture is distributed, marketed and creatively reused through new media technologies. This book develops a global perspective on the creative industries and creative economy; draws insights from media and cultural studies, innovation economics, cultural policy studies, and economic and cultural geography; explores what it means for policy-makers when culture and creativity move from the margins to the center of economic dynamics; makes extensive use of case studies in ways that are relevant not only to researchers and policy-makers, but also to the generation of students who will increasingly be establishing a ′portfolio career′ in the creative industries International in coverage, The Creative Industries traces the historical and contemporary ideas that make the cultural economy more relevant that it has ever been. It is essential reading for students and academics in media, communication and cultural studies.
Creative Labour by
Creative Labour provides an insight into the unique employment issues affecting workers in film, television, theatre, arts, music, radio and new media. In the UK alone, more than 1 million people work in the creative industries, generating billions of pounds in exports each year. These workers have to contend with elastic working hours, employment and promotion uncertainty and vigorous competition for each role. Creative Labour offers a contemporary perspective on a fascinating area of study and a rapidly growing area in developed economies. Key benefits: * Grasp the realities of work behind the industry façade * Evaluate real-life case-studies through a flexible, critical mindset * Tailor your management decisions to the needs of creative staff
Entrepreneurship and the Creative Economy by
Entrepreneurship and the Creative Economy contains a range of theoretical and empirically based research contributions that collectively consider and debate the process, policy and practice of the creative economy.The 'creative economy' and the broad spectrum of creative industries that it encompasses, is increasingly important in the 21st century's global economy. In challenging economic conditions, creative industries are both politically and economically appealing with governments around the world now recognising their potential as a source of employment and entrepreneurial endeavour. As such, this informative book will play a vital part in furthering our understanding of the creative industries and the role they play in economic development.This enlightening compendium, researched by leading authors in the field, will prove invaluable for students, academics and researchers in the fields of creative entrepreneurship, creative industries and the creative economy.
Entrepreneurship for the Creative and Cultural Industries by
Artists, musicians, actors, singers, designers and other creative individuals need to understand basic business concepts if they are to successfully pursue their chosen artistic profession. These skills have historically not been taught to creative students, which leaves them unprepared to make a living from their artistic efforts. Entrepreneurship for the Creative and Cultural Industries will teach the basics of business in a way that is relevant to the challenges of running a small business marketing a creative product. Whether it is understanding the basics of business language, appreciating the crucial importance of finance, or using social media marketing, this innovative textbook covers the entrepreneurial skills required to succeed in the creative sector. Including advice from artists who have turned their idea in to a profitable business and worksheets that can be combined into a simple business plan, Kolb helps non-business minded creatives to understand everything they need to succeed in the increasingly competitive creative economy. This textbook is essential reading for non-business students who are looking to understand the business side of the creative sector whilst its practical style will also suit recent graduates in these industries
The Global Contemporary Art World by
The final installment in the critically-acclaimed trilogy on globalization and art explores the growing dominance of Asian centers of art This book takes readers on a fascinating journey around five Asian centers of contemporary art and its myriad institutions, agents, forms, materials, and languages, while posing vital questions about the political economy of culture and the power of visual art in a multi-polar world. He analyzes the financial powerhouse of Art Basel Hong Kong, new media art in South Korea, the place of the Kochi Biennale within contemporary art in India, transnational art and art education in China, and the geo-politics of art patronage in Palestine, and he develops a highly original synthesis of theoretical perspectives and empirical research. Drawing on detailed case studies and personal insights gained from his extensive experience of the contemporary art scene in Asia, Professor Harris examines the evolving relationship between the western centers of art practice, collection, and validation and the emerging "peripheries" of Asian Tiger societies with burgeoning art centers. And he arrives at the somewhat controversial conclusion that dominance of the art world is rapidly slipping away from Europe and North America. The Global Contemporary Art World is essential reading for undergraduates and postgraduate students in modern and contemporary art, art history, art theory and criticism, cultural studies, the sociology of culture, and globalization studies. It is also a vital resource for research students, academics, and professionals in the art world.
Leadership in the Performing Arts by
What does it mean to be a performing arts leader? Leadership in the Performing Arts addresses and analyzes this question by presenting the wisdom and expertise of eleven men and women with experience leading nonprofit performing arts institutions in the United States. These successful leaders provide many real-world examples of business practices that may be generally applied by practitioners in our field, and throughout the nonprofit sector. The book examines: The leader's career path and professional growth The leader's vision Leadership styles and the importance of interpersonal skills Setting and executing organizational priorities Leading decision-making and communication processes Creating change and innovation Challenges faced in leading an institution Interviewees include: Kathy Brown, executive director of the New York City Ballet; Peter Gelb, general manager of the Metropolitan Opera; Heather Hitchens, president of the American Theatre Wing; Karen Brooks Hopkins, president and chief executive officer of the Brooklyn Academy of Music; Timothy J. McClimon, president of the American Express Foundation; Laura Penn, executive director of the Stage Directors and Choreographers Society; Arlene Shuler, president and chief executive officer of New York City Center; Paul Tetreault, director of Ford's Theatre; Nancy Umanoff, executive director of the Mark Morris Dance Group; Patrick Willingham, executive director of The Public Theater; and Harold Wolpert, managing director of the Roundabout Theatre Company. Allworth Press, an imprint of Skyhorse Publishing, publishes a broad range of books on the visual and performing arts, with emphasis on the business of art. Our titles cover subjects such as graphic design, theater, branding, fine art, photography, interior design, writing, acting, film, how to start careers, business and legal forms, business practices, and more. While we don't aspire to publish a New York Times bestseller or a national bestseller, we are deeply committed to quality books that help creative professionals succeed and thrive. We often publish in areas overlooked by other publishers and welcome the author whose expertise can help our audience of readers.
Management and the Arts by
The fifth edition of Management and the Arts discusses the theory and practical applications from all arts management perspectives including planning, marketing, finance, economics, organization, staffing, and group dynamics. Revised to reflect the latest thinking and trends in managing organizations and people, this fifth edition features class-tested questions in each chapter, which help students to integrate the material and develop ideas about how the situations and problems could have been handled. Statistics and real-world examples illustrate all aspects of arts managements, from budgeting and fundraising, to e-marketing and social networking, to working effectively with boards and staff members. Case studies focus on the challenges facing managers and organizations every day, and "In the News" quotes provide real-world examples of principles and theories. Students in Arts Management university courses along with arts managers in a theatre, museum, dance company, and opera will gain useful insights into strategic planning, organization, and integrated management theories with this book.
The Oxford Handbook of Creative Industries by
The Oxford Handbook of Creative Industries is a reference work, bringing together many of the world's leading scholars in the application of creativity in economics, business and management, law, policy studies, organization studies, and psychology. Creative industries research has become aregular theme in academic journals and conferences across these subjects and is also an important agenda for governments throughout the world, while business people from established companies and entrepreneurs revaluate and innovate their models in creative industries.The Handbook is organized into four parts: Following the editors' introduction, Part One on Creativity includes individual creativity and how this scales up to teams, social networks, cities, and labour markets. Part Two addresses Generating and Appropriating Value from Creativity, as achieved byagents and organizations, such as entrepreneurs, stars and markets for symbolic goods, and considers how performance is measured in the creative industries.Part Three covers the mechanics of Managing and Organizing Creative Industries, with chapters on the role of brokerage and mediation in creative industry networks, disintermediation and glocalisation due to digital technology, the management of project-based organzations in creative industries,organizing events in creative fields, project ecologies, Global Production Networks, genres and classification and sunk costs and dynamics of creative industries.Part Four on Creative Industries, Culture and the Economy offers chapters on cultural change and entrepreneurship, on development, on copyright, economic spillovers and government policy.This authoritative collection is the most comprehensive source of the state of knowledge in the increasingly important field of creative industries research. Covering emerging economies and new technologies, it will be of interest to scholars and students of the arts, business, innovation, andpolicy.
Routledge Handbook of Creative and Cultural Industries in Asia by
Recent years have witnessed the remarkable development of the cultural and creative industries (CCIs) in Asia, from the global popularity of the Japanese games and anime industries, to Korea¿s film and pop music successes. While CCIs in these Asian cultural powerhouses aspire to become key players in the global cultural economy, Southeast Asian countries such as Malaysia and Thailand are eager to make a strong mark in the region¿s cultural landscape. As the first handbook on CCIs in Asia, this book provides readers with a contextualized understanding of the conditions and operation of Asian CCIs. Both internationalising and de-Westernising our knowledge of CCIs, it offers a comprehensive contribution to the field from academics, practitioners and activists alike. Covering 12 different societies in Asia from Japan and China to Thailand, Indonesia and India, the themes include: State policy in shaping CCIs Cultural production inside and outside of institutional frameworks Circulation of CCIs products and consumer culture Cultural activism and independent culture Cultural heritage as an industry. Presenting a detailed set of case studies, this book will be an essential companion for researchers and students in the field of cultural policy, cultural and creative industries, media and cultural studies, and Asian studies in general.
Financial Management for Artistic and Creative Industries
AMFINMA introduces students to key financial principles and allows them to apply these in a real-world context of arts organization management. The course is designed as an interactive finance class with several case studies allowing students to bring theory into practice. During the course, students will progress through a series of modules from understanding basic financial principles to applying analysis and ratios in case studies driving financial decisions.
Art and money by
Art and money have much in common. Both are spheres of social activity that carry symbolic values. A coin is simply a piece of metal, stamped with signs to give it symbolic meaning, to give it a value, a value that changes with the vicissitudes of its economic life, or, when no longer legal tender, with its life as a collectable. A painting is a piece of canvas, stretched on a frame to make it taut, which is then covered with pigment, brushed with an image, a sign that gives it value, a value that changes with the vicissitudes of its aesthetic and symbolic life, with its commodity value. Art a.
Art crossing borders : the internationalisation of the art market in the age of nation states, 1750-1914 by
"Art Crossing Borders offers a thought-provoking analysis of the internationalisation of the art market during the long nineteenth century. Twelve experts, dealing with a wide variety of geographical, temporal, and commercial contexts, explore how the gradual integration of art markets structurally depended on the simultaneous rise of nationalist modes of thinking, in unexpected and ambiguous ways. By presenting a radically international research perspective Art Crossing Borders offers a crucial contribution to the field of art market studies"-- Provided by publisher.
Creative communities : art works in economic development by
Urban and regional planners, elected officials, and other decisionmakers are increasingly focused on what makes places livable. Access to the arts inevitably appears high on that list, but knowledge about how culture and the arts can act as a tool of economic development is sadly lacking. This important sector must be considered not only as a source of amenities or pleasant diversions, but also as a wholly integrated part of local economies. Employing original data produced through both quantitative and qualitative research, Creative Communities provides a greater understanding of how art works as an engine for transforming communities. "Without good data and analysis--much of it grounded in economic theory--we cannot hope to strengthen communities through the arts or to achieve any of the other goals we set for the National Endowment for the Arts, the largest nationwide funder of the arts." --from the Foreword by Rocco Landesman Contributors: Hasan Bakhshi (Nesta UK), Elisa Barbour (University of California, Berkeley), Shiri M. Breznitz (Georgia Institute of Technology), Roland J. Kushner (Muhlenberg College), Rex LaMore (Michigan State University), James Lawton (Michigan State), Neil Lee (Nesta UK), Richard G. Maloney (Boston University), Ann Markusen (University of Minnesota), Juan Mateos-Garcia (Nesta UK), Anne Gadwa Nicodemus (Metris Arts Consulting), Douglas S. Noonan (Indiana University-Purdue University Indianapolis), Peter Pedroni (Williams College), Amber Peruski (Michigan State), Michele Root-Bernstein (Michigan State), Robert Root-Bernstein (Michigan State), Eileen Roraback (Michigan State), Michael Rushton (Indiana University), Lauren Schmitz (New School for Social Research), Jenny Schuetz (University of Southern California), John Schweitzer (Michigan State), Stephen Sheppard (Williams College), Megan VanDyke (Michigan State), Gregory H. Wassall (Northeastern University)
The Creative Industries by
"Moving from age-old warnings about the influence of the cultural industry to a tentative embrace of a global creative society, Terry Flew′s new book provides an excellent overview of this exciting field. Warmly recommended for students and policymakers alike."- Mark Deuze, Indiana University"A comprehensive text on the state of the art of the creative industries... a running commentary on the ebb and flow of both the academic debates (from cultural studies, cultural economics, organisational studies, economic geography and urban sociology) and the policy initiatives that seek to frame the field for outsiders. An ideal primer."- Andy C Pratt, King′s College London The rise of creative industries requires new thinking in communication, media and cultural studies, media and cultural policy, and the arts and information sectors. The Creative Industries sets the agenda for these debates, providing a richer understanding of the dynamics of cultural markets, creative labour, finance and risk, and how culture is distributed, marketed and creatively re-used through new media technologies. This book: Develops a global perspective on the creative industries and creative economy Draws insights from media and cultural studies, innovation economics, cultural policy studies, and economic and cultural geography Explores what it means for policy-makers when culture and creativity move from the margins to the centre of economic dynamics Makes extensive use of case studies in ways that are relevant not only to researchers and policy-makers, but also to the generation of students who will increasingly be establishing a ′portfolio career′ in the creative industries. International in coverage, The Creative Industries traces the historical and contemporary ideas that make the cultural economy more relevant that it has ever been. It is essential reading for students and academics in media, communication and cultural studies.
Culture and commerce : the value of entrepreneurship in creative industries by
Art and business are often described as worlds apart, even diametric opposites. And yet, these realms are close cousins in creative industries where firms bring cultural goods to market, attaching price tags to music, paintings, theater, literature, film, and fashion.Building on theories of value construction and cultural production, Culture and Commerce details the processes by which artistic worth is decoded, translated, and converted to economic value. Mukti Khaire introduces readers to three industry players: creators, producers (who bring to market and distribute cultural goods), and intermediaries (who critique and rave about them). Case studies of firms from Chanel and Penguin to tastemakers like the Pritzker Prize and The Sundance Institute illuminate how these professionals construct a vital value chain. Highlighting the role of "pioneer entrepreneurs"--who carve out space for radical, new product categories--Khaire illustrates how creative professionals influence our sense of value, shifting consumer behavior and our culture in deep, surprising ways.
The Economics of Art and Culture by
This is the first book to cover not only the economics of the fine arts and performing arts, but also public policy toward the arts at federal, state, and local levels in the United States. The second edition offers greater coverage of the international arts sector. The work will interest academic readers as a supplementary text on the sociology of the arts, as well as general readers seeking a systematic analysis of the economics of the arts. Theoretical concepts are developed from scratch so that readers with no background in economics can follow the argument.
The Global Contemporary Art World by
The final installment in the critically-acclaimed trilogy on globalization and art explores the growing dominance of Asian centers of art This book takes readers on a fascinating journey around five Asian centers of contemporary art and its myriad institutions, agents, forms, materials, and languages, while posing vital questions about the political economy of culture and the power of visual art in a multi-polar world. He analyzes the financial powerhouse of Art Basel Hong Kong, new media art in South Korea, the place of the Kochi Biennale within contemporary art in India, transnational art and art education in China, and the geo-politics of art patronage in Palestine, and he develops a highly original synthesis of theoretical perspectives and empirical research. Drawing on detailed case studies and personal insights gained from his extensive experience of the contemporary art scene in Asia, Professor Harris examines the evolving relationship between the western centers of art practice, collection, and validation and the emerging "peripheries" of Asian Tiger societies with burgeoning art centers. And he arrives at the somewhat controversial conclusion that dominance of the art world is rapidly slipping away from Europe and North America. The Global Contemporary Art World is essential reading for undergraduates and postgraduate students in modern and contemporary art, art history, art theory and criticism, cultural studies, the sociology of culture, and globalization studies. It is also a vital resource for research students, academics, and professionals in the art world.
Globalized arts : the entertainment economy and cultural identity by
Focusing on the confrontation between global politics and symbolic creative expression, J. P. Singh shows how, by integrating themselves into international markets, entertainment industries give rise to far-reaching cultural anxieties and politics. Taking examples from Hollywood, Bollywood, French grand opera, Latin American television, West African music, postcolonial literature, and even the Thai sex trade, he cites not only the attempts to address cultural discomfort but also the efforts to deny entertainment acts as cultural. He connects creative expression to clashes between national identities, and he details the effect of cultural policies, such as institutional patronage and economic incentives, on the making and incorporation of art into the global market. Singh ultimately demonstrateshow these issues affect the debates on cultural trade being waged by the World Trade Organization, UNESCO, and the developing world.
Handbook of the economics of art and culture by
This volume emphasizes the economic aspects of art and culture, a relatively new field that poses inherent problems for economics, with its quantitative concepts and tools. Building bridges across disciplines such as management, art history, art philosophy, sociology, and law, editors Victor Ginsburgh and David Throsby assemble chapters that yield new perspectives on the supply and demand for artistic services, the contribution of the arts sector to the economy, and the roles that public policies play. With its focus on culture rather than the arts, Ginsburgh and Throsby bring new clarity and definition to this rapidly growing area.
AMIDEAS forms part of an arts management seminar series which emphasizes current trends, challenges, best practices, and contemporary ecosystem of the creative industries and complex nature of culture and heritage landscape, conservation, and sustainability of communities relevant to arts management.
100 Ideas That Changed Art by
From the earliest cave paintings through to the internet and street art, this inspiring book chronicles the 100 most influential ideas that have shaped the world of art. Arranged in broadly chronological order, it provides a source of inspiration and a fascinating resource for the general reader to dip into. Lavishly illustrated with historical masterpieces and packed with fascinating contemporary examples, this is an inspirational and wholly original guide to understanding the forces that have shaped world art.
The art book by
What makes something a great work of art? Written in plain English, The Art Book cuts through the jargon of art history and theory, and is packed with images of the world's greatest works of art and witty infographics that explore the ideas behind them. From prehistoric fertility figures to contemporary video installations, this is the perfect primer to the world of art.
Art in theory 1815-1900 : an anthology of changing ideas by
Art in Theory 1815-1900 provides the most wide-ranging and comprehensive collection of documents ever assembled on nineteenth-century theories of art.
Creative freedom : 52 art ideas, projects and exercises to overcome your creativity block by
Paint outside the lines! Jumpstart your creativity and inject new life into your art. Struggling to get started? Paralyzed by the fear of failure? Find yourself falling back on the same colors again and again? Just plain stuck? It happens to every artist sooner or later. What can you do to get unstuck quickly and painlessly? Creative Freedom presents 52 strategies for getting out of ruts and venturing beyond your comfort zone, courtesy of 25 artists who have been there, done that. Each approach is illustrated with a step-by-step painting demonstration. Together, they help you experiment with different mediums, new color combinations, fresh approaches to favorite subjects, and more. Try one a week for a year of creative adventure. Or dip in whenever you're feeling inspired. You may be surprised at the creative liberation that comes from... Painting with your other hand. Going big with your canvas and brushes. Painting fast with 10-minute studies. Limiting your palette. Starting with a random line drawing or custom painting surface. Zooming in on one small detail of a landscape for abstract results. Copying the work of an Old Master. Featuring an exciting variety of styles and mediums (oil, watercolor, acrylic and pastel), novel perspectives and an invigorating sense of play, this book is sure to generate creative sparks and joyful painting sessions. Getting unstuck has never been so fun!
Defining creativity : the art and science of great ideas by
Defining Creativity comprehensively explains what creativity is, from a biological, psychological, and socio-cultural standpoint. At the same time, it makes for a concise and inspiring read that brings together everything there is to know about creativity.
Draplin Design Co by
Esquire. Ford Motors. Burton Snowboards. The Obama Administration. While all of these brands are vastly different, they share at least one thing in common: a teeny, little bit of Aaron James Draplin. Draplin is one of the new school of influential graphic designers who combine the power of design, social media, entrepreneurship, and DIY aesthetic to create a successful business and way of life. Pretty Much Everything is a mid-career survey of work, case studies, inspiration, road stories, lists, maps, how-tos, and advice. It includes examples of his work--posters, record covers, logos--and presents the process behind his design with projects like Field Notes and the "Things We Love" State Posters. Draplin also offers valuable advice and hilarious commentary that illustrates how much more goes into design than just what appears on the page. With Draplin's humour and pointed observations on the contemporary design scene, Draplin Design Co. is the complete package for the new generation of designers.
Gardner's Art Through the Ages by
GARDNER'S ART THROUGH THE AGES: A GLOBAL HISTORY, VOLUME I provides you with a comprehensive, beautifully illustrated tour of the world's great artistic traditions! Easy to read and understand, the 15th edition of the most widely read art history book in the English language continues to evolve, providing a rich cultural backdrop for each of the covered periods and geographical locations, and incorporating new artists and art forms -- all reproduced according to the highest standards of clarity and color fidelity. A complete online learning environment, including all images and an eBook, also is available. The unique Scale feature will help you better visualize the actual size of the artworks shown in the book. "The Big Picture" overviews at the end of every chapter summarize the chapter's important concepts.
Gardner's Art Through the Ages : a Concise Global History by
GARDNER'S ART THROUGH THE AGES: A CONCISE GLOBAL HISTORY, 4th Edition provides you with a comprehensive, beautifully illustrated tour of the world's great artistic traditions, and, with MindTap, all of the online study tools you need to excel in your art history course! Easy to read and understand, the fourth edition includes new artists and provides a rich cultural backdrop for each of the covered periods and geographical locations.
The History of Graphic Design. Vol. 1. 1890-1959 by
History is a complex business. Fortunes boom and bust, empires wax and wane, and change--whether social, political, or technological--has its winners, its losers, its advocates, and its enemies. Through all the turbulent passage of time, graphic design--with its vivid, neat synthesis of image and idea--has distilled the spirit of each age. This book is an in-depth history of graphic design from the end of the 19th century to the '50s. It traces the evolution of this creative field from its beginning as poster design to its further development into advertising, corporate identity, packaging, and editorial design. Organized chronologically, the volume features over 2,500 seminal designs from all over the world, 71 of which are profiled in detail besides 61 leaders in the field, including Alphonse Mucha (chocolate advertisements), Edward Johnston (London Underground logo and typeface), El Lissitzky (constructivist graphics), Herbert Matter (photomontage travel posters from Switzerland), Saul Bass (animated opening titles), and A. M. Cassandre (art deco posters). With his sweeping knowledge of the field, author Jens Müller curates the standout designs for each year alongside a running sequence of design milestones. Meanwhile, in his introductory essay, David Jury situates graphic design from its point of origin in early printing, engraving, and lithography to striking creative developments in the 19th century. Each consecutive decade is then prefaced by a succinct overview as well as a stunning visual timeline, offering a vivid display of the variety of graphic production in each decade as well as the global landscape which it at once described and defined. As we move on from and reflect upon the 20th century, this first volume examines the foundations of what would influence some of the fastest-changing creative fields. Combined with Volume Two--which spans from the 1960s until today--the tomes offer the most comprehensive exploration of graphic design to date and a long-overdue recognition of its enormous contribution to economics, politics, social causes, the arts, media, and the way we see the world.
History of Illustration by
Winner of the 2019 CHOICE Award "The authoritative book on the origins, history, and influence of illustration. Bravo!" David Brinley, University of Delaware, USA History of Illustration covers image-making and print history from around the world, spanning from the ancient to the modern. Hundreds of color images show illustrations within their social, cultural, and technical context, while they are ordered from the past to the present. Readers will be able to analyze images for their displayed techniques, cultural standards, and ideas to appreciate the art form. This essential guide is the first history of illustration written by an international team of illustration historians, practitioners, and educators.
Humanities through the arts by 
Mastering the Pitch by
Told from the perspective of a Hollywood executive with nearly 20 years' experience professionally pitching and distributing film/TV projects, Mastering the Pitch reveals all the nuanced details of the pitching process. Readers will gain valuable insights into how the Hollywood system operates, improve their professional pitching skills and gain a competitive edge in getting their ideas from concept to greenlight. This book covers: how projects are packaged and developed before a pitch how a pitch presentation happens in a real-world setting the core concepts required to pitch each genre type how professional companies actually acquire a pitched project the legal workflows and financial details required to put a deal together examples of pitch documents, presentation materials and how these elements should be designed how to build your personal brand so that you're seen by Hollywood decision makers as someone capable of delivering great projects; and how you should speak to professionals about the business viability of your projects Mastering the Pitch is a valuable crossover text, designed to help both students and veteran film/TV producers alike hone their pitching and presentation skills.
Monographic Exhibitions and the History of Art by
This edited collection traces the impact of monographic exhibitions on the discipline of art history from the first examples in the late eighteenth century through the present. Roughly falling into three genres (retrospectives of living artists, retrospectives of recently deceased artists, and monographic exhibitions of Old Masters), specialists examine examples of each genre within their social, cultural, political, and economic contexts. Exhbitions covered include Nathaniel Hone's 1775 exhibition, the Holbein Exhibition of 1871, the Courbet retrospective of 1882, Titian's exhibition in Venice, Poussin's Louvre retrospective of 1960, and El Greco's anniversaty exhibitions of 2014.
New Dictionary of the History of Ideas by
Experts examine major developments in intellectual history during the past 30 years. A board of specialists from various disciplines was assembled to reflect all aspects of knowledge from a global and gender-inclusive perspective, which allows readers to trace ideas and concepts across culture and time periods.
A new way of seeing : the history of art in 57 works by
An exciting new criticalvoice explores what it isthat makes great art greatthrough an illuminatinganalysis of the world'sartistic masterpieces. From a carved mammoth tusk (ca. 40,000 BCE) to Bosch's Garden of Earthly Delights (1505-1510) to Duchamp's Fountain (1917), a remarkable lexicon of astonishing imagery has imprinted itself onto the cultural consciousness of the past 40,000 years. Author Kelly Grovier devotes himself to illuminating these and more than fifty other seminal works in this radical new history of art. Stepping away from biography, style, and the chronology of "isms" that preoccupies most of art history, A New Way of Seeing invites a new interaction with art, one in which we learn from the artworks and not just about them. Grovier identifies that part of the artwork that bridges the divide between art and life and elevates its value beyond the visual to the vital. This book challenges the sensibility that conceives of artists as brands and the works they create as nothing more than material commodities to hoard, hide, and flip for profit. Lavishly illustrated with many of the most breathtaking and enduring artworks ever created, Kelly Grovier casts fresh light on these famous works by daring to isolate a single, and often overlooked, detail responsible for its greatness and power to move.
Philippine modernities : music, performing arts, and language, 1880 to 1941 by Pop Art and Design by
This book offers the first in-depth analysis of the relationship between art and design, which led to the creation of 'pop'. Challenging accepted boundaries and definitions, the authors seek out various commonalities and points of connection between these two exciting areas. Confronting the all-pervasive 'high art / low culture' divide, Pop Art and Design brings a fresh understanding of visual culture during the vibrant 1950s and 60s. This was an era when commercial art became graphic design, illustration was superseded by photography and high fashion became street fashion, all against the backdrop of a rapidly-evolving economic and political landscape, a glamorous youth scene and an effervescent popular culture. The book's central argument is that pop art relied on and drew inspiration from pop design, and vice versa. Massey and Seago assert that this relationship was articulated through the artwork, design, publications and exhibitions of a network of key practitioners. Pop Art and Design provides a case study in the broader inter-relationship between art and design, and constitutes the first interdisciplinary publication on the subject.
Saysay himig : a sourcebook on Philippine music history, 1880-1941 by 
Sharpie® art workshop : techniques & ideas for transforming your world by
The most comprehensive, step-by-step, hands on creative workbook for creating art with Sharpie markers- bold and sharp, brilliant and vivid!
Swedish design : a history by
Swedish Design- A History provides a fascinating and comprehensive introduction to the development of design in Sweden from the mid-nineteenth century to the early twenty-first. Leading design historian Lasse Brunnstrum traces the move from artisanal crafts production to the mass production and consumption of designed objects, a process by which the role and profile of the designer became increasingly important. His survey, richly illustrated with images of the designed objects discussed, takes in forms of design traditionally associated with Sweden, such as household objects and textiles, while also considering some less-written about genres such as industrial and graphic design. Brunnstrum questions many established ideas about design in Sweden, notably its aesthetics and its relationship to Sweden's national and political culture. He argues that the history of design in Sweden has been far more complex and less straightforwardly 'blond' than hitherto understood.
Understanding Interactive Digital Narrative by
A clearly written and timely critical revaluation of core issues in the interactive digital narrative (IDN) field that untangles the range of theories and arguments that have developed over the past two decades, providing both teachers and students with a more precise and specific understanding of IDN. Wide interdisciplinary appeal - especially useful for classes in media and communication studies focussing on new media, and their sister field Game Design, which has a large and growing number of undergraduate programs. The international reputation of the author will ensure a broad geographic appeal, especially in Europe and North America but also in Asia, Australia, Latin America.
AMIDEAS forms part of an arts management seminar series which emphasizes current trends, challenges, best practices, and contemporary ecosystem of the creative industries and complex nature of culture and heritage landscape, conservation, and sustainability of communities relevant to arts management.
Antiques : the history of an idea by
The notion of retrieving a bit of the past-by owning a material piece of it-has always appealed to humans. Often our most prized possessions are those that have had a long history before they came into our hands. Part of the pleasure we gain from the encounter with antiques stems from the palpable age and the assumed (sometimes imaginary) cultural resonances of the particular object. But precisely what is it about these objects that creates this attraction? What common characteristics do they share and why and how do these traits affect us as they do? In Antiques: The History of an Idea, Leon Rosenstein, a distinguished philosopher who has also been an antiques dealer for more than twenty years, offers a sweeping and lively account of the origin and development of the antique as both a cultural concept and an aesthetic category. He shows that the appeal of antiques is multifaceted: it concerns their value as commodities, their age and historical and cultural associations, their uniqueness, their sensuous and tactile values, their beauty. Exploring how the idea of antiques evolved over time, Rosenstein chronicles the history of antique collecting and connoisseurship. He describes changing conceptions of the past in different epochs as evidenced by preservations, restorations, and renascences; examines shifting attitudes toward foreign cultures as revealed in stylistic borrowings and the importation of artifacts; and investigates varying understandings of and meanings assigned to their traits and functions as historical objects. While relying on the past for his evidence, Rosenstein approaches antiques from an entirely original perspective, setting history within a philosophical framework. He begins by providing a working definition of antiques that distinguishes them from other artifacts in general and, more distinctly, both from works of fine art and from the collectible detritus of popular culture. He then establishes a novel set of criteria for determining when an artifact is an antique: ten traits that an object must possess in order to elicit the aesthetic response that is unique to antiques. Concluding with a provocative discussion of the relation between antiques and civilization, this engaging and thought-provoking book helps explain the enduring appeal of owning a piece of the past.
Art and homosexuality : a history of ideas by
This bold, globe-spanning survey is the first book to thoroughly explore the radical, long-standing interdependence between art and homosexuality. It draws examples from the full range of the Western tradition, including classical, Renaissance, and contemporary art, with special focus on the modern era. It was in the modern period, when arguments about homosexuality and the avant-garde were especially public, that our current conception of the artist and the homosexual began to take shape, and almost as quickly to overlap. Not a chronology of gay or lesbian artists, the book is a fascinating and sophisticated account of the ways two conspicuous identities have fundamentally informed one another. Art and Homosexuality discusses many of modernism's canonical figures--painters like Courbet, Picasso, and Pollock; writers like Whitman and Stein--and issues, such as the rise of abstraction, the avant-garde's relationship to its patrons and the political exploitation of art. It shows that many of the core ideas that define modernism are nearly indecipherable without an understanding of the paired identities of artist and homosexual. Illustrated with over 175 b/w and color images that range from high to popular culture and from Ancient Greece to contemporary America, Art and Homosexuality punctures the platitudes surrounding discussions of both aesthetics and sexual identity and takes our understanding of each in stimulating new directions.
The art of ideas : creative thinking for work and life by
"Great ideas don't just happen. Innovation springs from creative thinking-a method of the human mind that we can study and learn. In The Art of Ideas, William Duggan and Amy Murphy bring together business concepts with stories of creativity in art, politics, and history to provide a visual and accessible guide to the art and science of new and useful ideas"-- Provided by publisher.
A Companion to Art Theory by
The Companion provides an accessible critical survey of Western visual art theory from sources in Classical, Medieval and Renaissance thought through to contemporary writings.
Modern/Postmodern by
Silvio Gaggi's survey of the vast terrain of twentieth century arts and ideas is unique not only for its scope but also for the clarity and cohesiveness it brings to wide-ranging, seemingly disparate works. By identifying underlying epistemological, aesthetic, and ethical issues. Gaggi draws connections among such modern and postmodern masterpieces as Pirandello's and Brecht's theater, Fowles's and Barth's fiction, Warhol's paintings, Godard's and Bergman's films, and Derrida's literary theory. Modern/Postmodern begins with a discussion of the profound skepticism--about traditional beliefs and about our ability to know the self--that lies at the heart of both modernism and postmodernism. Gaggi identifies the modernist response to this doubt as the rejection of mimesis in favor of a purely formalistic or expressionistic art. The postmodern response, on the other hand, is above all to create art that is self-referential (concerned with art itself, the history of art, or its processes). Drawing from the work of Piranadello and Brecht, paradigms that can be applies to many different art works, Gaggi emphasizes how these works from diverse media relate to one another and what their relationships are to the contemporary artistic and philosophical climate. He concentrates on the works themselves, but examines theory as a parallel manifestation of the same obsessions that inform recent literature and art. Gaggi asks, finally, if self-referential art can also be politically and ethically engaged with the reality outside it. He concludes that the postmodern obsession with language, narrativity, and artifice is not necessarily a decadent indulgence but is, at its best, an honest inquiry into the problems, questions, and paradoxes of language. Modern/Postmodern is a lively approach to postmodern art that will interest all students and scholars of contemporary art and literature.
Modern Art and the Idea of the Mediterranean by
Drawing on recent geographical, historical, cultural and anthropological studies, contributors address the visual representation of identity in both the European and the ?Oriental,? the colonial and post-colonial Mediterranean.
Music, the Arts, and Ideas by
Meyer makes a valuable statement on aesthetics, criteria for assessing great works of music, compositional practices and theories of the present day, and predictions of the future of Western culture. His postlude, written for the book's twenty-fifth anniversary, looks back at his thoughts on the direction of music in 1967.
New Dictionary of the History of Ideas by
Experts examine major developments in intellectual history during the past 30 years. A board of specialists from various disciplines was assembled to reflect all aspects of knowledge from a global and gender-inclusive perspective, which allows readers to trace ideas and concepts across culture and time periods.
Arts Management and the Creative Industries
AMINTRO introduces students to the management of arts, culture, and creative industries.
Artist Management for the Music Business by
With the evolution of the music business and the shifting influence of large record labels, the artist manager is now ¿ more than ever ¿ at the center of an artist¿s career. Artist managers are tasked with keeping abreast of the music industry and supporting the artists under their management while simultaneously managing their own careers. Including key industry insights, exclusive planning guidance, management tools, and strategies for a successful career, Artist Management for the Music Business has the tools to support any new or experienced artist manager. Through its analysis of over a dozen case studies, lessons, and contract examples, author Paul Allen provides a focused look at managing artists¿ careers. This follow-up to the best-selling second edition features a new chapter on entrepreneurship including detailed information on how to run an artist management enterprise as a business and includes coverage of anticipating risks, reacting to challenges, and basic money management. The chapter also contains additional sections on the effective use of social media, the Web, and handling online promotion. For additional resources, visit the book¿s website at www.artistmanagementonline.com.
Arts and Cultural Leadership in Asia by
Arts and cultural activity in Asia is increasingly seen as important internationally, and Asia's growing prosperity is enabling the full range of artistic activities to be better encouraged, supported and managed. At the same time, cultural frameworks and contexts vary hugely across Asia, and it is not appropriate to apply Westerns theories and models of leadership and management. This book presents a range of case studies of arts and cultural leadership across a large number of Asian countries. Besides examining different cultural frameworks and contexts, the book considers different cultural approaches to leadership, discusses external challenges and entrepreneurialism, and explores how politics can have a profound impact. Throughout the book covers different art forms, and different sorts of arts and cultural organisations.
Arts and Entrepreneurship by
Interest in entrepreneurship in the arts has grown in recent years. This book brought together experts and thought leaders from around the world to uncover business success strategies for individuals engaged in the arts worldwide.
Arts Entrepreneurship by
Arts Entrepreneurship: Creating a New Venture in the Artsprovides the essential tools, techniques, and concepts needed to invent, launch, and sustain a business in the creative sector. Building on the reader's artistic talents and interests, the book provides a practical, action-oriented introduction to the business of art, focusing on product design, organizational planning and assessment, customer identification and marketing, fundraising, legal issues, money management, cultural policy, and career development. It also offers examples, exercises, and references that guide entrepreneurs through the key stages of concept creation, business development, and growth. Special attention is paid to topics such as cultural ventures seeking social impact, the emergence of creative placemaking, the opportunities afforded by novel corporate forms, and the role of contemporary technologies in marketing, fundraising, and operations. A hands-on guide to entrepreneurial success, this book is a valuable resource for students of Arts Entrepreneurship programs, courses, and workshops, as well as for early-stage business founders in the creative sector looking for guidance on how to create and sustain their own successful venture.
Arts Governance by
Since the crisis in governance which led to a shortage of capable board members, recent years have seen the emergence of the enterprising arts organisation - a development which has led to the need for new types of board members who have a greater understanding of 'mission, money and merit' within a cultural construct. This innovative book explores the world of the arts board member from the unique perspective of the cultural and creative industries. Using a wide range of research techniques including interviews with board members and stakeholders, board observations and case studies this book provides a rich and deep analysis from inside the boardroom. It provides in-depth insight into the changing pressures on arts boards after the financial crisis, and focuses uniquely on the role of passion on arts boards. Part of the Routledge Research in Creative and Cultural Industries Management series, written specifically for people seeking to develop their careers in cultural and creative management, this book is also for people working in and with arts organisations, in government and non-profit arts organisations. It will also be of interest to academics and researchers working in the wider corporate governance field.
Arts leadership : creating sustainable arts organizations by
The contemporary world faces unprecedented upheaval and change forcing institutions of all types to rethink how they are designed and how they must now function if they are to survive into an uncertain future. The performing arts are no exception; in an era of constant change and technological transformation, arts organizations and their leaders face significant organizational challenges if they are to maintain their relevance. Arts Leadership: Creating Sustainable Arts Organizations provides a contemporary overview of the field of arts leadership, focused on the performing arts. It examines what these challenges are, how they are affecting the performing arts and arts organizations in general and proposes creative ways to reimagine, build and lead sustainable arts organizations in this uncharted environment. With a global perspective drawn from his extensive experience advising arts organizations around the world and based on his own work successfully leading important performing arts organizations in the United States, Foster proposes an innovative approach to organizational design, systems, and structures for arts leaders in the 21st century that is based in ecological thinking and the creative process that is intrinsic to the arts. In disrupting conventional arts leadership practice, the book provides an exceptional tool to understand a unique sector, and is essential reading for students and practitioners across the creative and cultural industries.
Arts Leadership in Contemporary Contexts by
This book explores and critiques different aspects of arts leadership within contemporary contexts. While this is an exploration of ways arts leadership is understood, interpreted and practiced, it is also an acknowledgement of a changing cultural and economic paradigm. Understanding the broader environment for the arts is therefore part of the leadership imperative. This book examines aspects such as individual versus collective leadership, gender, creativity and the influences of stakeholders and culture. While the book provides a theoretical and critical understanding of arts leadership, it also gives examples of arts leadership in practice.
Arts Management by
Interest in aesthetics and organization/management studies is of growing attractiveness at the start of the 21st century. This text offers a critical overview of arts management as a vital sub-discipline. There is a concerted effort to address the artistic, managerial, and social obligations of arts and cultural organizations operating in contemporary urban environs.
Arts Management by
Arts Management is designed as an upper division undergraduate and graduate level text that covers the principles of arts management. It is the most comprehensive, up to date, and technologically advanced textbook on arts management on the market. While the book does include the background necessary for understanding the global arts marketplace, it assumes that cultural fine arts come to fruition through entrepreneurial processes, and that cultural fine arts organizations have to be entrepreneurial to thrive. Many cases and examples of successful arts organizations from the Unites States and abroad appear in every chapter. A singular strength of Arts Management is the author's skilful use of in-text tools to facilitate reader interest and engagement. These include learning objectives, chapter summaries, discussion questions and exercises, case studies, and numerous examples and cultural spotlights. Online instructor's materials with PowerPoints are available to adopters.
Creative Arts Marketing by
Creative Arts Marketing third edition is a long-awaited update of a classic and influential text. A ground-breaking book when first published, it covers the core concepts of marketing and management as they apply to the arts and heritage industries with a depth that is still unrivalled. With an emphasis on global case studies, practical examples and discussion questions and an author team that draws from rich and varied experiences in the arts management sector, the book serves as a text for students as much as it is a practitioner's guide to industry best practice. Extensively revised to reflect the dramatic changes to this industry, this edition integrates organizational and management subject matter, reflecting the marketing function's deeper involvement in broad organizational issues. This fully updated and revised third edition features: Audience diversity and audience development The impact of digital technologies on the industry An exploration of the increasingly complex relationship between public and private funding for the arts Ethics and sustainability issues for arts marketers Cultural policy changes in the industry Including a brand new companion website, complete with materials for tutors and students for the first time, the return of this important text will be welcomed by students, tutors and professionals in the arts.
Creative Arts Marketing by
As a comprehensive overview of all aspects of marketing in the sector, Creative Arts Marketingremains unrivalled, and in addition this edition gives new coverage of- * Current knowledge and best practice about marketing and advertising through new media * The impact of Relationship Marketing techniques * A wholly revised and enhanced set of cases * Entirely revised and updated data on the arts 'industry' Creative Arts Marketingreflects the diversity of the arts world in its wide ranging analysis of how different marketing techniques have worked for a diverse range of arts organizations. As such it is an invaluable text for both students and arts managers
Creative research : the theory and practice of research for the creative industries by
Academic research in design can seem daunting - let Hilary Collins show you the building blocks of a great final project. The perfect companion for a research project in fashion, design or visual communication, this 2nd edition of Creative Research walks you through: · Choosing a topic · Deciding your approach · Using previous research and writing a literature review · Obtaining your own data and using it appropriately Useful case studies show best practice, revealing the links between a researcher's choice of method and the conclusions they draw. Packed with advice on how to manage your time and structure your project effectively, this edition also includes new sections on design thinking and ethnography. Collins marries theory and practice from start to finish, showing you everything you need to confidently embark on your creative research project.
Culture As a Vocation by
Vocational occupations are attractive not so much for their material rewards as for the prestige and self-fulfillment they confer. They require a strong personal commitment, which can be subjectively experienced in terms of passion and selflessness. The choice of a career in the cultural sector provides a good example of this. What are the terms of this calling? What predisposes individuals to answer it? What are the meanings of such a choice? To answer these questions, this book focuses on would-be cultural managers. By identifying their social patterns, by revealing the resources, expectations and visions of the world they invest in their choice, it sheds new light on these occupations. In these intermediary and indeterminate social positions, family heritages intersect with educational strategies, aspirations of upward mobility with tactics against downward mobility, and social critique with adjustment strategies. Ultimately the study of career choices in cultural management suggests a new take on the analysis of social reproduction and on the embodiment of the new spirit of capitalism. The empirical findings of this research conducted in France are set in a broader comparative perspective, at the European level and with the USA.
How to run a theatre : a witty, practical and fun guide to arts management by
"All of us in the arts field are hungry to improve our skills in arts management. The grim tenor of the times makes this witty and fun guide even more valuable to us all!" Ben Cameron, Former Executive Director, Theater Communications Group "Dr. Jim Volz knows how to organize, how to manage, how to motivate, how to assign priorities. In short, he knows how to get the job done." Abe J. Bassett, Former Dean, Indiana University/Purdue University Jim Volz is one of America's leading theatre consultants with over three decades of work with theatre, dance, music, museum and arts center management. Now, Jim Volz brings his expertise to anyone who works in arts management, from novices to middle managers to executive directors. How to Run a Theater is a unique, dynamic, and savvy guide to building an arts institution that works. Drawing on more than 30 years of experience, here is practical advice on a variety of management skills: Financial Management; Personnel Management; Fundraising Development; Board of Trustees Communications; and Marketing & Audience Development. This new edition is thoroughly updated and revised and now includes a Board of Trustee Contract, new budget exercise with ticket income formulae and the use of social networking for marketing and fundraising.
Introducing the Creative Industries by
"This text does a sterling job at identifying, outlining and defining the many elements that go to make up this booming sector of industry. What makes it particularly interesting is that it includes the view of the creative industries from the perspective of working in it, then the definitions of what products and producers are involved, and ends with the broader picture of the creative economy and predictions for future trends. Add to this that they include both theory and practice, and this really is an all-round guide to the vast domain that is loosely titled ′the creative industries′"- Angela Birchall, School of Media, Music & Performance, Salford UniversityThis is your complete guide to studying and succeeding in the creative industries. This book takes you through the history, trends, products and markets of the creative industries, showing how success depends on a mix of ideas, tactics and talent.When understanding social networks and cultural economy is just as important as hands-on skills or an entrepreneurial spirit, Introducing the Creative Industries shows you how to use theories, concepts and practical skills to get ahead in their course and professional life. Creatively imagined and beautifully written, this book: Interweaves theoretical concepts and professional practice on every page Uses cultural economy to teach the essential concepts and thinkers Integrates case studies from fashion and gaming to journalism and music Teaches strategies for navigating the links between skills, industries, creativity and markets. This book shows you how to spot opportunities and use your knowledge and savvy to take kickstart your career in this fast-moving industry. It is an essential guidebook for students of creativity in media and communication, design, creative industries and business.
Introduction to the Art of Stage Management by
How do you develop the craft and skills of stage management for today's theatre industry? And how can these same skills be applied in a variety of entertainment settings to help you develop a rewarding and successful career? Drawing on his diverse experience working with companies from across the performing arts spectrum in venues from the Hollywood Bowl to the Barbican Centre in London, Michael Vitale offers a practical resource on the art of stage management for new and established stage managers. Besides providing detailed coverage of the role within theatre, the book uniquely explores the field of stage management in numerous branches of the entertainment industry. From theatre, opera, and theme parks, to cruise ships, special events, and dance, stage managers are an integral part of keeping productions running, and this book offers guidance on each distinct area to equip you for a varied and successful career. Written with candour and filled with real-world examples, the book examines the nuts and bolts of the job at each stage of the production process- from preproduction, room rehearsal, technical rehearsal, through to running the show. Vitale considers the skills needed to work with a myriad of different people, explores the traits of a successful stage manager, and helps you to hone and evaluate your own practice. Whether you are exploring the field for the first time or are a veteran looking to diversify your resume, Introduction to the Art of Stage Management will provide insight, practical information, and useful tips to help along the way. An accompanying Companion Website features a range of time-saving templates and forms, such as schedule templates and scene samples. https-//www.bloomsbury.com/uk/introduction-to-the-art-of-stage-management-9781474257190/
Management and the Arts by
The fifth edition of Management and the Arts discusses the theory and practical applications from all arts management perspectives including planning, marketing, finance, economics, organization, staffing, and group dynamics. Revised to reflect the latest thinking and trends in managing organizations and people, this fifth edition features class-tested questions in each chapter, which help students to integrate the material and develop ideas about how the situations and problems could have been handled. Statistics and real-world examples illustrate all aspects of arts managements, from budgeting and fundraising, to e-marketing and social networking, to working effectively with boards and staff members. Case studies focus on the challenges facing managers and organizations every day, and "In the News" quotes provide real-world examples of principles and theories. Students in Arts Management university courses along with arts managers in a theatre, museum, dance company, and opera will gain useful insights into strategic planning, organization, and integrated management theories with this book.
Management of Art Galleries by
The latest edition of the bestselling guide to running a successful gallery, told from the expert perspective of art-world insiders What makes an art gallery successful? How do galleries ensure their marketing is right? How should galleries best approach new markets and customers, while still serving their loyal clientele? Based on the results of an anonymous survey sent to more than 8,000 galleries in the US, UK, and Germany, Magnus Resch's insightful examination of the business of selling art, newly updated and revised, is a compelling read, with an approach that is both aspirational and practical.
Performing Arts Management by
Do you know what it takes to manage a performing arts organization today? In this comprehensive volume, more than 100 managers of top nonprofit and commercial venues share their winning strategies. From theater to classical music, from opera to dance, every type of organization is included, with information on how each one is structured, key managerial figures, its best-practices for financial management, how it handles labor relations, and more. Kennedy Center, the Brooklyn Academy of Music, Lincoln Center, the Mark Morris Dance Company, the New Victory Theater, the Roundabout Theater, the Guthrie Theater, Steppenwolf Theater Company, and many other top groups are represented. Learn to manage a performing arts group successfully in today's rapidly changing cultural environment with Performing Arts Management.
The Production Manager's Toolkit by
"Our theater world is so much better with this book in it, and even better with Cary and Jay at the helm." -David Stewart, Director of Production for the Guthrie Theater The Production Manager's Toolkit is a comprehensive introduction to a career in theatrical and special event production for new and aspiring professionals, given by expert voices in the field. The book discusses management techniques, communication skills, and relationship building tactics to create effective and successful production managers. With a focus on management theory, advice from top production managers provide insights into budgeting, scheduling, meetings, hiring, maintaining safety, and more. Through interviews and case studies, the history and techniques of production management are explored throughout a variety of entertainment venues: theatre, dance, opera, and special events. The book includes references, tools, templates, and checklists; and a companion website contains downloadable paperwork and links to other useful resources such as unions, venues, and vendors. This book is written for student and professional production managers.
The Routledge Companion to Arts Marketing by
The relationship between the arts and marketing has been growing ever more complex, as the proliferation of new technologies and social media has opened up new forms of communication. This book covers the broad and involved relationship between the arts and marketing. It frames "arts marketing" in the context of wider, related issues, such as the creative and cultural industries, cultural policy and arts funding, developments in the different art forms and the impact of environmental forces on arts business models and markets. The Routledge Companion to Arts Marketing provides a comprehensive, up-to-date reference guide that incorporates current analyses of arts marketing topics by leaders of academic research in the field. As such, it will be a key resource for the next generation of arts marketing scholars and teachers and will constitute the single most authoritative guide on the subject internationally.
Routledge Handbook of Creative and Cultural Industries in Asia by
Recent years have witnessed the remarkable development of the cultural and creative industries (CCIs) in Asia, from the global popularity of the Japanese games and anime industries, to Korea¿s film and pop music successes. While CCIs in these Asian cultural powerhouses aspire to become key players in the global cultural economy, Southeast Asian countries such as Malaysia and Thailand are eager to make a strong mark in the region¿s cultural landscape. As the first handbook on CCIs in Asia, this book provides readers with a contextualized understanding of the conditions and operation of Asian CCIs. Both internationalising and de-Westernising our knowledge of CCIs, it offers a comprehensive contribution to the field from academics, practitioners and activists alike. Covering 12 different societies in Asia from Japan and China to Thailand, Indonesia and India, the themes include: State policy in shaping CCIs Cultural production inside and outside of institutional frameworks Circulation of CCIs products and consumer culture Cultural activism and independent culture Cultural heritage as an industry. Presenting a detailed set of case studies, this book will be an essential companion for researchers and students in the field of cultural policy, cultural and creative industries, media and cultural studies, and Asian studies in general.
Theatre management : arts leadership for the 21st century by
An essential introductory textbook that provides a comprehensive and student-friendly overview of the key processes involved in developing and managing a theatre in the 21st century. It covers a complete range of topics fundamental to successful commercial and not-for-profit theatre management, from developing a mission statement to communicating with stakeholders, from marketing and promotion to fund development platforms, and from governance structures to community engagement. With over two decades of experience in the industry, Anthony Rhine encourages a critical understanding of theatre management; rather than simply giving students the facts and theories to memorise, he shows readers how to think like theatre managers, giving them the skills needed to be able to carve out their own career paths. Far-reaching and globally applicable, the text serves as an invaluable guide for aspiring theatre managers, as well as undergraduate and postgraduate students on Theatre Management, Arts Management, Creative Industries and Theatre and Performance Studies degree courses.
Arts Management and the Creative Industries
AMINTRO introduces students to the management of arts, culture, and creative industries.
Artist Management for the Music Business by
Anyone managing an artist's career needs to be well versed and have a savvy understanding of the moving parts of the music business. Learn how and why those moving parts "move," as well as how to manage and navigate a music-based career. Artist Management for the Music Business gives a comprehensive view of how to generate income through music and how to strategically plan for future growth. The book is full of valuable practical insights. It includes interviews and case studies with examples of real-world management issues and outcomes. Updates to this new edition include the importance of online streaming to music careers, how anyone can effectively network, tools for successful negotiation, ways to identify and manage income sources, and guidance on the ever-changing social media landscape of the music business. This book gives access to resources about artist management and the music business at its companion website, http://www.artistmanagementonline.com. There is no login, and the resources are updated regularly.
Artist Management for the Music Business by
With the evolution of the music business and the shifting influence of large record labels, the artist manager is now ¿ more than ever ¿ at the center of an artist¿s career. Artist managers are tasked with keeping abreast of the music industry and supporting the artists under their management while simultaneously managing their own careers. Including key industry insights, exclusive planning guidance, management tools, and strategies for a successful career, Artist Management for the Music Business has the tools to support any new or experienced artist manager. Through its analysis of over a dozen case studies, lessons, and contract examples, author Paul Allen provides a focused look at managing artists¿ careers. This follow-up to the best-selling second edition features a new chapter on entrepreneurship including detailed information on how to run an artist management enterprise as a business and includes coverage of anticipating risks, reacting to challenges, and basic money management. The chapter also contains additional sections on the effective use of social media, the Web, and handling online promotion. For additional resources, visit the book¿s website at www.artistmanagementonline.com.
Arts Management by
The second edition of Arts Management has been thoroughly revised to provide an updated, comprehensive overview of this fast-changing subject. Arts managers and students alike are offered a lively, sophisticated insight into the artistic, managerial and social responsibilities necessary for those working in the field. With new cases studies and several new chapters, Derrick Chong takes an interdisciplinary approach in examining some of the main impulses informing discussions on the management of arts and cultural organizations. These are highly charged debates, since arts managers are expected to reconcile managerial, economic and aesthetic objectives. Topics include: arts and the State, with reference to the instrumentalism of the arts and culture business and the arts ownership and control of arts organizations arts consumption and consumers, including audience development and arts marketing managing for excellence and artistic integrity financial investing in the arts, namely fine arts funds and theatre angels philosophies of philanthropy Incorporating a deliberately diverse range of sources, Arts Management is essential reading for students on arts management courses and provides valuable insights for managers already facing the management challenges of this field.
The Creative Industries by
"Moving from age-old warnings about the influence of the cultural industry to a tentative embrace of a global creative society, Terry Flew's new book provides an excellent overview of this exciting field. Warmly recommended for students and policymakers alike." - Mark Deuze, Indiana University "A comprehensive text on the state of the art of the creative industries... a running commentary on the ebb and flow of both the academic debates (from cultural studies, cultural economics, organisational studies, economic geography and urban sociology) and the policy initiatives that seek to frame the field for outsiders. An ideal primer." - Andy C Pratt, King's College London The rise of creative industries requires new thinking in communication, media and cultural studies, media and cultural policy, and the arts and information sectors. The Creative Industries sets the agenda for these debates, providing a richer understanding of the dynamics of cultural markets, creative labour, finance and risk, and how culture is distributed, marketed and creatively re-used through new media technologies. This book: Develops a global perspective on the creative industries and creative economy Draws insights from media and cultural studies, innovation economics, cultural policy studies, and economic and cultural geography Explores what it means for policy-makers when culture and creativity move from the margins to the centre of economic dynamics Makes extensive use of case studies in ways that are relevant not only to researchers and policy-makers, but also to the generation of students who will increasingly be establishing a 'portfolio career' in the creative industries. International in coverage, The Creative Industries traces the historical and contemporary ideas that make the cultural economy more relevant that it has ever been. It is essential reading for students and academics in media, communication and cultural studies.
Culture and commerce : the value of entrepreneurship in creative industries by
Art and business are often described as worlds apart, even diametric opposites. And yet, these realms are close cousins in creative industries where firms bring cultural goods to market, attaching price tags to music, paintings, theater, literature, film, and fashion.Building on theories of value construction and cultural production, Culture and Commerce details the processes by which artistic worth is decoded, translated, and converted to economic value. Mukti Khaire introduces readers to three industry players: creators, producers (who bring to market and distribute cultural goods), and intermediaries (who critique and rave about them). Case studies of firms from Chanel and Penguin to tastemakers like the Pritzker Prize and The Sundance Institute illuminate how these professionals construct a vital value chain. Highlighting the role of "pioneer entrepreneurs"--who carve out space for radical, new product categories--Khaire illustrates how creative professionals influence our sense of value, shifting consumer behavior and our culture in deep, surprising ways.
The cycle : a practical approach to managing arts organizations by
In the third book of his popular trilogy on creating and sustaining arts organizations, Michael Kaiser reveals the hidden engine that powers consistent success. According to Kaiser, successful arts organizations pursue strong programmatic marketing campaigns that compel people to buy tickets, enroll in classes, and so on--in short, to participate in the organization's programs. Additionally, they create exciting activities that draw people to the organization as a whole. This institutional marketing creates a sense of enthusiasm that attracts donors, board members, and volunteers. Kaiser calls this group of external supporters the family. When this hidden engine is humming, staff, board, and audience members, artists, and donors feel confidence in the future. Resources are reinvested in more and better art, which is marketed aggressively; as a result, the "family" continues to grow, providing even more resources. This self-reinforcing cycle underlies the activities of all healthy arts organizations, and the theory behind it can be used as a diagnostic tool to reveal--and remedy--the problems of troubled ones. This book addresses each element of the cycle in the hope that more arts organizations around the globe--from orchestras, theaters, museums, opera companies, and classical and modern dance organizations to service organizations and other not-for-profit cultural institutions--will be able to sustain remarkable creativity, pay the bills, and have fun doing so!
The great orchestrator : Arthur Judson and American arts management by
This biography charts the career and legacy of the pioneering American music manager Arthur Judson (1881-1975), who rose to prominence in Philadelphia and New York at the beginning of the twentieth century. A violinist by training, Judson became manager of the Philadelphia Orchestra in 1915 under the iconic conductor Leopold Stokowski. Within a few years, Judson also took on management of the New York Philharmonic, navigating a period of change and the tenures of several important conductors who included William Mengelberg, Arturo Toscanini, and John Barbirolli. Judson also began managing individual artists, including pianists Alfred Cortot and Vladimir Horowitz, violinist Jasha Heifetz, and cellist Gregor Piatigorsky. He also organized the U.S. tours of several prominent composers, including Igor Stravinsky and Vincent d'Indy. At the same time, Judson began managing conductors. His first clients were Stokowski and Fritz Reiner. By the 1930s, Judson's conductor list included most of the important conductors working in America. Drawing on rich correspondence between Judson and the conductors and artists he served, James M. Doering demonstrates Judson's multifaceted roles, including involvement with programming choices, building audiences, negotiating with orchestra members and their unions, and exploring new technologies for extending the orchestras' reach. In addition to his colorful career behind the scenes at two preeminent American orchestras, Judson was important for a number of innovations in arts management. In 1922, he founded a nationwide network of local managers and later became involved in the relatively unexplored medium of radio, working first with WEAF in New York City and then later forming his own national radio network in 1927. Providing valuable insight into the workings of these orchestras and the formative years of arts management, The Great Orchestrator is a valuable portrait of one of the most powerful managers in American musical history.
Innovation in the Cultural and Creative Industries by
Technological innovations, sociological and consumer trends, and growing internationalization are transforming the cultural and creative industries (CCIs). These changes present new challenges for CCIs that require original and inventive answers. Innovation in the Cultural and Creative Industries analyzes the powerful strategies put in place by CCI organizations such as Nintendo, the Lascaux Cave and Daft Punk. The case studies presented in this book cover video games, books, music, museums, fashion, film and architecture. Each chapter is organized around five key points: a theoretical framework that focuses on a specific concept, a description of the methodological mechanism mobilized, a presentation of the industry concerned, the analysis of the innovative strategy and a recap of the lessons and best practices demonstrated by the case.
Key Concepts in Creative Industries by
"This guide to the emerging language of creative industries field is a valuable resource for researchers and students alike. Concise, extensively referenced, and accessible, this this is an exceptionally useful reference work."- Gauti Sigthorsson, Greenwich University"There could be no better guides to the conceptual map of the creative industries than John Hartley and his colleagues, pioneers in the field. This book is a clear, comprehensive and accessible tool-kit of ideas, concepts, questions and discussions which will be invaluable to students and practitioners alike. Key Concepts in Creative Industries is set to become the corner stone of an expanding and exciting field of study"- Chris Barker, University of WollongongCreativity is an attribute of individual people, but also a feature of organizations like firms, cultural institutions and social networks. In the knowledge economy of today, creativity is of increasing value, for developing, emergent and advanced countries, and for competing cities. This book is the first to present an organized study of the key concepts that underlie and motivate the field of creative industries. Written by a world-leading team of experts, it presents readers with compact accounts of the history of terms, the debates and tensions associated with their usage, and examples of how they apply to the creative industries around the world. Crisp and relevant, this is an invaluable text for students of the creative industries across a range of disciplines, especially media, communication, economics, sociology, creative and performing arts and regional studies.
Management and the Arts by
The fifth edition of Management and the Arts discusses the theory and practical applications from all arts management perspectives including planning, marketing, finance, economics, organization, staffing, and group dynamics. Revised to reflect the latest thinking and trends in managing organizations and people, this fifth edition features class-tested questions in each chapter, which help students to integrate the material and develop ideas about how the situations and problems could have been handled. Statistics and real-world examples illustrate all aspects of arts managements, from budgeting and fundraising, to e-marketing and social networking, to working effectively with boards and staff members. Case studies focus on the challenges facing managers and organizations every day, and "In the News" quotes provide real-world examples of principles and theories. Students in Arts Management university courses along with arts managers in a theatre, museum, dance company, and opera will gain useful insights into strategic planning, organization, and integrated management theories with this book.
The production manager's toolkit : successful production management in theatre and the performing arts by
"Our theater world is so much better with this book in it, and even better with Cary and Jay at the helm." -David Stewart, Director of Production for the Guthrie Theater The Production Manager's Toolkit is a comprehensive introduction to a career in theatrical and special event production for new and aspiring professionals, given by expert voices in the field. The book discusses management techniques, communication skills, and relationship building tactics to create effective and successful production managers. With a focus on management theory, advice from top production managers provide insights into budgeting, scheduling, meetings, hiring, maintaining safety, and more. Through interviews and case studies, the history and techniques of production management are explored throughout a variety of entertainment venues: theatre, dance, opera, and special events. The book includes references, tools, templates, and checklists; and a companion website contains downloadable paperwork and links to other useful resources such as unions, venues, and vendors. This book is written for student and professional production managers.
Routledge Handbook of Cultural and Creative Industries in Asia by
Recent years have witnessed the remarkable development of the cultural and creative industries (CCIs) in Asia, from the global popularity of the Japanese games and anime industries, to Korea's film and pop music successes. While CCIs in these Asian cultural powerhouses aspire to become key players in the global cultural economy, Southeast Asian countries such as Malaysia and Thailand are eager to make a strong mark in the region's cultural landscape. As the first handbook on CCIs in Asia, this book provides readers with a contextualized understanding of the conditions and operation of Asian CCIs. Both internationalising and de-Westernising our knowledge of CCIs, it offers a comprehensive contribution to the field from academics, practitioners and activists alike. Covering 12 different societies in Asia from Japan and China to Thailand, Indonesia and India, the themes include: State policy in shaping CCIs Cultural production inside and outside of institutional frameworks Circulation of CCIs products and consumer culture Cultural activism and independent culture Cultural heritage as an industry. Presenting a detailed set of case studies, this book will be an essential companion for researchers and students in the field of cultural policy, cultural and creative industries, media and cultural studies, and Asian studies in general.
Stage management basics : a primer for performing arts stage managers by
Stage Management Basics touches on basic principles for stage management for theatre, dance, and opera productions. Without assuming any intrinsic prior knowledge of the theatrical field and its associated, specialized terminology, this book covers every aspect of the stage management, from reading a script, meeting with a director and theatre staff, and auditioning, to constructing green digital scripts, communication best practices, and opening night protocol. Additionally, this book features multiple appendices containing stage management form templates, blank version of which are available on its companion website. This book is for the beginning Stage Management student.
Strategic Management in the Arts by
Strategic Management in the Arts looks at the unique characteristics of organisations in the arts and culture sector and shows readers how to tailor a strategic plan to help these diverse organizations meet their objectives. Strategic management is an essential element that drives an organisation's success, yet many cultural organizations have yet to apply strategic thinking and entrepreneurial actions within the management function. Varbanova reviews the existing theories and models of strategic management and then relates these specifically to cultural organisations. Also included are sections on entrepreneurship and innovations in the arts, considering the concept of a 'learning organisation' - an organisation able to adapt its strategy within a constantly changing, complex environment. The book is structured to walk the reader through each element of the strategic plan systematically. With a fresh approach, key questions, examples, international cases to connect theory with practice and suggestions for further reading, this book is designed to accompany classes on strategic planning, cultural management or arts management.
Technical Management for the Performing Arts by
Technical Management for the Performing Arts: Utilizing Time, Talent, and Money is a comprehensive guide to the tools and strategies of a successful technical manager. This book demonstrates how you can coordinate personnel, raw materials, and venues, all while keeping a production on a tight schedule and within budget. From concept to realization, through nightly performances, Technical Management for the Performing Arts focuses on the technical and organization skills a technical manager must demonstrate, and emphasizes the need for creativity and interpersonal management of a team.
Foreign Language : Japanese, Chinese
Foreign Language teaches students communicative competence in any one of these foreign languages: Japanese, Chinese for practical and business situations in the arts and culture context, especially in connecting art practitioners to art institutions and to audiences.
Another option is Sign Language. The purpose of this course is to enable students to begin to acquire proficiency in Sign Language. Emphasis is placed on the development of receptive and expressive signing skills and on the acquisition of the fundamentals of applied grammar.
Basic Japanese by
Basic Japanese takes a friendly and innovative approach to beginner Japanese, emphasizing the structure of the Japanese language rather than just vocabulary. This method was pioneered by the author,Samuel E. Martin. Once considered controversial, modern linguists now agree that the structurally based approach for learning a language allows for more efficient retention than the traditional repetition-based approach. It is especially useful for self-study and first-time learners as well as in a classroom setting. The MP3 Audio-CD helps to reinforce pronunciation and build listening comprehension. Each lesson is set up to ease learners into not just understanding the new material but mastering it, using a four-step method: Step 1: Basic Sentences: Each lesson begins with the key to quick mastery of spoken Japanese--learning and understanding new sentence patterns. Vocabulary is learned in context. A Basic Vocabulary section lists only essential words and phrases that are relevant to the theme of the lesson. Step 2: Structure Notes: Next the learner is guided through complete, in-depth explanations of the sentences' grammar essentials, to aid in mastering the sentence patterns. Step 3: Conversation: Authentic dialogue teaches the way people naturally speak, putting into practice the lesson's sentence patterns with everyday topics. Step 4: Exercises: An opportunity for practicing--and for strengthening your understanding of the lesson's key points and ability to read Japanese. All disc content is alternatively accessible on tuttlepublishing.com/downloadable-content.
Basic Japanese Grammar by
This is a clear simple and compact guide to colloquial, everyday Japanese grammar. Basic Japanese Grammar teaches all the grammar you need to speak Japanese and understand simple spoken Japanese. Covering what is essential, it provides an efficient way for learners who have limited time to learn Japanese and begin to communicate naturally with Japanese speakers. It is intended for self-study or classroom use. It offers a practical course in colloquial Japanese but leaves aside forms that are unnecessary or little used as well as those that are more important for written Japanese. In short chapters, it helps the user understand the logic of Japanese grammar, while its straightforward explanations and clear examples make learning as easy as possible. The grammar section includes a glossary of grammatical terms and an index, as well as appendixes on Japanese pronunciation and verb conjugation. All Japanese words and phrases are written in Kanji and Kana (Hiragana and Katakana) as well as Romanized Japanese (Romanji) and English. Explanations are given in English.
Chineasy : the new way to read Chinese by
Learning Chinese is notoriously difficult and has long put off the most linguistically savvy Westerners ... until now. Breaking down the Great Wall of language, ShaoLan Hsueh has unpicked Chinese characters and created a simple system for quickly understanding the basic building blocks of the written language. Working with renowned illustrator Noma Bar, she has developed a unique set of illustrations that are engaging and delightful, and offer a glimpse into the wonder of the Chinese language and culture. The books main section introduces the radicals the key characters on which the language is built and reveals how they can be combined to form a wealth of more complex words and phrases. In fewer than 200 pages, readers of all ages will have made the first steps towards a genuine appreciation of Chinese, loving every new character they learn.
Conversational Japanese by
This book is a user-friendly language guide for basic spoken Japanese. To effectively learn Japanese and communicate in another culture you need more than the bare bones of the language. You need to understand the given norms of that society, how people interact, how things work, what the system is, how to navigate and manipulate those systems--in short, how to use the language in context. More than a Japanese phrase book,Conversational Japanese provides basic material for practical day-to-day communication. Through hundreds of example sentences and dialogs, as well as thorough explanations of the customs involved, learners will know what to say and do when: Meeting new people. Reserving a hotel room. Buying a train ticket. Offering a gift. Writing emails, business letters, cards and thank-you notes. This book aims to prepare you for situations you are likely to find yourself in if you go to Japan to visit or to work. Every chapter starts with a short introduction giving background knowledge for that topic; then there are dialogues based on rea-life situations which give you the words and phrases you need to manage a wide range of daily tasks from getting on with the neighbors, to buying a phone, shopping on the internet, sightseeing, visiting clients or giving a speech. The Japanese language is kept simple and clear and strikes a balance between Japanese textbook language and colloquial Japanese language. Real life Japanese conversations are untidy and elliptical. Unlike most language books,Conversational Japanese does not restrict the use of kanji (Chinese characters), and the sentences are written in the usual Japanese combination of kana (hiragana andkatakana) and kanji. Since learning kanji is a difficult task,Conversational Japanese includes romanji (Romanized Japanese) for each word or phrase. As you progress, using kanji and kana will become easier to remember, and you should be able to pick up new kanji over time. Soon your abilities to speak Japanese, comprehend Japanese, read Japanese and write Japanese will be improved.
Deaf Eyes on Interpreting by
As the ASL-English interpreting field has become professionalized, there is a growing disconnect between interpreters and the Deaf consumers they serve. Whereas interpreting used to be a community-based practice, the field is growing into a research-based profession that begins in a classroom rather than in the Deaf community. Despite the many gains being made in the interpreting services profession, with an emphasis on the accuracy of the interpreted work, the perspectives of Deaf individuals are rarely documented in the literature. Opportunities for enhanced participation and full inclusion need to be considered in order for Deaf people to best represent themselves to the hearing, nonsigning public as competent and intelligent individuals. Deaf Eyes on Interpreting brings Deaf people to the forefront of the discussions about what constitutes quality interpreting services. The contributors are all Deaf professionals who use interpreters on a regular basis, and their insights and recommendations are based on research as well as on personal experiences. These multiple perspectives reveal strategies to maximize access to interpreted work and hearing environments and to facilitate trust and understanding between interpreters and Deaf consumers. Interpreter educators, interpreting students, professional interpreters, and Deaf individuals will all benefit from the approaches offered in this collection.
Easy Japanese : a guide to spoken and written Japanese by
Learn Japanese in 16 easy-to-follow lessons! Easy Japanese provides all the basics you need to speak and write Japanese. Designed with the true beginner in mind, this book provides full language explanations in English and focuses on essential Japanese for effective communication in everyday situations. You'll find the lessons stimulating and effortless and organized into clearly defined sections for ease of use: useful everyday expressions; pattern sentences and how to use the grammar; cultural highlights and study recommendations. Once you get a bit comfortable, written Japanese--both kana and kanji--is introduced. You can put to use your new skills right from the start and allows you to progress at your own pace. Includes: 16 easy-to-follow lessons Cultural "sidelights" and study recommendations A free audio download from the first chapter (lesson), The Importance of Good Pronunciation. Topics include: The Importance of Good Pronunciation, Word Order, Particles Wa, Ga, Mo, Ka, Ne, and Yo, Singulars and Plurals, Desu and Arimasu, Yes and No, Nouns, Negatives of Desu and Arimasu, The ko, so, a, and do words, The uses of no, Names of nations, languages, and peoples, The two classes of adjectives, Kana, Conjugation of A Verbs, -masu, Periods of Time, Basic numbers, Desiderative -tai, Gerund + hoshii, "and", Conjugation B verbs, Pronouns, Time, Irregular verbs, Adverbs, -nagara (while, although), Tsumori (intention), Kara, node, and naze ka to iu to (because), Noni, tame ni--In order to, Noni--Even though, Tokoro--Place, time, et al, Dokoro ka--Quite the contrary, -tari (-dari) suru--to do this and that, Ho ga ii...It is better to..., Numators, Passive Voice, The Causative and the Passive Causative, Kanji (the written characters), Particles, Conjunctions, To--meaning if or when or with, Phrases of location, Interjections, -kata, yo, oku, miru, -te (-de) miru, -yasui and -nikui, -so desu, Koto, (conditional verb) to suru or to omou, kamo shiremasen, -shidai, Must, Should, Commands, Instructions, and Requests, Permission, -ra suffixed to the plain past, The Comparative Degree, The Superlative Degree, The same as..,Nara
Essential Japanese : speak Japanese with confidence. by
This portable, user-friendly Japanese language guide, phrasebook and dictionary is the cheapest and easiest way to learn Japanese before and during your trip. If you only want to purchase one Japanese language book--Essential Japanese is the way to go. Part of Tuttle Publishing'sEssential Series, it is a great first introduction and beginner guide to the language of Japan and is also designed as a Japanese phrasebook, making it the most versatile Japanese language learning tool on the market. Perfect for business people or tourist traveling to Japan or for students who want to supplement their learning, this book's easy indexing feature allows it to act as a Japanese phrase book or as an English-Japnese Dictionary. A clever "point to" feature allows you to simply point to a phrase translated in Japanese without the need to say a word. You will soon find yourself turning toEssential Japanese again and again when visiting Japan and working or interacting with Japanese speakers. In this book you will find: Over 1500 practical sentences for everyday use. A glossary of over 200 terms and expressions. Latest Japanese vocabulary and Japanese phrases for smartphones, social media and more. Japanese characters (kana and kanji) as well as Latin script (romanji). Extensive information about Chinese grammar and pronunciation. This beginner Japanese book will help you to quickly and easily learn Japanese. Your ability to read Japanese, write Japanese, speak Japanese, and comprehend Japanese will be vastly improved without having to take an entire Japanese language class. Other titles in this bestselling series of phrasebooks include:Essential Japanese, Essential Chinese, Essential Korean, Essential Tagalog, andEssential Arabic.
Essential Japanese Grammar by
Essential Japanese Grammar is an indispensable study guide for students of the Japanese language at all levels. Long the standard in Japanese language education, it provides clear, jargon-free explanations of how Japanese grammar works and offers hundreds of example sentences. An essential handbook for self-study or the classroom, students will find that a strong foundation in grammar is vital to those wishing to learn Japanese. Essential Japanese Grammar presents many unique features. First, grammatical terminology has been kept to a minimum so that extensive prior knowledge of grammar is not required. Second, abundant example sentences are written in Japanese characters (kana and kanji) followed byromanji and English translations. Third, the authors have tried to reveal aspects of grammar that may not be found in comparable grammar books--such as rare Japanese verbs, adjectival nouns, clauses, adverbs, etc. This Japanese grammar book contains: Parts of speech. Sentence constructions. Conjugations forms. Speech styles and tones. Accentuation rules. Essential words and functional elements. An appendix for referencing and cross-referencing Japanese words.
The Evolution of English Language Learners in Japan by
This book seeks a better understanding of the sociocultural and ideological factors that influence English study in Japan and study-abroad contexts such as university-bound high schools, female-dominant English classes at college, ESL schools in Canada, and private or university-affiliated ESL programs in Singapore and Malaysia. The discussion is based not only on data garnered from Japanese EFL learners and Japanese/overseas educators but also on official English language policies and commercial magazine discourses about English study for Japanese people. The book addresses seemingly incompatible themes that are either entrenched in or beyond Japan's EFL context such as: Japan's decades-long poorly-performing English education vs. its equally long-lived status as an economic power; Japanese English learners' preference for native English speakers/norms in at-home Japanese EFL contexts vs. their friendship with other Asian students in western study-abroad contexts; Japanese female students' dream of using English to further their careers vs. Japanese working women's English study for self-enrichment; Japanese society's obsession with globalization through English study vs. the Japanese economy sustained by monolingual Japanese businessmen; Japanese business magazines' frequent cover issues on global business English study vs. Japanese working women's magazines' less frequent and markedly feminized discourses about English study.
Eyes on China : an intermediate-advanced reader of modern Chinese = Wo kan Zhongguo : xian dai Han yu zhong gao ji du ben by
Eyes on China is the ideal textbook for students entering the third year of a four-year course of Chinese language study and those who are ready to move from an intermediate to advanced level. Bridging the gap between informal spoken Chinese and more formal written Chinese, this textbook presents an on-the-ground perspective of what a visitor to China today might see and experience. Unlike other advanced-level textbooks, which typically feature essays, articles, and reviews from Chinese newspapers and magazines, the selections included here have all been written by the authors expressly for this book. They cover a range of timely China-related topics, including the problem of air pollution, corruption, infrastructure development, the development of high-speed rail, the prevalence of knock-off products in the marketplace, new tech trends, the contemporary art scene, and the relationship between mainland China and Taiwan. Each chapter's featured text is accompanied by grammar structure explanations, a vocabulary list, and other useful tools. · An ideal textbook for students progressing to advanced-level Chinese language study · Brand-new materials present a comprehensive understanding of China today · Features original selections enhanced by grammar explanations, vocabulary lists, and other tools
A Frequency Dictionary of Japanese by
A Frequency Dictionary of Japanese is an invaluable tool for all learners of Japanese, providing a list of the 5,000 most commonly used words in the language. Based on a100 million word corpus, composed of spoken, fiction, non-fiction and news texts in current use, the dictionary provides the user with a detailed frequency-based list, as well as alphabetical and part-of-speech indices. All entries in the frequency list feature the English equivalent and a sample sentence with English translation. The dictionary also contains 25 thematically organised lists of frequently used words on a variety of topics such as food, weather, occupations and leisure. Numerous bar charts are also included to highlight the phonetic and spelling variants across register. A Frequency Dictionary of Japanese enables students of all levels to maximise their study of Japanese vocabulary in an efficient and engaging way. It is also an excellent resource for teachers of the language.
Go! Chinese听说读打写. Go 100 workbook by 
Intermediate Japanese by
This is complete Japanese textbook and learning package for intermediate level students. In the intermediate level of this highly-acclaimed new series, learners will continue to study Japanese through an engaging storyline which slowly unfolds over the arc of the text, keeping things interesting and adding the motivation needed to master new material. This story-based approach is a great way to learn Japanese. The emphasis in Intermediate Japanese is on real-life situations drawn from contemporary Japanese culture and authentic written, visual and oral materials embedded in the lessons. Available in both hardcover and paperback, Intermediate Japanese includes an accompanying audio disc and free web-based multimedia resources with additional exercises. A separate Workbook is available with corresponding one-of-a-kind practice activities. Key features of this program: The focus is very visual. The book's narrative is told with manga-style story pages, and the CD-ROM uses colorful video. Authentic written, visual, and oral materials are embedded very naturally throughout the book. Independent learners and classroom students alike will find this an accessible and upbeat way to master contemporary Japanese. Kanji characters are emphasized here more than in other textbooks and are taught as an integral part of learning Japanese spoken vocabulary, rather than separately. By the end of this book, learners will have mastered 149 additional kanji, for a cumulative total of 300 kanji. The CD-ROM includes Native Japanese language speakers. Pronunciation guides for all new words. Accompanying dialogues. The Beginning Japanese Website includes: Online games and activities. Additional information and updates. Downloadable Hiragana Practice Book, Katakana Practice Book, kana practice sheets. Downloadable kanji and kana flash cards. Beginning Japanese is the second volume in a 2-level series. Deepen your learning with the Intermediate Japanese Workbook, a volume of drills and exercises that reinforce the lessons in the textbook.
Interpretation skills : English to American sign language by 
Japanese in 30 Days by
This newly designed, beginner-level Japanese audio course is ideal for language learners looking for a fun and effective course with short, manageable daily lessons. Lessons are in a fun, diary-like format, designed to fit seamlessly into your daily schedule. The audio CD runs for 60 minutes and the contents can be easily downloaded to your iPod or MP3 player. Following through the lessons transports you to life in Japan where you will learn how to meet and greet people, carry out everyday tasks, and find and start work. Exercises and examples progressively build a solid foundation of essential grammar and vocabulary alongside knowledge of the country and its culture.
Japanese Phrasebook and Dictionary by
Lonely Planet: The world's #1 phrasebook publisher* Lonely Planet Japanese Phrasebook & Dictionary is your handy passport to culturally enriching travels with the most relevant and useful Japanese phrases and vocabulary for all your travel needs. Get to know your sushi from your sake, enjoy an elaborate tea ceremony with its centuries'-old conventions, and find your way elaborate transit maps; all with your trusted travel companion. With language tools in your back pocket, you can truly get to the heart of wherever you go, so begin your journey now! Get More From Your Trip with Easy-to-Find Phrases for Every Travel Situation! Feel at ease with essential tips on culture, manners, idioms and multiple meanings Order with confidence, explain food allergies, and try new foods with the menu decoder Save time and hassles with vital phrases at your fingertips Never get stuck for words with the 3500-word two-way, quick-reference dictionary Be prepared for both common and emergency travel situations with practical phrases and terminology Meet friends with conversation starter phrases Get your message acrosswith easy-to-use pronunciation guides InsideLonely Planet Japanese Phrasebook & Dictionary: Full-colour throughout User-friendly layout organised by travel scenario categories Survival phrases inside front cover for at-a-glance on-the-fly cues Convenient features 5 Phrases to Learn Before You Go 10 Ways to Start a Sentence 10 Phrases to Sound like a Local Listen For - phrases you may hear Look For - phrases you may see on signs Shortcuts - easy-to-remember alternatives to the full phrases Q&A - suggested answers to questions asked Covers Basics - time, dates, numbers, amounts, pronunciation, reading tips, grammar rules Practical - travel with kids, disabled travellers, sightseeing, business, banking, post office, internet, phones, repairs, bargaining, accommodations, directions, border crossing, transport Social - meeting people, interests, feelings, opinions, going out, romance, culture, activities, weather Safe Travel -emergencies, police, doctor, chemist, dentist, symptoms, conditions Food - ordering, at the market, at the bar, dishes, ingredients The Perfect Choice:Lonely Planet Japanese Phrasebook & Dictionary, a pocket-sized comprehensive language guide, provides on-the-go language assistance; great for language students and travellers looking to interact with locals and immerse themselves in local culture. Looking for an auditory guide to pronunciations? Check out Lonely Planet'sJapanese Phrasebook & Audio CD. Authors:Written and researched by Lonely Planet, Yoshi Abe and Keiko Hagiwara. About Lonely Planet:Started in 1973, Lonely Planet is the world's leading travel guide publisher with guidebooks to every destination on the planet, and has been connecting travellers and locals for over 25 years with phrasebooks for 120 languages, more than any other publisher! With an award-winning website, a suite of mobile and digital travel products, and a dedicated traveller community, Lonely Planet enables curious travellers to experience the world and to truly get to the heart of the places they find themselves. The world awaits! *#1 phrasebook publisher. Source: Nielsen Bookscan UK, US & AUS
Literature and society : an advanced reader of modern Chinese by
A revised one-volume edition of the popular upper-level Chinese language textbook Since its first publication in 1999, Literature and Society has been widely used in Chinese-language classes at major universities and language institutions. In this completely revised edition, designed for upper-level students, this classic textbook continues to explore a variety of contemporary Chinese social issues through the study of Chinese literary works and essays. This new edition condenses and consolidates the original two-volume set into one convenient volume. The first section, "Literature," includes essays, short stories, and a play, and features a range of writers: Lu Xun, Lin Yutang, Liang Shiqiu, Wang Li, Xie Bingying, and Wang Meng. The second section, "Society," includes essays by Fei Xiaotong, Ma Yinchu, Wu Han, Liang Sicheng, and Chen Hengzhe. The selections delve into such subjects as population issues, ethics, marriage, the lives of intellectuals, and challenges faced by minorities in China. Each selection begins with a brief introduction about the author and concludes with discussion questions. The simplified character text and corresponding vocabulary words face each other on adjacent pages, and the traditional character text follows at the end of each lesson. Literature and Society remains an innovative way for students to sharpen their Chinese language abilities while learning more about important areas of Chinese culture. Completely revised edition Original two-volume set now consolidated into one convenient volume Selections of literary works and essays explore contemporary Chinese social issues Each selection begins with an introduction to the author and concludes with discussion questions Simplified character text and corresponding vocabulary sit on facing pages Traditional character text appears at the end of each lesson
Mandarin Chinese Words and Parts of Speech by
This monograph is a translation of two seminal works on corpus-based studies of Mandarin Chinese words and parts of speech. The original books were published as two pioneering technical reports by Chinese Knowledge and Information Processing group (CKIP) at Academia Sinica in 1993 and 1996, respectively. Since then, the standard and PoS tagset proposed in the CKIP report have become the de facto standard in Chinese corpora and computational linguistics, in particular in the context of traditional Chinese texts. This new translation represents and develops the principles and theories originating from these pioneering works. The results can be applied to numerous fields; Chinese syntax and semantics, lexicography, machine translation and other language engineering bound applications. Suitable for graduate and scholars in the fields of linguistics and Chinese, Mandarin Chinese Words and Parts of Speech provides a comprehensive survey of the issues around wordhood and PoS.
Modern Japanese Grammar Workbook by
The Modern Japanese Grammar Workbook is an innovative book of exercises and language tasks for all learners of Japanese. The book is divided into two parts: Section A provides exercises based on essential grammatical structures Section B practises everyday functions (e.g. making introductions, apologizing, expressing needs). All sentences are written both in Romanization and in the Japanese script and a comprehensive answer key at the back enables the learner to check on their progress. Key features of the book include: Exercises graded on a 3-point scale according to their level of difficulty Cross-referencing to the related　Modern Japanese Grammar Topical exercises drawn from realistic scenarios to help learners develop their vocabulary and practical communication skills Opportunities to practise both written and spoken Japanese. Modern Japanese Grammar Workbook is an ideal practice tool for learners of Japanese at all levels. No prior knowledge of grammatical terminology is assumed and it can be used both independently and alongside the　Modern Japanese Grammar (ISBN 978-0-415-57201-9), which is also published by Routledge.
More Making Out in Japanese by
More Making Out in Japanese is a fun, accessible and thorough guide to the Japanese language as it's really spoken. This prasebook follows the bestsellingMaking Out in Japanese providing additional (and classic) phrases for travelers, including ones to help you make acquaintances, discuss likes and dislikes, share a meal, go out on the town or develop a romantic relationship. If you are a student, businessman or tourist traveling to Japan and would like to have an authentic and meaningful experience, the key is being able to speak like a local. This friendly and easy-to-use phrasebook makes this possible.More Making Out in Japanese has been completely revised and expanded to be even more helpful as a guide to modern colloquial Japanese for use in everyday informal interactions--giving access to the sort of catchy Japanese expressions that aren't covered in traditional language materials. As well as the Romanized forms (romanji), each expression is now given in authentic Japanese script (kanji and kana withfurigana pronunciation clues), so that in the case of difficulties the book can be shown to the person the user is trying to communicate with. This Japanese phrasebook includes: A guide to pronouncing Japanese words correctly Explanations of basic Japanese grammar, such as, intonation, word stress, and particles A guide to male and female usage Romanized forms of words and phrases (romanji) Complete Japanese translations including Japanese characters (kanji) and the Japanese alphabet (kana) Useful and interesting notes on Japanese language and culture Lots of colorful, fun and useful expressions not covered in other phrasebooks Titles in this unique series of bestselling phrase books include:Making Out in Chinese, Making Out in Indonesian, Making Out in Thai, Making Out in Korean, Making Out in Hindi, Making Out in Japanese, Making Out in Vietnamese, Making Out in Burmese, Making Out in Tagalog, Making Out in Hindi, Making Out in Arabic, Making Out in English, More Making Out in Korean, andMore Making Out in Japanese.
The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies in Language by
Language development, and the challenges it can present for individuals who are deaf or hard-of-hearing, have long been a focus of research, theory, and practice in D/deaf studies and deaf education. Over the past 150 years, but most especially near the end of the 20th and beginning of the21st century, advances in the acquisition and development of language competencies and skills have been increasing rapidly.This volume addresses many of those accomplishments as well as remaining challenges and new questions that have arisen from multiple perspectives: theoretical, linguistic, social-emotional, neuro-biological, and socio-cultural. The contributors comprise an international group of prominent scholarsand practitioners from a variety of academic and clinical backgrounds. The result is a volume that addresses, in detail, current knowledge, emerging questions, and innovative educational practice in a variety of contexts. The volume takes on topics such as discussion of the transformation of effortsto identify a "best" language approach (the "sign" versus "speech" debate) to a stronger focus on individual strengths, potentials, and choices for selecting and even combining approaches; the effects of language on other areas of development as well as effects from other domains on language itself;and how neurological, socio-cognitive, and linguistic bases of learning are leading to more specialized approaches to instruction that address the challenges that remain for deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals. This volume both complements and extends The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies and DeafEducation, Volumes 1 and 2, going further into the unique challenges and demands for deaf or hard-of-hearing individuals than any other text and providing not only compilations of what is known but setting the course for investigating what is still to be learned.
Roger Dahl's Comic Japan by
The humorous cross-cultural observations in this graphic novel, drawn from a long-running comic in The Japan Times, will delight visitors to Japan and armchair travelers alike. Roger Dahl's Comic Japan is a collection of the best of the Zero Gravity cartoon strip, a favorite feature of Japan's leading English-language daily newspaper The Japan Times, since 1991. In this anthology, it is made available in book form for the first time. The Japan comic strip stars Larry and Lily, a young American couple working as English teachers in Tokyo, who never manage to integrate into Japanese society fully. Rounding out the strip's ensemble cast is the three-generational Koyama family, with whom Larry and Lily share friendship and regular misunderstanding. There is plenty of miscommunication between the Japanese characters as well. Zero Gravity takes a whimsical approach to the meeting of cultures. The primary focus is on the humorous misunderstandings between East and West, but nearly as often it explores the quirky dynamics of changing relationships between generations and subgroups within Japan. Though the strip is undoubtedly an exploration of colliding cultures, it is primarily a story about characters who have a good deal of affection for one another. This anthology contains eight chapters covering various aspects of Larry and Lily's life in Japan. Each chapter includes 16-20 pages and 32-40 cartoon strips with two strips to each page and opens with a brief introduction to the theme of the chapter. A 3-page illustrated foreword to the book introduces Roger Dahl, his career and his inspiration for Zero Gravity. For a unique perspective on Japan from a Western artist, the 300+ strips in this Japanese comic anthology will both make you laugh and make you think.
Schaums Outline of Japanese Grammar by
The ideal review for your Japanese course More than 40 million students have trusted Schaum's Outlines for their expert knowledge and helpful solved problems. Written by renowned experts in their respective fields, Schaum's Outlines cover everything from math to science, nursing to language. The main feature for all these books is the solved problems. Step-by-step, authors walk readers through coming up with solutions to exercises in their topic of choice. 788 practice exercises Examples and exercises in both Japanese characters and English transliteration Appropriate for the following courses: First-Year Japanese, Elementary Japanese, Japanese A & B, Independent Studies in Japanese Supports all the major textbooks for Japanese courses
Signed Language Interpreting in the 21st Century by
This text provides interpreting students with a broad knowledge base that encompasses the latest research, addresses current trends and perspectives of the Deaf community, and promotes critical thinking and open dialogue about the working conditions, ethics, boundaries, and competencies needed by a highly qualified interpreter in various settings. This volume expands the resources available to aspiring interpreters, including Deaf interpreters, and incorporates the voices of renowned experts on topics relevant to today's practitioners. Each chapter provides students with objectives, keywords, and discussion questions. The chapters convey clear information about topics that include credentialing, disposition and aptitude for becoming an interpreter, interpreting for people who are DeafBlind, and working within specialty settings, such as legal and healthcare. A key resource for interpreter certification test preparation, this text follows the interpreter's ethical, practical, and professional development through a career of lifelong learning and service.
Sign Language Interpreting in the Workplace by
The last forty years have seen a dramatic change in the nature of work, with deaf people increasingly moving into white collar or office-based professions. The rise of deaf professionals has led to employment opportunities for signed language interpreters across a variety of workplace settings, creating a unique set of challenges that require specialized strategies. Aspects such as social interaction between employees, the unwritten patterns and rules of workplace behavior, hierarchical structures, and the changing dynamics of deaf employee/interpreter relationships place constraints upon the interpreter's role and interpreting performance. Jules Dickinson's examination of interpreted workplace interactions is based on the only detailed, empirical study of this setting to date. Using practitioner responses and transcripts of real-life interpreted workplace interactions, Dickinson's findings demonstrate the complexity of the interpreter's role and responsibilities. The book concentrates on the ways in which signed language interpreters affect the interaction between deaf and hearing employees in team meetings by focusing on humor, small talk, and the collaborative floor. Signed Language Interpreting in the Workplace demonstrates that deaf employees require highly skilled professionals to enable them to integrate into the workplace on a level equal with their hearing peers. It also provides actionable insights for interpreters in workplace settings that will be a valuable resource for interpreting students, practitioners, interpreter trainers, and researchers.
Foreign Language : Japanese, Chinese
Foreign Language teaches students communicative competence in any one of these foreign languages: Japanese, Chinese for practical and business situations in the arts and culture context, especially in connecting art practitioners to art institutions and to audiences.
Another option is Sign Language. The purpose of this course is to enable students to begin to acquire proficiency in Sign Language. Emphasis is placed on the development of receptive and expressive signing skills and on the acquisition of the fundamentals of applied grammar.
Advances in Chinese As a Second Language by
This book is a collection of 13 empirical studies examining the acquisition and processing of Chinese as a second language. On the acquisition front, these studies explore the acquisition of structures such as the perfective marker le, wh-questions, bei- constructions, and bare nouns, and examine the factors that may affect acquisition such as learnersOCO background, anxiety, and instruction. Processing studies cover topics such as the identification of Chinese tones, the recognition of charact..."
Beginning Japanese Workbook by
This companion workbook to Beginning Japanese is the perfect guide for practicing basic conversational Japanese language. Written by experienced high-school Japanese teachers, it includes practice activities for reading, writing, speaking, listening and understanding Japanese: Dialogues Translation exercises Kanji practice Comprehension, vocabulary, and grammar exercises Reading practice The activities are varied and interesting, mirroring the book, and they help you polish every aspect of your Japanese language skills. Whether you're learning Japanese for fun, preparing for a Japanese proficiency exam, or want to achieve AP- or IB-level competency, the Beginning Japanese series is your key to becoming a confident Japanese-speaker.
Cognitive-Functional Approaches to the Study of Japanese As a Second Language by
This innovative and original volume brings together studies that apply cognitive and functional linguistics to the study of the L2 acquisition of Japanese. With each article grounded on the usage-based model and/or conceptual notions such as foregrounding and subjectivity, the volume sheds light on how cognitive and functional linguistics can help us understand aspects of Japanese acquisition that have been neglected by traditionalists.
Easy Mandarin Chinese by
Concise and user-friendly, Easy Mandarin Chinese is designed for anyone who wants to learn Mandarin Chinese--whether on their own or with a teacher. This language learning book introduces the learner to all the basics of the Chinese language and teaches practical daily conversations and vocabulary. It enables users to begin communicating effectively from the very first day and it's compact size makes it a great tool for travelers or business people looking to learn Chinese on the road without giving up on any content. This Mandarin language learning book includes: Useful notes on the Chinese script, pronunciation, sentence structure, vocabulary, and grammar Sections covering greetings, requests, idiomatic expressions and common situations Cultural information about Chinese etiquette as well as do's and don'ts A glossary of the most commonly-used Mandarin Chinese words and phrases Downloadable audio with many hours of native-speaker recordings of the dialogues, vocabulary and exercises.
Essential Japanese phrasebook & dictionary : speak Japanese with confidence!.
Essential Japanese Phrase Book & Dictionary teaches you the practical phrases and expressions needed for common, everyday interactions in Japan in a clear, concise, accessible and enjoyable way. Key features of this Japanese phrasebook and dictionary include: Over 1,500 practical phrases for everyday use An English to Japanese dictionary with over 2,000 terms and expressions Essential expressions used for meeting people, starting conversations, and asking and replying to simple questions Manga illustrations to illustrate critical phrases and situations A pronunciation guide and Japanese grammar notes explain the basic sounds and sentence patterns of the Japanese language The latest Japanese vocabulary and phrases for smartphones, social media and more Japan travel tips, cultural notes and much more! All words and phrases are in Romanized form as well as the Japanese script. Basic Japanese grammar and pronunciation notes get you speaking right away, and tips on culture and etiquette allow you to interact in Japanese without making serious blunders. Whether you're a novice or have some experience with the language, this is a reference you'll turn to again and again when visiting Japan and interacting with Japanese people.
A Grammar of Gan Chinese by
China is very rich in language resources, and Mandarin is undoubtedly its most prestigious and well-known representative. Unfortunately, most of these languages remain understudied or even unstudied. Such is the case of Yichun Gan. Written in the style of a reference grammar, this book sets out to give a comprehensive and systematic description of Yichun grammar, with the aim of increasing readers' knowledge about Chinese languages other than Mandarin. In addition to common categories like nouns, verbs, adjectives and prepositions, the volume attempts to cover as many grammatical categories and constructions as possible, including the Sinitic-specific categories such as classifiers, the aspect system, postpositions and the object-marking BA constructions. To highlight its uniqueness, the book adopts a comparative perspective to contrast many features of Yichun Gan with Mandarin and other Sinitic languages. Our study shows that Yichun Gan possesses both Northern and Southern Chinese traits in many constructions, which supports its status as a transitional language. It will be of interest to linguists who wish to learn more about East Asian languages, and more specifically Sinitic languages.
Handbook of Japanese Applied Linguistics by
Applied linguistics is the best single label to represent a wide range of contemporary research at the intersection of linguistics, anthropology, psychology, and sociology, to name a few. The Handbook of Japanese Applied Linguistics reflects crosscurrents in applied linguistics, an ever-developing branch/discipline of linguistics. The book is divided into seven sections, where each chapter discusses in depth the importance of particular topics, presenting not only new findings in Japanese, but also practical implications for other languages. Section 1 examines first language acquisition/development, whereas Section 2 covers issues related to second language acquisition/development and bilingualism/multilingualism. Section 3 presents problems associated with the teaching and learning of foreign languages. Section 4 undertakes questions in corpus/computational linguistics. Section 5 deals with clinical linguistics, and Section 6 takes up concerns in the area of translation/interpretation. Finally, Section 7 discusses Japanese sign language. Covering a wide range of current issues in an in an in-depth, comprehensive manner, the book will be useful for researchers as well as graduate students who are interested in Japanese linguistics in general, and applied linguistics in particular. Chapter titles Chapter 1. Cognitive Bases and Caregivers' Speech in Early Language Development (Tamiko Ogura, Tezukayama University)Chapter 2. Literacy Acquisition in Japanese Children (Etsuko Haryu, University of Tokyo)Chapter 3. Age Factors in Language Acquisition (Yuko Goto Butler, University of Pennsylvania)Chapter 4. Cross-lingual Transfer from L1 to L2 Among School-age Children (Kazuko Nakajima, University of Toronto)Chapter 5. Errors and Learning Strategies by Learners of Japanese as an L2 (Kumiko Sakoda, Hiroshima University/NINJAL)Chapter 6. Adult JFL Learners' Acquisition of Speech Style Shift (Haruko Minegishi Cook, University of Hawai'i at Manoa)Chapter 7. Japanese Language Proficiency Assessment (Noriko Kobayashi, Tsukuba University)Chapter 8. The Role of Instruction in Acquiring Japanese as a Second Language (Kaoru Koyanagi, Sophia University)Chapter 9. The Influence of Topic Choice on Narrative Proficiency by Learners of Japanese as a Foreign Language (Masahiko Minami, San Francisco State University)Chapter 10. CHILDES for Japanese: Corpora, Programs, and Perspectives (Susanne Miyata, Aichi Shukutoku University)Chapter 11. KY Corpus (Jae-Ho Lee, Tsukuba University)Chapter 12. Corpus-based Second Language Acquisition Research (Hiromi Ozeki, Reitaku University)Chapter 13. Assessment of Language Development in Children with Hearing Impairment and Language Disorders (Kiyoshi Otomo, Tokyo Gakugei University)Chapter 14. Speech and Language Acquisition in Japanese Children with Down Syndrome (Toru Watamaki, Nagasaki University)Chapter 15. Revisiting Autistic Language: Is "literalness" a Truth or Myth? Manabu Oi (Osaka University/Kanazawa University)Chapter 16. Towards a Robust, Genre-based Translation Model and its Application (Judy Noguchi, Mukogawa Women's University; Atsuko Misaki, Kwansei Gakuin University; Shoji Miyanaga, Ritsumeikan University; Masako Terui, Kinki University)Chapter 17. Japanese Sign Language: An Introduction (Daisuke Hara, Toyota Technological Institute)Chapter 18. Japanese Sign Language Phonology and Morphology (Daisuke Hara, Toyota Technological Institute)Chapter 19. Japanese Sign Language Syntax (Noriko Imazato, Kobe City College of Technology)Chapter 20. Sign Language Development and Language Input (Takashi Torigoe, Hyogo University of Teacher Education)
Handbook of Japanese Contrastive Linguistics by
The Handbook of Japanese Contrastive Linguistics is a unique publication that brings together insights from three traditions--Japanese linguistics, linguistic typology and contrastive linguistics--and makes important contributions to deepening our understanding of various phenomena in Japanese as well other languages of the globe. Its primary goal is to uncover principled similarities and differences between Japanese and other languages of the globe and thereby shed new light on the universal as well as language-particular properties of Japanese. The issues addressed by the papers in this volume cover a wide spectrum of phenomena ranging from lexical to syntactic and discourse levels. The authors of the chapters, leading scholars in their respective field of research, present the state-of-the-art research from their respected field.
Handbook of Japanese Syntax by
Studies of Japanese syntax have played a central role in the long history of Japanese linguistics spanning more than 250 years in Japan and abroad. More recently, Japanese has been among the languages most intensely studied within modern linguistic theories such as Generative Grammar and Cognitive/Functional Linguistics over the past fifty years. This volume presents a comprehensive survey of Japanese syntax from these three research strands, namely studies based on the traditional research methods developed in Japan, those from broader functional perspectives, and those couched in the generative linguistics framework. The twenty-four studies contained in this volume are characterized by a detailed analysis of a grammatical phenomenon with broader implications to general linguistics, making the volume attractive to both specialists of Japanese and those interested in learning about the impact of Japanese syntax to the general study of language. Each chapter is authored by a leading authority on the topic. Broad issues covered include sentence types (declarative, imperative, etc.) and their interactions with grammatical verbal categories (modality, polarity, politeness, etc.), grammatical relations (topic, subject, etc.), transitivity, nominalizations, grammaticalization, word order (subject, scrambling, numeral quantifier, configurationality), case marking (ga/no conversion, morphology and syntax), modification (adjectives, relative clause), and structure and interpretation (modality, negation, prosody, ellipsis). Chapter titles Introduction Chapter 1. Basic structures of sentences and grammatical categories, Yoshio Nitta, Kansai University of Foreign Studies Chapter 2: Transitivity, Wesley Jacobsen, Harvard University Chapter 3: Topic and subject, Takashi Masuoka, Kobe City University of Foreign Studies Chapter 4: Toritate: Focusing and defocusing of words, phrases, and clauses, Hisashi Noda, National Institute for Japanese Language and Linguistics Chapter 5: The layered structure of the sentence, Isao Iori, Hitotsubashi University Chapter 6. Functional syntax, Ken-Ichi Takami, Gakushuin University; and Susumu Kuno, Harvard University Chapter 7: Locative alternation, Seizi Iwata, Osaka City University Chapter 8: Nominalizations, Masayoshi Shibatani, Rice University Chapter 9: The morphosyntax of grammaticalization, Heiko Narrog, Tohoku University Chapter 10: Modality, Nobuko Hasegawa, Kanda University of International Studies Chapter 11: The passive voice, Tomoko Ishizuka, Tama University Chapter 12: Case marking, Hideki Kishimoto, Kobe University Chapter 13: Interfacing syntax with sounds and meanings, Yoshihisa Kitagawa, Indiana University Chapter 14: Subject, Masatoshi Koizumi, Tohoku University Chapter 15: Numeral quantifiers, Shigeru Miyagawa, MIT Chapter 16: Relative clauses, Yoichi Miyamoto, Osaka University Chapter 17: Expressions that contain negation, Nobuaki Nishioka, Kyushu University Chapter 18: Ga/No conversion, Masao Ochi, Osaka University Chapter 19: Ellipsis, Mamoru Saito, Nanzan University Chapter 20: Syntax and argument structure, Natsuko Tsujimura, Indiana University Chapter 21: Attributive modification, Akira Watanabe, University of Tokyo Chapter 22: Scrambling, Noriko Yoshimura, Shizuoka Prefectural University
Instant Chinese by
It's amazing how 100 key words and phrases provide instant communication! Do you want to speak simple Mandarin Chinese but are too busy to study it? Are you visiting China for a short time and want a Mandarin phrase book to help you communicate in the Chinese language? If so, this Mandarin phrasebook is for you. It's tiny 0.4 x 4.1 x 5.9 inches size makes it incredibly convenient to travel with but without losing the most essential content for communication. This new, expanded edition contains 15% more content, fun manga-style illustrations, and additional information on which destinations, personalities and trends are hot in China right now! The idea of Instant Chinese is simple—learn 100 words and phrases and say 1,000 things. The trick is knowing which 100 words to learn, but the author Boye Lafayette De Mente has solved the problem, choosing only those words you'll hear again and again. Even with a vocabulary this small, you'll be surprised how quickly and fluently you too can communicate in Mandarin Chinese. Words are repeated in different combinations, building familiarity without effort. All phrases are given in both simplified Chinese characters and standard Hanoi Pinyin romanization. A brief guide to pronunciation allows the user to say the phrases correctly. An English–Chinese glossary makes looking up a word or phrase simple and quick. Here's a sample of what you'll be able to do with this chinese phasebook: Meet people. Go shopping. Ask directions. Ride the subway. Order food and drinks. And much more.
Japanese for Beginners by
Japanese for Beginners is a straightforward learning guide which enables beginners to pick up a function knowledge of spoken Japanese very quickly and easily. This complete Japanese language package has helped many thousands of people learn to speak colloquial Japanese. Toyozato includes drills and exercises in each chapter to reinforce vocabulary, basic grammar, and sentence structures. The book also includes free downloadable audio with recordings of native speakers demonstrating the correct pronunciation of Japanese words. Whether readers are going to work in Japan--or for a Japanese company--or simply seeing the sights in Tokyo and Kyoto, this affordably priced book will teach them everything they need to converse confidently in Japanese! Key features of Japanese for Beginners: Practical Japanese phrases help you converse with ease. Comic strips (Japanese manga) and dialogues bring Japanese to life. Exercises help you to practice speaking and listening. Downloadable audio features native Japanese speakers to help you pronounce Japanese like a pro. Thousands of people need to communicate in Japanese for practical reasons, but don't have the time or opportunity to devote the many years it takes to study Japanese formally. By providing a firm grounding in Japanese sentence structure, using dialogues that reflect authentic Japanese culture and comic strips that emphasize conversations and humor, Tuttle Japanese for Beginners will soon have you on your way to becoming conversational in Japanese. When you consider that the Japanese language is spoken by 125 million people worldwide, and Japan is the world's third largest economy, the advantages of speaking Japanese become clear! About this new edition: Japanese for Beginners is now expanded to include IT, Social Media, mobile phone conversations and texting!
Japanese Hiragana and Katakana Practice Pad by
Japanese Hiragana & Katakana Practice Pad provides an enjoyable and motivating way for the learner to have practice in writing the syllables of the Japanese hiragana and katakana writing systems. There are a total of 365 practice sheets--one per day for a year of learning, or more than one per day for faster progress!--as well as basic instructions and extra sheets of blank squared paper for extra practice. The syllables are introduced in a logical order, along with their equivalents in the roman alphabet and several examples, and practice is given in using them to write simple, useful Japanese language words. Word-stroke diagrams are provided for each character. Structured space around the edge of each page allows the user to first trace the shapes on top of the models, and then write the syllables independently. This volume will provide a good foundation for anybody interested in mastering the basic kana syllables essential for learning Japanese.
Japanese Phrases Language Practice Pad : Learn Japanese in Just a Few Minutes Per Day! by
With Beginning Japanese Phrases Language Practice Pad you can master essential Japanese phrases in just minutes a day! Although more people are studying the Japanese language than ever before, others are still wary of starting because they believe, "it's too difficult." But Beginning Japanese Phrases Language Practice Pad will show absolute beginners that Japanese is in many ways much easier than other languages and it will help intermediate Japanese learners review and improve upon their past studies and practice Japanese everyday. Japanese is a fascinating language that uses Chinese characters (kanji) as well as two other alphabets (hiragana and katakana). After a few weeks of gradual progress your ability to read Japanese, write Japanese and speak Japanese will grow tremendously. This calendar like desk companion is divided into monthly topics and builds upon itself, one day at a time. Japanese phrases are kept short, simple and functional. Each of the 365 pages include these four components: The phrase or dialogue in Japanese characters. A transliteration using English letters (romanji), which gives English speakers a guide to pronunciation. The English translation. A related note about the phrase, Japan, or Japanese culture to add context.
Language Contact and Change in Chinese by
The book sheds light on the fascinating evolution of contact-induced grammatical features in Chinese syntax. For more than two thousand years, Chinese has been in large scale language contact with languages such as Sanskrit, Mongolian, and Manchurian. Originally published in Chinese in renowned academic journals, the contributions are made available for the first time to the English speaking world.
Learning English and Chinese As Foreign Languages by
This book compares English as a Foreign Language teaching in Taiwan with Chinese as a Foreign Language education in England and highlights how classroom activities are embedded within ethnic or social group cultures, family resources and school visions or goals, and it highlights the potential for a perpetuation of social inequality as a result.
Looking at Language by
The volume presents an essential selection collected from the essays of Wolfgang Klein. In addition to journal and book articles, many of them published by Mouton, this book features new and unpublished texts by the author. It focuses, among other topics, on information structure, the expression of grammatical categories and the structure of learner varieties.
Mandarin Chinese Dual Language Immersion Programs by
This book discusses multiple aspects of Chinese dual language immersion programs, focusing on the Utah model. Themes include how to build a supportive classroom, the views of those involved, teacher identities, strategy use, corrective feedback, Chinese-character teaching, and the translanguaging phenomenon.
New Perspectives on Chinese Syntax by
Mandarin Chinese has become indispensable for crosslinguistic comparison and syntactic theorizing. It is nevertheless still difficult to obtain comprehensive answers to research questions, because Chinese is often presented as an "exotic" language defying the analytical tools standardly used for other languages. This book sets out to demystify Chinese. It places controversial issues in the context of current syntactic theories and offers precise analyses based on a large array of representative data. Although the focus is on Modern Mandarin, earlier stages of Chinese are occasionally referred to in order to highlight striking continuities in its history. VO order is one such constant factor, thus invalidating the idea that Chinese went through a major word order change from OV to VO and back to OV. Another claim often made for Chinese as an isolating language, viz. the existence of an impoverished inventory of parts of speech, is likewise refuted. Other long debated issues addressed here include the relevance of the dichotomy topic vs subject prominence and the role of Chinese as a recurring exception to crosscategorial harmonies posited in typological studies.
Periplus Pocket Japanese Dictionary by
It's never a good idea to be overly-relient on technology while traveling! Look up words quickly and easily with this great travel-sized Japanese dictionary. Intended for use by tourists, students, and businesspeople traveling to Japan, Pocket Japanese Dictionary is an essential tool for communicating in Japanese and a great way to learn Japanese. It's handy pocket format and easy-to-read type will make any future trip to Japan much easier. In addition to being an excellent English to Japanese and Japanese to English dictionary, Pocket Japanese Dictionary contains important notes on the Japanese language, Japanese grammar and Japanese pronunciation. All Japanese words are written in the Romanized form as well as Japanese script (hiragana and katakana) and characters (kanji) so that in the case of difficulties, the book can simply be shown to the person the user is trying to communicate with. This dictionary contains: The 4,500 most commonly used words in the Japanese language The latest computer, mobile, internet and social media terms Romanized Japanese and Japanese script (kanji and kana) English-Japanese and Japanese-English sections Designed for English speakers An introduction to and history of the Japanese language Information on Japanese grammar A guide to pronouncing Japanese correctly
Read Japanese kanji today : the easy way to learn the 400 basic kanji by
The method that has helped thousands—Read Japanese Kanji Today provides readers with a quick and simple method to learn kanji characters. Far from being a complex and mysterious script, Japanese writing is actually a simple and fascinating pictographic and ideographic system, easily understood and mastered. With the approach used in this easy-to-read, entertaining kanji book you'll soon be able to recognize and read over 400 kanji, whether or not you have any knowledge of Japanese grammar or the spoken Japanese language. The 400+ kanji characters stick in your mind thanks to an engaging text and illustrations that show the historical development and meaning of each character. The description of each kanji explains its origins and development, its modern uses, and how it is pronounced. Many examples of everyday usage are included. This new, expanded edition has added: Pronunciations Readings Vocabulary Stroke Order Practice BoxesUse Read Japanese Kanji Today to learn kanji quickly and painlessly!
Sign language, sustainable development, and equal opportunities by
Increased interaction between sign language communities and the mainstream societies in which they function is creating the potential for greater equality of opportunity for people who are deaf and hard of hearing. In this volume, renowned scholars and policy makers from around the world present innovative and groundbreaking perspectives on the relationships among sign language, sustainable development, and equal opportunities. The contributors to this volume offer creative and open-minded explorations of the construct of sustainability that are informed by their work with deaf individuals, deaf communities, families of deaf children, and other stakeholders. Sign Language, Sustainable Development, and Equal Opportunities describes sustainability in relation to: · identity, resilience, and well-being · participatory citizenship · historical perspectives on sign language use in educational contexts · sign language learning and teaching · human rights and inclusive education · literate thought and literacy · the sign language factor and the development of sign language communities in sub-Saharan Africa · sign language legislation These changing communities' understanding of what is required to become sustainable--in areas such as full participation and citizenship in society, economic well-being, access to quality education, and cultural and linguistic identity--is also taking new forms. This work contributes to the paradigm shifts regarding deaf emancipation and deaf education taking place around the world.
The Sign Language Interpreting Studies Reader by
In Sign Language Interpreting (SLI) there is a great need for a volume devoted to classic and seminal articles and essays dedicated to this specific domain of language interpreting. Students, educators, and practitioners will benefit from having access to a collection of historical and influential articles that contributed to the progress of the global SLI profession. In SLI there is a long history of outstanding research and scholarship, much of which is now out of print, or was published in obscure journals, or featured in publications that are no longer in print. These readings are significant to the progression of SLI as an academic discipline and a profession. As the years have gone by, many of these readings have been lost to students, educators, and practitioners because they are difficult to locate or unavailable, or because this audience simply does not know they exist. This volume brings together the seminal texts in our field that document the philosophical, evidence-based and analytical progression of SLI work.
Sign Languages of the World by
Sign Languages of the World is a one-of-a-kind handbook covering38 of the world's deaf sign languages and auxiliary sign languages. Each sign language has a dedicated chapter, written by experts for the volume. The book includes contributions from both deaf and hearing scholars.
Sign Multilingualism by
This volume has arisen from a three-part, five-year study on language contact among multilingual sign language users, which has three strands: cross-signing, sign-switching, and sign-speaking. These phenomena are only sparsely documented so far, and thus the volume is highly innovative and presents data and analyses not previously available.
Soft Power and the Worldwide Promotion of Chinese Language Learning by
This book evaluates China's attempts to exert soft power through the Confucius Institutes and other language-related activities. Although these have enhanced Chinese language learning and teaching, they have not necessarily improved China's standing on the global stage. The author examines the reasons for this and its implications.
Survival Chinese by
A handy Mandarin Chinese phrasebook and guide to the Chinese language, Survival Chinese contains basic vocabulary necessary for getting around. This book contains all the necessary words and phrases for speaking Mandarin Chinese in any kind of setting. Perfect for students, tourists, or business people learning Mandarin or traveling to China or Taiwan, it also contains a beginner guide to the Mandarin language, allowing for a deeper understanding of Chinese than a typical Mandarin phrasebook or Chinese dictionary. The book is broken into four basic sections: Common Chinese Expressions and Key Words, Essential Chinese Communication Tools, Chinese Travel Vocabulary, and making your own sentences. All Chinese words and phrases are written in Romanized form (pinyin) as well phonetically, making pronouncing Chinese a breeze. For example, the word for "reservation", yuding is also written as yuu-deeng. Authentic Chinese characters are also included so that in the case of difficulties the book can be shown to the person the user is trying to communicate with. Key features of Survival Chinese include: Hundreds of useful Chinese words and expressions. An A-Z index which allows the book to function as a English to Chinese dictionary. Romanized forms, phonetic spellings, and Chinese Characters (Hanzi) for all words and phrases. A concise background and history of the Chinese language. A complete guide to Chinese pronunciations. A concise guide to using Chinese tones. A brief introduction to Chinese grammar.
Survival Japanese by
A handy Japanese phrasebook and guide to the Japanese language, Survival Japanese contains basic vocabulary necessary for travelling in Japan. This book contains all the necessary words and phrases for speaking Japanese in any kind of setting. Perfect for students, tourists, or business people learning Japanese or travelling to Japan, it also contains a beginner guide to the Japanese language, allowing for a deeper understanding of Japanese than a typical Japanese phrasebook or Japanese dictionary. The phrase book is broken into two basic sections: Common Japanese Expressions and Key Words, and Japanese Pronunciation Guides for Key Japanese Names and Signs. All Japanese words and phrases are written in Romanized form as well phonetically, making pronouncing Japanese a breeze. For example, the word for "hotel", hoteru is also written as hoe-tay-rue. Authentic Japanese script (Kanji and Kana) is also included so that in the case of difficulties the book can be shown to the person the user is trying to communicate with. Key features of Survival Japanese include: Hundreds of useful Japanese words and expressions. Up-to-date expressions for the internet, mobile, and social media Romanized forms, phonetic spellings, and Japanese script (Kanji and Kana) for all words and phrases. A concise background and history of the Japanese language. A pronunciation guide for Japanese words including long vowels, double consonants, and accents. A guide to Japanese grammar including word order, questions, singular vs. plural, and formal, vs. informal.
Writing and Literacy in Chinese, Korean and Japanese by
The book describes how the three East Asian writing systems-Chinese, Korean, and Japanese- originated, developed, and are used today. Uniquely, this book: (1) examines the three East Asian scripts (and English) together in relation to each other, and (2) discusses how these scripts are, and historically have been, used in literacy and how they are learned, written, read, and processed by the eyes, the brain, and the mind. In this second edition, the authors have included recent research findings on the uses of the scripts, added several new sections, and rewritten several other sections. They have also added a new Part IV to deal with issues that similarly involve all the four languages/scripts of their interest. The book is intended both for the general public and for interested scholars. Technical terms (listed in a glossary) are used only when absolutely necessary.
Foreign Language : French, Spanish
Foreign Language teaches students communicative competence in any one of these foreign languages: French, Spanish for practical and business situations in the arts and culture context, especially in connecting art practitioners to art institutions and to audiences.
Another option is Sign Language. The purpose of this course is to enable students to begin to acquire proficiency in Sign Language. Emphasis is placed on the development of receptive and expressive signing skills and on the acquisition of the fundamentals of applied grammar.
501 Essential French Verbs by
Learning another language can be a rewarding but daunting task, especially in terms of verbs and their many tenses, irregularities, and exceptions. This handy compilation of more than 500 common French verbs will benefit beginners, advanced students, and everyone in between. Each page focuses on an individual verb, presenting full conjugations of multiple tenses, plus several sentences that illustrate the verb's usage. This book is equally suitable as a classroom text or as a guide to independent study.
Berlitz French in 30 Days by
This newly designed, beginner-level French audio course is ideal for language learners looking for a fun and effective course with short, manageable daily lessons. Lessons are in a fun, diary-like format, designed to fit seamlessly into your daily schedule. The audio CD runs for 60 minutes and the contents can be easily downloaded to your iPod or MP3 player. Following through the lessons transports you to life in France where you will learn how to meet and greet people, carry out everyday tasks, and find and start work. Exercises and examples progressively build a solid foundation of essential grammar and vocabulary alongside knowledge of the country and its culture.
Complete French Grammar by
Build your confidence in your French skills with practice, practice, practice! From present tense regular verbs to double object pronouns, this comprehensive guide and workbook covers all those aspects of French grammar that you might find a little intimidating or hard to remember. Practice Makes Perfect: Complete French Grammar focuses on the practical aspects of French as it's really spoken, so you are not bogged down by unnecessary technicalities. Each unit features crystal-clear explanations, numerous realistic examples, and dozens of engaging exercises in a variety of formats--including multiple choice, fill-in sentences and passages, sentence rewrites, and creative writing--perfect for whatever your learning style. Whenever possible, explanations include comparisons you to understand the basic logic behind the rules and to remember correct usage. This new edition includes: Time-saving vocabulary panels that eliminate having to look words up Advice on how to avoid common mistakes A detailed answer key for quick, easy progress checks Offering a winning formula for getting a handle on French grammar right away, Practice Makes Perfect: Complete French Grammar your ultimate resource for learning to speak French the way the native speakers do.
Deaf Eyes on Interpreting by
As the ASL-English interpreting field has become professionalized, there is a growing disconnect between interpreters and the Deaf consumers they serve. Whereas interpreting used to be a community-based practice, the field is growing into a research-based profession that begins in a classroom rather than in the Deaf community. Despite the many gains being made in the interpreting services profession, with an emphasis on the accuracy of the interpreted work, the perspectives of Deaf individuals are rarely documented in the literature. Opportunities for enhanced participation and full inclusion need to be considered in order for Deaf people to best represent themselves to the hearing, nonsigning public as competent and intelligent individuals. Deaf Eyes on Interpreting brings Deaf people to the forefront of the discussions about what constitutes quality interpreting services. The contributors are all Deaf professionals who use interpreters on a regular basis, and their insights and recommendations are based on research as well as on personal experiences. These multiple perspectives reveal strategies to maximize access to interpreted work and hearing environments and to facilitate trust and understanding between interpreters and Deaf consumers. Interpreter educators, interpreting students, professional interpreters, and Deaf individuals will all benefit from the approaches offered in this collection.
French by
Lonely Planet: The world's leading travel guide publisher Many visitors to France get around without speaking a word of French, but just a few phrases go a long way in making friends, inviting service with a smile, and ensuring a rich and rewarding travel experience - you could discover a cosy vineyard off the tourist track, experience a sublime meal, or grab that great shopping bargain. Essential phrases to meet all your travel needs How to get local recommendations Easy-to-use pronunciation guides Expert tips to boost your confidence Lonely Planet gets you to the heart of a place. Our job is to make amazing travel experiences happen. We visit the places we write about each and every edition. We never take freebies for positive coverage, so you can always rely on us to tell it like it is. Authors: Written and researched by Lonely Planet, Michael Janes, Jean-Bernard Carillet, and Jean-Pierre Masclef. About Lonely Planet: Started in 1973, Lonely Planet has become the world's leading travel guide publisher with guidebooks to every destination on the planet, as well as an award-winning website, a suite of mobile and digital travel products, and a dedicated traveller community. Lonely Planet's mission is to enable curious travellers to experience the world and to truly get to the heart of the places they find themselves in. TripAdvisor Travelers' Choice Awards 2012 and 2013 winner in Favorite Travel Guide category 'Lonely Planet guides are, quite simply, like no other.' - New York Times 'Lonely Planet. It's on everyone's bookshelves; it's in every traveller's hands. It's on mobile phones. It's on the Internet. It's everywhere, and it's telling entire generations of people how to travel the world.' - Fairfax Media (Australia)
French All-In-One for Dummies, with CD by
Your comprehensive guide to speaking, reading, and writing in French French is a beautiful language but can be quite difficult to learn. Whether you need to learn the language for a French class, or for business or leisure travel, French for Dummies All-In-One makes it easier. With nearly 800 pages, French All-in-One For Dummies is for those readers looking for a comprehensive guide to help them immerse themselves in the French language. Culls vital information from several Dummies titles, offering you a comprehensive, all-encompassing guide to speaking and using French Includes French Canadian content and enhanced practiced opportunities Its accompanying audio CD provides you with en effective tool to start speaking French right away Both new students of French and experienced speakers can benefit from the wealth of information that has been included in French All-in-One For Dummies. CD-ROM/DVD and other supplementary materials are not included as part of the e-book file, but are available for download after purchase.
French Conversation by
Learn how to speak French fluently and spontaneously Practice Makes Perfect: French Conversation gives you helpful instruction on correct pronunciation, grammar, syntax, and word usage, keeping in mind the typical problems of native English speakers like you. Each section includes a series of exercises that gives you extra practice in using new concepts and encourages you to construct personalized conversations. The lessons will reassure even grammar-phobic learners that you can achieve a confident speaking style. Offering a winning formula for getting a handle on speaking French right away, Practice Makes Perfect: French Conversation offers: Engaging dialogues illustrate practical conversational situations Example phrases or sentences clarify each point A variety of exercises for practice, with an answer key that provides instant feedback and reference Practical and high-frequency vocabulary used throughout
French demystified by
Lick your French-language problems with DeMYSTiFieD! Want to figure out French but don't know where to start? No problem! Just use French DeMYSTiFieD, Second Edition and--voil#65533;!--learning the language gets a whole lot easier. Written in a step-by-step format, this practical guide provides a firm foundation in French-language basics. You'll move on to mastering subjects such as using verbs, asking questions, telling time, counting, and more. Detailed examples and concise explanations make it easy to understand the material, and end-of-chapter quizzes and a final exam help reinforce learning. It's a no brainer. You'll learn: Pronunciation Special Characters Definite Articles Conjugations Pronouns And more Topics include: French Pronunciation,Identifying Things,Asking Questions,To Be or To Have, That is the Question,Describing Things,Telling Time,Expressing Possibilities, Wishes, and Abilities,Getting Acquainted,Talking About the Immediate Future and Past, Using Pronomial Verbs,All About Pronouns,Talking About the Past with the Pass#65533;, Talking About the Past with the Imparfait,All About Prepositions,Indicating Possession,Using The Infinitive, Present Participle, and Passive Voice,Making Suggestions and Hypotheses,Knowing Who is Whom with Relative Pronouns,The Subjunctive Mood
French for Dummies, with CD by
The fast, informal way to learn to speak French - withintegrated audio clips throughout. Listento pronunciations and conversations. French is a beautiful language but quite difficult to learn.Whether you need to learn the language for a French class, or youtravel overseas for business or leisure, this enhanced edition ofFrench for Dummies can help. Written in an easy-to-followformat, with integrated audio clips, it gives you just whatyou need for basic communication in French. The enhanced editionincludes: Expanded coverage of necessary grammar, vocabulary, andpronunciations Useful exercises, practice questions, and amini-dictionary Business, an upcoming class, travel ? whatever your reasonfor wanting to learn a new language but don't have time to take aclass, this enhanced edition of French For Dummies can get you wellon your way to becoming fluent in no time!
French for the IB MYP 4&5 (Phases 1-2): by Concept by
Develop your skills to become an inquiring learner; ensure you navigate the MYP framework with confidence using a concept-driven and assessment-focused approach to French, presented in global contexts.· Develop conceptual understanding with key MYP concepts and related concepts at the heart of each chapter. · Learn by asking questions for a statement of inquiry in each chapter. · Prepare for every aspect of assessment using support and tasks designed by experienced educators.· Understand how to extend your learning through research projects and interdisciplinary opportunities.· Think internationally with chapters and concepts set in global contexts.
French Grammar for Dummies by
The easy way to master French grammar French Grammar For Dummies is a logical extension andcomplement to the successful language learning book, French ForDummies. In plain English, it teaches you the grammatical rulesof the French language, including parts of speech, sentenceconstruction, pronouns, adjectives, punctuation, stress and verbtenses, and moods. Throughout the book, you get plenty of practiceopportunities to help you on your goal of mastering basic Frenchgrammar and usage. Grasp the grammatical rules of French including parts ofspeech, sentence construction, and verb tenses Enhance your descriptive speech with adverbs, adjectives, andprepositions Benefit from plenty of practice opportunities throughout thebook Use the French language confidently and correctly Whether you're a student studying French or a professionallooking to get ahead of the pack by learning a second language,French Grammar For Dummies is your hands-on guide to quicklyand painlessly master the written aspect of this popularlanguage.
French in Action by
French in Action is a model for video-based language instruction, and the new edition updates the text and workbook for today's students. Since it was first published, French in Action: A Beginning Course in Language and Culture--The Capretz Method has been widely recognized in the field as a model for video-based foreign-language instructional materials. The third edition has been revised by Pierre Capretz and Barry Lydgate and includes new, contemporary illustrations throughout and more-relevant information for today's students in the Documents sections of each lesson. A completely new feature is a journal by the popular character Marie-Laure, who observes and humorously comments on the political, cultural, and technological changes in the world between 1985 and today. The new edition also incorporates more content about the entire Francophone world. In use by hundreds of colleges, universities, and high schools, French in Action remains a powerful educational resource, and the third edition updates the course for a new generation of learners.
Interpretation skills : English to American sign language by 
Lonely Planet French Phrasebook & Dictionary by
Lonely Planet: The world's #1 phrasebook publisher* Lonely Planet French Phrasebook & Dictionary is your handy passport to culturally enriching travels with the most relevant and useful French phrases and vocabulary for all your travel needs. Ask about tucked-away vineyards, bargain with local famers at the market or order wine like a professional; all with your trusted travel companion. With language tools in your back pocket,you can truly get to the heart of wherever you go, so begin your journey now! Get More From Your Trip with Easy-to-Find Phrases for Every Travel Situation! - Feel at ease with essential tips on culture, manners, idioms and multiple meanings - Order with confidence, explain food allergies, and try new foods with the menu decoder - Save time and hassles with vital phrases at your fingertips - Never get stuck for words with the 3500-word two-way, quick-reference dictionary - Be prepared for both common and emergency travel situations with practical phrases and terminology - Meet friends with conversation starter phrases - Get your message across with easy-to-use pronunciation guides Inside Lonely Planet French Phrasebook & Dictionary : - Full-colour throughout - User-friendly layout organised by travel scenario categories - Survival phrases inside front cover for at-a-glance on-the-fly cues - Convenient features - 5 Phrases to Learn Before You Go - 10 Ways to Start a Sentence - 10 Phrases to Sound like a Local - Listen For - phrases you may hear - Look For - phrases you may see on signs - Shortcuts - easy-to-remember alternatives to the full phrases - Q&A - suggested answers to questions asked - Covers - Basics - time, dates, numbers, amounts, pronunciation, reading tips, grammar rules - Practical - travel with kids, disabled travellers, sightseeing, business, banking, post office, internet, phones, repairs, bargaining, accommodation, directions, border crossing, transport - Social - meeting people, interests, feelings, opinions,going out, romance, culture, activities, weather - Safe Travel - emergencies, police, doctor, chemist, dentist, symptoms, conditions - Food - ordering, at the market, at the bar, dishes, ingredients The Perfect Choice: Lonely Planet French Phrasebook & Dictionary , a pocket-sized comprehensive language guide, provides on-the-go language assistance; great for language students and travellers looking to interact with locals and immerse themselves in local culture. - Looking for just the basics? Check out Lonely Planet's Fast Talk French, a pocket-sized, essential language guide designed to get you talking quickly; perfect for a quick trip experience. - Looking for an auditory guide to pronunciations? Check out Lonely Planet's French Phrasebook & Audio CD. Authors: Written and researched by Lonely Planet, Michael Janes, Jean-Pierre Masclef, Jean-Bernard Carillet. About Lonely Planet: Started in 1973, Lonely Planet is the world's leading travel guide publisher with guidebooks to every destination on the planet, and has been connecting travellers and locals for over 25 years with phrasebooks for 120 languages, more than any other publisher! With an award-winning website, a suite of mobile and digital travel products, and a dedicated traveller community, Lonely Planet enables curious travellers to experience the world and to truly get to the heart of the places they find themselves. The world awaits! *#1 phrasebook publisher. Source: Nielsen Bookscan UK, US & AUS
The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies in Language by
Language development, and the challenges it can present for individuals who are deaf or hard-of-hearing, have long been a focus of research, theory, and practice in D/deaf studies and deaf education. Over the past 150 years, but most especially near the end of the 20th and beginning of the21st century, advances in the acquisition and development of language competencies and skills have been increasing rapidly.This volume addresses many of those accomplishments as well as remaining challenges and new questions that have arisen from multiple perspectives: theoretical, linguistic, social-emotional, neuro-biological, and socio-cultural. The contributors comprise an international group of prominent scholarsand practitioners from a variety of academic and clinical backgrounds. The result is a volume that addresses, in detail, current knowledge, emerging questions, and innovative educational practice in a variety of contexts. The volume takes on topics such as discussion of the transformation of effortsto identify a "best" language approach (the "sign" versus "speech" debate) to a stronger focus on individual strengths, potentials, and choices for selecting and even combining approaches; the effects of language on other areas of development as well as effects from other domains on language itself;and how neurological, socio-cognitive, and linguistic bases of learning are leading to more specialized approaches to instruction that address the challenges that remain for deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals. This volume both complements and extends The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies and DeafEducation, Volumes 1 and 2, going further into the unique challenges and demands for deaf or hard-of-hearing individuals than any other text and providing not only compilations of what is known but setting the course for investigating what is still to be learned.
Practice Make Perfect French Vocabulary by
Master the words and phrases necessary for handling everyday situations Practice Makes Perfect: French Vocabulary helps you develop your vocabulary by providing practice in word-building and encouraging you to analyze new words for an ever-increasing vocabulary. Each chapter of this comprehensive book focuses on a theme, such as family or travel, so you can build your language skills in a systematic manner. As you lay the foundation for an increasing vocabulary, you are able to perfect your new words with plenty of exercises and gain the confidence to communicate well in French. Practice Makes Perfect: French Vocabulary offers you: More than 120 exercises Concise grammatical explanations A new chapter on contemporary vocabulary An answer key to gauge your comprehension With help from this book, you can easily speak or write in French about: Different occupations and jobs * French holidays and traditions * Taking the train * Growing your own garden * Where it hurts on your body * Your house * Your family and friends * What you studied in school * Your favorite TV show * Your family's background . . . and much more!
Practice Makes Perfect: Intermediate French Grammar by
Master French grammar through hands-on exercises and practice, practice, practice! Practice Makes Perfect: Intermediate French Grammar helps you take your grammar skills to a higher level and gives you the confidence to speak and write in your new language. This workbook leads you through French grammar using concise, easy-to-understand language, keeping you focused on achieving your goal of total fluency. Practice Makes Perfect: Intermediate French Grammar is packed with: Example sentences that illustrate and clarify each grammatical point Hundreds of exercises in formats suited to your learning style Practical and high-frequency French vocabulary Master these tricky subjects: Prepositions and prepositional phrases * Idiomatic uses of irregular verbs * Negative and interrogative structures * Imparfait and passe compose * The subjunctive mood * Relative pronouns
Say It Right in French by
Say farewell to language faux pas forever! Based on the revolutionary Easily Pronounced Language Systems approach, Say It Right in French makes mastering correct French pronunciation simple. With Say It Right you'll learn how to use hundreds of French words and phrases in everyday conversation. This amazing guide gives you easy-to-read vowel symbols that, when combined with consonants, make pronunciation easy. This second edition is enhanced by a new chapter that applies the Say It Right! "PhraseMaker" approach to common verbs. With Say It Right in French you will: Learn more than 500 essential French words and phrases Easily create sentences using "Phrasemakers" Get a quick reference to more than 500 word pronunciations in the Say It Right travel dictionary
Side-By-Side French and English Grammar, 3rd Edition by
A simple approach for learning French grammar by comparing it to your first language, English! Side-by-Side French and English Grammar present explanations of the essential elements of French grammar alongside their English-language equivalents. This method allows you to build on what you already know; not only do you learn French grammar but also enjoy the added benefit of strengthening your grammar skills in your native tongue! Each lesson clearly explains functions and uses of the different parts of speech and includes abundant examples for each entry. Because the vocabulary is limited to frequently used words, you can concentrate more on a sentence's structure instead of becoming tangled in its meaning. A "Quick Check" section summarizes main ideas in each section and helps you retain the most important information. This third edition features a new exercise section to further reinforce what you have learned.
Signed Language Interpreting in the 21st Century by
This text provides interpreting students with a broad knowledge base that encompasses the latest research, addresses current trends and perspectives of the Deaf community, and promotes critical thinking and open dialogue about the working conditions, ethics, boundaries, and competencies needed by a highly qualified interpreter in various settings. This volume expands the resources available to aspiring interpreters, including Deaf interpreters, and incorporates the voices of renowned experts on topics relevant to today's practitioners. Each chapter provides students with objectives, keywords, and discussion questions. The chapters convey clear information about topics that include credentialing, disposition and aptitude for becoming an interpreter, interpreting for people who are DeafBlind, and working within specialty settings, such as legal and healthcare. A key resource for interpreter certification test preparation, this text follows the interpreter's ethical, practical, and professional development through a career of lifelong learning and service.
Sign Language Interpreting in the Workplace by
The last forty years have seen a dramatic change in the nature of work, with deaf people increasingly moving into white collar or office-based professions. The rise of deaf professionals has led to employment opportunities for signed language interpreters across a variety of workplace settings, creating a unique set of challenges that require specialized strategies. Aspects such as social interaction between employees, the unwritten patterns and rules of workplace behavior, hierarchical structures, and the changing dynamics of deaf employee/interpreter relationships place constraints upon the interpreter's role and interpreting performance. Jules Dickinson's examination of interpreted workplace interactions is based on the only detailed, empirical study of this setting to date. Using practitioner responses and transcripts of real-life interpreted workplace interactions, Dickinson's findings demonstrate the complexity of the interpreter's role and responsibilities. The book concentrates on the ways in which signed language interpreters affect the interaction between deaf and hearing employees in team meetings by focusing on humor, small talk, and the collaborative floor. Signed Language Interpreting in the Workplace demonstrates that deaf employees require highly skilled professionals to enable them to integrate into the workplace on a level equal with their hearing peers. It also provides actionable insights for interpreters in workplace settings that will be a valuable resource for interpreting students, practitioners, interpreter trainers, and researchers.
Foreign Language : French, Spanish
Foreign Language teaches students communicative competence in any one of these foreign languages: French, Spanish for practical and business situations in the arts and culture context, especially in connecting art practitioners to art institutions and to audiences.
Another option is Sign Language. The purpose of this course is to enable students to begin to acquire proficiency in Sign Language. Emphasis is placed on the development of receptive and expressive signing skills and on the acquisition of the fundamentals of applied grammar.
The Acquisition of French As a Second Language by
Within the field of second language acquisition, interest in the acquisition of French as a second language has a long-standing tradition, especially in the European context. The aim of this book is to offer a synthesis of current research within this area. It contains contributions from different researchers in the field, including studies on the acquisition of grammar, formulaic language, lexis and pragmatic devices, and covering interlanguage development from beginner level up to very advanced, presumably near-native levels of proficiency. The learners in the studies reported in the volume represent different L1 backgrounds and age groups. The chapters shed light on current issues in research on second language acquisition from different theoretical perspectives, and contribute to a better understanding of L2 French and SLA in general. The volume should be of interest for students, teachers and researchers of L2 French and SLA.Originally published in "Language, Interaction and Acquisition" 3:1 (2012)
The Acquisition of Spanish in Understudied Language Pairings by
By examining the acquisition of Spanish in combination with languages other than English (Arabic, Basque, Catalan, Chinese, Dutch, Farsi, French, German, Nahuatl, Quechua, Portuguese, Swedish, Turkish), this volume advances novel data pertinent to the field's understanding of acquisition of Spanish in the XXI century. Its crosslinguistic nature invites us to reconsider major theoretical questions such as the role of L1 transfer, linguistic typology, and onset of acquisition from a fresh perspective, and to question the validity of the traditional parameter (re)setting perspective taken in SLA. Additionally, this volume underscores the necessity of providing accurate descriptions of the language pairings investigated, emphasizing the interconnection between linguistic and SLA theory, and pushing us to a more atomic view of the system in which features and feature bundles mapped onto lexical items comprise the skeleton of language. This volume is of great relevance for researchers and students of SLA alike.
The Conceptualization of Counterfactuality in L1 and L2 : Grammatical Devices and Semantic Implications in French, Spanish and Italian by
Counterfactual thinking is a universal cognitive process in which reality is compared to an imagined view of what might have been. This type of reasoning is at the center of daily operations, as decision-making, risk preventability or blame assignment. More generally, non-factual scenarios have been defined as a crucial ingredient of desire and modern love. If the areas covered by this reasoning are so varied, the L2 learner will be led to express 'what might have been' at some point of her acquisitional itinerary. How is this reasoning expressed in French, Spanish and Italian? By the use of what lexical, syntactic and grammatical devices? Will the learner combine these devices as the native French speakers do? What are the L1 features likely to fossilize in the L2 grammar? What are the information principles governing a communicative task based on the production of counterfactual scenarios? These are some of the questions addressed by the present volume.
English Pronunciation for Speakers of Spanish by
English Pronunciation for Speakers of Spanish fills a gaping hole in the market for books on English phonetics and pronunciation because it not only combines theoretical issues and applications to practice, but it also adopts a contrastive English-Spanish approach to better suit the needs of Spanish-speaking learners of English (SSLE), enabling them to build gradually on the knowledge gained in each chapter. The book covers the key concepts of English phonetics and phonology in seven chapters written in an accessible and engaging style: 1. Phonetics and Phonology 2. The Production and Classification of Speech Sounds 3. Vowels and Glides 4. Consonants 5. Segment Dynamics: Aspects of Connected Speech 6. Beyond the Segment: Stress and Intonation 7. Predicting Pronunciation from Spelling (and vice versa) Features: in-text audio illustrations, as well as over a hundred written and audio exercises with corresponding keys and different kinds of artwork (Tables, Figures, illustrations, spectrograms, etc.) classic readings in the discipline in the Further Reading section of each chapter highlights the phonetic contrasts and specific cues that are more important to aid comprehension in English and offers guidelines on "correct" pronunciation habits to help SSLE sound as close as possible to native English The book's companion website, EPSS Multimedia Lab, can be used on computers, smartphones and tablets, and is useful for the self-taught student and the busy lecturer alike. Features of the website: a complete sound bank defining and illustrating the sounds of English RP as compared with those of Peninsular Spanish written definitions and animated diagrams, videos and original recordings (by native speakers of English and Spanish) showing the articulation of each sound, alongside its most common spellings, as well as pronunciation practice for individual words and whole sentences a comprehensive selection of over a hundred written and audio exercises (with their keys) for practice both at home or in the language lab audio files corresponding to the audio illustrations given in the written book a repository of useful resources by topics and a list of online glossaries and pronunciation dictionaries
The French Language in Russia by
-- With support from the Arts and Humanities Research Council of the UK and the Deutsches Historisches Institut Moskau --The French Language in Russia provides the fullest examination and discussion to date of the adoption of the French language by the elites of imperial Russia during the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries. It is interdisciplinary, approaching its subject from the angles of various kinds of history and historical sociolinguistics. Beyond its bearing on some of the grand narratives of Russian thought and literature, this book may afford more general insight into the social, political, cultural, and literary implications and effects of bilingualism in a speech community over a long period. It should also enlarge understanding of francophonie as a pan-European phenomenon. On the broadest plane, it has significance in an age of unprecedented global connectivity, for it invites us to look beyond the experience of a single nation and the social groups and individuals within it in order to discover how languages and the cultures and narratives associated with them have been shared across national boundaries.
French Verbs by
Knowing and understanding verbs is often the key to a language. Concentrate and study on French verbs using this 6 page laminated guide designed for quick access, easy review and focus on what many learners see as their most difficult hurdle. A student reviewing often will boost their grades and if that student is a traveler, the native speakers will appreciate the extra effort to understand and communicate in their language. Suggested uses: o Students - a very lightweight, inexpensive grade-booster that can be slipped between your notebook pages for quick and easy answers o Teachers - Inexpensive classroom tool, whether you have a few for those students struggling or a whole class set that can last your entire career with the durable lamination o Travelers - Being flat, laminated and with conjugations being easy to find, if you have moved beyond one word translations and are striving to speak correctly, this is a great travel buddy
Lacandon Maya-Spanish-English Dictionary by
Around 1700 AD the Lacandon Maya took refuge in the forest lowlands of Chiapas, Mexico, and in western Petén, Guatemala. They were never conquered by the Spanish and thus maintained many of their cultural practices well into the twentieth century. Their language belongs to the Yucatecan branch of the Maya language, a branch that is believed to have begun to diversify at least one thousand years ago. Today the Lancandon are split into northern and southern linguistic groups. This dictionary focuses on the southern Lacandon of Lacanjá. Following the same trilingual format as Hofling's Mopan Maya-Spanish-English Dictionary, this reference contains pronunciation and grammatical information. It is a hybrid of a root dictionary and one with words in alphabetical order; words can be looked up in these two different ways, making it easy to use for both native and nonnative speakers. It also accommodates Spanish speakers who wish to learn Lacandon, and in the future is likely to be helpful to Lacandon-speaking children, who increasingly use Spanish outside the home, while preserving a record of this indigenous language.
Language loyalty and linguistic variation : a study in Spanish Cantabria by 
The Meaning of Space in Sign Language by
Bringing together sign language linguistics and the semantics-pragmatics interface, this book focuses on the use of signing space in Catalan Sign Language (LSC). On the basis of small-scale corpus data, it provides an exhaustive description of referential devices dependent on space. The book provides insight into the study of meaning in the visual-spatial modality and into our understanding of the discourse behavior of spatial locations.
The Oxford handbook of deaf studies in language by
Language development, and the challenges it can present for individuals who are deaf or hard-of-hearing, have long been a focus of research, theory, and practice in D/deaf studies and deaf education. Over the past 150 years, but most especially near the end of the 20th and beginning of the 21st century, advances in the acquisition and development of language competencies and skills have been increasing rapidly.This volume addresses many of those accomplishments as well as remaining challenges and new questions that have arisen from multiple perspectives: theoretical, linguistic, social-emotional, neuro-biological, and socio-cultural. Contributors comprise an international group of prominent scholars and practitioners from a variety of academic and clinical backgrounds. The result is a volume that addresses, in detail, current knowledge, emerging questions, and innovative educational practice in a variety of contexts. The volume takes on topics such as discussion of the transformation of efforts to identify a "best" language approach (the "sign" versus "speech" debate) to a stronger focus on individual strengths, potentials, and choices for selecting and even combining approaches; the effects of language on other areas of development as well as effects from other domains on language itself; and how neurological, socio-cognitive, and linguistic bases of learning are leading to more specialized approaches to instruction that address the challenges that remain for deaf and hard-of-hearing individuals. This volume both complements and extends The Oxford Handbook of Deaf Studies and Deaf Education, Volumes 1 and 2, going further into the unique challenges and demands for deaf or hard-of-hearing individuals than any other text and providing not only compilations of what is known but setting the course for investigating what is still to be learned.
The prosthetic tongue : printing technology and the rise of the French language by
In The Prosthetic Tongue, Katie Chenoweth explores the relationship between printing and vernacular language as it took shape in sixteenth-century France and charts the technological reinvention of French across a range of domains, from typography, orthography, and grammar to politics, pedagogy, and poetics.
SignGram Blueprint by
We gratefully acknowledge the financial support of COST (European Cooperation in Science and Technology), funded by the Horizon 2020 Framework Programme of the European Union. Current grammatical knowledge about particular sign languages is fragmentary and of varying reliability, and it appears scattered in scientific publications where the description is often intertwined with the analysis. In general, comprehensive grammars are a rarity. The SignGram Blueprint is an innovative tool for the grammar writer: a full-fledged guide to describing all components of the grammars of sign languages in a thorough and systematic way, and with the highest scientific standards. The work builds on the existing knowledge in Descriptive Linguistics, but also on the insights from Theoretical Linguistics. It consists of two main parts running in parallel: the Checklist with all the grammatical features and phenomena the grammar writer can address, and the accompanying Manual with the relevant background information (definitions, methodological caveats, representative examples, tests, pointers to elicitation materials and bibliographical references). The areas covered are Phonology, Morphology, Lexicon, Syntax and Meaning. The Manual is endowed with hyperlinks that connect information across the work and with a pop-up glossary. The SignGram Blueprint will be a landmark for the description of sign language grammars in terms of quality and quantity.
Sign language, sustainable development, and equal opportunities by
Increased interaction between sign language communities and the mainstream societies in which they function is creating the potential for greater equality of opportunity for people who are deaf and hard of hearing. In this volume, renowned scholars and policy makers from around the world present innovative and groundbreaking perspectives on the relationships among sign language, sustainable development, and equal opportunities. The contributors to this volume offer creative and open-minded explorations of the construct of sustainability that are informed by their work with deaf individuals, deaf communities, families of deaf children, and other stakeholders. Sign Language, Sustainable Development, and Equal Opportunities describes sustainability in relation to: · identity, resilience, and well-being · participatory citizenship · historical perspectives on sign language use in educational contexts · sign language learning and teaching · human rights and inclusive education · literate thought and literacy · the sign language factor and the development of sign language communities in sub-Saharan Africa · sign language legislation These changing communities' understanding of what is required to become sustainable--in areas such as full participation and citizenship in society, economic well-being, access to quality education, and cultural and linguistic identity--is also taking new forms. This work contributes to the paradigm shifts regarding deaf emancipation and deaf education taking place around the world.
Sign Languages of the World by
Sign Languages of the World is a one-of-a-kind handbook covering38 of the world's deaf sign languages and auxiliary sign languages. Each sign language has a dedicated chapter, written by experts for the volume. The book includes contributions from both deaf and hearing scholars.
Spanish Language Use and Public Life in the United States by
The Contributions to the Sociology of Language series features publications dealing with sociolinguistic theory, methods, findings and applications. It addresses the study of language in society in its broadest sense, as a truly international and interdisciplinary field in which various approaches - theoretical and empirical - supplement and complement each other. The series invites the attention of scholars interested in language in society from a broad range of disciplines - anthropology, education, history, linguistics, political science, and sociology. To discuss your book idea or submit a proposal, please contact Natalie Fecher.
Spanish Loanwords in the English Language by
The future of English linguistics as envisaged by the editors of Topics in English Linguistics lies in empirical studies, which integrate work in English linguistics into general and theoretical linguistics on the one hand, and comparative linguistics on the other. The TiEL series features volumes that present interesting new data and analyses, and above all fresh approaches that contribute to the overall aim of the series, which is to further outstanding research in English linguistics. For further publications in English linguistics see also our Dialects of English book series. To discuss your book idea or submit a proposal, please contact Natalie Fecher.
Spanish verbs : conjugations by
The key to learning the Spanish language is the ability to conjugate Spanish verbs. This 6-page laminated guide offers easy-to-read tables of conjugations for the 15 verb tenses and moods, with the changes bolded for quick reference. Sixty verbs and their meanings are included, with the irregular tenses and moods listed for each verb. Using the example conjugations, this guide becomes a powerful key to unlocking Spanish for communication. Suggested uses: • Students – a very lightweight, inexpensive grade-booster that can be slipped between your notebook pages for quick and easy answers • Teachers – Inexpensive classroom tool • Travelers – Being flat, laminated and with conjugations being easy to find, this is a great travel buddy
Speaking Spanish in the US : The Sociopolitics of Language by
This book introduces readers to basic concepts of sociolinguistics with a focus on Spanish in the US. The coverage goes beyond linguistics to examine the history and politics of Spanish in the US, the relationship of language to Latinx identities, and how language ideologies and policies reflect and shape societal views of Spanish and its speakers. Accessible to those with no linguistic background, this book provides students with a foundation in the study of language and society, and the opportunity to relate theoretical concepts to Spanish in the US in a range of contexts, including everyday speech, contemporary culture, media, education and policy. The book is a substantially revised and expanded 2nd edition of Spanish Speakers in the USA, including new chapters on the history of Spanish in the US, the demographics of Spanish in the US, and language policy; and expanded chapters on language ideologies, race, identity, media, and education.
The Structure of Modern Standard French : A Student Grammar by
This book is an advanced student's grammar of French that integrates traditional grammar with knowledge and insights from modern linguistics. Maj-Britt Mosegaard Hansen takes a structural approach to French grammar: she provides clear descriptions of grammatical rules based explicitly on syntactic structure, and places descriptive emphasis on instances where the grammatical structures of French differ from those used in corresponding contexts in English. The firstpart of the book provides an introduction to French sentence structure, before the following parts examine the grammar of verbs, nominals, particles, and clauses and sentences.The Structure of Modern Standard French will be a valuable resource for students of French at undergraduate level and beyond. It assumes some prior knowledge of French grammar but is designed to be accessible to those with no background in linguistics.
Understanding Core French Grammar by
This book contains an explanatory treatment of the core areas of difficulty for the English speaking learner of French. It deals with the key issues in tense formation and use and verbal structures and processes such as negation, passives and subjunctives along with a highly exemplified treatment of pronouns and a section dealing with adjectives and other elements of the grammar.It fills a gap between general text books of French in which grammatical issues are frequently treated piecemeal and scattered throughout the book in between more communicative information on one hand and exhaustive reference grammars aimed at graduate and research students on the other which would be beyond the level of intellectual maturity of most school children and some non-specialist undergraduates.It has the advantage of treating each grammatical issue in detail but without being too long-winded, explaining the systems and processes which underlie the facts of the language. The emphasis is on explanation and not merely the listing of facts, enabling the learner to master the system and become an independent user of the language. It could be used highly successfully either as a classroom aid alongside the more usual textbooks which are organized typically around topics and themes in society or for self-study for the committed individual learner of any age. There are extensive exercises and answers for all topics covered.
Émigrés : French words that turned English by
The fascinating history of French words that have entered the English language and the fertile but fraught relationship between English- and French-speaking cultures across the world English has borrowed more words from French than from any other modern foreign language. French words and phrases--such as à la mode, ennui, naïveté and caprice--lend English a certain je-ne-sais-quoi that would otherwise elude the language. Richard Scholar examines the continuing history of untranslated French words in English and asks what these words reveal about the fertile but fraught relationship that England and France have long shared and that now entangles English- and French-speaking cultures all over the world. Émigrés demonstrates that French borrowings have, over the centuries, "turned" English in more ways than one. From the seventeenth-century polymath John Evelyn's complaint that English lacks "words that do so fully express" the French ennui and naïveté, to George W. Bush's purported claim that "the French don't have a word for entrepreneur," this unique history of English argues that French words have offered more than the mere seasoning of the occasional mot juste. They have established themselves as "creolizing keywords" that both connect English speakers to--and separate them from--French. Moving from the realms of opera to ice cream, the book shows how migrant French words are never the same again for having ventured abroad, and how they complete English by reminding us that it is fundamentally incomplete. At a moment of resurgent nationalism in the English-speaking world, Émigrés invites native Anglophone readers to consider how much we owe the French language and why so many of us remain ambivalent about the migrants in our midst.
Law and Policy for Artistic and Creative Industries
AMLAW is an introduction to legal and related considerations and approaches implemented in the Philippines and other countries concerning the creation and commercialization of works by artists and creative content producers, the function of the Intellectual Property Law, and other issues regarding important cultural sites and properties.
Artist, Authorship and Legacy: a Reader by
This anthology of interdisciplinary essays examines the interlocking themes of artistic authorship, authenticity and legacy from legal, art market and art historical perspectives. It is structured in three sections: Authorship and Artists' Rights; The Artwork, Aura, and Authentication; Legacy and Its Stewards. The book addresses how artistic authorship is iterated over time by various figures, from the artist to the artist's heirs to art experts. It is through the law that artists' rights of authorship are articulated and tested against collectors, dealers, museums and even against other artists and photographers. It is increasingly through the law that conflicts are being resolved in the art market, as it expands (at least at the high end, and despite short-term dips across the world) and as artistic production dramatically increases to meet demand.
Comic Art, Creativity and the Law by
The characters and stories found in comic art play a dominant role in contemporary popular culture throughout the world. In this first-of-its-kind work, Comic Art, Creativity and the Law examines how law and legal doctrine shapes the creative process as applied to comic art. The book examines the impact of contract law, copyright law (including termination rights, parody and ownership of characters), tax law and obscenity law has on the creative process. It considers how these laws enhance and constrain the process of creating comic art by examining the effect their often inconsistent and incoherent application has had on the lives of creators, retailers and readers of comic art. It uniquely explains the disparate results in two key comic book parody cases, the Winter Brothers case and the Air Pirates case, offering an explanation for the seemingly inconsistent results in those cases. Finally, it offers a detailed discussion and analysis of the history and operation of the 'work for hire' doctrine in copyright law and its effect on comic art creators.Designed for academics, practitioners, students and fans of comic art, the book offers proposals for changes in those laws that constrain the creative process, as well as a glimpse into the future of comic art and the law.
Creative practice and the law by
This book outlines the legal matters that people in the Arts (creative industries) should be aware of.
Hollywood dealmaking : negotiating talent agreements for film, TV, and new media by
Hollywood Dealmaking has become the go-to resource for new and experienced entertainment attorneys, agent trainees, business affairs executives, and creative executives. Entertainment attorneys and Hollywood insiders Dina Appleton and Daniel Yankelevits explain the negotiation techniques and strategies of entertainment dealmaking and detail the interests and roles of producers, writers, actors, directors, agents, and studio employees in crafting a deal. This new edition captures the dramatic changes over the past five years in the film and television industry landscape, with two new chapters: "Reality Television" details the sources of revenue, syndication possibilities, and format sales of these shows as well as the talent deals that are made, and the "Internet/New Media" chapter delves into new digital formats such as mobile phones, game consoles, video-on-demand, and web-based apps, and explains where today's revenues are generated, where the industry is headed, and talent negotiation issues. All the ins and outs of negotiating are explained, including back ends, gross and adjusted gross profits, deferments, box office bonuses, copyrights, and much more. This easy-to-follow reference is packed with expert insights on distribution, licensing, and merchandising. The book's invaluable resource section includes definitions of lingo for acquisition agreements and employment deals, twelve ready-to-use sample contracts, and a directory of entertainment attorneys in both New York and Los Angeles. In Hollywood Dealmaking, readers will recognize the key players in the process, understand the "lingo" of crafting deals, learn how to negotiate agreements for the option and purchase of books and screenplays, be able to negotiate employment deals for all members of a film or television crew, understand payment terms and bonuses, and be able to register copyrights in scripts and other literary works. Allworth Press, an imprint of Skyhorse Publishing, publishes a broad range of books on the visual and performing arts, with emphasis on the business of art. Our titles cover subjects such as graphic design, theater, branding, fine art, photography, interior design, writing, acting, film, how to start careers, business and legal forms, business practices, and more. While we don't aspire to publish a New York Times bestseller or a national bestseller, we are deeply committed to quality books that help creative professionals succeed and thrive. We often publish in areas overlooked by other publishers and welcome the author whose expertise can help our audience of readers.
Key Issues in the Arts and Entertainment Industry by
The only book on contemporary issues which covers the arts and entertainment sectors, from social networking and Twitter, to reality TV and digital rights management.
Law, Art and the Commons by
The concept of the cultural commons has become increasingly important for legal studies. Within this field, however, it is a contested concept: at once presented as a sphere for creativity, democratic access and freedom of speech, but one that denies property rights and misappropriates the public domain. In this book, Merima Bruncevic takes up the cultural commons not merely as an abstract notion, but in its connection to physical spaces such as museums and libraries. A legal cultural commons can, she argues, be envisioned as a lawscape that can quite literally be entered and engaged with. Focusing largely on art in the context of the copyright regime, but also addressing a number of cultural heritage issues, the book draws on the work of Deleuze and Guattari in order to examine the realm of the commons as a potential space for overcoming the dichotomy between the owner and the consumer of culture. Challenging this dichotomy, it is the productive and creative potential of law itself that is elicited through the book's approach to the commons as the empirical basis for a new legal framework, which is able to accommodate a multitude of interests and values.
Law and Creativity in the Age of the Entertainment Franchise by
Much of the real value in the entertainment industry today lies in franchises - fictional universes, entertainment concepts, reinventions of cultural traditions and celebrity - that create an ongoing presence in the marketplace. The entertainment franchise now shapes the global cultural landscape. However, scholars have devoted little attention to how intellectual property law has changed or is being stretched in practice to accommodate this type of creativity and form of enterprise. Covering law and practice in jurisdictions such as the UK, the EU, the USA, Australia, Spain and the Caribbean, this collection explores the 'fit' of intellectual property laws with specific franchises and tracks the way creators and entrepreneurs work around law's limitations. Case studies include mega-film franchises, fan activity, hip-hop, the management of celebrity reputation, flamenco, 'Disneyfied' theatre, film and television funding, arts festivals and 'carnival in a box'.
Law for Artists by
Written especially for professional artists and those studying the visual arts, Law for Artists is an accessible guide to those aspects of law that impact on artists and their work. It encompasses a comprehensive range of creative practices including fine art, photography, the graphic and plastic arts, animation, illustration, applied and media arts, as well as fashion, textile and product design. As one of the few academics working in this field Blu Tirohl clearly explains the legal principles - such as intellectual property, censorship, freedom of expression and criminal law - that are relevant to artists working in a range of disciplines. In order to illustrate these key concepts the book includes an engaging collection of examples of artists who have come into conflict with the law, demonstrating precisely the challenges faced by creative practitioners. The author also explores how the establishment co-opts transgressive artists; bringing about a range of contradictions that create legal inconsistencies. While the focus is primarily on UK law, the reader is also given ample information to understand how European law affects them. An entire chapter is also dedicated to the comparative study of US Law through well-known cases, ensuring students have a well-rounded knowledge of the concepts that they need to consider in a professional context. The book also provides additional resources including a list of useful websites, a glossary of key terms, as well as a list of statutes and cases. Law for Artists is an invaluable resource to professional practitioners and art graduates, as well as the academics who instruct them. This insightful publication, the first of its kind, helps introduce artists to the professional practice skills needed to ensure they are well-equipped to deal with working life.
The law of art & antiques : a primer for artists and collectors by 
Legal Guide for the Visual Artist by
This reference book presents a comprehensive overview of the legal issues faced by anyone working in the visual arts. It covers: copyright, contracts, censorship, moral rights, sales (by artist, gallery or agent), taxation, estate planning, museums, collecting and grants. The book suggests basic strategies, gives information to help with further action and contains many sample legal forms and contracts. This edition is revised to provide not only updated legal information, but also to cover the importance of new media and electronic rights.
Media and Entertainment Law by
Media and Entertainment Lawpresents a contemporary analysis of the law relating to the media and entertainment industry both in terms of its practical application and its theoretical framework. It provides a clear, current and comprehensive account of this exciting subject. Fully updated and revised, this second edition is one of the first texts to contain a full analysis of the Leveson Inquiry and the implications for our press and media that are arising from it. The new edition contains; a new chapter analysing the Defamation Act 2013; the Digital Economy Act 2010 which aimed to toughen up against copyright infringement online and has been subject to parliamentary review since coming into power; and the liability of internet service providers, including recent cases such as Tamiz vs Google 2012, which goes some way to define the extent to which an ISP may or may not be found liable for their bloggers content. With integrated coverage of Scots and Northern Irish law, Media and Entertainment Lawalso highlights comparisons with similar overseas jurisdictions, such as with the liability of ISPs where there are differences in both US and European law, in order to help students demonstrate an awareness of media laws, which may then influence UK legislation. Looking at key aspects such as TV and radio broadcasting, the print press, the music industry, online news and entertainment and social networking sites, this text provides detailed coverage of the key principles, cases and legislation as well as a critical analysis of regulatory bodies such as OFCOM and the new regulator for the UK's newspapers and magazines (and online editions), the Independent Press Standards Organisation (Ipso). The text also provides the most comprehensive and up to date coverage of the law relating to Intellectual Property law for the entertainment industry with recent changes in EU law relating to performers' rights. See what goes behind the writing of Media & Entertainment Law: http://youtu.be/XiCGmnRDvb0 lt;/P> With integrated coverage of Scots and Northern Irish law, Media and Entertainment Lawalso highlights comparisons with similar overseas jurisdictions, such as with the liability of ISPs where there are differences in both US and European law, in order to help students demonstrate an awareness of media laws, which may then influence UK legislation. Looking at key aspects such as TV and radio broadcasting, the print press, the music industry, online news and entertainment and social networking sites, this text provides detailed coverage of the key principles, cases and legislation as well as a critical analysis of regulatory bodies such as OFCOM and the new regulator for the UK's newspapers and magazines (and online editions), the Independent Press Standards Organisation (Ipso). The text also provides the most comprehensive and up to date coverage of the law relating to Intellectual Property law for the entertainment industry with recent changes in EU law relating to performers' rights. See what goes behind the writing of Media & Entertainment Law: http://youtu.be/XiCGmnRDvb0 nt changes in EU law relating to performers' rights. See what goes behind the writing of Media & Entertainment Law: http://youtu.be/XiCGmnRDvb0
Media Law, Ethics, and Policy in the Digital Age by
The growing presence of digital technologies has caused significant changes in the protection of digital rights. With the ubiquity of these modern technologies, there is an increasing need for advanced media and rights protection. Media Law, Ethics, and Policy in the Digital Age is a key resource on the challenges, opportunities, issues, controversies, and contradictions of digital technologies in relation to media law and ethics and examines occurrences in different socio-political and economic realities. Highlighting multidisciplinary studies on cybercrime, invasion of privacy, and muckraking, this publication is an ideal reference source for policymakers, academicians, researchers, advanced-level students, government officials, and active media practitioners.
The Musician's Business and Legal Guide by
The Musician's Business and Legal Guide provides vital information to help demystify the music business and the complex body of law that shapes it. This book answers such questions as how to protect name and copyright; what is and is not legal about sampling; what are the legal issues surrounding digital downloads and streaming; what are the jobs of managers, talent agents and publishers; what are common contractual relationship between independent and major labels. The new edition includes chapters not covered in depth by other books: social media law, TV talent shows, YouTube, and international copyright. As in previous editions, the book features clause-by-clause contract analyses for 360 record deals, music publishing, management, and producer agreements.
Law and Policy for Artistic and Creative Industries
AMLAW is an introduction to legal and related considerations and approaches implemented in the Philippines and other countries concerning the creation and commercialization of works by artists and creative content producers, the function of the Intellectual Property Law, and other issues regarding important cultural sites and properties.
Art and Social Justice by
This book is a collection of articles that reflect on various connectivities between art and social justice and media which are pertinent to studying contemporary societies. How different forms of media and art, in the broadest possible meaning of these terms, reflect on, relate to, and campaign for social justice is an important topic to consider as artists, academics and activists. The subject matter of the book is also contextualized, with attention being paid to historical, cultural and communication factors, and with chapters referencing situations and collaborations in Brazil, Cyprus, Greece and South Africa. This is the first time that such a broad range of contexts are being considered together within the pursuit of studies on art and social justice. Furthermore, this book concentrates on how different art forms are manifest, in relation to social justice issues in an ever-changing world mediated by the Internet. How much mobilization happens online through art and media, and how much happens in 'reality' (offline) are issues explored at length with regard to youth and participation in social change.
The creative industries : culture and policy by
"Moving from age-old warnings about the influence of the cultural industry to a tentative embrace of a global creative society, Terry Flew's new book provides an excellent overview of this exciting field. Warmly recommended for students and policymakers alike." - Mark Deuze, Indiana University "A comprehensive text on the state of the art of the creative industries... a running commentary on the ebb and flow of both the academic debates (from cultural studies, cultural economics, organisational studies, economic geography and urban sociology) and the policy initiatives that seek to frame the field for outsiders. An ideal primer." - Andy C Pratt, King's College London The rise of creative industries requires new thinking in communication, media and cultural studies, media and cultural policy, and the arts and information sectors. The Creative Industries sets the agenda for these debates, providing a richer understanding of the dynamics of cultural markets, creative labour, finance and risk, and how culture is distributed, marketed and creatively re-used through new media technologies. This book: Develops a global perspective on the creative industries and creative economy Draws insights from media and cultural studies, innovation economics, cultural policy studies, and economic and cultural geography Explores what it means for policy-makers when culture and creativity move from the margins to the centre of economic dynamics Makes extensive use of case studies in ways that are relevant not only to researchers and policy-makers, but also to the generation of students who will increasingly be establishing a 'portfolio career' in the creative industries. International in coverage, The Creative Industries traces the historical and contemporary ideas that make the cultural economy more relevant that it has ever been. It is essential reading for students and academics in media, communication and cultural studies.
Creativity without law : challenging the assumptions of intellectual property by
Behind the scenes of the many artists and innovators flourishing beyond the bounds of intellectual property laws Intellectual property law, or IP law, is based on certain assumptions about creative behavior. The case for regulation assumes that creators have a fundamental legal right to prevent copying, and without this right they will under-invest in new work. But this premise fails to fully capture the reality of creative production. It ignores the range of powerful non-economic motivations that compel creativity, and it overlooks the capacity of creative industries for self-governance and innovative social and market responses to appropriation. This book reveals the on-the-ground practices of a range of creators and innovators. In doing so, it challenges intellectual property orthodoxy by showing that incentives for creative production often exist in the absence of, or in disregard for, formal legal protections. Instead, these communities rely on evolving social norms and market responses--sensitive to their particular cultural, competitive, and technological circumstances--to ensure creative incentives. From tattoo artists to medical researchers, Nigerian filmmakers to roller derby players, the communities illustrated in this book demonstrate that creativity can thrive without legal incentives, and perhaps more strikingly, that some creative communities prefer, and thrive, in environments defined by self-regulation rather than legal rules. Beyond their value as descriptions of specific industries and communities, the accounts collected here help to ground debates over IP policy in the empirical realities of the creative process. Their parallels and divergences also highlight the value of rules that are sensitive to the unique mix of conditions and motivations of particular industries and communities, rather than the monoculture of uniform regulation of the current IP system.
Key Concepts in Creative Industries by
"This guide to the emerging language of creative industries field is a valuable resource for researchers and students alike. Concise, extensively referenced, and accessible, this this is an exceptionally useful reference work." - Gauti Sigthorsson, Greenwich University "There could be no better guides to the conceptual map of the creative industries than John Hartley and his colleagues, pioneers in the field. This book is a clear, comprehensive and accessible tool-kit of ideas, concepts, questions and discussions which will be invaluable to students and practitioners alike. Key Concepts in Creative Industries is set to become the corner stone of an expanding and exciting field of study" - Chris Barker, University of Wollongong Creativity is an attribute of individual people, but also a feature of organizations like firms, cultural institutions and social networks. In the knowledge economy of today, creativity is of increasing value, for developing, emergent and advanced countries, and for competing cities. This book is the first to present an organized study of the key concepts that underlie and motivate the field of creative industries. Written by a world-leading team of experts, it presents readers with compact accounts of the history of terms, the debates and tensions associated with their usage, and examples of how they apply to the creative industries around the world. Crisp and relevant, this is an invaluable text for students of the creative industries across a range of disciplines, especially media, communication, economics, sociology, creative and performing arts and regional studies.
Legal Emblems and the Art of Law by
The emblem book was invented by the humanist lawyer Andrea Alciato in 1531. The preponderance of juridical and normative themes, of images of rule and infraction, of obedience and error in the emblem books is critical to their purpose and interest. This book outlines the history of the emblem tradition as a juridical genre, along with the concept of, and training in, obiter depicta, in things seen along the way to judgment. It argues that these books depict norms and abuses in classically derived forms that become the visual standards of governance. Despite the plethora of vivid figures and virtual symbols that define and transmit law, contemporary lawyers are not trained in the critical apprehension of the visible. This book is the first to reconstruct the history of the emblem tradition, evidencing the extent to which a gallery of images of law already exists and structuring how the public realm is displayed, made present and viewed.
Making Art Panamerican : Cultural Policy and the Cold War by
Among the buildings on the National Mall in Washington, D.C., only the Pan American Union (PAU) houses an international organization. The first of many anticipated OC peace palacesOCOconstructed in the early twentieth century, the PAU began with a mission of cultural diplomacy, and after World War II its Visual Arts Section became a leader in the burgeoning hemispheric arts scene, proclaiming Latin AmericaOCOs entr(r)e into the international community as it forged connections between a growing base of middle-class art consumers on one hand and concepts of supranational citizenship and political and economic liberalism on the other. "Making Art Panamerican" situates the ambitious visual arts programs of the PAU within the broader context of hemispheric cultural relations during the cold war. Focusing on the institutional interactions among aesthetic movements, cultural policy, and viewing publics, Claire F. Fox contends that in the postwar years, the PAU Visual Arts Section emerged as a major transfer point of hemispheric American modernist movements and played an important role in the consolidation of Latin American art as a continental object of study. As it traces the careers of individual cultural policymakers and artists who intersected with the PAU in the two postwar decadesOCosuch as Concha Romero James, Charles Seeger, Jos(r) Gmez Sicre, Jos(r) Luis Cuevas, and Rafael SquirruOCothe book also charts the trajectories and displacements of sectors of the U.S. and Latin American intellectual left during a tumultuous interval that spans the Mexican Revolution, the Spanish Civil War, the New Deal, and the early cold war. Challenging the U.S. bias of conventional narratives about Panamericanism and the postwar shift in critical values from realism to abstraction, "Making Art Panamerican" illuminates the institutional dynamics that helped shape aesthetic movements in the critical decades following World War II.
A profile of the performing arts industry : culture and commerce by
Attending a live concert or theatrical performance can be a thrilling experience. At their best, the performing arts represent the height of human creativity and expression. But the presentation on stage, whether it is Shakespeare, Beethoven, or The Lion King, depends on a business backstage. This book provides an overview of both the product on stage and the industry that makes it possible. While the industry's product is unique--with unique supply and demand characteristics--it is still an industry, with supply inputs, organization structures, competitors, business models, value chains, and customers. We will examine each of the major segments (Broadway, regional theater, orchestra, opera, and ballet) along these business dimensions. This book will give lovers of the performing arts an understanding of the business realities that make live performances possible. Managers, board members, and performers will be better equipped to take on the strategic challenges their companies face. People contemplating any of these roles will have a better idea of what to expect. Business analysts and students of strategy will discover how economic frameworks apply in this unique setting where culture and commerce converge.
Visual arts and the law : a handbook for professionals by
This essential handbook offers art professionals and collectors an accessible legal analysis of important principles in art law, as well as a practical guide to legal rights when creating, buying, selling and collecting art in a global market. Although the book is international in scope, there is a particular focus on the US as a major art centre and the site of countless key international court cases. This authoritative but accessible and wide-ranging volume is essential reading for arts advisors, collectors, dealers, auction houses, museums, investors, artists, attorneys and students of art and law.
Leadership and Strategic Planning for Artistic and Creative Industries
AMLEADR provides an introduction to the foundational concepts, principles, approaches, and methodologies in leadership, strategic planning, and development for artistic and creative industries.
Arts and Cultural Leadership in Asia by
Arts and cultural activity in Asia is increasingly seen as important internationally, and Asia's growing prosperity is enabling the full range of artistic activities to be better encouraged, supported and managed. At the same time, cultural frameworks and contexts vary hugely across Asia, and it is not appropriate to apply Westerns theories and models of leadership and management. This book presents a range of case studies of arts and cultural leadership across a large number of Asian countries. Besides examining different cultural frameworks and contexts, the book considers different cultural approaches to leadership, discusses external challenges and entrepreneurialism, and explores how politics can have a profound impact. Throughout the book covers different art forms, and different sorts of arts and cultural organisations.
Arts leadership : creating sustainable arts organizations by
The contemporary world faces unprecedented upheaval and change forcing institutions of all types to rethink how they are designed and how they must now function if they are to survive into an uncertain future. The performing arts are no exception; in an era of constant change and technological transformation, arts organizations and their leaders face significant organizational challenges if they are to maintain their relevance. Arts Leadership: Creating Sustainable Arts Organizations provides a contemporary overview of the field of arts leadership, focused on the performing arts. It examines what these challenges are, how they are affecting the performing arts and arts organizations in general and proposes creative ways to reimagine, build and lead sustainable arts organizations in this uncharted environment. With a global perspective drawn from his extensive experience advising arts organizations around the world and based on his own work successfully leading important performing arts organizations in the United States, Foster proposes an innovative approach to organizational design, systems, and structures for arts leaders in the 21st century that is based in ecological thinking and the creative process that is intrinsic to the arts. In disrupting conventional arts leadership practice, the book provides an exceptional tool to understand a unique sector, and is essential reading for students and practitioners across the creative and cultural industries.
Arts Leadership in Contemporary Contexts by
This book explores and critiques different aspects of arts leadership within contemporary contexts. While this is an exploration of ways arts leadership is understood, interpreted and practiced, it is also an acknowledgement of a changing cultural and economic paradigm. Understanding the broader environment for the arts is therefore part of the leadership imperative. This book examines aspects such as individual versus collective leadership, gender, creativity and the influences of stakeholders and culture. While the book provides a theoretical and critical understanding of arts leadership, it also gives examples of arts leadership in practice.
Design forward : creative strategies for sustainable change by
.Design as a strategic and holistic way of finding and creating sustainable and successful solutions .A presentation of new tendencies and strategic approaches that work for positive change In this book Hartmut Esslinger - one of the most influential designers and thinkers, as well as the founder of frog design - explains how 'strategic design' in business and society can and must bring about positive change through innovative creativity. A key component is the strategically extended definition of design as a convergent and humanistic amalgamation of technology, the environment and the economy. For Esslinger, design has always been a key strategic discipline, which he has practised successfully in cooperation with companies such as Wega, Louis Vuitton, Sony, SAP and especially Apple, collaborating directly with Steve Jobs. Therefore in this book he sets out to establish a wide range of creative innovators as top executives, who are equally influential and occupy leading positions in economics, education and politics. Every future projection is always based on history, Design Forwardalso shows relevant and richly illustrated case studies taken from Esslinger's career, as well as selected works by his students at the University of Applied Arts in Vienna."
Innovation Leadership by
A leader's ability to discover and implement innovations is crucial to adapting to changing technologies and customer preferences, enhancing employee creativity, developing new products, supporting market competitiveness, and sustaining economic growth. Gliddon and Rothwell provide an exciting and comprehensive resource for readers that are currently seeking to build success in organizations with new ideas. Innovation leadership involves synthesizing different leadership styles in organizations to influence employees to produce creative ideas, products, services, and solutions. It is a practice and an approach to organization development and organizational change. Innovation leadership commonly includes four basic stages, which are: (a) support for idea generation, (b) identifying innovations, (c) evaluating innovations, and (d) implementation. There are two types of innovations, including: (a) exploratory innovation, which involves generating brand new ideas, and (b) value-added innovation, which involves modifying and renewing ideas that already exist. The two fundamental leadership theories that are generally necessary for innovation leadership are path-goal theory and Leader Member Exchange theory. The key role in the practice of innovation leadership is that of the innovation leader. However, there are currently multiple perspectives on the definition of an innovation leader. An individual in an organization, a group within an organization, the organization itself, and even a community, state, or nation can be considered an innovation leader. The book explores each of these perspectives on the definition of an innovation leader.
Integrated marketing communications : strategic planning perspectives by 
Leadership by
Written by an author team from one of Europe's leading management schools, Leadership combines highly up-to-date research with a wealth of real-world case studies to help readers make the transition from theory to practice. This student-focussed text encourages critical appraisal of themainstream viewpoints and personal reflection on leadership experience in a way that is both clear and highly engaging.Divided into four parts, the book guides the reader thematically through the big issues and debates in the field, including the leadership versus management debate, team performance, and the question of whether leaders are born or made. The first part of the book, "Defining the Terrain", lays thefoundation for subsequent chapters by exploring what we mean by leadership, how it compares to management, and why we study it. The second and third parts of the book build on this, addressing core topics that have shaped leadership thinking for academics and practitioners over the last fifty years,as well as considering the cutting-edge debates within the field, and tackling issues such as strategic leadership, ethical leadership, and leading change. Finally, the fourth part, "Developing Leaders", explores traditional and state-of-the-art development techniques, before encouraging the readerto consider their own leadership through identity work. Leadership mappings in the final chapter assimilate the range of theories and themes from the previous chapters, providing a framework for comparisons and connections throughout the book.This clear and logical structure is combined with carefully designed learning features including author and student reflection boxes, film and media parallels, case studies, and discussion points to develop and support learning, while the critical approach invites students to exercise their thinkingskills and develop their own perspectives on the material presented. The authors draw upon their years of academic and business experience to offer an insight into this important and dynamic field, making this text a must read for all students concerned with understanding and practicing leadership.This book has a dedicated online resource centre, with the following materials:Student resources:* Online glossary - a searchable list of key terms from the book ensures you have a firm graps of relevant leadership terminology.* Links to feeds from topical journals - this resource points you towards a number of relevant journal articles, and provides a good starting point to begin further research.* Web links to related sites - relevant and reliable content to simplify your Internet research and allow you to widen your reading.Lecturer resources:* Integrative case studies - access a number of additional and extended case studies linking to content in the book.* PowerPoint slides - fully customizable lecture slides to accompany each chapter of the book.* Suggestions for discussion points - suggestions and guidance for using the discussion points feature in the book in tutorials, group work, and written work.* Video clips - support class discussion with a selection of video clips and accompanying teaching notes.
Leadership by
Now with an all-new chapter on Followership! Adopted at more than 1600 institutions in 89 countries and translated into 13 different languages, this market-leading text successfully combines an academically robust account of the major theories and models of leadership with an accessible style and special emphasis on how leadership theory can inform leadership practice. Peter G. Northouse uses a consistent structure for each chapter, allowing students to easily compare and contrast the various theories. Case studies and questionnaires provide students with practical examples and opportunities to deepen their personal understanding of their own leadership style. Leadership: Theory and Practice, Eighth Edition provides readers with a user-friendly account of a wide range of leadership research in a clear, concise, and interesting manner. Free Poster: 6 Emerging Leadership Approaches A Complete Teaching & Learning Package Interactive eBook with Interactive Leadership Assessments Includes access to Interactive Leadership Assessments, SAGE Premium Video, multimedia tools, and much more! Save when you bundle the Interactive eBook with the new edition. Order using bundle ISBN: 978-1-5443-2644-3. Learn more. SAGE Premium Video featuring Peter Northouse Included in the Interactive eBook! SAGE Premium Video tools and resources boost comprehension and bolster analysis. Learn more. SAGE coursepacks FREE! Easily import our quality instructor and student resource content into your school's learning management system (LMS) and save time. Learn more. SAGE edge FREE online resources for students that make learning easier. See how your students benefit. Bundle with Introduction to Leadership: Concepts and Practice, Fourth Edition and save! Bundle ISBN: 978-1-5443-3017-4
The Leadership Challenge by
The most trusted source of leadership wisdom, updated to address today's realities The Leadership Challenge is the gold-standard manual for effective leadership, grounded in research and written by the premier authorities in the field. With deep insight into the complex interpersonal dynamics of the workplace, this book positions leadership both as a skill to be learned, and as a relationship that must be nurtured to reach its full potential. This new sixth edition has been revised to address current challenges, and includes more international examples and a laser focus on business issues; you'll learn how extraordinary leaders accomplish extraordinary things, and how to develop your leadership skills and style to deliver quality results every time. Engaging stories delve into the fundamental roles that great leaders fulfill, and simple frameworks provide a primer for those who seek continuous improvement; by internalizing key insights and putting concepts into action, you'll become a more effective, more impactful leader. A good leader gets things done; a great leader aspires, inspires, and achieves more. This book highlights the differences between good and great, and shows you how to bridge the chasm between getting things done and making things happen. Gain deep insight into leadership's critical role in organizational health Navigate the shift toward team-oriented work relationships Motivate and inspire to break through the pervasive new cynicism Leverage the electronic global village to deliver better results Business is evolving at an increasingly rapid rate, and leaders must keep pace with the changes or risk stagnation. People work differently, are motivated differently, and have different expectations today'business as usual is quickly losing its effectiveness. The Leadership Challenge helps you stay current, relevant, and effective in the modern workplace.
Leadership in the Creative Industries by
A groundbreaking book that explores the theory and practice of leading in the creative workplace Leadership in the Creative Industries is a much-needed guide to the theory and practice of the creative leadership skills that are essential to lead effectively in creative fields. As the growth of creative industries continues to surge and "noncreative" businesses put increasing emphasis on creativity and innovation, this book offers a practical resource that explores how to confidently lead a workforce, creatively. In order to lead creative people it is essential to understand the creative process, creativity, and the range of variables that affect it. This book fills a gap in the literature by exploring the creative leadership practices that are solidly grounded in evidenced-based research. The author includes suggestions for overcoming the challenges associated with leading creative people, and puts to rest many of the current industry misconceptions about leading creatively. This vital resource: Is the first book that highlights the theory and practice of creative leadership skills in the creative industries Includes best practices of leading for creativity, and reveals what encourages creativity and what suppresses it Debunks commonly held myths about leading a creative workforce with evidence-based guidance Contains a wealth of helpful tips, visualizations, callouts from primary research, and anecdotes from recognized thought leaders, to highlight and underscore important principles. Written for academics and students of leadership, those working or aspiring to work in the creative industries, Leadership in the Creative Industries puts the focuses directly on theory and practice of creative leadership in creative fields.
Leadership in the Performing Arts by
What does it mean to be a performing arts leader? Leadership in the Performing Arts addresses and analyzes this question by presenting the wisdom and expertise of eleven men and women with experience leading nonprofit performing arts institutions in the United States. These successful leaders provide many real-world examples of business practices that may be generally applied by practitioners in our field, and throughout the nonprofit sector. The book examines: The leader's career path and professional growth The leader's vision Leadership styles and the importance of interpersonal skills Setting and executing organizational priorities Leading decision-making and communication processes Creating change and innovation Challenges faced in leading an institution Interviewees include: Kathy Brown, executive director of the New York City Ballet; Peter Gelb, general manager of the Metropolitan Opera; Heather Hitchens, president of the American Theatre Wing; Karen Brooks Hopkins, president and chief executive officer of the Brooklyn Academy of Music; Timothy J. McClimon, president of the American Express Foundation; Laura Penn, executive director of the Stage Directors and Choreographers Society; Arlene Shuler, president and chief executive officer of New York City Center; Paul Tetreault, director of Ford's Theatre; Nancy Umanoff, executive director of the Mark Morris Dance Group; Patrick Willingham, executive director of The Public Theater; and Harold Wolpert, managing director of the Roundabout Theatre Company. Allworth Press, an imprint of Skyhorse Publishing, publishes a broad range of books on the visual and performing arts, with emphasis on the business of art. Our titles cover subjects such as graphic design, theater, branding, fine art, photography, interior design, writing, acting, film, how to start careers, business and legal forms, business practices, and more. While we don't aspire to publish a New York Times bestseller or a national bestseller, we are deeply committed to quality books that help creative professionals succeed and thrive. We often publish in areas overlooked by other publishers and welcome the author whose expertise can help our audience of readers.
The Leadership of Organizational Change by
Understanding both leadership and change have been recurrent and popular themes within the business, management and organization studies literature. However, our understanding of leadership and organizational change in combination is far more limited. The Leadership of Organizational Change offers a critical review of the evolution of leadership and organizational change for the past thirty-five years, taking stock of what we know, identifying what we do not know, and establishing how the study of the leadership of change should advance. In the late seventies and early eighties, as interest in managing and leading change was fuelled by the competitive threat of Asia in general and Japan in particular as perceived by western businesses and governments, Burns (1978) writing in his landmark book Leadership at this time, referred to an intellectual crisis: "The crisis of leadership today is the mediocrity or irresponsibility of so many of the men and women in power, but leadership rarely rises to the full need for it. The fundamental crisis underlying mediocrity is intellectual. If we know all too much about our leaders, we know far too little about leadership." While the study of managing change has benefitted from sustained critical scrutiny, particularly in the last decade, it is believed that this is to have been at the expense of critical scrutiny of leading change. The Leadership of Organizational Change critically reviews how the study of leading change has advanced since 1978 and the crisis of intellectual mediocrity.
Situated Practices of Strategic Planning by
All over the world societies are facing a number of major problems. New developments, challenges and opportunities cause these issues and yet cases tell us that traditional spatial planning responses and tools are often insufficient to tackle these problems and challenges. Situated Practices of Strategic Planning draws together examples from across the globe - from France to Australia; from Nigeria to the United States, as it observes international comparisons of the strategic planning process. Many approaches and policies used today fail to capture the dynamics of urban/regional transformation and are more concerned with maintaining an existing social order than challenging and transforming it. Stewarded by a team of highly regarded and experienced researchers, this book gives a synthetic view of the process of change and frames future directions of development. It is unique for its combination of analysis of international case studies and reflection on critical nodes and features in strategic planning. This volume will be of interest to students who study regional planning, academics, professional planners, and policy makers.
Strategic communication : an introduction to theory and global practice by 
The strategic designer : tools and techniques for managing the design process by
The design profession has been asking itself some important questions lately. How do designers deal with the increasing complexity of design problems? What skills do designers need to be competitive in the future? How do designers become co-creators with clients and audiences? How do designers prove their value to business? Designers are looking for ways to stay competitive in the conceptual economy and address the increasing complexity of design problems. By adopting a process that considers collaboration, context and accountability, designers move from 'makers of things' to 'design strategists.' The Strategic Designer shows designers how to build strong client relationships, elevate their standing with clients, increase project success rates, boost efficiency and enhance their creativity.
Strategic Planning for Public Relations by
This innovative and popular text provides a clear pathway to developing public relations campaigns and other types of strategic communication. Implementing the pragmatic, in-depth approach of the previous editions, author Ronald D. Smith presents a step-by-step unfolding of the strategic campaign process used in public relations practice. Drawing from his experience in professional practice and in the classroom, Smith walks readers through the critical steps for the formative research, strategic and tactical planning, and plan evaluation phases of the process. Offering clear explanations, relevant examples, and practical exercises, this text identifies and discusses the decision points and options in the development of a communication program. The cases and examples included here explore classic real-world public relations situations as well as current, timely events. This fourth edition highlights the results of new research studies on opinions and practices within the discipline, and adds overviews of several award-winning public relations campaigns. As a classroom text or a resource for professional practice, this volume provides a model that can be adapted to fit specific circumstances and used to improve effectiveness and creativity in communication planning. It serves as an accessible and understandable guide to field-tested procedures, offering practical insights that apply to public relations campaigns and case studies coursework.
Theatre management : arts leadership for the 21st century by
An essential introductory textbook that provides a comprehensive and student-friendly overview of the key processes involved in developing and managing a theatre in the 21st century. It covers a complete range of topics fundamental to successful commercial and not-for-profit theatre management, from developing a mission statement to communicating with stakeholders, from marketing and promotion to fund development platforms, and from governance structures to community engagement. With over two decades of experience in the industry, Anthony Rhine encourages a critical understanding of theatre management; rather than simply giving students the facts and theories to memorise, he shows readers how to think like theatre managers, giving them the skills needed to be able to carve out their own career paths. Far-reaching and globally applicable, the text serves as an invaluable guide for aspiring theatre managers, as well as undergraduate and postgraduate students on Theatre Management, Arts Management, Creative Industries and Theatre and Performance Studies degree courses.
Leadership and Strategic Planning for Artistic and Creative Industries
AMLEADR provides an introduction to the foundational concepts, principles, approaches, and methodologies in leadership, strategic planning, and development for artistic and creative industries.
Artistic Transfer by
Creativity is not a prisoner of art! Non-conformist, non-linear, unruly thought and action have always led to great works of art, pathbreaking inventions and forward-looking perspectives, helping us deal with social, ecological and economic challenges. But how can it find its way into our everyday working life? The crucial step, Ursula Bertram contends, is to reach a synergy of logically justifiable knowledge and the capacity to navigate in open systems. To find out how such synergy could come about, Ursula Bertram has observed the strategies and principles of artists, theatre directors, musicians and unruly thinkers and compared them with the stories of physicists, mathematicians, managers and researchers. She shows that when artistic thought is circulated and tested in fields beyond the arts, an extremely efficient pattern called artistic transfer emerges. With contributions by Bazon Brock, Werner Preißing, and others.
Creative economy and culture : challenges, changes and futures for the creative industries by
An authoritative exploration of the current state of the creative industries, showing how students, researchers, entrepreneurs, practitioners and policy makers can make use of recent advances in the systematic study of the creative process on a population-wide scale.
Culture and commerce : the value of entrepreneurship in creative industries by
Art and business are often described as worlds apart, even diametric opposites. And yet, these realms are close cousins in creative industries where firms bring cultural goods to market, attaching price tags to music, paintings, theater, literature, film, and fashion.Building on theories of value construction and cultural production, Culture and Commerce details the processes by which artistic worth is decoded, translated, and converted to economic value. Mukti Khaire introduces readers to three industry players: creators, producers (who bring to market and distribute cultural goods), and intermediaries (who critique and rave about them). Case studies of firms from Chanel and Penguin to tastemakers like the Pritzker Prize and The Sundance Institute illuminate how these professionals construct a vital value chain. Highlighting the role of "pioneer entrepreneurs"--who carve out space for radical, new product categories--Khaire illustrates how creative professionals influence our sense of value, shifting consumer behavior and our culture in deep, surprising ways.
Drones and the creative industry : innovative strategies for European SMEs by
This open access, interdisciplinary book presents innovative strategies in the use of civil drones in the cultural and creative industry. Specially aimed at small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs), the book offers valuable insights from the fields of marketing, engineering, arts and management. With contributions from experts representing varied interests throughout the creative industry, including academic researchers, software developers and engineers, it analyzes the needs of the creative industry when using civil drones both outdoors and indoors. The book also provides timely recommendations to the industry, as well as guidance for academics and policymakers.
Exploring creativity : evaluative practices in innovation, design and the arts by
Under the guidance of Moeran and Christensen, the authors in this volume examine evaluative practices in the creative industries by exploring the processes surrounding the conception, design, manufacture, appraisal and use of creative goods. They describe the editorial choices made by different participants in a 'creative world', as they go about conceiving, composing or designing, performing or making, selling and assessing a range of cultural products. The study draws upon ethnographically rich case studies from companies as varied as Bang and Olufsen, Hugo Boss and Lonely Planet, in order to reveal the broad range of factors guiding and inhibiting creative processes. Some of these constraints are material and technical; others are social or defined by aesthetic norms. The authors explore how these various constraints affect creative work, and how ultimately they contribute to the development of creativity.
Leadership Brand. by
Everyone has a reputation. Whether good or bad, your reputation precedes you, and can inhibit or enhance your professional goals. However, how do you actively nurture, develop, and manage how others see you? In this book, we’ll discuss how crafting a brand can give you control of how you’re perceived at work. From proven strategies from CCL experts, to practical advice you can implement immediately, Leadership Brand: Deliver on Your Promise can help you figure out the leader you want to be, and how to build the brand that can get you there.
Lessons in Leadership by
In this practical guide, Emmy Award-winning public broadcasting anchor Steve Adubato teaches readers to be self-aware, empathetic, and more effective leaders at work and at home. His powerful case studies spotlighting dozens of leaders--from Pope Francis to New Jersey governor Chris Christie--are complemented by concrete tips and tools based in real-life scenarios. With Lessons in Leadership, readers can learn to steer others through difficult economic times, to mentor rising leaders, to provide straight talk to underperforming employees, and even how to lead a company through a significant change.
Marketing and Public Relations for Artistic and Creative Industries
AMMKTPR introduces students to principles and practices in marketing and public relations for artistic and creative industries. This course teaches students brand management, writing for media, interviews, special events and promotions, and new media and communications technology.
Advertising Media Planning by
The planning and placement of advertising media is a multibillion dollar business that critically impacts advertising effectiveness. The new edition of this acclaimed and widely adopted text offers practical guidance for those who practice media planning on a daily basis, as well as those who must ultimately approve strategic media decisions. Full of current brand examples, the book is a "must-read" for all who will be involved in the media decision process on both the agency and client side. Its easy-to-read style and logical format make it ideal for classroom adoption, and students will benefit from the down-to-earth approach, and real-world business examples. Several new chapters have been added to the fourth edition, including: International advertising Campaign evaluation The changing role of media planning in agencies, to give the reader a better grounding in the role of media in an advertising and marketing plan today Evaluating media vehicles, filled with up-to-date examples Search engine marketing, and a thorough revision of the chapter on online display advertising to address the increased emphasis on digital media Gaming, and many new examples of the latest digital media with an emphasis on social media, and a new framework for analyzing current and future social media Increased coverage of communication planning Added focus on the importance of media strategy early on in the book Separate chapters for video and audio media (instead of lumping them together in broadcast). This creates a more in-depth discussion of radio in particular An online instructor's manual with PowerPoint slides and sample test questions is available to adopters.
Advertising Promotion and Other Aspects of Integrated Marketing Communications by
Market-leading ADVERTISING, PROMOTION, AND OTHER ASPECTS OF INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATIONS, 9th Edition discusses all aspects of marketing communications, from time-honored methods to the newest developments in the field. Delivering the fundamentals you need, the text focuses on advertising and promotion, including planning, branding, media buying, sales, public relations, and much more. Emerging topics get special attention in this edition, such as the enormous popularity of social media outlets, online and digital practices, viral communications, and personal selling, along with all of their effects on traditional marketing. Revised to make ADVERTISING, PROMOTION, AND OTHER ASPECTS OF INTEGRATED MARKETING COMMUNICATIONS, 9th Edition the most current I.M.C. book on the market, chapters address must-know changes to environmental, regulatory, and ethical issues, as well as Marcom insights, place-based applications, privacy, global marketing, and of course, memorable advertising campaigns.
Brand Management by
For more than three decades it has been argued that the brand is an important value creator and should be a top management priority. However, the definition of what a brand is remains elusive. BRAND MANAGEMENT: RESEARCH, THEORY, AND PRACTICE fills a gap in the market, providing an understanding of different 'schools of thought' in brand management and offers deep insight into the opening question of the opening question of almost every brand management course: 'What is a brand?' This comprehensive second edition offers an exhaustive scientific analysis of various approaches to brand management developed over the past thirty years. It also delivers a thorough understanding of the strategic and managerial implications of different brand perspectives.
Brand Management by
Presenting the basics of brand management, the book provides both a theoretical and practical guide to brands, placing emphasis on the theory that the consumer is a co-creator in a brand′s identity.In a world in which social media and inclusive digital platforms have increased customer engagement, the role of brands and branding has changed. The line between the producer and the consumer has become blurred; consumers are no longer the recipients of brand identity, but the co-creators, playing a significant role in shaping new products and systems.To help students better understand the basics of brand management, and the co-creation theory, the book includes a collection of geographically diverse case studies, including: Burger King, Lego, Lynx, Maserati, HSBC and Vegemite.The book is complemented by online resourcesfor lecturers and students, including PowerPoint slides, journal articles, web and video links, and a selection of exclusive videos with a professional brand consultant.Suitable reading for students of branding and brand management modules.
Brand Meaning Management by
Establishing, expanding and leveraging brand meaning is critically important yet exceedingly complex. Successful brand meaning management is foundational to both brand differentiation and to outcomes like brand identification and brand attachment. Yet, managing this meaning over time is complex. Noted contributors to this special issue add new insights to this complex domain. A group of papers lend insight into the myriad entities involved in the meaning making process itself, such as marketers, celebrities, brand users, and the broader culture in which consumers live. A second set emphasizes the critical impact that brand meaning has on consumers and brands themselves-outcomes that include brand identification and attachment, social relationship management, and brand evangelism. The final set addresses when and how brand transgressions can threaten these outcomes, and what brands must do to recover from lost or tainted meanings. The volume co-editors provide an overview of the chapters and identify future research issues on brand meaning management in B2B (vs. B2C) markets, and how multi-product firms manage the collective set of meanings that comprise their brand portfolio.
Critical Perspectives on Media, Power and Change by
This book aims to feed into the critical debates about media, power and change through the respectful inclusion of a wide variety of critical approaches and traditions. This diversity is simultaneously structured and balanced by a deeply shared set of concerns, that are mobilised to defend core societal values including social justice, equality, fairness, care for the other and humanity. Critical Perspectives on Media, Power and Change raises questions about how the omnipresent media can contribute to the materialisation of these core values, and how it sometimes works against them. Rethinking social change, mediatisation and regulations are thus significant issues - explicitly addressed in this book. In addition the authors show how the role of the critical media and communication scholar merits and requires (self-)reflection; critical voices matter, but they also face structural limitations. This book was originally published as two special issues of Javnost - The Public.
A Designer's Research Manual, 2nd Edition, Updated and Expanded by
Go beyond crafting a logo or brochure and learn what it takes to design a commercial success.
The disappearing product : marketing and markets in the creative industries by
The Disappearing Product combines analysis of developments in the creative economy with practical guidance for marketing in the creative industries. Using theoretical models and extensive practical examples, this book challenges cultural producers to reclaim their place in the creative economy. Marketing is situated in the context of social, cultural and technological change that has revolutionised the creative and media industries. Traditional broadcasters, publishers and record labels have been displaced by a new generation of intermediaries including Amazon, Apple, Facebook and Google. These new intermediaries are marginalising cultural producers, devaluing products and monopolising consumer attention. Bilton's analysis focuses on how the creative industries must respond to these structural changes with new, innovative marketing methods for cultural products. Key features include: * a defined approach to marketing geared towards the cultural and creative industries, distinguished from 'business as usual' and 'arts marketing' * case studies and questions for discussion that can be used in the classroom * analysis of the creative economy highlighting practical strategies for marketers and managers * key examples of recent innovative marketing by artists and cultural entrepreneurs. An essential guide for students of creative industries, marketing and management, this book allows readers to develop their own tailored approach to marketing. Cultural entrepreneurs, marketers and managers will benefit from the in-depth insight into new patterns of consumption, transformed markets and emerging business models.
Dynamics of Media Writing by
Undergraduate students and early career professionals in journalism, public relations and advertising.
Integrated Advertising, Promotion, and Marketing Communications by
Directed primarily toward undergraduate Marketing college/university majors, this text also provides practical content to current and aspiring industry professionals. The carefully integrated approach of this text blends advertising, promotions, and marketing communications together, providing readers with the information they need to understand the process and benefits of successful IMC campaigns. 0133131017 / 9780133131017 Integrated Advertising, Promotion, and Marketing Communications Plus NEW MyMarketingLab with Pearson eText -- Access Card Package Package consists of 0133112934 / 9780133112931 NEW MyMarketingLab with Pearson eText -- Standalone Access Card -- 0133126242 / 9780133126242 Integrated Advertising, Promotion, and Marketing Communications
Marketing communications : an advertising, promotion and branding perspective by
Marketing Communications acknowledges that the most important task faced by any marketing communications practitioner is to identify and select an optimum promotions mix to help achieve an organisation's business objectives. It notes that the design and development of marketing communications campaigns takes place against a backdrop of change, choice, chance and worldwide connections. It also recognises that to achieve success, brands need to be engaging, compelling to achieve stand-out amongst competition. Marketing Communications discusses issues such as: * Understanding communications by exploring the past, present and examining the future; * Planning, development and evaluation of marketing communication campaigns; * Designing a more creative approach to stand-out relative to competing brands; * Exploring case study exemplars to reflect and gain insight for future campaigns. To help support their learning, readers have access to a range of online resources including chapter-by-chapter multiple choice questions which will enable them to assess how well they have grasped individual chapters. The text also features a range of supplementary readings, in text exercises and cases/examples to help bring concepts to life. Part of the The Global Management Series; a complete portfolio of global business and management texts that successfully meets the needs of students on international undergraduate and postgraduate business and management degree courses. Each book is a clear, concise and practical and has a thorough pedagogic structure to suit a 12 week semester. The series offers a flexible 'pick and mix' choice of downloadable e-chapters, so that users can select and build learning materials tailored to their specific needs. See www.goodfellowpublishers.com/GMS for details. Each book in the series is edited and contributed to by a team of experienced academics based in the UK, Dubai and Malaysia it provides an essential learning aid for students across a wide range of business and management courses and an invaluable teaching tool for lecturers and academics. Series Editors: Robert MacIntosh, Professor of Strategy and Kevin O'Gorman, Professor of Management, both at Heriot-Watt University, UK.
Media Management and Artificial Intelligence by
This cutting-edge textbook examines contemporary media business models in the context of Artificial Intelligence (AI) and digital transformation. AI has dramatically impacted media production and distribution, from recommendation engines to synthetic humans, from video-to-text tools to natural language models. "AI is really the change agent of the media industry," answered a natural language generation model when AI was 'asked' about the subject of this book. "It will open incredible opportunities." This book seeks to explore them. The media is examined through four sections. 'Principles' maps business models and the key tools of AI. 'Platforms' covers distribution channels in Games, Streamers, Social Networks, Broadcast and Digital Publishing. 'Producers' covers the engines of content-making, including Scripted, Entertainment, Factual, Content Marketing, Creators and Music. Finally, 'Pioneers' covers emerging sectors of Podcasting, Esports, the Metaverse and other AI-driven developments. Then in each chapter, a standard value creation model is applied, mapping a single sector through development, production, distribution and monetisation. Diverse case studies are analysed from India, Nigeria, South Korea, South Africa, France, the Netherlands, the US, the UK, Denmark and China - around creative entrepreneurship, revenue models, profit drivers, rights and emerging AI tools. Questions are provided for each case, whilst chapter summaries cement learning. Applied and technology-focused, this text offers core reading for advanced undergraduate and postgraduates studying Media Management - or the relationship between Entertainment, Media and Technology. Online resources include chapter-by-chapter PowerPoint slides and an Instructor's Manual with further exercises and case studies.
Moving Objects by
Moving Objects deals with emotive design: designed objects that demand to be engaged with rather than simply used. If postmodernism depended upon ironic distance, and Critical Design is all about questions, then emotive design runs hotter than this, confronting how designers are using feelings in what they make. Damon Taylor's original study considers these emotionally laden, highly authored works, often produced in limited editions and sold like art - objects such as a chair made from cuddly toys, a leather sofa that resembles a cow, and a jewellery box fashioned from human hair. Tracing the phenomenon back to the 'Dutch inflection' that began with Droog designers like Jurgen Bey and Hella Jongerius, Taylor conducts an analysis of the development of Design Art and looks for its origins in the uncanny explorations of surrealism. Offering a critique of Speculative Design, and an examination of the work of designers such as Mathias Bengtsson, whose work involves 'growing' furniture inside computers, Taylor asks what happens when the tangible melts into the datascape and design becomes a question of mobilities. In this way, Moving Objects examines contemporary issues of how we live with artefacts and what design can do.
Promotion in the Merchandising Environment by
The third edition of Promotion in the Merchandising Environment explains the process of promotion and describes the promotion tools available for creating successful campaigns. This edition focuses on the comprehensive nature of promotion in the merchandising environment of fashion and related goods, emphasizing online retailing, interactive and social media and the overall impact of the technology on all areas of promotion. Swanson and Everett combine coverage of print and broadcast media in a traditional media chapter, with greater emphasis on the rise of digital media in retail advertisement and promotion. With updated examples of retail advertisement and promotion activities and concepts in each chapter plus new, full color artwork throughout the book, readers will gain a full understanding of how to create a successful promotion campaign for retail merchandising products. New to This Edition- - Updated chapter opening vignettes and supporting color images of current and timeless examples - New Chapter 3 Tools of Creativity explains how the principles and elements of design are used in promotional activities and illuminates the creative relationship between the fashion retailer and advertising agencies - New Chapter 8 Digital Media covers interactive online retailing and social media such as Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, and Pinterest and the overall impact of the internet on all areas of promotion - 60% new photos and advertisements plus updated charts and graphs - New illustrated case study boxes in each chapter - Ethical Issues and Social Impact sidebars throughout chapters - Streamlined coverage from 17 to 14 chapters makes text more concise
Reading and Writing a Screenplay by
Reading and Writing a Screenplaytakes you on a journey through the many possible ways of writing, reading and imagining fiction and documentary projects for cinema, television and new media. It explores the critical role of a script as a document to be written and read with both future readers and the future film it will be giving life to in mind. The book explores the screenplay and the screenwriting process by approaching the film script in three different ways: how it is written, how it is read and how it can be rewritten. Combining contemporary screenwriting practices with historical and academic context, Isabelle Raynauld provides key analytical tools and reading strategies for conceptualizing and scripting projects based on the impact different writing styles can have on readers, with various examples ranging from early cinema to new media and new platforms throughout. This title offers an alternative, thought-provoking and inspiring approach to reading and writing a screenplay that is ideal for directors, producers, actors, students, aspiring screenwriters and readers interested in understanding how an effective screenplay is created. d inspiring approach to reading and writing a screenplay that is ideal for directors, producers, actors, students, aspiring screenwriters and readers interested in understanding how an effective screenplay is created.
Routledge Handbook of New Media in Asia by
While a decade ago much of the discussion of new media in Asia was couched in Occidental notions of Asia as a "default setting" for technology in the future, today we are seeing a much more complex picture of contesting new media practices and production. As "new media" becomes increasingly an everyday reality for young and old across Asia through smartphones and associated devices, boundaries between art, new media, and the everyday are transformed. This Handbook addresses the historical, social, cultural, political, philosophical, artistic and economic dimensions of the region's new media. Through an interdisciplinary revision of both "new media" and "Asia" the contributors provide new insights into the complex and contesting terrains of both notions. The Routledge Handbook of New Media in Asia will be the definitive publication for readers interested in comprehending all the various aspects of new media in Asia. It provides an authoritative, up-to-date, intellectually broad, conceptually cutting-edge guide to the important aspects of new media in the region -- as the first point of consultation for researchers, advanced level undergraduate and postgraduate students in fields of new media and Asian studies.
Social media addiction by Social media and mental health. by 
Social Media and Public Relations by
Social media is having a profound, but not yet fully understood impact on public relations. In the 24/7 world of perpetually connected publics, will public relations function as a dark art that spins (or tweets) self-interested variations of the truth for credulous audiences? Or does the full glare of the internet and the increasing expectations of powerful publics motivate it to more honestly engage to serve the public interest? The purpose of this book is to examine the role of PR by exploring the myriad ways that social media is reshaping its conceptualization, strategies, and tactics. In particular, it explores the dichotomies of fake and authentic, powerless and powerful, meaningless and meaningful. It exposes transgressions committed by practitioners--the paucity of digital literacy, the lack of understanding of the norms of social media, naivety about corporate identity risks, and the overarching emphasis on spin over authentic engagement. But it also shows the power that closely networked social media users have to insert information and opinion into discussions and force "false PR friends" to be less so. This timely, challenging, and fascinating book will be of interest to all students, researchers, and practitioners in Public Relations, Media, and Communication Studies. Winner of the 2016 NCA PRIDE Award for best book
Strategic communication : an introduction to theory and global practice by 
Writing for Television, Radio, and New Media by
This text covers the principles, techniques, and approaches of writing for a variety of formats for television, radio, and the Internet. This text includes a variety of formats, including interviews, sports, advertisement, and scripts, as well as news.
Writing for the Mass Media by
This successful book offers a simple organization, clear writing, abundant exercises, and precise examples that give readers the information about media writing and the opportunity to develop their skills as professional writers. Using a workbook-style format, it introduces and explains the major forms of media writing–inverted pyramid for print and Web, dramatic unity for broadcast, copy platforms for advertising, and the various writing structures required for public relations–and covers all major areas of media, including the Internet. Its basic and practical approach make it an excellent text for an introductory writing course.
Marketing and Public Relations for Artistic and Creative Industries
AMMKTPR introduces students to principles and practices in marketing and public relations for artistic and creative industries. This course teaches students brand management, writing for media, interviews, special events and promotions, and new media and communications technology.
Advancing insights on brand management by
This book is an original, high-quality collection of chapters about highly topical and important brand management issues, and it shows both theoretical and empiric analysis. The 10 selected chapters are referred, with original contents and rigorous research methodologies, to some important challenges the brand management has to face in the current competitive contexts, characterized by the dominance of the intangible resources and the new information and communication technologies. Written by leading academics, this book is dedicated not only to marketing and management scholars but also to students wanting to investigate the knowledge concerning special fields and special brand management themes. As well to the practitioners who can find a wide reference also to the managerial implication from the strategic and operative perspectives.
Brand Meaning Management by
Establishing, expanding and leveraging brand meaning is critically important yet exceedingly complex. Successful brand meaning management is foundational to both brand differentiation and to outcomes like brand identification and brand attachment. Yet, managing this meaning over time is complex. Noted contributors to this special issue add new insights to this complex domain. A group of papers lend insight into the myriad entities involved in the meaning making process itself, such as marketers, celebrities, brand users, and the broader culture in which consumers live. A second set emphasizes the critical impact that brand meaning has on consumers and brands themselves-outcomes that include brand identification and attachment, social relationship management, and brand evangelism. The final set addresses when and how brand transgressions can threaten these outcomes, and what brands must do to recover from lost or tainted meanings. The volume co-editors provide an overview of the chapters and identify future research issues on brand meaning management in B2B (vs. B2C) markets, and how multi-product firms manage the collective set of meanings that comprise their brand portfolio.
Communication and Information Technologies Annual by
Sponsored by the Communication and Information Technologies Section of the American Sociological Association, this volume examines wide-ranging aspects of culture, communication, and [new] media broadly defined. Themes include the interplay between [new] media and any of the following: culture, communication, technology, convergence, the arts, cultural production, and cultural change in the digital age. Contributions shed light on emergent phenomena that -sociologists, particularly those studying media or communication, culture scholars will find intriguing.
Generational Use of New Media by
Generational Use of New Media examines and contrasts how younger and older people, representing different generations, engage with the new media that they increasingly encounter in everyday life. Exploring the various assumptions about the degrees to which younger and older people are more or less willing to use, or are capable of using, new media, the social circumstances under which they do so and the very design of those media, this book critically examines the gap that is assumed to exist between younger users of new media and older non-users. Thematically organised and offering comparative analyses of the generational use of new media and technology, this timely volume presents the latest research and rich new empirical material gathered in the EU, USA and Hong Kong, to reflect on societal practices and the practical implications of building a more inclusive information society.
The Handbook of Brand Management Scales by
The Handbook of Brand Management Scales is a concise, clear and easy-to-use collection of scales in brand management. Scales are a critical tool for researchers measuring consumer insights, emotions and responses. Existing handbooks of marketing scales do not include (or include very few) scales related to brand management constructs. This book is the first to meet this need. Sample scales include brand personality, brand authenticity, consumer-brand relationships and brand equity. Each scale is included with a clear definition of the construct it is designed to benchmark, a description of the scale itself, how to use it and examples of possible applications in managerial and academic contexts. A much-needed reference point, this is a unique, vital and convenient volume that should be within reach of every marketing scholar's and manager's desk.
The Indestructible Brand by
Whether or not your brand is on social media, your consumers are. They are continuously sharing their good and bad experiences about your brand. Most brands are not prepared to deal with negative feedback which, if ignored, can spiral into a crisis. This book seeks to aid brand and business owners to structure organizations to be crisis- ready. Creating a crisis squad and a crisis playbook, envisioning various scenarios that can occur, and what the brand's response should be are some of the areas the book delves into. It also recommends preventive measures that can save brands from social embarrassment, and social listening strategies that can alert organizations to a problem before it becomes a crisis. When everything else fails and a crisis is at hand, the focus shifts to executing the playbook, turning the conversation around leveraging evangelists and influencers. Once the crisis has ended, it's time to audit the playbook and close the gaps, as well as evaluate financial or reputational damage done to the brand, and see how quickly one can recover.
Keywords for Media Studies by
Introduces key terms, research traditions, debates, and their histories, and offers a sense of the new frontiers and questions emerging in the field of media studies Keywords for Media Studies introduces and aims to advance the field of critical media studies by tracing, defining, and problematizing its established and emergent terminology. The book historicizes thinking about media and society, whether that means noting a long history of "new media," or tracing how understandings of media "power" vary across time periods and knowledge formations. Bringing together an impressive group of established scholars from television studies, film studies, sound studies, games studies, and more, each of the 65 essays in the volume focuses on a critical concept, from "fan" to "industry," and "celebrity" to "surveillance." Keywords for Media Studies is an essential tool that introduces key terms, research traditions, debates, and their histories, and offers a sense of the new frontiers and questions emerging in the field of media studies. Visit keywords.nyupress.org for online essays, teaching resources, and more.
Management and Economics of Communication by
This handbook combines the perspectives of communication studies, economics and management, and psychology in order to provide a comprehensive economic view on personal and mass communication. It is divided into six parts that comprise: 1. an overarching introduction that defines the field and provides a brief overview of its history (1 chapter) 2. the most commonly used theoretic frameworks for the analysis of communication economics and management (4 chapters) 3. the peculiarities of the quantitative and qualitative methods and data used in the field (3 chapters) 4. key issues of the field such as the economics of language, labor in creative industries, media concentration, branding etc. (10 chapters) 5. descriptions of the development, trends and peculiarities of the field in different parts of the world, written by scholars from the respective region (10 chapters) 6. reflections on future directions for the field, both from a managerial and from an economics perspective (1 chapter). The authors of the individual chapters represent different academic disciplines, research traditions, and geographic backgrounds. The reader will thus gain multifaceted insights into the management and economics of communication.
Message and medium : English language practices across old and new media by
Studies of digital communication technologies often focus on the apparently unique set of multimodal resources afforded to users and the development of innovative linguistic strategies for performing mediatised identities and maintaining online social networks. This edited volume interrogates the novelty of such practices by establishing a transhistorical approach to the study of digital communication. The transhistorical approach explores language practices as lived experiences grounded in historical contexts, and aims to identify those elements of human behaviour that transcend historical boundaries, looking beyond specific developments in communication technologies to understand the enduring motivations and social concerns that drive human communication. The volume reveals long-term patterns in the indexical functions of seemingly innovative written and multimodal resources and the ideologies that underpin them, and shows that methods are not necessarily contingent on their datasets: historical analytic frameworks can be applied to digital data and newer approaches used to understand historical data. These insights present exciting opportunities for English language researchers, both historical and modern.
Visual marketing : 99 proven ways for small businesses to market with images and design by
Effective creative strategies and campaigns for business owners or marketers Whether it's on the Web, in a book, or live in-person, the most effective solutions are those that unexpectedly grab our attention. David Langton and Anita Campbell identify eye-catching and thought-provoking marketing and PR tips, ideas, and creative "stunts." This compendium of winning ideas will inspire small business leaders, creative professionals, and students. Award-winning visual communication designer David Langton has worked for a range of businesses from Fortune 500 leaders to small businesses. Anita Campbell, an internationally known small business expert, reaches over 2 million small business owners and stakeholders annually. Through case studies, photos, and illustrations, Visual Marketing displays creative marketing campaigns that brought attention to small businesses in unique, compelling, and unexpected ways. Online visual marketing solutions may include apps, interactive games tools and modules; infographics; HTML emails / e-newsletters; widgets; YouTube videos; flash animation; social networking campaigns; websites, weblets, mini-sites; blogs; podcasts / MP3s; projected signage; PowerPoint / keynote presentations In print solutions may include brochures, flyers; annual reports; books; direct mail, post cards; newsletters; invitations; letters; press releases; infographics On-site, giveaways, exhibit, and tradeshow solutions may include live events and performances; signs; billboards; exhibits; banners; tent cards; posters; plasmas screens; kiosks; giveaways: tchotchkes, t-shirts, tote bags, etc.; floor graphics/vinyl graphic wraps With Visual Marketing, you'll discover 99 powerful strategies for capturing the attention of your potential customers.
Organizational Management for Artistic and Creative Industries
AMORGMA introduces organizational management covers functions of human resource management, managerial process and competencies, leadership and change management, organizational mapping, organizational design systems and change, and the like, for artistic and creative industries.
Advancing Human Resource Project Management by
Get real-world solutions and evidence-based guidelines for HRproject management challenges Tackling major human resources management projects can bedaunting, but now you can learn from the lessons of HRprofessionals who have encountered roadblocks or challenges insimilar contexts. Advancing Human Resource ProjectManagement is an in-depth, thoughtful resource that highlightsthe knowledge and experience of those who have undertaken large HRprojects. This guide illustrates what worked and what didn't, witha focus on evidence and real-world cases to illuminate effectivestrategies and solutions. Each chapter presents empirical findingscomplemented by professional judgment and wisdom from humanresource management professionals well-versed in global businessenvironments. Advancing Human Resource Project Management recognizesthe importance of context, addresses the practical and professionalimplications of managing HR management projects in differentindustry sectors, and provides comprehensive coverage onimplementing global development programs and project initiation andplanning. Ideal for global Industrial and Organizational Psychologyfaculty and practitioners, graduate students, and, especially, HRprofessionals, this resource uncovers the best evidence-basedpractices available today for effective HR project managementstrategies. The book includes: An emphasis on the implications and challenges of providingsolutions for HR business problems on a global scale Real-world cases and firsthand professional experiences withsummaries of knowledge gained from research and practice Advice on tackling challenges inherent in various stages of aproject Expertise and counsel from HR professionals familiar with largeprojects and from those who study and work in the field of projectmanagement Let this comprehensive resource guide your approach toinitiating and managing large HR projects. With solid, empiricalevidence and relatable case studies, Advancing Human ResourceProject Management is the ideal professional companion forthose looking to strengthen their project techniques, projectleadership, and management skills.
Arts leadership : creating sustainable arts organizations by
The contemporary world faces unprecedented upheaval and change forcing institutions of all types to rethink how they are designed and how they must now function if they are to survive into an uncertain future. The performing arts are no exception; in an era of constant change and technological transformation, arts organizations and their leaders face significant organizational challenges if they are to maintain their relevance. Arts Leadership: Creating Sustainable Arts Organizations provides a contemporary overview of the field of arts leadership, focused on the performing arts. It examines what these challenges are, how they are affecting the performing arts and arts organizations in general and proposes creative ways to reimagine, build and lead sustainable arts organizations in this uncharted environment. With a global perspective drawn from his extensive experience advising arts organizations around the world and based on his own work successfully leading important performing arts organizations in the United States, Foster proposes an innovative approach to organizational design, systems, and structures for arts leaders in the 21st century that is based in ecological thinking and the creative process that is intrinsic to the arts. In disrupting conventional arts leadership practice, the book provides an exceptional tool to understand a unique sector, and is essential reading for students and practitioners across the creative and cultural industries.
Beyond Change Management by
"With this extensively upgraded second edition, Dean Anderson andLinda Ackerman Anderson solidify their status as the leadingauthorities on change leadership and organizational transformation.This is without question the most comprehensive approach forleaders who are serious about making change a strategicdiscipline." ?Jim Kouzes, Author, The Leadership Challengeand The Truth About Leadership A comprehensive look at what it really takes to leadtransformation successfully, written by two of the "masters of thecraft." The author's best-selling first edition has beensignificantly updated to deliver critical insights about howleaders can achieve breakthrough results from transformationalchange, even in these challenging times. The book introducesconscious change leadership and provides insights about thecritical human and change process dynamics that leaders must beaware of in order to succeed, and reveals why most leaders do notsee these dynamics. Most importantly, it highlights the shift inworldview leaders must make to deliver greater success. The book outlines the author's highly successful"multi-dimensional, process approach" to transformation, addressingchange at the organizational, team, relational, and personallevels. It thoroughly addresses leadership mindset and behavioralmodeling, culture change, and large systems implementations,providing best practices developed over three decades of successfulconsulting to Fortune 500 executives. Written for executives andmanagers, OD consultants, change managers, project managers, andchange consultants, this must read book provides the foundation forsuccessful change leadership and consulting. Based on thirty years of action research with Fortune 500companies, government agencies, the military, and large non-profitglobal organizations Provides worksheets, tools, case examples, and assessments thatyou can immediately apply to all types of change efforts Contrasts two vastly different leadership approaches to change,and reveals why only one works Provides solutions for turning employee resistance intocommitment Outlines the common mistakes in change and how you can avoidthem Reveals the differences between transformation and other typesof change so you can build strategies that really get results Beyond Change Management advances the field of changeleadership, and takes the concept of managing change inorganizations to a whole new level. It is a must read for anyonewanting to stay abreast of advancements in the field. Together with its companion volume, The Change Leader?sRoadmap: How to Navigate Your Organization?sTransformation, these books can be used as texts in corporateor graduate school training programs and courses.
Business Organisation for Construction by
With a user-friendly style and a strong theoretical base, Business Organisation for Construction provides readers with the tools required to skillfully and successfully operate a business in today's construction industry. Arranged into three sections, Chris March explains: strategy and vision, business finance and the market place the organization, recruitment, support, motivation and leadership of people communication and negotiation. With a wealth of practical construction industry experience, March provides rich anecdotal evidence to enlighten the theory, as well as illustrations and tables to clarify. Available singly or as part of a set, Business Organisation for Construction is a valuable resource for construction students.
The Creative Business Guide to Running a Graphic Design Business by
This is the industry's first comprehensive manual for running and maintaining a successful graphic design business. The four sections cover organization, marketing, personnel, and operations, and provide the necessary tools unique to the specific management styles and operation agendas of a design firm. A complete appendix of business forms is also included.
Design Management by
Placed at the nexus between marketing and organisational studies, this book breaks a new ground on the intersection of these two disciplines with design management. With the latest marketing thinking assigning greater emphasis on organisations co-creating value with consumers and other stakeholders by placing them at the heart of the product/service development process, it has never been more important to integrate marketing and organisational perspectives into design management. This text explores the importance of managing design strategies, design processes, and design implementation in a way that it puts the human and the society at the centre, contributing to organisational success, customer gratification, and social welfare. Drawing from a variety of scholarly research and personal commercial insights, this book integrates key concepts of marketing, innovation, and design, to provide an in-depth discussion of the subject of design management. With end-of-chapter exercises, case studies, and reflective insights along with online teaching materials, Design Management: Organisation and Marketing Perspectives is an essential text for students in design management, marketing, and innovation, or for anyone interested in gaining an in-depth understanding of how design can be successfully managed in order to generate the best answers to contemporary global challenges.
Design Management by
All designers will feel that creativity and innovation are at the heart of their designs. But for a design to have an effective and lasting impact it needs to work within certain structures, or have those structures created suitably around it. No matter how you work, a design can always be improved by assessing where it fits into the market, how it best to strengthen it before it's set in stone, who it could appeal to. It needs to be managed. In this accessible and informative second edition, Kathryn Best brings together the theory and practice of design management. With new interviews, case studies and related exercises, she provides an up to date guide for students wanting to know more about the strategy, process and implementation crucial to the management of design. The book takes its reader through the essential steps to good management of design and highlights topics currently under debate. In each part of the book Strategy, Process and Implementation are each explained using advice from leaders in the industry and real life examples. Best breaks up each part into clear and readable sections to create the perfect undergraduate book on design management.
Design thinking : integrating innovation, customer experience and brand value by
This thought-provoking and inspirational book covers such topics as: developing a solid creative process through "Visual Reflection Notebooks" and "Bring Play to Work"; understanding the artist's unique identity in relation to the larger culture; building systems of support and collaboration; explaining how an artist's needs and passions can lead to innovation and authenticity; using language to inspire visual creativity; responding to the Internet and changing concepts of what is public and private; and accepting digression as a creative necessity. Through the exercises and techniques outlined in Art Without Compromise*, the reader will develop new confidence to pursue individual goals and inspiration to explore new paths, along with motivation to overcome creative blocks. With a revised understanding of the relevance in their own work within the sphere of contemporary culture, the artist will come away with a clearer perspective on his or her past and future work and a critical eye for personal authenticity. Allworth Press, an imprint of Skyhorse Publishing, publishes a broad range of books on the visual and performing arts, with emphasis on the business of art. Our titles cover subjects such as graphic design, theater, branding, fine art, photography, interior design, writing, acting, film, how to start careers, business and legal forms, business practices, and more. While we don't aspire to publish a New York Times bestseller or a national bestseller, we are deeply committed to quality books that help creative professionals succeed and thrive. We often publish in areas overlooked by other publishers and welcome the author whose expertise can help our audience of readers.
Gower Handbook of Leadership and Management Development by
On few occasions in the history of modern management have leadership skills been in such sharp focus as they are now. The ability to direct often very large and diverse organizations; to make sense of the complex and turbulent markets and environments in which you operate; and to adapt and learn seems at an all time premium. The premise behind the fifth edition of this influential Handbook is that leadership, management and organizational development are all parts of the same process; enhancing the capacity of organizations, whatever their size, and the people within them to achieve their purpose. To this end, the editors have brought together a who's who of current writers on leadership and development and created the definitive single volume guide to the subject. The perspectives that the text provides to leadership, learning and development, embrace the formal and the informal, cultures and case examples from organizations of all kinds; and offers readers a rigorous, readable and, where appropriate, ground-breaking book. In the 14 years since the fourth edition of this classic book, very much has changed. But the need for this Handbook is as strong as ever and the Fifth Edition of Gower Handbook of Leadership and Management Development is set to become a definitive read for senior managers and those who develop them and an essential reader for the management students aspiring to become the next generation of leaders.
Human Resource Management, Social Innovation and Technology by
This volume places Social Innovation between Human Resource Management (HRM) and Technology. There is a growing acceptance of the theory that HRM is strategically important for social innovation within organizations. To meet the requirements of globalization, diversity, "war for talent", and fast technological developments, HRM should allow a greater amount of flexibility and innovation in their policies and practices. In order for this to happen, however, HRM needs to be modernised by replacing inefficient and unsustainable HR practices and forms with flexible, sound, and pioneering ones, crossing inter and intraorganizational boundaries. Built within the Social Innovation research tradition, this volume views innovation of HRM from two ends of one continuum: At one end, HR practices and policies should be designed to support innovative organizational members, the creation of new ideas, an innovative organizational climate, and enlargement of the innovation capacity of organizations. At the other end, the HRM function evolves through applying new structures and new channels for delivery of the HR practices, and through involving new agents in the management of Human Resources.
Human Resource Management in Construction by
The construction sector is one of the most complex and problematic arenas within which to manage people. As a result, the applicability of much mainstream human resource management (HRM) theory to this industry is limited. Indeed, the operational realities faced by construction organizations mean that all too often the needs of employees are subjugated by performance concerns. This has potentially dire consequences for those who work in the industry, for the firms that employ them and ultimately, for the prosperity and productivity of the industry as a whole. In this new edition of their leading text, Andrew Dainty and Martin Loosemore have assembled a collection of perspectives which critically examine key aspects of the HRM function in the context of contemporary construction organizations. Rather than simply update the previous edition, the aim of this second edition is to provide a more critical commentary on the ways in which the industry addresses the HRM function and how this affects those who work within the industry. To this end, the editors have gathered contributions from many of the leading thinkers within construction HRM to critique the perspectives presented in the first edition. Each contributor either tackles specific aspects of the HRM function, or provides a critical commentary on industry practice. The authors explain, using real-life case studies, the ways in which construction firms respond to the myriad pressures that they face through their HRM practices. Together the contributions encourage the reader to rethink the HRM function and its role in defining the employment relationship. This provides essential reading for students of construction and project management, and reflective practitioners who are interested in theoretically informed insights into industry practice and its implications. 　
Leadership & management : theory & practice by
This market-leading textbook provides students with rigorous information while balancing the key topics with a practical approach, through real-life case studies, examples and problem-solving techniques. It uses everyday business terms and language, putting management in a context that makes it easy to understand for all types of learners. Leadership & Management: Theory & Practice enables students to strengthen skills in areas such as managing poor performance, being more directive, and solving problems permanently. It is noted for its application across industry sectors and different types of business. -- Publishers website.
LinkedIn for Business: How Advertisers, Marketers and Salespeople Get Leads, Sales and Profits from LinkedIn by
Monetise LinkedIn, with the complete practical, tactical, step-by-step LinkedIn system for every marketer, advertiser and sales pro!
Managing innovation : integrating technological, market and organizational change by
Managing Innovation is an established, bestselling textfor MBA, MSc and advanced undergraduate courses on innovationmanagement, management of technology, new product development andentrepreneurship. It is also widely used by managers in both theservices and manufacturing sectors. Now in its fifth edition, Managing Innovation has been fullyrevised and now comes with a fully interactive e-bookhousing an impressive array of videos, cases, exercises and toolsto bring innovation to life. The book is also accompanied by theInnovation Portal at www.innovation-portal.infowhich contains an extensive collection of additional digitalresources for both lecturers and students. Features: The Research Notes and Views from the Front Linefeature boxes strengthen the evidence-based and practical approachmaking this a must read for anyone studying or working withininnovation The Innovation Portal www.innovation-portal.info is an essential resource for both student and lecturerand includes the Innovation Toolkit ? a fullysearchable array of practical innovation tools along with acompendium of cases, exercises, tools andvideos The interactive e-book that accompanies the textprovides enriched content to deepen the readers understanding ofinnovation concepts
Managing interdisciplinary projects : a primer for architecture, engineering and construction by
Construction, architecture and engineering projects are complex undertakings, involving a temporary grouping of people and companies, with different agendas and experience, coming together to achieve a project goal. This book investigates the dynamics of the relationships between individuals involved in architecture, engineering and construction projects. It combines a structured theoretical framework, derived from social psychology and mainstream management theory, with case studies and research from the built environment sector. Focusing on how people interact, communicate and work together, it examines how best to manage the interdisciplinary relationships that form and reform during the project life cycle. The book covers vital areas of project management, whose importance has recently come to be recognized, and will be valuable for students at both undergraduate and graduate level. Practitioners will also find it a useful insight into the social aspect of project management, with implications and applications that apply to all projects in the built environment sector.
Organization Management in Construction by
Today's construction environment is changing at an unprecedented pace and executives are facing a diverse set of issues - globalization, economics, workforce demographics, and technology. Moreover the traditional issues of competition and delivery are being challenged by new laws and new industry entrants; and the tasks of project and organization management are being overhauled. This all demands greater leadership from senior management. Construction executives typically reach senior level after many years mastering the art of project management, which has given them very little time or opportunity to learn the concepts and principles of organization leadership - unlike their counterparts in other industries who have been steeped in this. This book provides a comprehensive overview of the key issues that organization leaders must understand and address. It provides concise summaries by leading international authorities of the ten key strategic management issues, shows how they have emerged, and outlines their potential impact on the construction organization.
Principles of Human Resource Management by
Gain a better understanding of how human resources impacts both individuals and organizations with this market-leading, practical text. PRINCIPLES OF HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT, 16E, International Edition builds upon a foundation of research and theory with an inviting, practical framework that focuses on today's most critical HR issues and current practices.The book's engaging writing style and strong visual design use more than 500 memorable examples from a variety of real organizations to illustrate key points and connect concepts to current HR practice. Fresh cases spotlight the latest developments and critical trends, while hands-on applications focus on practical tips and suggestions for success.
Ten universal principles of great art and their applications to leadership and management by Theatre management : arts leadership for the 21st century by
An essential introductory textbook that provides a comprehensive and student-friendly overview of the key processes involved in developing and managing a theatre in the 21st century. It covers a complete range of topics fundamental to successful commercial and not-for-profit theatre management, from developing a mission statement to communicating with stakeholders, from marketing and promotion to fund development platforms, and from governance structures to community engagement. With over two decades of experience in the industry, Anthony Rhine encourages a critical understanding of theatre management; rather than simply giving students the facts and theories to memorise, he shows readers how to think like theatre managers, giving them the skills needed to be able to carve out their own career paths. Far-reaching and globally applicable, the text serves as an invaluable guide for aspiring theatre managers, as well as undergraduate and postgraduate students on Theatre Management, Arts Management, Creative Industries and Theatre and Performance Studies degree courses.
Vision and Values in Design Management by
Vision and Values in Design Management explores the value of design as a key strategic resource that can be utilized in the pursuit of securing a competitive advantage within highly complex and emergent markets. Throughout the book, David Hands offers contributions from key thinkers and practitioners drawn from both industry and academia to provide an essential guide to the development, key issues and future directions of design management.
Organizational Management for Artistic and Creative Industries
AMORGMA introduces organizational management covers functions of human resource management, managerial process and competencies, leadership and change management, organizational mapping, organizational design systems and change, and the like, for artistic and creative industries.
Advancing Human Resource Project Management by
Get real-world solutions and evidence-based guidelines for HRproject management challenges Tackling major human resources management projects can bedaunting, but now you can learn from the lessons of HRprofessionals who have encountered roadblocks or challenges insimilar contexts. Advancing Human Resource ProjectManagement is an in-depth, thoughtful resource that highlightsthe knowledge and experience of those who have undertaken large HRprojects. This guide illustrates what worked and what didn't, witha focus on evidence and real-world cases to illuminate effectivestrategies and solutions. Each chapter presents empirical findingscomplemented by professional judgment and wisdom from humanresource management professionals well-versed in global businessenvironments. Advancing Human Resource Project Management recognizesthe importance of context, addresses the practical and professionalimplications of managing HR management projects in differentindustry sectors, and provides comprehensive coverage onimplementing global development programs and project initiation andplanning. Ideal for global Industrial and Organizational Psychologyfaculty and practitioners, graduate students, and, especially, HRprofessionals, this resource uncovers the best evidence-basedpractices available today for effective HR project managementstrategies. The book includes: An emphasis on the implications and challenges of providingsolutions for HR business problems on a global scale Real-world cases and firsthand professional experiences withsummaries of knowledge gained from research and practice Advice on tackling challenges inherent in various stages of aproject Expertise and counsel from HR professionals familiar with largeprojects and from those who study and work in the field of projectmanagement Let this comprehensive resource guide your approach toinitiating and managing large HR projects. With solid, empiricalevidence and relatable case studies, Advancing Human ResourceProject Management is the ideal professional companion forthose looking to strengthen their project techniques, projectleadership, and management skills.
Beyond Change Management by
"With this extensively upgraded second edition, Dean Anderson andLinda Ackerman Anderson solidify their status as the leadingauthorities on change leadership and organizational transformation.This is without question the most comprehensive approach forleaders who are serious about making change a strategicdiscipline." ?Jim Kouzes, Author, The Leadership Challengeand The Truth About Leadership A comprehensive look at what it really takes to leadtransformation successfully, written by two of the "masters of thecraft." The author's best-selling first edition has beensignificantly updated to deliver critical insights about howleaders can achieve breakthrough results from transformationalchange, even in these challenging times. The book introducesconscious change leadership and provides insights about thecritical human and change process dynamics that leaders must beaware of in order to succeed, and reveals why most leaders do notsee these dynamics. Most importantly, it highlights the shift inworldview leaders must make to deliver greater success. The book outlines the author's highly successful"multi-dimensional, process approach" to transformation, addressingchange at the organizational, team, relational, and personallevels. It thoroughly addresses leadership mindset and behavioralmodeling, culture change, and large systems implementations,providing best practices developed over three decades of successfulconsulting to Fortune 500 executives. Written for executives andmanagers, OD consultants, change managers, project managers, andchange consultants, this must read book provides the foundation forsuccessful change leadership and consulting. Based on thirty years of action research with Fortune 500companies, government agencies, the military, and large non-profitglobal organizations Provides worksheets, tools, case examples, and assessments thatyou can immediately apply to all types of change efforts Contrasts two vastly different leadership approaches to change,and reveals why only one works Provides solutions for turning employee resistance intocommitment Outlines the common mistakes in change and how you can avoidthem Reveals the differences between transformation and other typesof change so you can build strategies that really get results Beyond Change Management advances the field of changeleadership, and takes the concept of managing change inorganizations to a whole new level. It is a must read for anyonewanting to stay abreast of advancements in the field. Together with its companion volume, The Change Leader?sRoadmap: How to Navigate Your Organization?sTransformation, these books can be used as texts in corporateor graduate school training programs and courses.
The Business of Creativity by
How does a group of people, brought together because of their diverse skills and professional knowledge, set out to be creative ? How are ongoing tensions between beauty, fame, and money resolved? In The Business of Creativity, Brian Moeran, a leading scholar and writer on the creative industries, takes the sacred relic of creativity out of the crypt and airs it in the ethnographic alley. In contrast to the persistent image of creativity as the spontaneous inspiration of a gifted individual, Moeran shows how creativity emerges from collaborative engagements among people, genres, institutions, materials and technologies. He alternates thick description of work in fashion, advertising, and ceramic art with theoretical innovations that shed new light on the aesthetic, symbolic, and economic dimensions of creativity and the production of worth."
Getting to "Yes And" : the Art of Business Improv. by
Amidst the deluge of advice for businesspeople, there lies an overlooked tool, a key to thriving in today's fast-paced, unpredictable environment: improvisation. In Getting to "Yes And" veteran improv performer, university professor, CEO, and consultant Bob Kulhan unpacks a form of mental agility with powers far beyond the entertainment value of comedy troupes.Drawing on principles from cognitive and social psychology, behavioral economics, and communication, Kulhan teaches readers to think on their feet and approach the most typical business challenges with fresh eyes and openness. He shows how improv techniques such as the "Yes, and" approach, divergent and convergent thinking, and focusing on being present can translate into more productive meetings, swifter decisions, stronger collaboration, positive conflict resolution, mindfulness, and more. Moving from the individual to the organizational level, Kulhan compiles time-tested teaching methods and training exercises into an instrumental guide that readers can readily implement as a party of one or a company of thousands.
Human Resource Management, Social Innovation and Technology by
This volume places Social Innovation between Human Resource Management (HRM) and Technology. There is a growing acceptance of the theory that HRM is strategically important for social innovation within organizations. To meet the requirements of globalization, diversity, "war for talent", and fast technological developments, HRM should allow a greater amount of flexibility and innovation in their policies and practices. In order for this to happen, however, HRM needs to be modernised by replacing inefficient and unsustainable HR practices and forms with flexible, sound, and pioneering ones, crossing inter and intraorganizational boundaries. Built within the Social Innovation research tradition, this volume views innovation of HRM from two ends of one continuum: At one end, HR practices and policies should be designed to support innovative organizational members, the creation of new ideas, an innovative organizational climate, and enlargement of the innovation capacity of organizations. At the other end, the HRM function evolves through applying new structures and new channels for delivery of the HR practices, and through involving new agents in the management of Human Resources.
The innovation code : the creative power of constructive conflict by
The Innovation Code The Creative Power of Constructive Conflict Harmony is sublime in music but deadly to innovation. The only way to create new, hybrid solutions is to clash. Innovation happens when we bring people with contrasting perspectives and complementary areas of expertise together in one room. We innovate best with people who challenge us, not people who agree with us. It sounds like a recipe for chaos and confusion. But in The Innovation Code, Jeff DeGraff, dubbed the "Dean of Innovation," and Staney DeGraff introduce a simple framework to explain the ways different kinds of thinkers and leaders can create constructive conflict in any organization. This positive tension produces ingenious solutions that go far beyond "the best of both worlds." Drawing on their work with nearly half of the Fortune 500 companies, the DeGraffs help you harness the creative energy that arises from opposing viewpoints. They identify four contrasting styles of innovator--the Artist, the Engineer, the Athlete, and the Sage--and include exercises and assessments for building, managing, and embracing the dynamic discord of a team that contains all four. You can also figure out where you fit on the continuum of innovator archetypes. Using vivid examples, The Innovation Code offers four steps to normalize conflict and channel it to develop something completely new. By following these simple steps, you will get breakthrough innovations that are both good for you and your customers. This is a rigorous but highly accessible guide for achieving breakthrough solutions by utilizing the full--and seemingly contradictory--spectrum of innovative thinking.
LinkedIn for Business: How Advertisers, Marketers and Salespeople Get Leads, Sales and Profits from LinkedIn by
Monetise LinkedIn, with the complete practical, tactical, step-by-step LinkedIn system for every marketer, advertiser and sales pro!
Managing interdisciplinary projects : a primer for architecture, engineering and construction by
Construction, architecture and engineering projects are complex undertakings, involving a temporary grouping of people and companies, with different agendas and experience, coming together to achieve a project goal. This book investigates the dynamics of the relationships between individuals involved in architecture, engineering and construction projects. It combines a structured theoretical framework, derived from social psychology and mainstream management theory, with case studies and research from the built environment sector. Focusing on how people interact, communicate and work together, it examines how best to manage the interdisciplinary relationships that form and reform during the project life cycle. The book covers vital areas of project management, whose importance has recently come to be recognized, and will be valuable for students at both undergraduate and graduate level. Practitioners will also find it a useful insight into the social aspect of project management, with implications and applications that apply to all projects in the built environment sector.
Tuned in : uncover the extraordinary opportunities that lead to business breakthroughs by
If you market a product, service, or idea in any business, industry or organization, you must read Tuned In: Uncover the Extraordinary Opportunities That Lead to Business Breakthroughs, a guide to understanding and meeting the needs of consumers, whether or not they make those needs clear. An easy-to-follow six-step process developed over the past 15 years can help you address unsolved problems, recognize buyer personas, quantify impact and create breakthrough experiences. Stop wasting time by guessing what your market needs and start understanding consumer desire.
Project Management for Artistic and Creative Industries
AMPROJM introduces project management which covers essentials of planning and implementation of any size and scope of project in for-profit and non-profit sectors of the artistic and creative industries.
Agile Project Management for Dummies by
Flex your project management muscle Agile project management is a fast and flexible approach to managing all projects, not just software development. By learning the principles and techniques in this book, you'll be able to create a product roadmap, schedule projects, and prepare for product launches with the ease of Agile software developers. You'll discover how to manage scope, time, and cost, as well as team dynamics, quality, and risk of every project. As mobile and web technologies continue to evolve rapidly, there is added pressure to develop and implement software projects in weeks instead of months'and Agile Project Management For Dummies can help you do just that. Providing a simple, step-by-step guide to Agile project management approaches, tools, and techniques, it shows product and project managers how to complete and implement projects more quickly than ever. Complete projects in weeks instead of months Reduce risk and leverage core benefits for projects Turn Agile theory into practice for all industries Effectively create an Agile environment Get ready to grasp and apply Agile principles for faster, more accurate development.
Communication design : insights from the creative industries by
The success of a piece of communication has always been dependent on the connection between content, form, audience and context - what the message is, who it's aimed at, what it looks like, and how and where it's communicated. In recent years the balance between these elements has shifted. This book bridges the gap between education and emerging practices to provide students and practitioners with the information they need to understand the new skillsets required to succeed in this changing communication environment. Organized into themes of brand, experience, conversation, participation, navigation, advocacy and critique, it explores the core ideas shaping contemporary practice. Alongside case studies of game changing projects, it uses analysis of historical context and interviews with key thinkers and practitioners to provide a relevant and contemporary guide to the creative employment landscape.
A complete step by step guide to successful event planning, organizing and management by 
Creative economy and culture : challenges, changes and futures for the creative industries by
"The most ambitious, thoughtful and internationally aware assessment to date of the creative economy. Defining creativity as the production of newness in complex, adaptive systems, the authors make the case that together the creative economy, along with other cultural outputs, represent a planet-wide innovation capability which marks an epochal turn in human affairs."- Ian Hargreaves, CBE, Professor of Digital Economy, Cardiff UniversityCreativity, new ideas and innovation - and with them the growth of knowledge - have spilled out of the lab, studio and factory into the street, scene, and social media. Now, everyday life is productive, everyone is creative, and new ideas can come from anywhere around the world. Instead of confining cultural expression to talented artists and expert professionals, this book investigates creative new ideas from everyone. Instead of confining the 'creative industries' to one sector of the economy and one type of productivity, this book extends the idea of creative innovation to everything. Instead of confining the growth of knowledge to wealthy countries or markets, this book looks for it in developing and emergent countries, everywhere.The productivity of creativity can now be seen as a global phenomenon. It demands a systems-based and dynamic mode of explanation. Creative Economy and Culturepursues the conceptual, historical, practical, critical and educational issues and implications. It looks at conceptual challenges, the forces and dynamics of change, and prospects for the future of creative work at planetary scale.It is essential reading for upper level students and researchers of the creative and cultural industries across media and cultural studies, communication and sociology.
Creative Industries and Entrepreneurship by
This book analyses the relationship between creative and cultural industries, local economic development and entrepreneurship from a global perspective. In so doing, it investigates the evolving paradigm of creative industries and creative entrepreneurship and their related economy over time.Creative Industries and Entrepreneurship explores cultural and creative economics, management, entrepreneurship, international business, and urban and regional sciences, in both developed and newly emerging countries. The authors provide a framework to understand the evolving paradigm of creative industries and creative entrepreneurship while highlighting the distinction between 'first generation countries' such as the US, Canada, Australia and Europe, and 'second generation countries' in Asia, South America and North Africa. By adopting a multidisciplinary approach, the book develops a comprehensive overview of the composite phenomenon of the creative economy and its relationship with entrepreneurship.This inter-disciplinary work will appeal to researchers and scholars interested in creative industries, the creative economy and entrepreneurship, in addition to policy makers and managers within these areas. Readers will find an up-to-date presentation of existing and new research perspectives in these domains.
Design Management by
This is a design guide for architects, engineers and contractors concerning the principles and application of design management. This book addresses the value that design management and design managers contribute to construction projects. As part of the PocketArchitecture series, Design Management is divided into two parts: Fundamentals and Application. In Part 1, Fundamentals, the chapters address the why, what, how and when questions in a simple and informative style, illustrated with vignettes from design management professionals. In Part 2, case studies from Colombia, Norway and the USA represent unique examples of the application of design management. This book offers a concise overview of design management for postgraduate students and early career design managers.
Design Management by
All designers will feel that creativity and innovation are at the heart of their designs. But for a design to have an effective and lasting impact it needs to work within certain structures, or have those structures created suitably around it. No matter how you work, a design can always be improved by assessing where it fits into the market, how it best to strengthen it before it's set in stone, who it could appeal to. It needs to be managed. In this accessible and informative second edition, Kathryn Best brings together the theory and practice of design management. With new interviews, case studies and related exercises, she provides an up to date guide for students wanting to know more about the strategy, process and implementation crucial to the management of design. The book takes its reader through the essential steps to good management of design and highlights topics currently under debate. In each part of the book Strategy, Process and Implementation are each explained using advice from leaders in the industry and real life examples. Best breaks up each part into clear and readable sections to create the perfect undergraduate book on design management.
The disappearing product : marketing and markets in the creative industries by
The Disappearing Product combines analysis of developments in the creative economy with practical guidance for marketing in the creative industries. Using theoretical models and extensive practical examples, this book challenges cultural producers to reclaim their place in the creative economy. Marketing is situated in the context of social, cultural and technological change that has revolutionised the creative and media industries. Traditional broadcasters, publishers and record labels have been displaced by a new generation of intermediaries including Amazon, Apple, Facebook and Google. These new intermediaries are marginalising cultural producers, devaluing products and monopolising consumer attention. Bilton's analysis focuses on how the creative industries must respond to these structural changes with new, innovative marketing methods for cultural products. Key features include: * a defined approach to marketing geared towards the cultural and creative industries, distinguished from 'business as usual' and 'arts marketing' * case studies and questions for discussion that can be used in the classroom * analysis of the creative economy highlighting practical strategies for marketers and managers * key examples of recent innovative marketing by artists and cultural entrepreneurs. An essential guide for students of creative industries, marketing and management, this book allows readers to develop their own tailored approach to marketing. Cultural entrepreneurs, marketers and managers will benefit from the in-depth insight into new patterns of consumption, transformed markets and emerging business models.
Effective Project Management by
The popular guide to the project management body of knowledge, now fully updated Now in its eighth edition, this comprehensive guide to project management has long been considered the standard for both professionals and academics, with nearly 40,000 copies sold in the last three editions! Well-known expert Robert Wysocki has added four chapters of new content based on instructor feedback, enhancing the coverage of best-of-breed methods and tools for ensuring project management success. With enriched case studies, accompanying exercises and solutions on the companion website, and PowerPoint slides for all figures and tables, the book is ideal for instructors and students as well as active project managers. Serves as a comprehensive guide to project management for both educators and project management professionals Updated to cover the new PMBOK® Sixth Edition Examines traditional, agile, and extreme project management techniques; the Enterprise Project Management Model; and Kanban and Scrumban methodologies Includes a companion website with exercises and solutions and well as PowerPoint slides for all the figures and tables used Written by well-known project management expert Robert Wysocki Effective Project Management, Eighth Edition remains the comprehensive resource for project management practitioners, instructors, and students. (PMBOK is a registered mark of the Project Management Institute, Inc.)
Fundamentals of Project Management by
Having already sold more than 200,000 copies and helped generations of project managers navigate the ins and outs of every aspect of successful project management, this revised fifth edition of Fundamentals of Project Management remains the perfect resource for succeeding in this complex discipline that has changed greatly in recent years. Fully updated in accordance with the latest version of the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK®), this all-encompassing book contains new information and expanded coverage on topics including estimating; stakeholder management; procurement management; creating a communication plan; project closure; requirements for PMP certification; and much more. Readers will also learn how to:* Clarify project goals and objectives* Develop a work breakdown in structure* Create a project risk plan* Produce a realistic schedule* Manage change requests* Control and evaluate progress at every stageChock full of tools, techniques, examples, and instructive exercises, don't go one more day without equipping yourself with what PM World Journal calls " . . . a great resource for helping a project manager or other team member to learn new tools and techniques or refresh their knowledge."
Human factors in control room design : a practical guide for project managers and senior engineers by
A succinct guide to a Human Factors programme of work This book provides a reference for project managers to assist in identifying the key rudiments of good Human Factors design. It is intended to be used in conjunction with an appointed Human Factors manager as part of a detailed design programme, read by all engineers and designers in order to establish a wide understanding across the whole team of the importance of Human Factors. Human Factors in Military and Industrial Control Room Design offers succinct advice, tailored for rapid injection into complex Human Factors programmes, together with applicability to any control room design, military or industrial. Applications include warship control rooms, command centres, fire and accident response centres, chemical plants, nuclear installations, oil rigs, refineries and other similar industries. Key features: A template for a thorough Human Factors programme of work. Applicability to any control room design. Aims to address operator workload and optimise system performance, comfort and safety. Can save significant costs by optimised system integration and enhanced system operation. It is advised that project managers use Human Factors in Military and Industrial Control Room Design as a template to develop a control room "Operating Philosophy" and "Human Computer Interface (HCI) Style Guide" for their own purposes within the constraints of their specific industry.
Introducing the Creative Industries by
"This text does a sterling job at identifying, outlining and defining the many elements that go to make up this booming sector of industry. What makes it particularly interesting is that it includes the view of the creative industries from the perspective of working in it, then the definitions of what products and producers are involved, and ends with the broader picture of the creative economy and predictions for future trends. Add to this that they include both theory and practice, and this really is an all-round guide to the vast domain that is loosely titled ′the creative industries′"- Angela Birchall, School of Media, Music & Performance, Salford UniversityThis is your complete guide to studying and succeeding in the creative industries. This book takes you through the history, trends, products and markets of the creative industries, showing how success depends on a mix of ideas, tactics and talent.When understanding social networks and cultural economy is just as important as hands-on skills or an entrepreneurial spirit, Introducing the Creative Industriesshows you how to use theories, concepts and practical skills to get ahead in their course and professional life. Creatively imagined and beautifully written, this book: Interweaves theoretical concepts and professional practice on every page Uses cultural economy to teach the essential concepts and thinkers Integrates case studies from fashion and gaming to journalism and music Teaches strategies for navigating the links between skills, industries, creativity and markets. This book shows you how to spot opportunities and use your knowledge and savvy to take kickstart your career in this fast-moving industry. It is an essential guidebook for students of creativity in media and communication, design, creative industries and business.
Key Concepts in Creative Industries by
"This guide to the emerging language of creative industries field is a valuable resource for researchers and students alike. Concise, extensively referenced, and accessible, this this is an exceptionally useful reference work."- Gauti Sigthorsson, Greenwich University"There could be no better guides to the conceptual map of the creative industries than John Hartley and his colleagues, pioneers in the field. This book is a clear, comprehensive and accessible tool-kit of ideas, concepts, questions and discussions which will be invaluable to students and practitioners alike. Key Concepts in Creative Industriesis set to become the corner stone of an expanding and exciting field of study"- Chris Barker, University of WollongongCreativity is an attribute of individual people, but also a feature of organizations like firms, cultural institutions and social networks. In the knowledge economy of today, creativity is of increasing value, for developing, emergent and advanced countries, and for competing cities. This book is the first to present an organized study of the key concepts that underlie and motivate the field of creative industries. Written by a world-leading team of experts, it presents readers with compact accounts of the history of terms, the debates and tensions associated with their usage, and examples of how they apply to the creative industries around the world. Crisp and relevant, this is an invaluable text for students of the creative industries across a range of disciplines, especially media, communication, economics, sociology, creative and performing arts and regional studies.
Leadership in the Creative Industries by
A groundbreaking book that explores the theory and practice of leading in the creative workplace Leadership in the Creative Industries is a much-needed guide to the theory and practice of the creative leadership skills that are essential to lead effectively in creative fields. As the growth of creative industries continues to surge and "noncreative" businesses put increasing emphasis on creativity and innovation, this book offers a practical resource that explores how to confidently lead a workforce, creatively. In order to lead creative people it is essential to understand the creative process, creativity, and the range of variables that affect it. This book fills a gap in the literature by exploring the creative leadership practices that are solidly grounded in evidenced-based research. The author includes suggestions for overcoming the challenges associated with leading creative people, and puts to rest many of the current industry misconceptions about leading creatively. This vital resource: Is the first book that highlights the theory and practice of creative leadership skills in the creative industries Includes best practices of leading for creativity, and reveals what encourages creativity and what suppresses it Debunks commonly held myths about leading a creative workforce with evidence-based guidance Contains a wealth of helpful tips, visualizations, callouts from primary research, and anecdotes from recognized thought leaders, to highlight and underscore important principles. Written for academics and students of leadership, those working or aspiring to work in the creative industries, Leadership in the Creative Industries puts the focuses directly on theory and practice of creative leadership in creative fields.
Management and the Arts by
The fifth edition of Management and the Arts discusses the theory and practical applications from all arts management perspectives including planning, marketing, finance, economics, organization, staffing, and group dynamics. Revised to reflect the latest thinking and trends in managing organizations and people, this fifth edition features class-tested questions in each chapter, which help students to integrate the material and develop ideas about how the situations and problems could have been handled. Statistics and real-world examples illustrate all aspects of arts managements, from budgeting and fundraising, to e-marketing and social networking, to working effectively with boards and staff members. Case studies focus on the challenges facing managers and organizations every day, and "In the News" quotes provide real-world examples of principles and theories. Students in Arts Management university courses along with arts managers in a theatre, museum, dance company, and opera will gain useful insights into strategic planning, organization, and integrated management theories with this book.
The Multiple Facets of Innovation Project Management by
For firms and other organizations, innovation has become a means of anticipating and managing major changes in their external context and overcoming societal challenges such as sustainable development. As a result, they must innovate repeatedly and continuously. This book explores the multiple facets of innovation project management, defined as the set of activities implemented to bring into being and successfully complete one or several innovation projects. It combines research experience, in cooperation with practitioners, and a theoretical, transversal and global overview inspired from different research streams. The author develops methodologies and frameworks that might be put into practice, provides a case study of research conducted with an air systems manufacturing firm, and outlines avenues for further reflection on innovation project management practice improvement.
The Oxford Handbook of Creative Industries by
The Oxford Handbook of Creative Industries is a reference work, bringing together many of the world's leading scholars in the application of creativity in economics, business and management, law, policy studies, organization studies, and psychology. Creative industries research has become aregular theme in academic journals and conferences across these subjects and is also an important agenda for governments throughout the world, while business people from established companies and entrepreneurs revaluate and innovate their models in creative industries.The Handbook is organized into four parts: Following the editors' introduction, Part One on Creativity includes individual creativity and how this scales up to teams, social networks, cities, and labour markets. Part Two addresses Generating and Appropriating Value from Creativity, as achieved byagents and organizations, such as entrepreneurs, stars and markets for symbolic goods, and considers how performance is measured in the creative industries.Part Three covers the mechanics of Managing and Organizing Creative Industries, with chapters on the role of brokerage and mediation in creative industry networks, disintermediation and glocalisation due to digital technology, the management of project-based organzations in creative industries,organizing events in creative fields, project ecologies, Global Production Networks, genres and classification and sunk costs and dynamics of creative industries.Part Four on Creative Industries, Culture and the Economy offers chapters on cultural change and entrepreneurship, on development, on copyright, economic spillovers and government policy.This authoritative collection is the most comprehensive source of the state of knowledge in the increasingly important field of creative industries research. Covering emerging economies and new technologies, it will be of interest to scholars and students of the arts, business, innovation, andpolicy.
The Production Managers Toolkit by
- The Production Manager's Toolkit is a well-rounded look at the theatrical production management profession, discussing management techniques, communication skills, and relationship building tactics to create effective and successful Production Managers. - This is the first and most comprehensive book devoted to theatrical production management. - This second edition includes all new case studies, new chapters, and updated content throughout, showcasing a continued progressive approach to the job and the field.
Project Management by
The latest edition of Project Management has beensignificantly revised to include important new developments in thefield. The previous editions of this best-selling book have beenwidely used on university degree programmes, executive managementtraining courses, planning software courses and professionalcertification. Features: Reflects changes in the new versions of the bodies of knowledgeof the PMI (American Project Management Institute) and the APM(British Association for Project Management) 7 additional chapters including expanded coverage of projectmethodology, project management process and knowledge areatrade-offs New case studies from different industries to indicate broaduse of project management techniques Includes numerous worked examples and practical exercises,which introduce the reader to the latest planning and controltechniques
Project management : a managerial approach. by
This title offers readers an insight into human behaviour, knowledge of organisational issues and quantitative methods needed to do project management. He emphasises the challenges they'll face including planning, negotiating, budgeting, communicating and scheduling.
Project Management Essentials for Dummies, Australian and New Zealand Edition by
The fast and easy way to perfect your project managementskills Whatever your profession, effective project management skillsare crucial to developing a successful business career. InProject Management Essentials For Dummies, you'll find allthe information and guidance you need to plan your projects withconfidence and deliver them on time. This comprehensive resourcewill help you unlock the keys to project management success, gainthe know-how to assess your strengths and weaknesses to maximiseyour project management potential, find proven ways to motivateyour project team, and so much more. In today's challenging business environment, professionals areincreasingly working within tight timeframes and constrictedbudgets, and striving to deliver projects under a range ofhigh-pressure scenarios. Thankfully, Project ManagementEssentials For Dummies shows you how to put out the firesigniting your workspace and explains how easy it is to organise,estimate and schedule projects more efficiently. In no time, you'llbe managing deliverables, assessing risks, maintainingcommunications, making the most of your resources and utilisingtime-saving technologies like a project management ninja! Understand how to develop your plans around a sturdy structure? from start to finish Discover how to select the right people and get the very bestfrom your team Recognise ways to take control and steer your projects tosuccess Get up to speed on mastering the basics of projectmanagement If you're a business professional looking to take your projectmanagement skills to new heights ? but don't want to getbogged down with forehead-scratching jargon and complexmethodologies ? Project Management Essentials ForDummies has everything you need to get up and running fast.
Project Management for Dummies - UK by
Get projects done on time, on budget, and with maximum efficiency - fully updated UK edition! In today's time-pressured and cost-conscious global business environment, reliable project management and competent delivery are more important than ever. Increasingly, project management is being seen as an essential management skill for all, as well as a career choice for many. This new UK edition of Project Management For Dummies, 2nd UK Edition quickly introduces you to the principles of successful project management with a clear and logical approach to help you deliver your projects, not only successfully, but also more easily. Unique to the UK edition, you'll find clear guidance on using the highly logical product-based approach to project planning, along with advice on how to release the great power of the technique, not only for effective planning, but also for project control. Updated with fresh content, tips, and tactics that cover everything you need to know from a project's start to finish, this accessible guide takes you through every stage of project management. You'll discover how to make project planning easier and more effective, manage resources and stay on track within a budget. Then you'll find help and advice to help you motivate and manage your teams to help them perform at their best. To help you stay at the leading edge, you'll also find two new chapters in this edition explaining project governance and the increasingly important international standard ISO 21500. In short, this book will help you master a highly valuable skill for advancing your career. Provides clear descriptions of who should do what in a project to prevent communication and control problems Presents the latest concepts in project management techniques Discusses how to keep risks under control during the project Includes access to online project management templates and checklists to aid in learning If you're a manager taking on a project for the first time or a more experienced project professional looking to get up to speed on the latest thinking and techniques, Project Management For Dummies, 2nd UK Edition equips you for project management success.
Project Management JumpStart by
An informative introduction for those considering a career in project management Project Management JumpStart offers a clear, practical introduction to the complex world of project management, with an entertaining approach based on real-world application. Fully revised to align with a Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge -PMBOK Guide©, 6th edition, this book provides an overview of the field followed by an exploration of current best practices. The practical focus facilitates retention by directly linking critical concepts to your everyday work, while the close adherence to PMBOK guidelines makes this book the perfect starting point for those considering certification to earn either PMP or CompTIA Project+ credentials. Project management is a top-five, in-demand skill in today's workplace, and the demand has spread far beyond IT to encompass nearly every industry; any organization that produces goods or services, whether for profit or not, has a vested interest in ensuring that projects are completed on time, on budget, and to the satisfaction of the client--this is the heart of the project management function. Let Kim Heldman, bestselling author of PMP Study Guide and CompTIA Project+ Study Guide, walk you through the basic principles and practices to help you build a strong foundation for further training. Understand current project management methods and practices Explore project management from a practical perspective Delve into illustrative examples that clarify complex issues Test your understanding with challenging study questions Trillions of dollars are invested in various projects around the world each year, and companies have learned that investing in qualified project management professionals pays off in every aspect of the operation. If you're considering a career in project management, Project Management JumpStart provides an excellent introduction to the field and clear direction for your next steps.
Strategic Project Management by
Strategic Project Management uses real life case examples to characterize and describe the organizational factors and conditions necessary for projects to thrive and to deliver the organization's strategic objectives. This characterization is formed around ten imperatives which senior managers can implement - both within individual projects and, even more crucially, within the institutions that sponsor them - using the tools provided. Accessible, practical and free of jargon, Strategic Project Management offers the solutions needed to successfully prioritize and manage a portfolio of projects, communicate aims, align priorities to organizational objectives, evaluate progress, manage supplier relationships and anticipate and mitigate the risks at every stage. Supported by a comprehensive package of online resources for project portfolio planning, management and analysis this book will help readers to build on their skills, knowledge and confidence to rise to the challenge of governing and delivering successful projects.
Successful Project Management by
Master everything you need to work successfully in today's project management environment with SUCCESSFUL PROJECT MANAGEMENT, 7E. This best-selling book details how to organize and manage project teams -- from planning and scheduling to cost management. Each chapter aligns with PMBOK (Project Management Body of Knowledge) to ensure best practices. The book covers the latest business challenges, including project constraints, stakeholder concerns, the project charter, and how projects support strategic plans. Learn the keys to effective communication and discover how project management applies in the workplace with new cases and real-world vignettes. End-of-chapter and Internet exercises review concepts critical to project management. New MindTap digital resources provide videos, quizzes, and case animations. You work with the latest, popular project management software: Microsoft© Project 2016, available on the website. Find everything you need to manage projects in business today.
Project Management for Artistic and Creative Industries
AMPROJM introduces project management which covers essentials of planning and implementation of any size and scope of project in for-profit and non-profit sectors of the artistic and creative industries.
Agile Project Management for Business Transformational Success by
This book is intended to provide project management office (PMO) executives' practical information to promote enterprise Agile for business value compatibility within their organization. The primary benefit of this book is to promote a sense of common purpose and collaboration between the project delivery and the organization. Agile project delivery methods are adaptable to the emergence of unknown requirements identified in the later part of the project delivery lifecycle. The key success factor is direct business participation and collaboration to ensure that a business focus determines the output. Agile promotes innovation and creates synergies through a business focus viewing technology deployments as a catalyst for change rather than the final objective. Technology investments implemented through Agile processes result in improved market leadership, organizational alignment, and resource efficiency delivering competitive advantage.
Careers in Creative Industries by
Comprising original empirical studies of career-making in the creative sector, this book takes in theatre, music, film, TV, visual arts, fashion design, and architecture as creative industries. This format facilitates comparative analysis of central features of career-making within as well as across both specific industries and national contexts. The book is at the forefront and intersection of contemporary career research and research on work in creative industries / the cultural economy, intertwining both subjective and objective approaches to and dimensions of career. The contributors move beyond the dichotomies that have characterized recent career theory and work on creative industries to examine factors that facilitate and restrict horizontal and vertical mobility. Spanning a diverse range of case studies, from German theatre to Danish fashion, this book is a valuable reference for scholars of the creative and cultural industries and important reading for thoser interested in careers more generally.
Collaborative Production in the Creative Industries.
"In recent years research into creative labour and cultural work has usually addressed the politics of production in these fields, but the sociotechnical and aesthetic dimensions of collaborative creative work have been somewhat overlooked. This book aims to address this gap. Through case studies that range from TV showrunning to independent publishing, from the film industry to social media platforms such as Tumblr and Wattpad, this collection develops a critical understanding of the integral role collaboration plays in contemporary media and culture. It draws attention to diverse kinds of creative collaboration afforded via the intermediation of digital platforms and networked publics. It considers how these are incorporated into emergent market paradigms and investigates the complicated forms of subjectivity that develop as a consequence. But it also acknowledges historical continuities, not least in terms of the continued exploitation of 'support personnel' and of resulting artistic conflicts but also of alternative models that resist the precarious nature of contemporary cultural work. Finally, this volume attempts to situate creative collaboration in broader social and economic contexts, where the experience and outcomes of such work have proved more problematic than the rich potential of their promise would lead us to expect."
Culture and commerce : the value of entrepreneurship in creative industries by
Art and business are often described as worlds apart, even diametric opposites. And yet, these realms are close cousins in creative industries where firms bring cultural goods to market, attaching price tags to music, paintings, theater, literature, film, and fashion.Building on theories of value construction and cultural production, Culture and Commerce details the processes by which artistic worth is decoded, translated, and converted to economic value. Mukti Khaire introduces readers to three industry players: creators, producers (who bring to market and distribute cultural goods), and intermediaries (who critique and rave about them). Case studies of firms from Chanel and Penguin to tastemakers like the Pritzker Prize and The Sundance Institute illuminate how these professionals construct a vital value chain. Highlighting the role of "pioneer entrepreneurs"--who carve out space for radical, new product categories--Khaire illustrates how creative professionals influence our sense of value, shifting consumer behavior and our culture in deep, surprising ways.
The cycle : a practical approach to managing arts organizations by
In the third book of his popular trilogy on creating and sustaining arts organizations, Michael Kaiser reveals the hidden engine that powers consistent success. According to Kaiser, successful arts organizations pursue strong programmatic marketing campaigns that compel people to buy tickets, enroll in classes, and so on--in short, to participate in the organization's programs. Additionally, they create exciting activities that draw people to the organization as a whole. This institutional marketing creates a sense of enthusiasm that attracts donors, board members, and volunteers. Kaiser calls this group of external supporters the family. When this hidden engine is humming, staff, board, and audience members, artists, and donors feel confidence in the future. Resources are reinvested in more and better art, which is marketed aggressively; as a result, the "family" continues to grow, providing even more resources. This self-reinforcing cycle underlies the activities of all healthy arts organizations, and the theory behind it can be used as a diagnostic tool to reveal--and remedy--the problems of troubled ones. This book addresses each element of the cycle in the hope that more arts organizations around the globe--from orchestras, theaters, museums, opera companies, and classical and modern dance organizations to service organizations and other not-for-profit cultural institutions--will be able to sustain remarkable creativity, pay the bills, and have fun doing so!
Effective Project Management by
The popular guide to the project management body of knowledge, now fully updated Now in its eighth edition, this comprehensive guide to project management has long been considered the standard for both professionals and academics, with nearly 40,000 copies sold in the last three editions! Well-known expert Robert Wysocki has added four chapters of new content based on instructor feedback, enhancing the coverage of best-of-breed methods and tools for ensuring project management success. With enriched case studies, accompanying exercises and solutions on the companion website, and PowerPoint slides for all figures and tables, the book is ideal for instructors and students as well as active project managers. Serves as a comprehensive guide to project management for both educators and project management professionals Updated to cover the new PMBOK® Sixth Edition Examines traditional, agile, and extreme project management techniques; the Enterprise Project Management Model; and Kanban and Scrumban methodologies Includes a companion website with exercises and solutions and well as PowerPoint slides for all the figures and tables used Written by well-known project management expert Robert Wysocki Effective Project Management, Eighth Edition remains the comprehensive resource for project management practitioners, instructors, and students. (PMBOK is a registered mark of the Project Management Institute, Inc.)
Key Concepts in Creative Industries by
"This guide to the emerging language of creative industries field is a valuable resource for researchers and students alike. Concise, extensively referenced, and accessible, this this is an exceptionally useful reference work." - Gauti Sigthorsson, Greenwich University "There could be no better guides to the conceptual map of the creative industries than John Hartley and his colleagues, pioneers in the field. This book is a clear, comprehensive and accessible tool-kit of ideas, concepts, questions and discussions which will be invaluable to students and practitioners alike. Key Concepts in Creative Industries is set to become the corner stone of an expanding and exciting field of study" - Chris Barker, University of Wollongong Creativity is an attribute of individual people, but also a feature of organizations like firms, cultural institutions and social networks. In the knowledge economy of today, creativity is of increasing value, for developing, emergent and advanced countries, and for competing cities. This book is the first to present an organized study of the key concepts that underlie and motivate the field of creative industries. Written by a world-leading team of experts, it presents readers with compact accounts of the history of terms, the debates and tensions associated with their usage, and examples of how they apply to the creative industries around the world. Crisp and relevant, this is an invaluable text for students of the creative industries across a range of disciplines, especially media, communication, economics, sociology, creative and performing arts and regional studies.
Making Projects Sing : a Musical Perspective of Project Management. by
This book explores project management (PM) from a musical perspective. Music is a significant example of a nontraditional arena where PM is vital, yet it is only beginning to be seen as a vital tool. Therefore, this book will give an in depth and preeminent look at the PM processes and knowledge areas that are of utmost importance in many fields that PM is not used for currently. Seeking to understand projects in musical ways, synergies between music and the wider project management profession are many and varied. Written and developed by international experts in the project management and music professions, this book represents a unique and insightful approach to the study of the subject. The authors take a fresh look at practical models of musical thinking capable of application at every scale of project management, and in every possible project management environment. If you want to make your projects more musical, or simply have an interest exploring project management in music, this is the book for you!
The Production Managers Toolkit by
- The Production Manager's Toolkit is a well-rounded look at the theatrical production management profession, discussing management techniques, communication skills, and relationship building tactics to create effective and successful Production Managers. - This is the first and most comprehensive book devoted to theatrical production management. - This second edition includes all new case studies, new chapters, and updated content throughout, showcasing a continued progressive approach to the job and the field.
Project Management in the Oil and Gas Industry by
Oil and gas projects have special characteristics that need a different technique in project management. The development of any country depends on the development of the energy reserve through investing in oil and gas projects through onshore and offshore exploration, drilling, and increasing facility capacities. Therefore, these projects need a sort of management match with their characteristics, and project management is the main tool to achieving a successful project. Written by a veteran project manager who has specialized in oil and gas projects for years, this book focuses on using practical tools and methods that are widely and successfully used in project management for oil and gas projects. Most engineers study all subjects, but focus on project management in housing projects, administration projects, and commercial buildings or other similar projects. However, oil and gas projects have their own requirements and characteristics in management from the owners, engineering offices, and contractors' side. Not only useful to graduating engineers, new hires, and students, this volume is also an invaluable addition to any veteran project manager's library as a reference or a helpful go-to guide. Also meant to be a refresher for practicing engineers, it covers all of the project management subjects from an industrial point of view specifically for petroleum projects, making it the perfect desktop manual. Not just for project managers and students, this book is helpful to any engineering discipline or staff in sharing or applying the work of a petroleum project and is a must-have for anyone working in this industry.
Project Management JumpStart by
An informative introduction for those considering a career in project management Project Management JumpStart offers a clear, practical introduction to the complex world of project management, with an entertaining approach based on real-world application. Fully revised to align with a Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge -PMBOK Guide©, 6th edition, this book provides an overview of the field followed by an exploration of current best practices. The practical focus facilitates retention by directly linking critical concepts to your everyday work, while the close adherence to PMBOK guidelines makes this book the perfect starting point for those considering certification to earn either PMP or CompTIA Project+ credentials. Project management is a top-five, in-demand skill in today's workplace, and the demand has spread far beyond IT to encompass nearly every industry; any organization that produces goods or services, whether for profit or not, has a vested interest in ensuring that projects are completed on time, on budget, and to the satisfaction of the client--this is the heart of the project management function. Let Kim Heldman, bestselling author of PMP Study Guide and CompTIA Project+ Study Guide, walk you through the basic principles and practices to help you build a strong foundation for further training. Understand current project management methods and practices Explore project management from a practical perspective Delve into illustrative examples that clarify complex issues Test your understanding with challenging study questions Trillions of dollars are invested in various projects around the world each year, and companies have learned that investing in qualified project management professionals pays off in every aspect of the operation. If you're considering a career in project management, Project Management JumpStart provides an excellent introduction to the field and clear direction for your next steps.
Project Management Metrics, KPIs, and Dashboards by
Harold Kerzner's essential strategies on measuring project management performance With the growth of complex projects, stakeholder involvement, and advancements in visual-based technology, metrics and KPIs (key performance indicators) are key factors in evaluating project performance. Dashboard reporting systems provide accessible project performance data, and sharing this vital data in a concise and consistent manner is a key communication responsibility of all project managers. This third edition of Kerzner's groundbreaking work, Project Management Metrics, KPIs, and Dashboards: A Guide to Measuring and Monitoring Project Performance, helps functional managers gain a thorough grasp of what metrics and KPIs are and how to use them. Plus, this edition includes new sections on processing dashboard information, portfolio management PMO and metrics, and BI tool flexibility. * Offers comprehensive coverage of the different dashboard types, design issues, and applications Provides full-color dashboards from some of the most successful project management companies, including IBM, Microsoft, and others Aligns with PMI's PMBOK® Guide and stresses value-driven project management PPT decks are available by chapter and a test bank will be available for use in seminar presentations and courses Get ready to bolster your awareness of what good metrics management really entails today--and be armed with the knowledge to measure performance more effectively.
Total Quality Management for Project Management by
Finding ways to improve margins can be the difference between organizations that thrive and those that simply survive during times of economic uncertainty. Describing why cost reductions can be just as powerful as increases in revenue, Total Quality Management for Project Management explains how to integrate time-tested project management tools wit
AMTOURS forms part of an arts management seminar series which emphasizes current trends, challenges, best practices, and contemporary ecosystem of the creative industries and complex nature of culture and heritage landscape, conservation, and sustainability of communities relevant to arts management.
Art and Cultural Heritage by
Art and Cultural Heritage is appropriately, not solely, about the law-national and international-respecting cultural heritage. It is a bubbling cauldron of law mixed with ethics, philosophy, politics and working principles about how cultural heritage law, policy and practice should be sculpted from the past as the present becomes the future. The authors explore these demanding concerns, untangle basic values, and look critically at the conflicts and contradictions in existing art and cultural heritage law and policy in its diverse sectors. The rich and provocative contributions collectively provide a reasoned discussion of the issues from a multiplicity of views to permit the reader to understand the theoretical and philosophical underpinnings of the cultural heritage debate.
Arts, Entertainment and Tourism by
'Arts, Entertainment and Tourism' is a pioneering text that, by focusing on the consumer, investigates the relationship between these 3 industries and how this relationship can be developed to its best competitive advantage. Issue-led, this text draws on appropriate disciplines rather than using one single approach, to examine issues in arts and entertainment within the framework of cultural tourism. Written to meet the needs of students studying on management courses in the arts, tourism and leisure, 'Arts, Entertainment and Tourism': * Describes the general arts and tourism background * Identifies a framework for analysis that acknowledges differing levels of interest in the arts and entertainment * Discusses the arts and entertainment that feature (past and present) in tourism * Examines the reasons why the arts, entertainment and tourism have an interest in each other and how they go about developing the relationship * Examines the relationship: are there tourists in audiences and do the arts and entertainment attract tourists to a destination? * Evaluates the wider effects (good and bad) on both the arts and tourism * Discusses the direction of future developments by arts and tourism organizations and for future research
Contemporary Issues in Cultural Heritage Tourism by
The perceived quality of a destination's cultural offering has long been a significant factor in determining tourist choices of destination. More recently, the need to present touristic offerings that include cultural experiences and heritage has become widely recognised, that this aspect of the tourism experience is an important differentiator of destinations, as well as being amongst the most manageable. This has also led to an increase in the management of such experiences through special exhibitions, events and festivals, as well as through ensuring more routine and controlled access to heritage sites. Reflecting the increasing application of cultural heritage as a driver for tourism and development, this book provides for the first time a cohesive volume on the subject that is theoretically rich, practically applied and empirically grounded. Written by expert scholars and practitioners in the field, the book covers a broad range of theoretical perspectives of cultural heritage tourism; regeneration, policy, stakeholders, marketing, socio-economic development, impacts, sustainability, volunteering and ICT. It takes a broad view, integrating international examples of sites, monuments as well as intangible cultural heritage, motor vehicle heritage events and modern art museums. This significant book furthers knowledge of the theory and application of tourism within the context of cultural heritage and will be of interest to students, researchers and practitioners in a range of disciplines.
Contemporary Tourism by
The study of tourism and indeed the tourism industry is changing constantly. Now in its fifth edition, Contemporary Tourism: an international approach presents a new and refreshing approach to the study of tourism, looking at the far reaching effects that the COVID pandemic has had on the industry and how it has been forced to change, or not subsequently. Considering issues such as advances in AI and its impacts, the environmental crisis and air travel, the sharing economy and Airbnb, and the tourist experience in a Covid world. In particular, it highlights the ongoing threats and opportunities faced by the tourism industry today, and discusses the related management strategies, illustrating the potential implications for the patterns and flow of tourism in the future. Divided into five sections, each chapter has a thorough learning structure including chapter objectives, examples, discussion points, self-review questions, checklists and case studies. URL links in the form of QR codes are heavily present throughout the text so that users of both hard and electronic formats can have direct links to up to date, authoritative and annotated sources of information. Cases are both thematic and destination-based and always international. New to this edition:* New material on latest issues such as the impact of the COVID-19 pandemic, international responses to the environmental crisis, the impact of AI/robotics on tourism human resource and the rise of the staycation; * Brand new and updated case studies and readings throughout;* Substantial support for both students and teachers, both within the text itself and via web-based student and instructor resources.ABOUT THE AUTHORS Chris Cooper is Professor in the School of Events, Tourism and Hospitality at Leeds Beckett University in the UK. Professor C Michael Hall is Professor of Marketing at the University of Canterbury in New Zealand; Docent, University of Oulu, Finland and Visiting Professor at Linnaeus University, Kalmar, Sweden.
Cultural and Heritage Tourism in Asia and the Pacific by
The Asia Pacific region's enormous diversity of living cultures and preserved heritage sites has significant appeal to many tourists. However tourism has grown so rapidly that many issues associated with the incorporation of cultural and heritage experiences in tourist itineraries (such as authenticity verses commodification, exploitation of national cultures, impacts on local communities, and the management of heritage resources) have not been adequately addressed and must be debated. This revealing book reviews recent developments in cultural and heritage tourism in the Asia Pacific region and provides a discussion on how communities have faced and overcome significant challenges to develop and market their culture and heritage resources. A range of models and case studies are used to deepen the reader's understanding of heritage and cultural issues, to illustrate many of the more controversial issues, and to examine new evaluative, and planning tools. This book is a special issue of the Asia Pacific Journal of Tourism Research.
Cultural Tourism by
Cultural Tourism remains the only book to bridge the gap between cultural tourism and cultural and heritage management. The first edition illustrated how heritage and tourism goals can be integrated in a management and marketing framework to produce sustainable cultural tourism. The current edition takes this further to base the discussion of cultural tourism in the theory and practice of cultural and heritage management (CM and CHM), under the understanding that for tourism to thrive, a balanced approach to the resource base it uses must be maintained. An 'umbrella approach' to cultural tourism represents a unique feature of the book, proposing solutions to achieve an optimal outcome for all sectors. Reflecting the many important developments in the field this new edition has been completely revised and updated in the following ways: * New sections on tangible and intangible cultural heritage and world heritage sites. * Expanded material on cultural tourism product development, the cultural tourism market and consumer behaviour, planning and delivery of exceptional experiences * New case studies throughout drawn from cultural attractions in developing countries such as Southeast Asia, China, South Africa and the Pacific as well as from the developed world, particularly the United States, Britain, Japan, Singapore, Australia and Canada. Written by experts in both tourism and cultural heritage management, this book will enable professionals and students to gain a better understanding of their own and each other's roles in achieving sustainable cultural tourism. It provides a blueprint for producing top-quality, long-term cultural tourism products.
Culture and the city : creativity, tourism, leisure by
This edited collection will examine the way in which cities are imagined, experienced and shaped by those who reside within them, those who manage or govern them, and those who, as visitor, tourist or traveller, pass through them. Attention will be paid to the influence that these various inhabitants have on city life and living and the dialectic that exists between their sometimes collective and sometimes divergent, perceptions and uses of city space. In conjunction with this, the collection will explore the ways in which local culture and cultural policy are used by public and private interests as the framework for changing the image and amenity of the city in order to raise its profile and attract tourists. The book contributes to discussions of the increasingly high profile place that cultural programs have in urban regeneration initiatives and explore the tensions, conflicts and negotiations that emerge in urban spaces as a result of policy and culture coming together. Papers will be sought from researchers around the world with a view to examining the nexus between tourism, leisure and cultural programming from a number of perspectives and with reference to a range of international case studies. This book was published as a special issue of the Journal of Policy Research in Tourism, Leisure and Events.
Event Tourism and Cultural Tourism by
Event and cultural tourism as a social practice is a widespread phenomenon of global socio-economic importance. The purpose of the book is to bring together current thinking on contemporary issues relating to the management and marketing of cultural events and attractions. The contributions to the book provide interesting perspectives on a number of topics including innovation in festivals, destination and event image, cultural events and national identity, religious festival experiences, effective management and marketing of events. The book is divided into two broad themes: event tourism and cultural tourism. The Cultural Tourism theme covers issues such as: socio-cultural and environmental impacts of tourism development; tourist experiences, motivations and behavior; development of cultural tourism; hosts and guests; Community participation; living heritage; and destination image and branding. The Event Tourism theme covers issues such as economic, socio-cultural and environmental impacts; tourist experiences, motivations and behavior; development of event tourism; event management and sponsorship; destination image and branding; and planning and marketing hallmark events. The book is in response to the increasing demand for empirically-based case studies on event and cultural tourism and will appeal to both academics and practitioners. Case studies are also ideal as teaching material for both undergraduate and postgraduate programmes internationally. This book is a special double issue of the Journal of Hospitality Marketing and Management.
Indigenous Tourism by
In a world characterized by an encroaching homogeneity induced by the growth of multi-national corporations and globalization, the causes of difference accrue new levels of importance. This is as true of tourism as in many other spheres of life - and one cause of differentiation for tourism promotion is the culture of Indigenous Peoples. This offers opportunities for cultural renaissance, income generation and enhanced political empowerment, but equally there are possible costs of creating commodities out of aspects of life that previously possessed spiritual meaning. This book examines these issues from many different perspectives; from those of product design and enhancement; of the aspirations of various minority groupings; and the patterns of displacements that occur - displacements that are not simply spatial but also social and cultural. How can these changes be managed? Case studies and analysis is offered, derived from many parts of the globe including North America, Asia and Australasia. The contributors themselves have, in many instances, worked closely with groups and organizations of Indigenous Peoples and attempt to give voice to their concerns. The book is divided into various themes, each with a separate introduction and commentary. The themes are Visitor Experiences, Who manages Indigenous Cultural Tourism Product, Events and Artifacts, Conceptualisation and Aspiration. In a short final section the silences are noted - each silence representing a potential challenge for future research to build upon the notions and lessons reported in the book. The book is edited by Professor Chris Ryan from New Zealand, and Michelle Aicken of Horwath Asia Pacific.
Issues in Cultural Tourism Studies by
The extensively revised second edition of Issues in Cultural Tourism Studies provides a new framework for analyzing the complexity of cultural tourism and its increasing globalization in existing as well as emergent destinations of the world. The book will focus in particular on the need for even more creative tourism strategies to differentiate destinations from each other using a blend of localized cultural products and innovative global attractions. The book explores many of the most pertinent issues in heritage, arts, festivals, indigenous, ethnic and experiential cultural tourism in urban and rural environments alike. This includes policy and politics; impact management and sustainable development; interpretation and representation; marketing and branding; and regeneration and planning. As well as exploring the inter-relationships between the cultural and tourism sectors, local people and tourists, the book provides suggestions for more effective and mutually beneficial collaboration. New edition features include: an increased number of topical case studies and contemporary photographs which serve to contextualize the issues discussed a re-orientation towards global rather than just European issues three brand new chapters on The Geography of Cultural Tourism, The Politics of Global Cultural Tourism, and The Growth of Creative Tourism an extensively revised chapter on Experiential Tourism. At the interface between the global and the local, a people-centred approach to planning and development is advocated to ensure that benefits are maximized for local areas, a sense of place and identity are retained, and the tourist experience is enhanced to the full. The text is unique in that it provides a summary and a synthesis of all of the major issues in global cultural tourism, which are presented in an accessible way using a diverse range of international case studies. This is a beneficial and valuable resource for all tourism students.
Places of the imagination : media, tourism, culture by
Recent years have seen an explosive growth in the phenomenon of people visiting locations from popular novels, films or television series. Places of the Imagination presents a timely and insightful analysis of this form of media tourism, exploring the question of how best to explain the increasing popularity of media tourism within contemporary culture. Drawing on extensive empirical and interview material, this book examines the representation of landscapes in popular narratives that have inspired media tourism, whilst also investigating the effects over time of such tourism on local landscapes, and the processes by which tourists appropriate the landscape, experiencing and accommodating them into their imagination. Oriented around three central case studies of popular television detective shows, famous films and classic literature, Places of the Imagination develops a new theoretical understanding of media tourism. As such, it will appeal to sociologists and cultural geographers, as well as those working in the fields of media and cultural studies, popular and fan culture, tourism and the sociology of leisure.
Screen Tourism and Affective Landscapes by
This book explores ways in which screen-based storyworlds transfix, transform, and transport us imaginatively, physically, and virtually to the places they depict or film. Topics include fantasy quests in computer games, celebrity walking tours, dark tourism sites, Hobbiton as theme park, surf movies, and social gangs of Disneyland. How physical, virtual, and imagined locations create a sense of place through their immediate experience or visitation is undergoing a revolution in technology, travel modes, and tourism behaviour. This edited collection explores the rapidly evolving field of screen tourism and the affective impact of landscape, with provocative questions and investigations of social groups, fan culture, new technology, and the wider changing trends in screen tourism. We provide critical examples of affective landscapes across a wide range of mediums (from the big screen to the small screen) and locations. This book will appeal to students and scholars in film and tourism, as well as geography, design, media and communication studies, game studies, and digital humanities.
Tourism art and souvenirs : the material culture of tourism by
This book examines the relationship between art and tourism through the study of the material culture of tourism: tourist art and souvenirs. It thoroughly examines how to categorise the material culture of tourism within the discourses of contemporary art and cultural anthropology, and demonstrates that tourist art is a unique expression of place and genuine artistic style. The first investigation to consider the activity of souvenirs from both indigenous and settler tourist sites, it brings a unique addition to the existing, dated, research in the area. Working initially from Graburn's definition of tourist art, as the art of one culture made specifically for the consumption of another, Tourism Art and Souvenirs sheds light on important aspects of the souvenir that have not been widely discussed. The most recent research is used to consider how the souvenir is designed and consumed, consumer expectations and influence on the character of the souvenir, how the souvenir maker is consumed by the tradition of heritage and how products become successful as souvenirs. The title also investigates the language involved in the representation of place and the recording of experience through the souvenir, developing a method that expresses the descriptive data of individual souvenir artefacts graphically so the patterns of language may be analysed. Enhancing the understanding of material culture in tourism and therefore adding to future tourism development this volume will be of interest to upper level students, researchers and academics in tourism, culture, heritage and sustainability.nbsp;
The Visual Culture Reader by
Ten years after the last edition, this thoroughly revised and updated third edition of The Visual Culture Reader highlights the transformed and expanded nature of globalized visual cultures. It assembles key new writings, visual essays and specially commissioned articles, emphasizing the intersections of the Web 2.0, digital cultures, globalization, visual arts and media, and the visualizations of war. The volume attests to the maturity and exciting development of this cutting-edge field. Fully illustrated throughout, The Reader features an introductory section tracing the development of what editor Nicholas Mirzoeff calls "critical visuality studies." It develops into thematic sections, each prefaced by an introduction by the editor, with an emphasis on global coverage. Each thematic section includes suggestions for further reading. Thematic sections include: Expansions War and Violence Attention and Visualizing Economy Bodies and Minds Histories and Memories (Post/De/Neo)Colonial Visualities Media and Mediations Taken as a whole, thesenbsp;47 essays provide a vital introduction to the diversity of contemporary visual culture studies and a key resource for research and teaching in the field. Contributors: Ackbar Abbas, Morana Alac, Malek Alloula, Ariella Azoulay, Zainab Bahrani, Jonathan L. Beller,Suzanne Preston Blier, Lisa Cartwright, Dipesh Chakrabarty, Wendy Hui Kyong Chun, Beth Coleman, Teddy Cruz, René Descartes, Faisal Devji, Henry Drewal, Okwui Enwezor, Frantz Fanon, Allen Feldman, Mark Fisher, Finbarr Barry Flood, Anne Friedberg, Alex Galloway, Faye Ginsburg, Derek Gregory, J. Jack Halberstam, Donna Haraway, Brian Holmes, Amelia Jones, Georgina Kleege, Sarat Maharaj, Brian Massumi, Carol Mavor, Tara McPherson, Nicholas Mirzoeff, Timothy Mitchell, W. J. T. Mitchell, Naeem Mohaiemen, Fred Moten, Lisa Nakamura, Trevor Paglen, Lisa Parks, Sumathi Ramaswamy, Jacques Rancière, Andrew Ross, Terence E. Smith, Marita Sturken, Paolo Virno, Eyal Weizman
AMTOURS forms part of an arts management seminar series which emphasizes current trends, challenges, best practices, and contemporary ecosystem of the creative industries and complex nature of culture and heritage landscape, conservation, and sustainability of communities relevant to arts management.
Cultural Tourism by
HauptbeschreibungCultural tourism is nowadays considered the fastest growing market in tourism. The research was obtained to gain further insight about cultural tourists. The study explored cultural tourists in Portugal through investigating the profile, motivation and level of interest of cultural tourists, in the specific case of Silves. Silves is a small town in the Algarve region, and as the former Capital of the Algarve in the period when the Arabs were ruling, the town is left with Arabic Heritage.The literature of cultural tourism revealed that further research is needed about the relation between the dependent variable of socio-demographics/trip characteristics and motivation and preferences for behavioural items of the cultural tourists.A combination of primary and secondary research has been applied in order to examine the topic, achieve the objectives and test the hypotheses. For the primary research, a survey was carried out at the site of Silves in Portugal, whereby altogether 196 valid surveys were obtained.aBiographische InformationenLaura Duhme, M.A. was born in 1984 in Cologne/ Germany. After finishing high school she decided to study in the Netherlands, completing a study in Business Administration. During her study the author meet people with many different cultural backgrounds. The curiosity drove her to travel to many countries and even to study, work and live in seven, including Guatemala, Canada and Portugal. In England, she enjoyed an excellent university education, which she completed with distinction. Six years abroad has shaped her and given an extensive knowledge about different cultures, but also about travelling and the tourism industry."
Cultural Tourism : The Partnership Between Tourism and Cultural Heritage Management by
Examine cultural tourism issues from both sides of the industry! Unique in concept and content, Cultural Tourism: The Partnership Between Tourism and Cultural Heritage Management examines the relationship between the sectors that represent opposite sides of the cultural tourism coin. While tourism professionals assess cultural assets for their profit potential, cultural heritage professionals judge the same assets for their intrinsic value. Sustainable cultural tourism can only occur when the two sides form a true partnership based on understanding and appreciation of each other's merits. The authors--one, a tourism specialist, the other, a cultural heritage management expert--present a model for a working partnership with mutual benefits, integrating management theory and practice from both disciplines. Cultural Tourism is the first book to combine the different perspectives of tourism management and cultural heritage management. It examines the role of tangible (physical evidence of culture) and intangible (continuing cultural practices, knowledge, and living experiences) heritage, describes the differences between cultural tourism products and cultural heritage assets, and develops a number of conceptual models, including a classification system for cultural tourists, indicators of tourism potential at cultural and heritage assets, and assessment criteria for cultural and heritage assets with tourism potential. Cultural Tourism examines the five main constituent elements involved in cultural tourism: cultural and heritage assets in tourism sites such as the Royal Palace in Bangkok, the Cook Islands, and Alcatraz Prison in San Francisco. tourism--what it is, how it works, and what makes it a success five different types of cultural tourists consumption of products, value adding, and commodification integrating the first four elements to satisfy the tourist, meet the needs of the tourism industry, and conserve the intrinsic value of the asset Though tourism and cultural heritage management professionals have mutual interests in the management, conservation, and presentation of cultural and heritage assets, the two sectors operate on parallel planes, maintaining an uneasy partnership with surprisingly little dialogue. Cultural Tourism provides professionals and students in each field with a better understanding of their own roles in the partnership, bridging the gap via sound planning, management, and marketing to produce top-quality, long-lasting cultural tourism products. Now translated into simplified Chinese.
Cultural Tourism in Southern Africa by
This volume provides an overview of cultural tourism in southern Africa. It examines the utilisation of culture in southern African tourism and the related impacts, possibilities and challenges from wide-ranging perspectives. Concepts explored include authenticity, commodification, the tourist gaze and 'Otherness', heritage and sustainability.
The discourse of tourism and national heritage : a contrastive study from a cultural perspective by
The Discourse of Tourism and National Heritage: A Contrastive Study from a Cultural Perspective presents an in-depth research study in the field of online tourism promotion. It focuses on the national online promotion of UNESCO World Heritage Sites, on two different types of websites - institutional and commercial - from three countries, Romania, Spain and Great Britain. The book analyses the way in which each country combines various modes to create a virtual brochure with a promotional message from both institutional and commercial positions. In doing this, it studies the organization of the.
New Tourism in the 21st Century : Culture, the City, Nature and Spirituality by
This book analyses the cultural elements of 21st-century tourism. The structure of the book is based on four main issues, which will help further the reader's understanding of present-day experiential tourism: namely urban and cultural tourism on a global scale; specific studies of new products linked to reappraising the landscape; heritage; and nature. It also examines the influence of branding and of the images projected in order to promote this new type of tourism, using both theoretical and general approaches. Finally, the Camino de Santiago is analysed as a paradigm of the new pilgrimage routes all over the world, with their implications and polysemic nature.Culture, nature, spirituality and urbanism are brought together in a series of studies of contemporary tourist activities. Tourism is, in short, an activity that marks the return of slow movement, of calm and relaxation, of the landscape and of self-rediscovery as a reappraised counterpoint to the frenetic pace of life in modern-day societies.
The Routledge Handbook of Cultural Tourism by
The Routledge Handbook of Cultural Tourism explores and critically evaluates the debates and controversies in this field of Tourism. It brings together leading specialists from a range of disciplinary backgrounds and geographical regions, to provide state-of-the-art theoretical reflection and empirical research on this significant stream of tourism and its future direction. The book is divided into 7 inter-related sections. Section 1 looks at the historical, philosophical and theoretical framework for cultural tourism. This section debates tourist autonomy role play, authenticity, imaginaries, cross-cultural issues and inter-disciplinarity Section 2 analyses the role that politics takes in cultural tourism. This section also looks at ways in which cultural tourism is used as a policy instrument for economic development. Section 3 focuses on social patterns and trends, such as the mobilities paradigm, performativity, reflexivity and traditional hospitality, as well as considering sensitive social issues such as dark tourism. Section 4 analyses community and development, exploring adaptive forms of cultural tourism, as well as more sustainble models for indigenous tourism development. Section 5 discusses Landscapes and Destinations, including the transformation of space into place, issues of authenticity in landscape, the transformation of urban and rural landscapes into tourism products and conservation versus development dilemmas. Section 6 refers to Regeneration and Planning, especially the creative turn in cultural tourism, which can be used to avoid problems of serial reproduction, standardisation and homogenisation. Section 7 deals with The Tourist and Visitor Experience, emphasising the desire of tourists to be more actively and interactively engaged in cultural tourism. This significant volume offers the reader a comprehensive synthesis of this field, conveying the latest thinking and research. The text is international in focus, encouraging dialogue across disciplinary boundaries and areas of study and will be an invaluable resource for all those with an interest in Cultural Tourism. This is essential reading for students, researchers and academics of Tourism as well as those of related studies in particular Cultural Studies, Leisure, Geography, Sociology, Politics and Economics.
Tourism Art and Souvenirs : the Material Culture of Tourism. by
This book examines the relationship between art and tourism through the study of the material culture of tourism: tourist art and souvenirs. It thoroughly examines how to categorise the material culture of tourism within the discourses of contemporary art and cultural anthropology, and demonstrates that tourist art is a unique expression of place and genuine artistic style. The first investigation to consider the activity of souvenirs from both indigenous and settler tourist sites, it brings a unique addition to the existing, dated, research in the area. Working initially from Graburn's definition of tourist art, as the art of one culture made specifically for the consumption of another, Tourism Art and Souvenirs sheds light on important aspects of the souvenir that have not been widely discussed. The most recent research is used to consider how the souvenir is designed and consumed, consumer expectations and influence on the character of the souvenir, how the souvenir maker is consumed by the tradition of heritage and how products become successful as souvenirs. The title also investigates the language involved in the representation of place and the recording of experience through the souvenir, developing a method that expresses the descriptive data of individual souvenir artefacts graphically so the patterns of language may be analysed. Enhancing the understanding of material culture in tourism and therefore adding to future tourism development this volume will be of interest to upper level students, researchers and academics in tourism, culture, heritage and sustainability.nbsp;
Tourism research : an interdisciplinary perspective by
Compiled from research papers presented at the 2nd Interdisciplinary Tourism Research Conference, Fethiye, Turkey, held in April 2012, this book brings us all those papers related to varying fields of tourism research from an interdisciplinary perspective, encompassing fields such as geography, architecture, recreation, and culture. The authors included in the book have a very diverse background both in terms of their research fields and their countries of origin and focus, covering the USA, ...
CREAWRI is a workshop class that will train students to write creative outputs relevant to arts management which they can use in various productions, projects, and activities designed for cultural, arts, and creative industry sectors.
Alternative Scriptwriting by
The three-act structure is so last century! Unlike other screenwriting books, this unique storytelling guide pushes you to break free of tired, formulaic writing by bending or breaking the rules of storytelling as we know them. This new edition dives into all the key aspects of scriptwriting, including structure, genre, character, form, and tone. Authors Ken Dancyger, Jessie Keyt, and Jeff Rush explore myriad alternatives to the traditional three-act story structure, going beyond teaching you "how to tell a story" by teaching you how to write against conventional formulas to produce original, exciting material. Fully revised and updated, the book includes new examples from contemporary and classic cinema and episodic series, as well as additional content on strategies for plot, character, and genre; an exploration of theatrical devices in film; and approaches to scriptwriting with case studies of prolific storytellers such as Billy Wilder, Kelly Reichardt, Phoebe Waller-Bridge, and Kathryn Bigelow. Ideal for students of screenwriting and professional screenwriters wishing to develop their craft and write original scripts.
The Art of Creative Research by
All writers conduct research. For some this means poring over records and combing, archives but for many creative writers research happens in the everyday world--when they scribble an observation on the subway, when they travel to get the feel for a city, or when they strike up a conversation with an interesting stranger. The Art of Creative Research helps writers take this natural inclination to explore and observe and turn it into a workable--and enjoyable--research plan. It shows that research shouldn't be seen as a dry, plodding aspect of writing. Instead, it's an art that all writers can master, one that unearths surprises and fuels imagination. This lends authenticity to fiction and poetry as well as nonfiction. Philip Gerard distills the process into fundamental questions: How do you conduct research? And what can you do with the information you gather? He covers both in-person research and work in archives and illustrates how the different types of research can be incorporated into stories, poems, and essays using examples from a wide range of writers in addition to those from his own projects. Throughout, Gerard brings knowledge from his seasoned background into play, drawing on his experiences as a reporter and a writer of both fiction and nonfiction. His enthusiasm for adventure is infectious and will inspire writers to step away from the keyboard and into the world. "Research can take you to that golden intersection where the personal meets the public, the private crosses the universal, where the best literature lives," Gerard writes. With his masterly guidance, anyone can become an expert in artful investigation.
The Cambridge Introduction to Creative Writing by
This pioneering book introduces students to the practice and art of creative writing and creative reading. It offers a fresh, distinctive and beautifully written synthesis of the discipline. David Morley discusses where creative writing comes from, the various forms and camouflages it has taken, and why we teach and learn the arts of fiction, poetry and creative nonfiction. He looks at creative writing in performance; as public art, as visual art, as e-literature and as an act of community. As a leading poet, critic and award-winning teacher of the subject, Morley finds new engagements for creative writing in the creative academy and within science. Accessible, entertaining and groundbreaking, The Cambridge Introduction to Creative Writing is not only a useful textbook for students and teachers of writing, but also an inspiring read in its own right. Aspiring authors and teachers of writing will find much to discover and enjoy.
The creative critic : writing as/about practice by
As practitioner-researchers, how do we discuss and analyse our work without losing the creative drive that inspired us in the first place? Built around a diverse selection of writings from leading researcher-practitioners and emerging artists in a variety of fields, The Creative Critic: Writing as/about Practice celebrates the extraordinary range of possibilities available when writing about one¿s own work and the work one is inspired by. It re-thinks the conventions of the scholarly output to propose that critical writing be understood as an integral part of the artistic process, and even as artwork in its own right. Finding ways to make the intangible nature of much of our work ¿count¿ under assessment has become increasingly important in the Academy and beyond. The Creative Critic offers an inspiring and useful sourcebook for students and practitioner-researchers navigating this area. Please see the companion site to the book, http://www.creativecritic.co.uk, where some of the chapters have become unfixed from the page.
Creative Writing and Art History by
Creative Writing and Art History considers the ways in which the writing of art history intersects with creative writing. Essays range from the analysis of historical examples of art historical writing that have a creative element to examinations of contemporary modes of creative writing about art. Considers the ways in which the writing of art history intersects with creative writing Covers a diverse subject matter, from late Neolithic stone circles to the writing of a sentence by Flaubert The collection both contains essays that survey the topic as well as more specialist articles Brings together specialist contributors from both sides of the Atlantic
Creative writing demystified by
Whether for high school, college or pleasure creative writing, you need to know the basic elements of the craft. Creative Writing DeMYSTiFieD gives you helpful suggestions for evaluating your work for freshness and originality and offers scores of exercises, techniques, samples and websites to access more. The book introduces you to general creative writing terms and craft as well as genre specific terms and craft elements. Creative Writing DeMYSTiFieD lets you work at your own pace and provides: -An overview of the creative writing field today and its history -Insights from top writers in the creative writing subgenres -Exercises by professionals in all the subgenres -Answers to questions creative writers have -Resources for revising and finishing your work
Creative Writing Exercises for Dummies by
Turn your inspiration into a story with clear, expertguidance Creative Writing Exercises For Dummies is a step-by-stepcreative writing course designed to hone your craft, regardless ofability. Written by the founder of the Complete Creative WritingCourse at London's Groucho Club, this activity-based guide walksyou through the process of developing and writing in a wide rangeof genres including novels, short stories and creative nonfiction.The book includes writing prompts, exercises, mind maps, flowcharts and diagrams designed to get your ideas flowing. You'll getexpert guidance into character development, plot structure andprose, plus extensive insight into self-editing and polishing yourwork. Whether you're a new writer with a seed of an idea you wouldlike to develop, or are looking to strengthen your creative writingskills, this book has you covered. Covering every aspect ofnarrative, from setting initial goals to formatting a manuscript,Creative Writing Exercises For Dummies provides the toolsand instruction you need to make your story the best it can be. Learn to spark your imagination and sketch out ideas Create compelling characters and paint a picture withdescription Develop your plot and structure and maintain continuity Step back from your work and become your own ruthlesseditor The rise of e-books has opened up the publishing world, even tonon-established writers. If you have a story you're dying to tellbut aren't sure how, Creative Writing Exercises For Dummiesis the clear, concise solution you need.
Critical Approaches to Creative Writing by
What is creative writing? In Critical Approaches to Creative Writing, Graeme Harper draws on both creative and critical knowledge to look at what creative writing is, and how it can be better understood. Harper explores how to critically consider creative writing in progress, while also tutoring the reader on how to improve their own final results. Throughout the book, Harper explains the nature of 'creative exposition', where creative writing is closely and directly examined in practice as well as through its final results. This book aims to empower you to develop your own critical approaches so that you can consider any creative writing situations you face, develop creative exposition that can be applied to writing problems, provide you with more creative choices and assist you in building your creative writing strengths.
Descriptosaurus by
Reviews of the first edition "This book is a treasure trove of descriptive language... Highly recommended for both teachers and parents. I wish I'd had a copy of this book when I was a full time English teacher! Invest in a copy today; you'll be glad you did." Sue Cowley, bestselling author, teacher and teacher trainer "Help to banish 'blank page syndrome' for ever, with this innovative book... Created by teacher, Alison Wilcox, this inspirational book will build children's confidence in their writing ability." Literacy Times Plus "A real 'godsend' to hard-pressed teachers, parents and pupils." Denis Hayes, author of Foundations of Primary Teaching 　 Reviews of the second edition '...the addition of the CD is perfect for the modern day classroom... fantastic!' 　Emma Palastanga, primary deputy head 'The... book/CD, will be so helpful to teachers who are struggling to think of different ways to say things and will enhance their planning and teaching. As a classroom resource it will be invaluable.' Elaine Smitheman, primary school teacher 　 Now available with a CD-ROM for classroom use, Descriptosaurus is the first book for creative writing that is a thematic expansion of a dictionary and a thesaurus. It provides children with a comprehensive resource with which to expand their descriptive vocabulary, experiment with language and sentence structure and build up narratives based around the following areas: Settings - landscapes, settlements and atmosphere, Characters - appearance, emotions and personality, and Creatures - appearance, abilities and habitats. New features for the second edition include: IWB compatible CD-ROM containing all the main elements of the book New VCOP coverage Expanded coverage of adverbs and connectives New planning sheets to help children organise and structure descriptions Character cards, games and mountain pyramid vocabulary builders The Descriptosaurus model was created and refined over a number of years as a result of feedback from children inside and outside the classroom as to the resources they required to inspire and assist them with their writing. For reluctant writers or those faced with blank page syndrome, it provides essential starting points to encourage putting pen to paper. Using Descriptosauruswill not only inspire children, it will build their confidence and dramatically improve the content of their writing. This is an ideal resource for all KS2 primary and KS3 secondary English teachers, literacy coordinators and parents keen to support their childrens' creative writing. It would also make an excellent classroom book for PGCE students, particularly Primary PGCE with English specialism.
Descriptosaurus: Myths and Legends by
Descriptosaurus: Myths & Legends builds on the vocabulary and descriptive phrases introduced in the original bestselling Descriptosaurus and, within the context of myths and legends, develops the structure and use of the words and phrases to promote colourful cinematic writing. This essential guide will enable children to take their writing to the next level, combine their descriptions of setting and character and show how the two interact. Children can then experiment with heroes, gods and supernatural beings to create a legendary story. This new system also provides a contextualised alternative to grammar textbooks and will assist children in acquiring, understanding and applying the grammar they will need to improve their writing, both creative and technical.
Doing Creative Writing by
Are you beginning a creative writing course? Or thinking about taking one? Doing Creative Writing is the ideal guide to what you should expect, what will be expected of you and how you can get the most from your course. It clearly and concisely outlines: the contexts for creative writing courses, explaining where the subject has come from and why that matters the content, structure and delivery of the courses, helping you to understand how your course will be shaped, what you will be asked to do and why the skills you will develop, from self-discipline and time management through to the organization of ideas, 'reading as a writer' and editing possibilities beyond the course, showing how you continue to benefit from what you've learned. Drawing on years of teaching and writing experience, as well as interviews with a wide range of students, Steve May provides all the background, advice and encouragement you need to embark on a creative writing course with complete confidence and to get maximum benefit from every writing session.
From Language to Creative Writing by
Developed by The Open University, this textbook offers an innovative introduction to the study of the English language and the practices, skills and strategies of creative writing. For anyone studying English Language or Creative Writing at tertiary level or in higher education, or for developing writers and those interested in the nature of linguistic creativity, it offers a uniquely integrated approach. Readers will better understand the structure and uses of language and be able to use a full range of strategies in crafting and developing their own writing. Offering a detailed investigation of language, the authors examine both everyday use and examples from literature and the media to illustrate the diverse ways in which language is used in a variety of social contexts. They consider accent and dialect, standard and non-standard English, how language use varies according to its purpose, and the relationship it has to identity. Interwoven with the study of language are creative writing chapters that introduce strategies for the reader to draw upon in their own writing. Practical writing exercises develop the ability to select and shape language for different effects, create 'voice' in a story, and utilise patterns of sound in the composition of poetry. This unique textbook will develop a better appreciation of language in use, as well as the skills to craft writing in distinctive ways.
The Handbook of Creative Writing by
A practical & inspirational resource for creative writers at all levelsIn 48 distinctive chapters, the Handbook is split into three parts: * Part 1: examines the critical theories behind the practice of creative writing * Part 2: explains the basics of how to write a novel, script or poetry * Part 3: explores how to deal with the practicalities and problems of becoming a writer Alongside the main creative writing activities, chapters cover other practices, from translation to starting a small magazine and from memoir writing to writing for children. Contributors are all experts in their fields: poets, novelists, dramatists, agents, publishers, editors, tutors, critics and academics. Anyone with an interest in creative writing will find this book invaluable in developing their own creative writing projects and as a way into new areas of writing activity.
Myth and Creative Writing by
Myth and Creative Writing is a unique and practical guide to the arts of creative writing. It: Gives a historical perspective on the storyteller's art Takes a wide view of myth, to include: legends, folklore, biblical myth, classical myth, belief myths, balladry and song. Considers all aspects of the creative process, from conception to completion Provides tips on seeking inspiration from classical and mythic sources Shows how myths can be linked to contemporary concerns Enables beginning writers to tap into the deeper resonances of myth Guides students to further critical and creative resources A secret that all writers know is that they are part of a long tradition of storytelling - whether they call it mythic, intertextual, interactive or original. And in the pantheon of storytelling, myths (those stories that tell us, in often magical terms, how the world and the creatures in it came to be) are the bedrock, a source of unending inspiration. One can dress the study of literature in the finest critical clothing - or intellectualise it until the cows come home - but at its heart it is nothing more - and nothing less - than the study of the human instinct to tell stories, to order the world into patterns we can more readily understand. Exploring the mythic nature of writing (by considering where the connections between instinct and art are made, and where the writer is also seen as a mythic adventurer) is a way of finding close links to what it is we demand from literature, which is - again - something to do with the essences of human nature. Further, in the course of examining the nature of myth, Adrian May provides a very practical guide to the aspiring writer - whether in a formal course or working alone - on how to write stories (myths) of their own, from how to begin, how to develop and how to close.
Reflective practice : writing and professional development by
Reflecting thoughtfully on your work is vital for improving your own self-awareness, effectiveness and professional development. This newly updated fifth edition of Gillie Bolton's bestselling book explores reflective writing as a creative and dynamic process for this critical enquiry. New to this edition: An expanded range of exercises and activities A new emphasis on using e-portfolios Further guidance on reflective writing assignments Enhanced discussion of reflection as a key employability skill Additional online resources This popular book has been used worldwide in various disciplines including education, social work, business and management, medicine and healthcare and is essential reading for students and professionals seeking to enhance their reflective writing skills and to examine their own practice in greater critical depth.
Teaching Creative Writing by
Teaching Creative Writing is a collection of twelve essays written by international experts in the field, with a critical introduction by Graeme Harper to the teaching and learning of the subject. The book includes: * Responding positively to genre-specific challenges * Considering learning styles and teaching techniques * Actively approaching creative writing in universities and colleges * Assessing the creative writing workshop and individual learning * Relating practice and criticism: new work in the field * Recommendations by authors of notable books/resources. Contributors cover the writing of short fiction, poetry, the novel, work for film, TV and radio, creative non-fiction, writing for the stage, writing for children and young adults, new media writing, the critical-creative cross-over, workshops, and key issues in creative writing research. Tightly focused around typical course modules, innovative and lucidly written, this will be the essential book for teachers and learners of creative writing in higher education.
Thinking on the page : a college student's guide to effective writing by
Take Charge of Your Writing--and Dazzle Your Instructors! It can be a challenge to achieve writing excellence, but it doesn't have to be mysterious, and it's definitely not impossible. To present powerful ideas effectively in your college essays, you need to break away from rigid rules and structures and start thinking on the page. With this book, you'll learn how to actively engage with a text, analyze it, draw informed conclusions, and then make solid claims about what you have observed. Thinking on the Page will also help you: Think critically about what you're reading and draw questions and ideas directly from the text Approach your essay as a story rather than a formula Work through your ideas by graphing, listing, charting, and drawing Incorporate relevant outside research Edit your final essay and polish it to perfection Whether you're in college or high school, you need to communicate your ideas effectively through writing. Thinking on the Page provides innovative tools tailored to the way you learn and write, enabling you to produce thoughtful, analytical, and meaningful work, both in school and beyond.
Understanding Interactive Digital Narrative by
A clearly written and timely critical revaluation of core issues in the interactive digital narrative (IDN) field that untangles the range of theories and arguments that have developed over the past two decades, providing both teachers and students with a more precise and specific understanding of IDN. Wide interdisciplinary appeal - especially useful for classes in media and communication studies focussing on new media, and their sister field Game Design, which has a large and growing number of undergraduate programs. The international reputation of the author will ensure a broad geographic appeal, especially in Europe and North America but also in Asia, Australia, Latin America.
Wonderbook (Revised and Expanded) by
Wonderbook has become the definitive guide to writing science fiction and fantasy by offering an accessible, example-rich approach that emphasizes the importance of playfulness as well as pragmatism. It also exploits the visual nature of genre culture and employs bold, full-color drawings, maps, renderings, and visualizations to stimulate creative thinking. On top of all that, the book features sidebars and essays from some of the biggest names working in the field today, including George R. R. Martin, Lev Grossman, Neil Gaiman, Michael Moorcock, and Karen Joy Fowler. For the fifth anniversary of the original publication, Jeff VanderMeer has added an additional 32 pages of diagrams, illustrations, and writing exercises creating the ultimate volume of inspiring advice that is also a stunning and inspiring object.
Writer's Digest Guide to Magazine Article Writing by
Your Essential Reference for Writing for Magazines! In The Writer's Digest Guide to Magazine Article Writing, accomplished freelance writer, author, and instructor Kerrie Flanagan demystifies the idea that writing for magazines is a difficult process meant only for those with journalism degrees. Drawing from her 20 years as a freelance writer and instructor, Flanagan takes you step-by-step through the entire process, sharing her knowledge and experiences in a friendly, conversational way. With more than a dozen sample articles, expert advice from magazine editors and successful freelance writers, practical tips on researching potential publications and instructions on crafting compelling query letters, you'll find the tools needed to write and publish magazine articles. In this book you'll learn how to: * Find and target ideas for the right magazine. * Develop effective query letters to catch the attention of editors and land more assignments. * Organize your writing life using the checklists and tools throughout the book. * Understand and negotiate contracts. * Write and sell personal essays to consumer, niche and trade magazines. Whether your goal is to get your first byline or make the switch from part-time freelancer to full-time writer, The Writer's Digest Guide to Magazine Article Writing is your go-to resource for writing success.
Writing for news media : the storyteller's craft by
Writing for News Media is a down-to-earth guide on how to write news stories for online, print and broadcast audiences. It celebrates the craft of storytelling, arguing for its continued importance in a modern newsroom. With dynamism and humour, Ian Pickering, a journalist with 30 years' experience, offers readers practical advice on being a news journalist, with step-by-step guidance on creating a great story and writing the perfect news copy. Chapters include: extracts from published news articles to help illustrate the dos and don'ts of storytelling; the ten golden rules for structuring and putting together a successful news article, including 'Nail the intro', 'Let it flow' and 'Keep it simple'; instruction on writing stories for different specialist subjects, including politics, court cases, economics, funnies and celebrity; help for readers on how to write for broadcast news; tips on how to write headlines, how to use pictures, how to make the most of quotations and how to avoid common style and grammar mistakes; glossaries covering a range of different aspects of news journalism, including types of news story, online and data journalism, typesetting and broadcasting. This is an instructive and insightful manual which champions brilliant storytelling and writing with flair. It introduces a set of key creative and analytical techniques that will help students of journalism and young professionals hone and refi ne their story-writing skills.
CREAWRI is a workshop class that will train students to write creative outputs relevant to arts management which they can use in various productions, projects, and activities designed for cultural, arts, and creative industry sectors.
Changing Creative Writing in America by
In this compelling collection of essays contributors critically examine Creative Writing in American Higher Education. Considering Creative Writing teaching, learning and knowledge, the book recognizes historical strengths and weaknesses. The authors cover topics ranging from the relationship between Creative Writing and Composition and Literary Studies to what it means to write and be a creative writer; from new technologies and neuroscience to the nature of written language; from job prospects and graduate study to the values of creativity; from moments of teaching to persuasive ideas and theories; from interdisciplinary studies to the qualifications needed to teach Creative Writing in contemporary Higher Education. Most of all it explores the possibilities for the future of Creative Writing as an academic subject in America.
The collection of creative writing by learners of Japanese by
Editor's Preface: This project aims to promote creative writing skills among Japanese language learners and provide them with opportunities to publish their work to benefit future learners. The project targets undergraduate students in their third and fourth years of Japanese language studies, taking courses designed to develop their reading skills to allow them to read a novel without external support. To this end, students were encouraged to participate in significant reading activities outside class. However, students indicated that they could not find attractive and appropriate reading options among the extensive Japanese reading collections. This project seeks to address the gap by encouraging students to create their own fictional works. Working in groups of three or four, students wrote a fictional work together. The students in the third-year Japanese class read Spirited Away and watched the original anime as course assignments. Their creative writing was inspired by the story and used various words that are not found in commercial Japanese language textbooks. Fourth-year students wrote a story relating to the main theme of the course: Tokyo. They successfully differentiated writing styles andapplied these to their creative writing. Upon completing these assignments, students were motivated to publish their own work for future students of the Japanese language, expressing hope that their worksmight encourage others to write in various genres to improve their language proficiency.
A Companion to Creative Writing by
A Companion to Creative Writing comprehensively considers key aspects of the practice, profession and culture of creative writing in the contemporary world. The most comprehensive collection specifically relating to the practices and cultural and professional place of creative writing Covers not only the "how" of creative writing, but many more topics in and around the profession and cultural practices surrounding creative writing Features contributions from international writers, editors, publishers, critics, translators, specialists in public art and more Covers the writing of poetry, fiction, new media, plays, films, radio works, and other literary genres and forms Explores creative writing's engagement with culture, language, spirituality, politics, education, and heritage
Creative Composition : Inspiration and Techniques for Writing Instruction. by
This book brings together contemporary authors and well-respected creative writing instructors and theorists to explore ways creativity in composition may be encouraged in student writers. The question in this anthology is not 'Can writing be taught?' but 'How can we inspire students to embrace the creative process no matter what they write?'
Creative Manoeuvres : Writing, Making, Being. by
Creative Manoeuvres is a collection of new writings on a topic of enduring interest: the role of creative practice in the formation of knowledge. The contributors to this collection are primarily creative writers, working in poetry, fiction, nonfiction and ethnography. Many include the visual or performing arts within their practice; and all are academics as well as creative writers. Their chapters move the study of creative writing beyond subjective accounts of 'how I write' towards broader issues of how knowledge is addressed by, or incorporated into, or embodied in, art. Each chapter also does double duty as a case study on approaches to creative and research work, both describing and critically exploring the strategies, or 'creative manoeuvres', these writers have adopted to advance their practice in both creative and critical domains. In this way, the book not only exemplifies moves in the contemporary academy to understand better the value creative practice can offer to the university, but also provides a rich and engaging set of narratives about ways of being, ways of making and ways of coming to know. In both practical and theoretical modes, it contributes to the ongoing questions about creativity and/versus scholarship that have been debated over recent decades.
Creative writing by
Creative writing may be the ultimate form of self-expression. Whether the reader is a creative writing student or someone who feels compelled to create stories and poetry in their free time, Idiot's Guides: Creative Writing helps them master the basics of fiction and creative nonfiction and write more effectively. Readers will learn how to:
- Create the fundamental elements of good fiction of creative nonfiction, including plot, character, point of view, setting, dialogue, style, and theme.
- Write various types and genres of creative writing, including novels, short stories, plays and screenplays, poetry, book-length and article-length narrative nonfiction, memoirs, and more.
- Hone their writing skills and boost their creativity with writing prompts and exercises.
Creative Writing and Education by
This book explores creative writing and its various relationships to education through a number of short, evocative chapters written by key players in the field. At times controversial, the book presents issues, ideas and pedagogic practices related to creative writing in and around education, with a focus on higher education.
Creative Writing and the Radical by
The rise of digital publishing and the ebook has opened up an array of possibilities for the writer working with innovation in mind. Creative Writing and the Radical uses an examination of how experimental writers in the past have explored the possibilities of multimodal writing to theorise the nature of writing fiction in the future.
Creative Writing Exercises for Dummies by
Turn your inspiration into a story with clear, expert guidance Creative Writing Exercises For Dummies is a step-by-step creative writing course designed to hone your craft, regardless of ability. Written by the founder of the Complete Creative Writing Course at London's Groucho Club, this activity-based guide walks you through the process of developing and writing in a wide range of genres including novels, short stories and creative nonfiction. The book includes writing prompts, exercises, mind maps, flow charts and diagrams designed to get your ideas flowing. You'll get expert guidance into character development, plot structure and prose, plus extensive insight into self-editing and polishing your work. Whether you're a new writer with a seed of an idea you would like to develop, or are looking to strengthen your creative writing skills, this book has you covered. Covering every aspect of narrative, from setting initial goals to formatting a manuscript, Creative Writing Exercises For Dummies provides the tools and instruction you need to make your story the best it can be. Learn to spark your imagination and sketch out ideas Create compelling characters and paint a picture with description Develop your plot and structure and maintain continuity Step back from your work and become your own ruthless editor The rise of e-books has opened up the publishing world, even to non-established writers. If you have a story you're dying to tell but aren't sure how, Creative Writing Exercises For Dummies is the clear, concise solution you need.
Creative Writing Pedagogies for the Twenty-First Century by
The creative writing workshop: beloved by some, dreaded by others, and ubiquitous in writing programs across the nation. For decades, the workshop has been entrenched as the primary pedagogy of creative writing. While the field of creative writing studies has sometimes myopically focused on this single method, the related discipline of composition studies has made use of numerous pedagogical models. In Creative Writing Pedagogies for the Twenty-First Century, editors Alexandria Peary and Tom C. Hunley gather experts from both creative writing and composition studies to offer innovative alternatives to the traditional creative writing workshop. Drawing primarily from the field of composition studies--a discipline rich with a wide range of established pedagogies--the contributors in this volume build on previous models to present fresh and inventive methods for the teaching of creative writing. Each chapter offers both a theoretical and a historical background for its respective pedagogical ideas, as well as practical applications for use in the classroom. This myriad of methods can be used either as a supplement to the customary workshop model or as stand-alone roadmaps to engage and reinvigorate the creative process for both students and teachers alike. A fresh and inspiring collection of teaching methods, Creative Writing Pedagogies for the Twenty-First Century combines both conventional and cutting-edge techniques to expand the pedagogical possibilities in creative writing studies.
Discovering Creative Writing by
This is a book about discovering how you do creative writing. How you begin, how you structure, how your writing process works, how a work embodies movement and change, what influences you, and, ultimately, how you end. Discovering Creative Writing points you toward clues that can assist you in understanding your own creative writing as well as the creative writing of others. This book is both a practical guide and a critical examination that empowers the reader to find things out and use that information to develop and support their own creative writing. This book will enable students of creative writing at both undergraduate and postgraduate level to deepen their understanding of their practice, and will be a valuable guide and inspiration for anyone wishing to begin, continue, or improve their writing.
Exploring Second Language Creative Writing by
Exploring Second Language Creative Writing continues the work of stabilizing the emerging Creative Writing (SL) discipline. In unique ways, each essay in this book seeks to redefine a tripartite relationship between language acquisition, literatures, and identity. All essays extend B.B. Kachru's notion of "bilingual creativity" as an enculturated, shaped discourse (a mutation of the Sapir-Whorf hypothesis). Creative Writing (SL), a new subfield to emerge from Stylistics, extends David Hanauer's Poetry as Research (2010); situating a suite of methodologies and interdisciplinary pedagogies, researchers in this book mobilize theories from Creativity Studies, TESOL, TETL, Translation Studies, Linguistics, Cultural Studies, and Literary Studies. Changing the relationship between L2 writers and canonized literary artefacts (from auratic to dialogic), each essay in this text is essentially Freirean; each chapter explores dynamic processes through which creative writing in a non-native language engages material and phenomenological modes toward linguistic pluricentricity and, indeed, emancipation.
The Future for Creative Writing by
This is a compelling look at the current state and future direction of creative writing by a preeminent scholar in the field. Explores the practice of creative writing, its place in the world, and its impact on individuals and communities Considers the process of creative writing as an art form and as a mode of communication Examines how new technology, notably the internet and cell phones, is changing the ways in which creative work is undertaken and produced Addresses such topics as writing as a cultural production, the education of a creative writer, the changing nature of communication, and different attitudes to empowerment
Key Issues in Creative Writing by
Key Issues in Creative Writing explores a range of important issues that inform the practice and understanding of creative writing. The collection considers creative writing learning and teaching as well as creative writing research. Contributors target debates that arise because of the nature of creative writing. These experts - from the UK, USA and Australia - specifically examine creative writing as a subject in universities and colleges and discuss both the creative knowledge and the critical understanding informing the subject and its future. Finally, this volume suggests ways in which addressing current issues will produce significant disciplinary knowledge that will contribute to the success of creative writing in current and future academic environments.
Researching Creative Writing by
Jen Webb is Distinguished Professor, Creative Practice, at the University of Canberra. Her research focuses on the politics and social location of art, and on the process and practice of creative writing. Her creative work includes the poetry collection, Proverbs from Sierre Leone (2004, Five Islands Press) and the short story collection, Ways of Getting By (2006, Ginninderra Press).
Teaching Creative Writing by
Teaching Creative Writing is designed to showcase practical approaches developed by practitioners in the ever-growing community of writers in higher education. Aimed at enabling those who teach the subject to review, borrow, and adapt ideas, the emphasis throughout is on diversity. 50 contributions from an international team of writers cover a variety of forms and genres and include traditional and innovative components of creative writing courses. Helen Gildfind, reviewing in TEXT (April 2013) writes: 'Teaching Creative Writing is obviously well suited to teachers of poetry, fiction, non-fiction, and plays. It offers a practical resource for teachers who are just starting out and lack the confidence or ideas required to create truly engaging classes. This book might even be useful for experienced teachers who suspect that their own methods have become repetitive and uninspiring, or who sense complacency creeping in to their classrooms through the stultifying effects of their own habits. Less obviously, this text has value for teachers because it emphasises and models the care required to structure classes in an engaging and purposeful manner. The book may even benefit creative writers themselves, for its huge bank of activities offer a means for writers to recover from writer's block, by providing defamiliarising writing tasks.'
Towards a Poetics of Creative Writing by
This book is a study of the poetics of creative writing as a subject in the dramatically changing context of practice as research, taking into account the importance of the subjectivity of the writer as researcher. It explores creative writing and theory while offering critical antecedents, theoretical directions and creative interchanges.
TV writing on demand : creating great content in the digital era by
TV Writing On Demand: Creating Great Content in the Digital Era takes a deep dive into writing for today's audiences, against the backdrop of a rapidly evolving TV ecosystem. Amazon, Hulu and Netflix were just the beginning. The proliferation of everything digital has led to an ever-expanding array of the most authentic and engaging programming that we've ever seen. No longer is there a distinction between broadcast, cable and streaming. It's all content. Regardless of what new platforms and channels will emerge in the coming years, for creators and writers, the future of entertainment has never looked brighter. This book goes beyond an analysis of what makes great programming work. It is a master course in the creation of entertainment that does more than meet the standards of modern audiences--it challenges their expectations. Among other essentials, readers will discover how to: Satisfy the binge viewer: analysis of the new genres, trends and how to make smart initial decisions for strong, sustainable story. Plus, learn from the rebel who reinvented an entire format. Develop iconic characters: how to foster audience alignment and allegiance, from empathy and dialogue to throwing characters off their game, all through the lens of authenticity and relatability. Create a lasting, meaningful career in the evolving TV marketplace: how to overcome trips, traps and tropes, the pros and cons of I.P.; use the Show Bible as a sales tool and make the most of the plethora of new opportunities out there. A companion website offers additional content including script excerpts, show bible samples, interviews with television content creators, and more.
What We Talk about When We Talk about Creative Writing by
This innovative edited collection pushes boundaries in both content and form. It discusses how new ways of knowing and doing scholarship produced in Creative Writing departments can make a contribution to a wider academic community and emphasises the value of personal reflection and sharing stories.
Creative Entrepreneurship and Business Planning
Creative Enterprise Planning is a unique course that allows learners in multi-media arts, arts management, music, dance, fashion, game development and animation to know and understand the inner workings of an enterprise from idea generation to conception, knowing the laws that affect the domain of designers and artists such as Intellectual Property Rights and business registration steps, how to set-up the enterprise by knowing the types of businesses, developing marketing strategies and tactics, setting up the organization, developing the operations flow, developing the initial capital needed, computing revenue and targets and forming a sound income statement that is sustainable.
Art, Culture and Enterprise (Routledge Revivals) by
First published in 1990, this investigative overview of the politics of arts' and cultural funding examines the question of public support for the arts. Looking at both popular commercial forms of culture, including radio, pop music and cinema, and the more traditional highbrow arts such as drama and opera, Art, Culture and Enterprise was the first book of its kind to deal systematically with the politics of contemporary culture. Drawing examples from specific British venues, Justin Lewis shows how innovative projects work in practice, and considers arts marketing and the promotion of culture as an economic strategy. A particularly relevant title in the context of the debate surrounding Arts Council funding, this reissue will prove valuable for artists, administrators and students of media and cultural studies, alongside those with a general interest in the future of public art and culture.
Art Entrepreneurship by
This pioneering book explores the connections between art and artistic processes and entrepreneurship. The authors expertly identify several areas and issues where research on art and artistic processes can inform and develop the traditional field of entrepreneurship research.Nine original chapters by an international group of scholars take a detailed look at the sources of new art ideas, how they are transformed into tangible objects of art, make their way through often hostile selection environments, and ultimately go on to become valued and accepted by the general public. Making a number of original contributions at the crossroads of art and entrepreneurship, the book speaks to researchers across these fields, practicing artists interested in promoting and gaining acceptance for their work, as well as policymakers concerned with sustained dynamics of the art arena. Entrepreneurship researchers interested in new developments in the field will find this unique book invigorating. It also serves as an invaluable source of inspiration for academics and practitioners interested in social and cultural entrepreneurship.
Arts and Entrepreneurship by
Interest in entrepreneurship in the arts has grown in recent years. This book brought together experts and thought leaders from around the world to uncover business success strategies for individuals engaged in the arts worldwide.
Arts Entrepreneurship by
Arts Entrepreneurship: Creating a New Venture in the Artsprovides the essential tools, techniques, and concepts needed to invent, launch, and sustain a business in the creative sector. Building on the reader's artistic talents and interests, the book provides a practical, action-oriented introduction to the business of art, focusing on product design, organizational planning and assessment, customer identification and marketing, fundraising, legal issues, money management, cultural policy, and career development. It also offers examples, exercises, and references that guide entrepreneurs through the key stages of concept creation, business development, and growth. Special attention is paid to topics such as cultural ventures seeking social impact, the emergence of creative placemaking, the opportunities afforded by novel corporate forms, and the role of contemporary technologies in marketing, fundraising, and operations. A hands-on guide to entrepreneurial success, this book is a valuable resource for students of Arts Entrepreneurship programs, courses, and workshops, as well as for early-stage business founders in the creative sector looking for guidance on how to create and sustain their own successful venture.
Creative Industries and Entrepreneurship by
This book analyses the relationship between creative and cultural industries, local economic development and entrepreneurship from a global perspective. In so doing, it investigates the evolving paradigm of creative industries and creative entrepreneurship and their related economy over time.Creative Industries and Entrepreneurship explores cultural and creative economics, management, entrepreneurship, international business, and urban and regional sciences, in both developed and newly emerging countries. The authors provide a framework to understand the evolving paradigm of creative industries and creative entrepreneurship while highlighting the distinction between 'first generation countries' such as the US, Canada, Australia and Europe, and 'second generation countries' in Asia, South America and North Africa. By adopting a multidisciplinary approach, the book develops a comprehensive overview of the composite phenomenon of the creative economy and its relationship with entrepreneurship.This inter-disciplinary work will appeal to researchers and scholars interested in creative industries, the creative economy and entrepreneurship, in addition to policy makers and managers within these areas. Readers will find an up-to-date presentation of existing and new research perspectives in these domains.
Cultural Icons and Cultural Leadership by
Authors in this illuminating book probe the social and spiritual contexts from which select iconic figures emerge as innovators and cultural leaders and draw material into forms that subsequent generations consider pioneering and emblematic. The book identifies creators such as novelists, poets, performers and dramatists who are leaders in their respective genres, and in culture and society at large, and examines the influence exerted on and by their works.Critics and admirers understand the cultural leaders discussed in this book as significant figures affecting social and political change. The chapters cover a range of genres, time periods and individuals, mixing literary and historical analysis with concerns relevant to leadership studies. The book includes a cross-disciplinary analysis focusing on its subjects' roles as leaders within and beyond their fields. Scholars and students of religion, history and popular culture with wide-ranging interests in the humanities will find this book a unique and fascinating look at cultural leadership.
The disappearing product : marketing and markets in the creative industries by
The Disappearing Product combines analysis of developments in the creative economy with practical guidance for marketing in the creative industries. Using theoretical models and extensive practical examples, this book challenges cultural producers to reclaim their place in the creative economy. Marketing is situated in the context of social, cultural and technological change that has revolutionised the creative and media industries. Traditional broadcasters, publishers and record labels have been displaced by a new generation of intermediaries including Amazon, Apple, Facebook and Google. These new intermediaries are marginalising cultural producers, devaluing products and monopolising consumer attention. Bilton's analysis focuses on how the creative industries must respond to these structural changes with new, innovative marketing methods for cultural products. Key features include: * a defined approach to marketing geared towards the cultural and creative industries, distinguished from 'business as usual' and 'arts marketing' * case studies and questions for discussion that can be used in the classroom * analysis of the creative economy highlighting practical strategies for marketers and managers * key examples of recent innovative marketing by artists and cultural entrepreneurs. An essential guide for students of creative industries, marketing and management, this book allows readers to develop their own tailored approach to marketing. Cultural entrepreneurs, marketers and managers will benefit from the in-depth insight into new patterns of consumption, transformed markets and emerging business models.
Entrepreneurship and the Creative Economy by
Entrepreneurship and the Creative Economy contains a range of theoretical and empirically based research contributions that collectively consider and debate the process, policy and practice of the creative economy.The 'creative economy' and the broad spectrum of creative industries that it encompasses, is increasingly important in the 21st century's global economy. In challenging economic conditions, creative industries are both politically and economically appealing with governments around the world now recognising their potential as a source of employment and entrepreneurial endeavour. As such, this informative book will play a vital part in furthering our understanding of the creative industries and the role they play in economic development.This enlightening compendium, researched by leading authors in the field, will prove invaluable for students, academics and researchers in the fields of creative entrepreneurship, creative industries and the creative economy.
Entrepreneurship for the Creative and Cultural Industries by
Artists, musicians, actors, singers, designers and other creative individuals need to understand basic business concepts if they are to successfully pursue their chosen artistic profession. These skills have historically not been taught to creative students, which leaves them unprepared to make a living from their artistic efforts. Entrepreneurship for the Creative and Cultural Industries will teach the basics of business in a way that is relevant to the challenges of running a small business marketing a creative product. Whether it is understanding the basics of business language, appreciating the crucial importance of finance, or using social media marketing, this innovative textbook covers the entrepreneurial skills required to succeed in the creative sector. Including advice from artists who have turned their idea in to a profitable business and worksheets that can be combined into a simple business plan, Kolb helps non-business minded creatives to understand everything they need to succeed in the increasingly competitive creative economy. This textbook is essential reading for non-business students who are looking to understand the business side of the creative sector whilst its practical style will also suit recent graduates in these industries
Filmmakers and financing : business plans for independents by
In this new and updated ultimate filmmaker's guide , Louise Levison gives you easy- to-use steps for writing an investor-winning business plan for a feature film including: * Comprehensive explanations for each of the eight sections of a plan * Full financial section with text and tables * Sample business plan * Companion website with additional information for various chapters and detailed financial instructions ― advanced math not needed New! * Breaking the rules: how feature documentary, animated, and large format films differ New! * Communicating with investors: who they are, pitching to them and the experiences of other indie filmmakers
Introducing the Creative Industries by
"This text does a sterling job at identifying, outlining and defining the many elements that go to make up this booming sector of industry. What makes it particularly interesting is that it includes the view of the creative industries from the perspective of working in it, then the definitions of what products and producers are involved, and ends with the broader picture of the creative economy and predictions for future trends. Add to this that they include both theory and practice, and this really is an all-round guide to the vast domain that is loosely titled ′the creative industries′"- Angela Birchall, School of Media, Music & Performance, Salford UniversityThis is your complete guide to studying and succeeding in the creative industries. This book takes you through the history, trends, products and markets of the creative industries, showing how success depends on a mix of ideas, tactics and talent.When understanding social networks and cultural economy is just as important as hands-on skills or an entrepreneurial spirit, Introducing the Creative Industries shows you how to use theories, concepts and practical skills to get ahead in their course and professional life. Creatively imagined and beautifully written, this book: Interweaves theoretical concepts and professional practice on every page Uses cultural economy to teach the essential concepts and thinkers Integrates case studies from fashion and gaming to journalism and music Teaches strategies for navigating the links between skills, industries, creativity and markets. This book shows you how to spot opportunities and use your knowledge and savvy to take kickstart your career in this fast-moving industry. It is an essential guidebook for students of creativity in media and communication, design, creative industries and business.
Marketing fashion : a global perspective by
While rooted in traditional marketing principles, successful fashion marketing presents a unique set of opportunities and challenges. Marketing Fashion: A Global Perspective is the first text to engagingly present marketing theories and practices as they specifically relate to apparel, home goods, and other design-driven products. Using a variety of contemporary examples, the text details how fashion marketers develop and apply marketing strategies that meet consumer needs at a profit. Topics covered include: consumer and organizational buying behavior, market research, market segmentation, product planning and positioning, pricing, retailer relationships, and additional classic marketing theories and practices as they relate to design. In addition, Fashion Marketing explores in depth contemporary issues such as technology, social responsibility and ethics, sustainability, and globalization, and considers effective strategies for various economic climates.
Your Creative Career by
Anna Sabino is an artist, but certainly not a starving one. She wasn't born into a wealthy family, didn't inherit money from a distant relative, and doesn't have a rich husband. But she made it as an entrepreneur, as a single woman, and most importantly, as an artist. In Your Creative Career, she shows her fellow artists and creatives how to build a business that reflects their talent and true calling while generating serious cash. Whether the goal is to build an empire and be financially free, create a lifestyle business, or just to have more time, Your Creative Career guides you through every aspect of creative entrepreneurship. If you want to start your creative career, transition into it, or give it a boost, this book is a must read that features: Proven systems and strategies to create ideally priced products that keep selling. The importance of going through all the steps of making it from idea inception and execution to branding and distribution. The importance of transitioning from artistic solitude to collaborative, creative entrepreneurship. The most effective marketing and PR methods adjusted to the new reality of short attention spans and information overload.
Creative Entrepreneurship and Business Planning
Creative Enterprise Planning is a unique course that allows learners in multi-media arts, arts management, music, dance, fashion, game development and animation to know and understand the inner workings of an enterprise from idea generation to conception, knowing the laws that affect the domain of designers and artists such as Intellectual Property Rights and business registration steps, how to set-up the enterprise by knowing the types of businesses, developing marketing strategies and tactics, setting up the organization, developing the operations flow, developing the initial capital needed, computing revenue and targets and forming a sound income statement that is sustainable.
Artist Management for the Music Business by
Anyone managing an artist's career needs to be well versed and have a savvy understanding of the moving parts of the music business. Learn how and why those moving parts "move," as well as how to manage and navigate a music-based career. Artist Management for the Music Business gives a comprehensive view of how to generate income through music and how to strategically plan for future growth. The book is full of valuable practical insights. It includes interviews and case studies with examples of real-world management issues and outcomes. Updates to this new edition include the importance of online streaming to music careers, how anyone can effectively network, tools for successful negotiation, ways to identify and manage income sources, and guidance on the ever-changing social media landscape of the music business. This book gives access to resources about artist management and the music business at its companion website, http://www.artistmanagementonline.com. There is no login, and the resources are updated regularly.
Creative communities : art works in economic development by
Urban and regional planners, elected officials, and other decisionmakers are increasingly focused on what makes places livable. Access to the arts inevitably appears high on that list, but knowledge about how culture and the arts can act as a tool of economic development is sadly lacking. This important sector must be considered not only as a source of amenities or pleasant diversions, but also as a wholly integrated part of local economies. Employing original data produced through both quantitative and qualitative research, Creative Communities provides a greater understanding of how art works as an engine for transforming communities. "Without good data and analysis--much of it grounded in economic theory--we cannot hope to strengthen communities through the arts or to achieve any of the other goals we set for the National Endowment for the Arts, the largest nationwide funder of the arts." --from the Foreword by Rocco Landesman Contributors: Hasan Bakhshi (Nesta UK), Elisa Barbour (University of California, Berkeley), Shiri M. Breznitz (Georgia Institute of Technology), Roland J. Kushner (Muhlenberg College), Rex LaMore (Michigan State University), James Lawton (Michigan State), Neil Lee (Nesta UK), Richard G. Maloney (Boston University), Ann Markusen (University of Minnesota), Juan Mateos-Garcia (Nesta UK), Anne Gadwa Nicodemus (Metris Arts Consulting), Douglas S. Noonan (Indiana University-Purdue University Indianapolis), Peter Pedroni (Williams College), Amber Peruski (Michigan State), Michele Root-Bernstein (Michigan State), Robert Root-Bernstein (Michigan State), Eileen Roraback (Michigan State), Michael Rushton (Indiana University), Lauren Schmitz (New School for Social Research), Jenny Schuetz (University of Southern California), John Schweitzer (Michigan State), Stephen Sheppard (Williams College), Megan VanDyke (Michigan State), Gregory H. Wassall (Northeastern University)
Culture and commerce : the value of entrepreneurship in creative industries by
Art and business are often described as worlds apart, even diametric opposites. And yet, these realms are close cousins in creative industries where firms bring cultural goods to market, attaching price tags to music, paintings, theater, literature, film, and fashion.Building on theories of value construction and cultural production, Culture and Commerce details the processes by which artistic worth is decoded, translated, and converted to economic value. Mukti Khaire introduces readers to three industry players: creators, producers (who bring to market and distribute cultural goods), and intermediaries (who critique and rave about them). Case studies of firms from Chanel and Penguin to tastemakers like the Pritzker Prize and The Sundance Institute illuminate how these professionals construct a vital value chain. Highlighting the role of "pioneer entrepreneurs"--who carve out space for radical, new product categories--Khaire illustrates how creative professionals influence our sense of value, shifting consumer behavior and our culture in deep, surprising ways.
The Graphic Designer's Business Survival Guide by
Successful graphic designer and entrepreneur Larry Daniels exposes the weak spot that derails so many graphic designers' careers: the critical business side of making it as an independent designer. Running even a one-person design firm takes a lot more than raw talent and technical ability. The Graphic Designer's Business Survival Guide offers insider expertise on building a profitable, sustainable design business. Packed with sample agreements, letters, forms, and more, this practical guide helps designers look beyond aesthetic priorities and focus on basic business skills such as writing, record keeping, and relationship building. You'll learn how to create a website and portfolio that effectively highlight your design solutions, do prepitch research and deliver winning presentations, prepare inviting proposals that win lucrative contracts, establish a reliable system for tracking billable hours, and use sales strategies to quantify design decisions in ways businesses can relate to and respect. Get ready to break out of "freelancer" or "starving artist" mode and enter into the role of a highly compensated creative consultant--one who stands out to clients.
Management and the Arts by
The fifth edition of Management and the Arts discusses the theory and practical applications from all arts management perspectives including planning, marketing, finance, economics, organization, staffing, and group dynamics. Revised to reflect the latest thinking and trends in managing organizations and people, this fifth edition features class-tested questions in each chapter, which help students to integrate the material and develop ideas about how the situations and problems could have been handled. Statistics and real-world examples illustrate all aspects of arts managements, from budgeting and fundraising, to e-marketing and social networking, to working effectively with boards and staff members. Case studies focus on the challenges facing managers and organizations every day, and "In the News" quotes provide real-world examples of principles and theories. Students in Arts Management university courses along with arts managers in a theatre, museum, dance company, and opera will gain useful insights into strategic planning, organization, and integrated management theories with this book.
A Profile of the Performing Arts Industry by
Attending a live concert or theatrical performance can be a thrilling experience. At their best, the performing arts represent the height of human creativity and expression. But the presentation on stage, whether it is Shakespeare, Beethoven, or The Lion King, depends on a business backstage. This book provides an overview of both the product on stage and the industry that makes it possible. While the industry's product is unique--with unique supply and demand characteristics--it is still an industry, with supply inputs, organization structures, competitors, business models, value chains, and customers. We will examine each of the major segments (Broadway, regional theater, orchestra, opera, and ballet) along these business dimensions. This book will give lovers of the performing arts an understanding of the business realities that make live performances possible. Managers, board members, and performers will be better equipped to take on the strategic challenges their companies face. People contemplating any of these roles will have a better idea of what to expect. Business analysts and students of strategy will discover how economic frameworks apply in this unique setting where culture and commerce converge.
Stage money : the business of the professional theater by
Stage Money is a groundbreaking guide to understanding professional theater finances today through the use of the tools and metaphors of the business world at large. This approach results in a comprehensive picture of the economic realities of theater production that is radically different from the assessments typically espoused elsewhere. Tim Donahue and Jim Patterson combine their experiences in the financial and creative aspects of theater production to present in straightforward prose their keen insights into the micro- and macro-economic aspects of the commercial stage. Tangible data, charts, and graphs are counterbalanced with illuminating "intermissions" between chapters and interspersed sidebars throughout to provide specific examples of key concepts, collectively presenting an expansive overview of the contemporary theater business. Stage Money is an unparalleled tool for theater professionals and enthusiasts interested in garnering a better understanding of the business's inner workings at present and its challenges for the future.Among the topics addressed in Stage Money are the risks and returns on Broadway in the early twenty-first century, the financial organization of theater performances today, and comparisons between the business models of commercial theater and not-for-profit theater. In concise language and clear examples, the authors explain where the money comes from and where it goes.
Understanding the Arts and Creative Sector in the United States by
The arts and creative sector is one of the nation's broadest, most important, and least understood social and economic assets, encompassing both nonprofit arts and cultural organizations, for-profit creative companies, such as advertising agencies, film producers, and commercial publishers, and community-based artistic activities. The thirteen essays in this timely book demonstrate why interest in the arts and creative sector has accelerated in recent years, and the myriad ways that the arts are crucial to the social and national agenda and the critical issues and policies that relate to their practice. Leading experts in the field show, for example, how arts and cultural policies are used to enhance urban revitalization, to encourage civic engagement, to foster new forms of historic preservation, to define national identity, to advance economic development, and to regulate international trade in cultural goods and services. Illuminating key issues and reflecting the rapid growth of the field of arts and cultural policy, this book will be of interest to students at both the undergraduate and graduate levels, to arts educators and management professionals, government agency and foundation officials, and researchers and academics in the cultural policy field.
Research Methodologies in Arts Management
RESMETO is an introductory course to research methodologies and their application to arts management. This course covers both quantitative and qualitative approaches, as well as mixed methods in research as well as ethical issues in research practices.
Big data in the arts and humanities : theory and practice by
As digital technologies occupy a more central role in working and everyday human life, individual and social realities are increasingly constructed and communicated through digital objects, which are progressively replacing and representing physical objects. They are even shaping new forms of virtual reality. This growing digital transformation coupled with technological evolution and the development of computer computation is shaping a cyber society whose working mechanisms are grounded upon the production, deployment, and exploitation of big data. In the arts and humanities, however, the notion of big data is still in its embryonic stage, and only in the last few years, have arts and cultural organizations and institutions, artists, and humanists started to investigate, explore, and experiment with the deployment and exploitation of big data as well as understand the possible forms of collaborations based on it. Big Data in the Arts and Humanities: Theory and Practice explores the meaning, properties, and applications of big data. This book examines therelevance of big data to the arts and humanities, digital humanities, and management of big data with and for the arts and humanities. It explores the reasons and opportunities for the arts and humanities to embrace the big data revolution. The book also delineates managerial implications to successfully shape a mutually beneficial partnership between the arts and humanities and the big data- and computational digital-based sciences. Big data and arts and humanities can be likened to the rational and emotional aspects of the human mind. This book attempts to integrate these two aspects of human thought to advance decision-making and to enhance the expression of the best of human life.
A Designer's Research Manual, 2nd Edition, Updated and Expanded by
Go beyond crafting a logo or brochure and learn what it takes to design a commercial success.
Designing Qualitative Research by
Addressing the complexity, flexibility, and controversies of qualitative research's many genres, Designing Qualitative Research, Sixth Edition gives students, research managers, policy analysts, and applied researchers clear, easy-to-understand guidance on designing qualitative research. While maintaining a focus on the proposal stage, this best-selling book takes readers from selecting a research genre through building a conceptual framework, data collection and interpretation, and arguing the merits of the proposal. Extended discussions cover strategies that researchers can use to address the challenges posed by postmodernists, feminists, and critical race theorists, as well as others who interrogate historical qualitative inquiry. The book also includes thoughtful discussion on trustworthiness and ethics, in addition to dealing with time, resource, and political stressors inherent to the research process. Throughout the book, the authors emphasize the importance of being systematic but also inspire readers with potential "Aha!" moments and opportunities to do research in close connection with people and communities. Available with Perusall--an eBook that makes it easier to prepare for class Perusall is an award-winning eBook platform featuring social annotation tools that allow students and instructors to collaboratively mark up and discuss their SAGE textbook. Backed by research and supported by technological innovations developed at Harvard University, this process of learning through collaborative annotation keeps your students engaged and makes teaching easier and more effective. Learn more.
Doing Qualitative Research by
Accessible, practical, and packed with indispensable advice, this bestselling textbook is the perfect hands-on guide for any student embarking on their own research. With expert advice from the author and real-life experiences from students, this book shows you how to go from the ideas of research to the practicalities of designing, conducting, and writing about your research yourself. What's new in this edition: · Fully interactive digital field guide including video tutorials and real data to practice with · An improved structure that takes you step-by-step form start to finish · An overview and practical guidance on mixed methods and working with different kinds of data The free digital field guide secures its place as the 'take this everywhere' textbook that supports students both in the classroom and in the field providing access via tablet/phone/laptop for easy access to: - A readymade bibliography of qualitative research contained in SAGE journal articles curated by the author, to enrich reading and offer top research articles to cite; - Definitions to explain key concepts and methods to deepen understanding of what is discussed in the text; - David′s quick, practical video tips and instructional guidance for when students are in the field (or preparing to go into it). David steps in as an instant supervisor to give encouragement and avoid common pitfalls; - A treasure chest of online resources and weblinks chosen by David offering expert guidance on how to do research and do it better. These include research websites and resources as well as insider guides from trusted experts, links to organizations/software, online text/articles; - Datasets provide students with research data on which to practice organizing, analysing, and drawing conclusions; -′Cheat sheets′ and reflective trackers students can use to monitor their progress and plan and manage projects. *Interactivity only available through Vitalsource eBook included as part of paperback product (ISBN 9781526441614). Access not guaranteed on second-hand copies (as access code may have previously been redeemed).
Doing Research in Design by
Doing Research in Design presents new ways of thinking about the relationship between design and research by positioning design as a social as well as a material practice. This approach emphasises the social consequences of design decisions as well as the importance of the efficient functioning of a design. Doing Research in Design argues that design promotes social change and that, in order to understand that change, designers must turn to social science research methods. The book outlines the relationships between thinking and doing in design - and makes explicit links between design, research, philosophy and sociology - and then examines four central social research methodologies in practice. The aim of Doing Research in Design is to provide anyone involved in the field of design with the knowledge and understanding of the best methods to plan and conduct their research.
Doing research in fashion and dress : an introduction to qualitative methods by
Whether you're investigating fashion as a material object, an abstract idea, a social phenomenon, or a commercial system, qualitative techniques can further your understanding of almost any research topic. Doing Research in Fashion and Dress begins by guiding you through a brief history of fashion studies, and the debates surrounding it, before introducing key qualitative methodological approaches, including ethnography, semiology, and object-based research. Detailed case studies demonstrate how each methodology is used in practice. These case studies include Japanese subcultures, fashion photography blogs and semiotic studies of fashion magazine shoots and advertisements. This second edition also features a new chapter on internet sources and online ethnography, reflecting the adoption of social media tools not only by industry practitioners but also by academics. By contextualizing history, theory and practice Doing Research in Fashion and Dress offers- -A systematic examination of qualitative research methods in fashion studies in social sciences. -A practical guide for anyone wishing to conduct fashion research in academia or in the business world. -An accessible grounding in contemporary fashion studies literature.
A Handbook of Media and Communication Research by
A Handbook of Media and Communication Research presents qualitative as well as quantitative approaches to the study of media and communication, integrating perspectives from both the social sciences and the humanities. Taking methodology as a strategic level of analysis that joins practical concerns with theoretical issues, the Handbook offers a comprehensive and in-depth review of the field and a set of guidelines for how to think about, plan, and carry out media and communication studies in different social and cultural contexts. The second edition has been thoroughly updated with reference to the development of the internet, mobile, and other digital media. Each chapter addresses shifting configurations of established media organizations, media discourses, and media users in networked practices of communication. The introduction and one further chapter probe changing conceptions on mass and interpersonal, online and offline communication - in research as in everyday life. Three new chapters have been added to exemplify different forms of research employing multiple methods to study multiple media in multiple contexts. List of contributors: Klaus Bruhn Jensen, Barrie Gunter, Rasmus Helles, Annette Hill, Stig Hjarvard, Peter Larsen, Amanda Lotz, Graham Murdock, Horace Newcomb, Paddy Scannell, Lynn Schofield Clark, Kim Christian Schrøder
Handbook of Research Methodologies and Design in Neuroentrepreneurship by
This Handbook provides an overview of neuroscience-driven research methodologies and how those methodologies might be applied to theory-based research in the nascent field of neuroentrepreneurship. A key challenge of this field is that few neuroscientists are trained as entrepreneurship scholars and few entrepreneurship scholars are trained as neuroscientists, but this book skillfully bridges that gap.Expert contributors include concrete examples of new ways to conduct research in their contributions, which have the potential to shed light onto areas such as decision making and opportunity recognition and allow neuroentrepreneurs to ask different, perhaps better, questions than ever before. This Handbook also presents current thinking and examples of pioneering work, serves as a reference for those wishing to incorporate these methods into their own research, and provides several helpful discussions on the nature of answerable questions using neuroscience techniques.Neuroentrepreneurship is an important, emerging field for neuroscientists and entrepreneurship scholars alike. For the former audience, this book presents concrete research questions and entrepreneurship applications; for the latter, it serves as a primer and introduction to neuroscientific methods. Graduate students studying entrepreneurship, and practitioners who are keen to promote innovation and entrepreneurial skills in their leadership, will also find this Handbook to be of interest.
Innovation management : a research overview by
Innovation is the means by which organizations survive and thrive in uncertain and turbulent conditions. Innovation management has become a well-established field of research, teaching and practice, with a substantial literature. As a broad-based research field, contributions stem from an array of perspectives including science, economics, engineering and psychology. Innovation is crucial for economic and social progress, and it needs to be managed in order to be beneficial. Innovation Management: A Research Overview provides a concise introduction to the best research on innovation management. It covers four main themes: foundational studies, key concepts and frameworks, important empirical studies, and current and emerging themes. The research discussed includes classic studies, with core insights in the field, key thinking on strategies and processes for innovation, well-established and novel research methods, and issues of greatest contemporary importance. This shortform book provides direction through the maze of research on the nature, processes and outcomes of innovation management, and provides an invaluable introduction to the literature on innovation management for students and professionals.
Qualitative data analysis : an introduction by
In this fully updated and expanded second edition, Carol Grbich provides a guide through current issues in the analysis of qualitative data. Packed with detailed examples, a glossary, further reading lists and a section on writing up, this book is exactly what you need to get you started in qualitative research. The new edition covers analytical approaches including: - grounded theory - classical, existential and hermeneutic phenomenology - feminist research including memory work - classical, auto- and cyberethnography as well as ethnodrama - content, narrative, conversation and discourse analysis - visual interpretation - semiotic, structural and poststructural analyses A one-stop-shop for students new to qualitative data analysis! Available with Perusall--an eBook that makes it easier to prepare for classPerusall is an award-winning eBook platform featuring social annotation tools that allow students and instructors to collaboratively mark up and discuss their SAGE textbook. Backed by research and supported by technological innovations developed at Harvard University, this process of learning through collaborative annotation keeps your students engaged and makes teaching easier and more effective. Learn more.
Quantitative Research for the Qualitative Researcher by
O′Dwyer and Bernauer promote understanding and appreciation of the quantitative tradition in the social sciences, especially for those who are most familiar with the qualitative tradition. The authors demonstrate that these two research traditions are complementary and that the primary components of good research--problem quality, design quality, evidence quality, and procedural quality--apply equally to both qualitative and quantitative research methodologies. By providing rich pedagogy throughout the book the authors give students ample support and guidance. Each chapter begins with an outline, key terms are defined throughout, and discussion questions conclude each chapter. Connections to Qualitative Research and Review of Published Research sections offer students opportunities to make connections to their current base of knowledge and to see the concepts described in the book being applied in real research.
Research Design by
This user-friendly book provides a step-by-step guide to using the five major approaches to research design: quantitative, qualitative, mixed methods, arts-based, and community-based participatory research. Chapters on each approach follow a unique format--they present a template for a research proposal and explain in detail how to conceptualize and fill in every section. Terminology commonly used within each approach is identified, and key moments of ethical decision making are flagged. Interdisciplinary research examples draw on current events and social justice topics. Unique coverage includes hot topics: replication studies and data sharing, tailoring proposals to different audiences, and more. The book also includes a general introduction to social research; an in-depth, practical discussion of ethics; and a chapter on how to begin a research study, from planning a topic to developing a research question via a literature review. Pedagogical Features *Multiple "Review Stops" in each chapter--quick quizzes with answer keys. *End-of-chapter writing exercises, research activities, and suggested resources. *Bold-face key terms and an end-of-book glossary. *Boxed tips from experts in the respective approaches. *Supplemental PowerPoint slides for instructors using the book in a class. Winner (Third Place)--American Journal of Nursing Book of the Year Award, Nursing Research Category
Research design : qualitative, quantitative, and mixed methods approaches by
This best-selling text pioneered the comparison of qualitative, quantitative, and mixed methods research design. For all three approaches, John W. Creswell and new co-author J. David Creswell include a preliminary consideration of philosophical assumptions, key elements of the research process, a review of the literature, an assessment of the use of theory in research applications, and reflections about the importance of writing and ethics in scholarly inquiry. The Fifth Edition includes more coverage of: epistemological and ontological positioning in relation to the research question and chosen methodology; case study, PAR, visual and online methods in qualitative research; qualitative and quantitative data analysis software; and in quantitative methods more on power analysis to determine sample size, and more coverage of experimental and survey designs; and updated with the latest thinking and research in mixed methods. SHARE this Comparison of Research Approaches poster with your students to help them navigate the distinction between the three approaches to research.
Research design : qualitative, quantitative, and mixed methods approaches by
This edition for sale in USA and Canada only. The book that has helped more than 150,000 students and researchers prepare their plan or proposal for a scholarly journal article, dissertation or thesis has been revised and updated while maintaining all the features that made the first edition so popular. New to this edition: · Because mixed method research has come into its own since the publication of the first edition, every chapter now shows how to implement a mixed method design in your proposal or plan as well as showing how to do the other two (qualitative and quantitative) approaches · Ethical issues that may arise in quantitative, qualitative and mixed methods designs have been added to a new section in Chapter 3 · Writing tips and considerations have been expanded and moved to the first part of the book to get your research plan started in the right direction · The latest developments in qualitative inquiry, including advocacy, participatory, and emancipatory approaches have been added to Chapter 10 · Mixed Method Procedures (Chapter 11) show readers how to identify the type of mixed method strategy, select the data collection and analysis approaches, and plan the overall structure of the study Examples, drawn from various disciplinary fields, are used throughout the book to deepen the readers understanding of the discussion. These include examples of studies with marginalized individuals in our society that reflect issues in social justice in addition to the traditional samples and populations studied by social researchers.
Research for Designers by
Today, designers design services, processes and organizations; craft skills no longer suffice. We need to discover, define and solve problems based upon evidence. We need to demonstrate the validity of our claims. We need a guide to design research that can educate students and be a reference for professionals. And here it is: a masterful book for 21st century designers.′ - Don Norman, Professor and Director of Design Lab, University of California San Diego, and former Vice President, Advanced Technologies, Apple ′Muratovski provides a structured approach to introducing students and researchers to design research and takes the reader through the research process from defining the research problem to the literature review on to data collection and analysis. With such practical and useful chapters, this book should prove to be essential reading in design schools across the world.′ - Tracy Bhamra, Professor of Sustainable Design and Pro Vice-Chancellor of Enterprise, Loughborough University Design is everywhere: it influences how we live, what we wear, how we communicate, what we buy, and how we behave. In order for designers to design for the real world, defining strategies rather than just implementing them, they need to learn how to understand and solve complex, intricate and often unexpected problems. This book is a guide to this new creative process. With this book in hand, students of design will: understand and apply the vocabulary and strategies of research methods learn how to adapt themselves to unfamiliar situations develop techniques for collaborating with non-designers find and use facts from diverse sources in order to prove or disprove their ideas make informed decisions in a systematic and insightful way use research tools to find new and unexpected design solutions. Research for Designers is an essential toolkit for a design education and a must-have for every design student who is getting ready to tackle their own research.
Research Methodologies for Beginners by
This textbook introduces the general points of view of research methodology in the scientific and engineering fields of studies and presents an overview of the technical and professional communication needed for article publication in journals. It comprises several practice exercises that will give beginners the confidence to move on the communicative activities. Every chapter provides problem sets that will help readers check their understanding of each concept. The book will also help readers formulate specific research topics, research questions, and hypotheses; conduct literature reviews relevant to the research topics; develop applicable research methodologies; and write and present their research outlining the key elements of the proposed projects. It is very useful for students and researchers opting for a course on research methodology and for seminars at undergraduate and graduate levels.
Research methods : a practical guide for students and researchers by 
Research methods in performance studies by
"Research Methods in Performance Studies offers a unique approach for readers to engage with performance research and methods in practice. It examines ways of making performance, researching performance cultures, researching performers who themselves are engaged in research, and conducting research in the context of enduring and emergent themes of performance studies inquiry"-- Provided by publisher.
The Role of Creativity in the Management of Innovation by
The effective management of innovation is integral to the development of any business. This book provides a collection of articles dealing with creativity in the context of innovation management from an interdisciplinary perspective of business, psychology and engineering. It takes papers from a Special Issue in the International Journal of Innovation and Management, published by World Scientific in 2016, and combines them with original articles written by some of the top academic minds in business and management. It covers topics such as creativity in innovation from a leadership perspective, creativity reduction in avoidance- and approach-oriented persons, creativity techniques and innovation, and the interplay between cognitive and organisational processes.The Role of Creativity in the Management of Innovation gives MBA graduate and undergraduate students, professors and business managers a comprehensive overview of current thinking in the field of business.
The SAGE Handbook of Qualitative Research by
The substantially updated and revised Fifth Edition of this landmark handbook presents the state-of-the-art theory and practice of qualitative inquiry. Representing top scholars from around the world, the editors and contributors continue the tradition of synthesizing existing literature, defining the present, and shaping the future of qualitative research. The Fifth Edition contains 19 new chapters, with 16 revised--making it virtually a new volume--while retaining six classic chapters from previous editions. New contributors to this edition include Jamel K. Donnor and Gloria Ladson-Billings; Margaret Kovach; Paula Saukko; Bryant Keith Alexander; Thomas A. Schwandt and Emily F. Gates; Johnny Saldaña; Uwe Flick; Mirka Koro-Ljungberg, Maggie MacLure, and Jasmine Ulmer; Maria Elena Torre, Brett G. Stoudt, Einat Manoff, and Michelle Fine; Jack Bratich; Svend Brinkmann; Eric Margolis and Renu Zunjarwad; Annette N. Markham; Alecia Y. Jackson and Lisa A. Mazzei; Jonathan Wyatt, Ken Gale, Susanne Gannon, and Bronwyn Davies; Janice Morse; Peter Dahler-Larsen; Marc Spooner; and David A. Westbrook. SAGE is offering a 30% discount on the Handbook. Enter code DENZIN30 at checkout to apply the discount.
Visual Research by
Visual Research: An Introduction to Research Methodologies in Graphic Design (second edition) is a guide to the practice of researching for graphic design projects. This book explains the key terms and theories that underlie design research; examining the importance of audience, communication theory, semiotics and semantics. It features a range of case studies that demonstrate how the use of rigorous research methods can form the basis of effective visual communication and design problem solving, eschewing end product analysis for a discussion of the way research feeds into the design process. This edition also includes 12 new international case studies, end of chapter exercises, a new chapter on Visual Grammar and a foreword by Ellen Lupton, an internationally renowned graphic designer, writer, curator and educator.
Research Methodologies in Arts Management
RESMETO is an introductory course to research methodologies and their application to arts management. This course covers both quantitative and qualitative approaches, as well as mixed methods in research as well as ethical issues in research practices.
An applied guide to research designs : quantitative, qualitative, and mixed methods by
This book covers the most practical and common research designs currently used in educational and the social and behavioural sciences. It will improve readers' ability to conceptualize, construct, test, problem solve and acquire knowledge, all of which are characteristics of scientific inquiry and the creative process required when conducting research.
Arts Based Research by
Designed to be used as both a class text and a resource for researchers and practitioners, Arts Based Research provides a framework for those who seek to broaden the domain of qualitative inquiry in the social sciences by incorporating the arts as forms that represent human knowing.
Audience Research Methodologies by
The transformations of people's relations to media content, technologies and institutions raise new methodological challenges and opportunities for audience research. This edited volume aims at contributing to the development of the repertoire of methods and methodologies for audience research by reviewing and exemplifying approaches that have been stimulated by the changing conditions and practices of audiences. The contributions address a range of issues and approaches related to the diversification, integration and triangulation of methods for audience research, to the gap between the researched and the researchers, to the study of online social networks, and to the opportunities brought about by Web 2.0 technologies as research tools.
Comics in qualitative research by
Although the medium of comics has a long history, its use as a method in qualitative research is still in its early stages. This entry begins by outlining the definition and scope of comics. Next, it explores how and why comics might be used within social research. It then discusses potential ethical and practical challenges. Finally, the entry provides practical suggestions to support the use of comics as a research method. This involves making connections with other visual research methods as well as exploring specific affordances of the comics medium.
Contemporary culture : new directions in arts and humanities research by
Are the humanities still relevant in the twenty-first century? In the context of pervasive economic liberalism and shrinking budgets, the importance of humanities research for society is increasingly put into question. This volume claims that the humanities do indeed matter by offering empirically grounded critical reflections on contemporary cultural practices, thereby opening up new ways of understanding social life and new directions in humanities scholarship. The contributors argue that the humanities can regain their relevance for society, pose new questions and provide fresh answers, while maintaining their core values: critical reflection, historical consciousness and analytical distance.
Designing digital qualitative research : experiences of studying open and closed production by
This SAGE methods case outlines the experiences of designing qualitative research of two digitally mediated social environments. First, open content production on Wikipedia which is based on knowledge sharing and dissemination. Second, commercial software production for Google (Alphabet Inc.) protected by non-disclosure agreements and trade secrets. Digital affordances played an important role in framing the initial research questions. Yet, the initial research design changed in both of these cases due to the accumulated knowledge about the subject and specific challenges that arose during the research process. A broad understanding of the advantages and disadvantages of different qualitative methodologies helped maintain a flexible and emergent research design. Ethical decision-making was an important factor in both cases.
Doing Qualitative Research Online by
Qualitative researchers can now connect with participants online to collect deep, rich data and generate new understandings of contemporary research phenomena. Doing Qualitative Research Online gives students and researchers the practical and scholarly foundations needed to gain digital research literacies essential for designing and conducting studies based on qualitative data collected online. The book will take a broad view of methodologies, methods and ethics, covering: Ethical issues in research design and ethical relationships with participants Designing online qualitative studies Collecting qualitative data online through interviews, observations, participatory and arts-based research and a wide range of posts and documents. Analyzing data and reporting findings Written by a scholar-practitioner in e-learning and online academia with 15 years' experience, this book will help all those new to online research by providing a range of examples and illustrations from published research. The text and accompanying materials will offer discussion and assignment ideas for ease of adoption.
Exploring communication through qualitative research by
This volume offers an insight into contemporary communication studies, as seen through the lens of qualitative research. It presents existing studies on qualitative research, current research programs, and trends for future expansion of this methodological approach. It also offers a series of practical examples of applying methods and techniques of qualitative research, to teach readers about the social world and to answer pressing problems related to applied communication. In terms of research, the studies within the book use focus-group interviews, in-depth interviews, qualitative content ana.
Mixed methods research : a guide to the field by
This practical book introduces a unique socio-ecological framework for understanding the field of mixed methods research and its different perspectives.
Reconceptualizing Qualitative Research by
The book problematizes taken for granted ideas about data, research design, and researcher responsibility, and in so doing challenges students' beliefs, paradigms, and methodological frameworks. The text includes numerous photographs, helpful glossary at the start of each chapter, comment boxes from real graduate students, and suggestions for how to implement the ideas presented in your own research project. The book focuses on audiences, communities, and participants in a way that no other qualitative text does. It will be a welcome addition to qualitative research courses that focus on methodological creativity, complexity, and theoretical diversity.
Research Methodologies in Music Education by
This volume provides an understanding of various research methodologies that have been used in music education projects. These methodologies include: historical research; quantitative research; narrative inquiry; action research; ethnography; case study; interpretative phenomenological analysis; arts-based methods; and mixed methods. Each of these research methodologies is detailed, before examples of music education projects that have used these methodologies are described.A separate chapter is devoted to each methodology, and each chapter has been written by a researcher with extensive experience and knowledge of the methodology in question. The book project is an initiative of the Australian and New Zealand Association for Research in Music Education (ANZARME).This association is the peak body for music research across the two countries. ANZARME promotes and supports all styles of research in all avenues of music education.The book will assist all those who are undertaking research in music education, particularly future researchers in music education, such as postgraduate research students. The text will assist researchers in understanding the many available research methods, and will provide clarity in choosing the most appropriate method for their particular research.
Research Methods in Theatre and Performance by
How have theatre and performance research methods and methodologies engaged the expanding diversity of performing arts practices? How can students best combine performance/theatre research approaches in their projects? This book's 29 contributors provide hands-on answers to such questions. Challenging and debating received research wisdom and exploring innovative procedures for rigorous enquiry via archives, technology, practice-as-research, scenography, performer training, applied theatre/performance, body in performance and more, they create a focussed compendium of future research options. Key Features* Created in association with TaPRA, the leading UK Theatre and Performance Research organisation, with chapters produced by specialist groupings.* Provides many detailed project case studies and examples - including successful practice-based PhDs - plus analysis of dynamic couplings between methods, methodologies and skill-sets. * Introduction interrogates crucial qualities of performing arts research that constitute theatre and performance as, variously, single-, multi-, inter-, and trans-disciplinary.* Contributors include: Maggie B. Gale (Chair of Drama, University of Manchester); Steve Dixon (Professor of Digital Performance, Brunel University); Joanne 'Bob' Whalley and Lee Miller (University Lecturers and founders Fictional Dogshelf Theatre Company); Simon Ellis and Rosemary Lee (independent performance/dance makers); Roberta Mock (Professor of Performance, University of Plymouth).
Teaching Artistic Research by
With artistic research becoming an established paradigm in art education, several questions arise. How do we train young artists and designers to actively engage in the production of knowledge and aesthetic experiences in an expanded field? How do we best prepare students for their own artistic research? What comprises a curriculum that accommodates a changed learning, making, and research landscape? And what is the difference between teaching art and teaching artistic research? What are the specific skills and competences a teacher should have? Inspired by a symposium at the University of Applied Arts Vienna in 2018, this book presents a diversity of well-reasoned answers to these questions.
Transpositions : aesthetico-epistemic operators in artistic research by
Research is a process that leads to new insights rupturing the existent fabric of knowledge. To prevent this process from disintegrating, its coherence must be assured. Under the heading transposition, seventeen artists, musicians, and theorists explain how one thing may turn into another in a spatio-temporal play of identity and difference that has the power to expand into the unknown. While it does not attempt to define the still evolving field of artistic research, through the idea of transposition this book aims to grasp a quality increasingly important to artistic practice because representational approaches have been losing traction. Taking to heart the lessons of deconstruction, new modes of epistemic relationships are being invented that include aesthetic dimensions. Working with materially concrete positions in a manner familiar to artists can ensure that knowledge does not decay into relativism.
TECHWRI is a workshop class that will train students to create various effective written outputs for various contexts relevant to arts management. Students will be introduced to various techniques and processes in technical communication with emphasis in writing. The course will help students craft and design personal documents such as letters, reports, curriculum vitae, resume, and the like.
Advanced Technical Communication by
A large number of students pursue their engineering degrees in various universities (technical and others) and engineering colleges. As they complete their cause, they have to seek jobs in various companies and multinational corporations. And, it is imperative that they communicate effectively in their day-to-day activities, and this book equips them with the communication skills required for their job. Divided into five parts, the books discusses in detail not only the basic skills of writing, speaking, listening and reading but also how to prepare normal technical documents, an other specialized documents like thesis, dissertation, and technical proposals. In addition, it also discusses soft skills such as presentation skills, interpersonal skills and group discussion skills.
The Architects Guide to Writing by
A one-stop shop for architects and other design professionals to improve their writing skills. There are a lot of good books available to help people write better. They include dictionaries, usage guides, and various types of writers' manuals - and professional writers ought to have many of those books on their bookshelves. But most architects and other design and construction professionals are not professional writers. Instead, they are people who spend a large part of their professional lives writing. That's a big difference, and that's where this book will help. 'The Architect's Guide to Writing' has been written not by an English major, but by Bill Schmalz, an architect who knows the kinds of documents his fellow professionals routinely have to write, and understands the kinds of technical mistakes they often make in their writing. This book is designed to meet the specific needs of design and construction professionals. It's not going to waste their time with the things that most educated professionals know, but it will help them with the things they don't know or are unsure of. It's not a Chicago Manual-sized encyclopaedic reference that includes everything any writer would ever need to know, because architects don't need to know everything. But what they do need to know - and what they use every day in their professional lives - has been assembled in this book. AUTHOR: Bill Schmalz, AIA, is a principal in the Los Angeles office of Perkins+Will. Since joining the firm in 1980, he has led teams on a wide variety of project types, including healthcare, education, research, transportation, and commercial. His expertise is in contract documentation, contract administration, and construction cost management. In addition, he has been teaching writing classes to the firm's project architects since 2009. SELLING POINTS: - Focuses on what architects and designers get wrong most often, and offers practical solutions - Chapters include the basics of vocabulary, grammar, punctuation, clarity and style, editing, international writing and handling architectural terms correctly - Special section on writing architectural specifications clearly and cogently, and correct use of terminology - A handy guide to the differences between UK, US, Australian and Canadian English 22 col.
Broadcast News Writing, Reporting, and Producing by
Broadcast News Writing, Reporting, and Producing, 7th Edition is the leading book covering all aspects of writing and reporting the news. It identifies the key concepts and terms readers need to know in the news gathering and dissemination process, and provides practical, real-world advice for operating in the modern day newsroom. New to the seventh Edition are profiles of working journalists who give readers a glimpse into the working life of modern reporters, producers, and directors. This new edition also covers important aspects of the use of social media, drone journalism, and digital technology. A new chapter on portfolio development will assist readers in developing the skills to advance in their careers. The text has also been updated to reflect new industry standards in modes of information gathering and delivery, writing style, and technology. Additional features include: Key words at the start of every chapter, identifying important terms and definitions; End of chapter summaries, which allows readers to review the chapter's main points; "Text Your Knowledge", which helps readers quiz themselves on important concepts; Chapter-by-chapter exercises, which readers can apply to a chapter's themes; A companion website featuring video tutorials of necessary skills for journalists, including how to arrange lighting structures, how to hold a microphone, and how to properly conduct an interview.
Discipline-Specific Writing by
Discipline-Specific Writing provides an introduction and guide to the teaching of this topic for students and trainee teachers. This book highlights the importance of discipline-specific writing as a critical area of competence for students, and covers both the theory and practice of teaching this crucial topic. With chapters from practitioners and researchers working across a wide range of contexts around the world, Discipline-Specific Writing: Explores teaching strategies in a variety of specific areas including science and technology, social science and business; Discusses curriculum development, course design and assessment, providing a framework for the reader; Analyses the teaching of language features including grammar and vocabulary for academic writing; Demonstrates the use of genre analysis, annotated bibliographies and corpora as tools for teaching; Provides practical suggestions for use in the classroom, questions for discussion and additional activities with each chapter. Discipline-Specific Writing is key reading for students taking courses in English for Specific Purposes, Applied Linguistics, TESOL, TEFL and CELTA.
English for Writing Research Papers by
Publishing your research in an international journal is key to your success in academia. This guide is based on a study of referees' reports and letters from journal editors on reasons why papers written by non-native researchers are rejected due to problems with English usage. It draws on English-related errors from around 5000 papers written by non-native authors, 500 abstracts by PhD students, and over 1000 hours of teaching researchers how to write and present research papers. With easy-to-follow rules and tips, and with examples taken from published and unpublished papers, you will learn how to: prepare and structure a manuscript increase readability and reduce the number of mistakes you make in English by writing concisely, with no redundancy and no ambiguity plan and organize your paper, and structure each paragraph and each sentence so that the reader can easily follow the logical build-up towards various conclusions write a title and an abstract that will attract attention and be read decide what to include in the various parts of the paper (Introduction, Methodology, Discussion etc) select from over 700 useful phrases highlight your claims and contribution avoid plagiarism and make it 100% clear whether you are referring to your own work or someone else's choose the correct tenses and style (active or passive) Other books in the series: English for Presentations at International Conferences English for Academic Correspondence and Socializing English for Research: Usage, Style, and Grammar English for Academic Research: Grammar / Vocabulary / Writing Exercises Adrian Wallwork is the author of more than 20 ELT and EAP textbooks. He has trained several thousand PhD students and academics from 35 countries to prepare and give presentations. Since 1984 he has been revising research papers, and in 2009 he set up englishforacademics.com - a proofreading and editing service specifically for researchers.
Enjoy Writing Your Science Thesis or Dissertation! by
This book is a step by step illustrated guide to planning and writing dissertations and theses for undergraduate and graduate science students. Topics covered include advice on writing each section of a thesis as well as general discussions on collecting and organizing references, keeping records, presenting data, interacting with a supervisor and avoiding academic misconduct. Recommendations about how to use word processors and other software packages effectively are included, as well as advice on the use of other resources. A concise summary of important points of English grammar is given, along with appendices listing frequently confused words and wordy phrases to avoid. Further appendices are provided, including one on SI units. The aim is to provide an easy-to-read guide that gives students practical advice about all aspects of writing a science thesis or dissertation, starting from writing a thesis plan and finishing with the viva and corrections to the thesis.
How to Write and Publish a Scientific Paper by
An essential guide for succeeding in today's competitive environment, this book provides beginning scientists and experienced researchers with practical advice on writing about their work and getting published. This brand new, updated edition also includes a new chapter on editing one's own work, a section on publicizing and archiving one's paper, and updates on authorship, including information on new authorship criteria and on the author identification number ORCID. The book guides readers through the processes involved in writing for and publishing in scientific journals, from choosing a suitable journal, to writing each part of the paper, to submitting the paper and responding to peer review, through checking the proofs. It covers ethical issues in scientific publishing, explains rights and permissions, and discusses writing grant proposals, giving presentations and writing for general audiences.
The IBM Style Guide by
The IBM Style Guide distills IBM wisdom for developing superior content: information that is consistent, clear, concise, and easy to translate. The IBM Style Guide can help any organization improve and standardize content across authors, delivery mechanisms, and geographic locations. This expert guide contains practical guidance on topic-based writing, writing content for different media types, and writing for global audiences. Throughout, the authors illustrate the guidance with many examples of correct and incorrect usage. Writers and editors will find authoritative guidance on issues ranging from structuring information to writing usable procedures to presenting web addresses to handling cultural sensitivities. The guidelines cover these topics: Using language and grammar to write clearly and consistently Applying punctuation marks and special characters correctly Formatting, organizing, and structuring information so that it is easy to find and use Using footnotes, cross-references, and links to point readers to valuable, related information Presenting numerical information clearly Documenting computer interfaces to make it easy for users to achieve their goals Writing for diverse audiences, including guidelines for improving accessibility Preparing clear and effective glossaries and indexes The IBM Style Guide can help any organization or individual create and manage content more effectively. The guidelines are especially valuable for businesses that have not previously adopted a corporate style guide, for anyone who writes or edits for IBM as an employee or outside contractor, and for anyone who uses modern approaches to information architecture.
Introduction to scientific publishing : backgrounds, concepts, strategies by
This book is a very concise introduction to the basic knowledge of scientific publishing. It starts with the basics of writing a scientific paper, and recalls the different types of scientific documents. In gives an overview on the major scientific publishing companies and different business models. The book also introduces to abstracting and indexing services and how they can be used for the evaluation of science, scientists, and institutions. Last but not least, this short book faces the problem of plagiarism and publication ethics.
Journalism, Technology and Cultural Practice by
Presents a new perspective on journalism history and development, exploring and emphasising how the role of technology has impacted on cultural practices in the industry. Clearly and chronological structured to highlight key cultural shift in relation to a range of journalism technologies including print, radio, television and digital developments. Engages with central critical and theoretical discussions in journalism studies in relation to ideas of profit, control, consumption and contribution, and the perceptions of journalist's role in wider society.
Presenting Your Research by
For many researchers, the need to present relevant and engaging material in the most effective way in an unfamiliar setting presents a potential barrier to their success as professionals. This handy guide tackles the obstacles to effective and successful presentations, considering the range of material which might be presented, the occasions which suit different types of material and the skills needed to present research in a way that is engaging and persuasive. This book addresses questions such as: Why should I give a paper and where might I give a paper? How does the conference system works? How do I prepare an abstract/outline/synopsis? How do I chose my material and prepare it for a conference presentation? How can I prepare effective conference aids? How can I overcome my nerves? How can I prepare and present effective posters for poster presentations? As with the other titles in the Success in Research series, this guide takes a hands-on approach and includes checklists, top tips, exercises and examples to help you remember what you have read and put it immediately to work! The Success in Research series, from Cindy Becker and Pam Denicolo, provides short, authoritative and accessible guides on key areas of professional and research development.Avoiding jargon and cutting to the chase of what you really need to know, these practical and supportive books cover a range of areas from presenting research to achieving impact, and from publishing journal articles to developing proposals. They are essential reading for any student or researcher interested in developing their skills and broadening their professional and methodological knowledge in an academic context.
Professional Writing by
Offers a comprehensive interdisciplinary introduction to professional writing for different media, synthesising methods and ideas developed in linguistics, journalism, public relations and marketing. This third edition contains new material on public relations writing and social media, as well as additional material on digital sources.
Scientific Style and Format by
For more than fifty years, authors, editors, and publishers in the scientific community have turned to Scientific Style and Format for authoritative recommendations on all matters of writing style and citation. Developed by the Council of Science Editors (CSE), the leading professional association in science publishing, this indispensable guide encompasses all areas of the sciences. Now in its eighth edition, it has been fully revised to reflect today’s best practices in scientific publishing. nbsp; Scientific Style and Format citation style has been comprehensively reorganized, and its style recommendations have been updated to align with the advice of authoritative international bodies. Also new to the eighth edition are guidelines and examples for citing online images and information graphics, podcasts and webcasts, online videos, blogs, social networking sites, and e-books. Style instructions for physics, chemistry, genetics, biological sciences, and astronomy have been adjusted to reflect developments in each field. The coverage of numbers, units, mathematical expressions, and statistics has been revised and now includes more information on managing tables, figures, and indexes. Additionally, a full discussion of plagiarism and other aspects of academic integrity is incorporated, along with a complete treatment of developments in copyright law, including Creative Commons. nbsp; For the first time in its history, Scientific Style and Format will be available simultaneously in print and online at www.scientificstyleandformat.org.nbsp;Online subscribers will receive access to full-text searches of the new edition and other online tools, as well as the popular Chicago Manual of Style Online Forum, a community discussion board for editors and authors. Whether online or in print, the eighth edition of Scientific Style and Format remains the essential resource for those writing, editing, and publishing in the scientific community.
The simplified research and technical report writing by Strategic communication : an introduction to theory and global practice by 
Successful Writing at Work by
SUCCESSFUL WRITING AT WORK, 11th Edition, is a comprehensive introduction to workplace writing with real-world examples and problems; an easy-to-read style; and thorough guidelines for planning, drafting, revising, editing, formatting, and producing professional documents in the global workplace. After a discussion of the writing process and collaboration, the author explores basic business communications (including e-communications and social media), letters, resumes, and other job search materials; proceeds to how to conduct research and document sources; and ends with guidance on more advanced tasks such as preparing visuals, websites, instructions, procedures, proposals, short and long reports, and presentations. You will learn how to be an effective problem solver at work, understand and write for a global audience, write clear and effective sentences, paragraphs, and documents, and select the best communication technologies to accomplish your goals.
Technical Communication by
Thoroughly revised and updated, this newly designed full color and streamlined 12th edition places special emphasis on up-to-the-minute coverage of ethics, global communication, and technology.
Technical Communication by
Join the thousands of students who have used Anderson's TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION: A READER-CENTERED APPROACH to develop the communication skills that employers consistently rank at the very top of the qualifications they seek in college graduates. You will learn to meet the special demands and expectations of the workplace by adapting and building on what you already know about writing and speaking effectively. Chapters guide you through the writing process and teach you how to communicate successfully at work, whether in print, orally, online, or through social media. Throughout, you'll find easy-to-learn guidelines and thoroughly annotated examples of effective communications.
Technical Writing by
Engineers and scientists of all types are often required to write reports, summaries, manuals, guides, and so forth. While these individuals certainly have had some sort of English or writing course, it is less likely that they have had any instruction in the special requirements of technical writing. Filling this void, Technical Writing: A Practical Guide for Engineers and Scientists enables readers to write, edit, and publish materials of a technical nature, including books, articles, reports, and electronic media. Written by a renowned engineer and widely published technical author, this guide complements the traditional writer¿s reference manuals and other books on technical writing. It helps readers understand the practical considerations in writing technical content. Drawing on his own work, the author presents many first-hand examples of writing, editing, and publishing technical materials. These examples illustrate how a publication originated as well as various challenges and solutions.
Technical Writing for Success by
An engaging writing style that appeals to today's students is combined with a strong practical approach to technical writing - what it is, who reads it, and how to achieve success in this highly relevant field. Coverage includes both technical writing and technical reading.
Technical writing in this era of globalization and modern technology by 
User Guides, Manuals and Technical Writing by
This book is intended for anyone whose job involves writing formal documentation. It is aimed at non-native speakers of English, but should also be of use for native speakers who have no training in technical writing. Technical writing is a skill that you can learn and this book outlines some simple ideas for writing clear documentation that will reflect well on your company, its image and its brand. The book has four parts: Structure and Content: Through examples, you will learn best practices in writing the various sections of a manual and what content to include. Clear Unambiguous English: You will learn how to write short clear sentences and paragraphs whose meaning will be immediately clear to the reader. Layout and Order Information: Here you will find guidelines on style issues, e.g., headings, bullets, punctuation and capitalization. Typical Grammar and Vocabulary Mistakes: This section is divided alphabetically and covers grammatical and vocabulary issues that are typical of user manuals.
TECHWRI is a workshop class that will train students to create various effective written outputs for various contexts relevant to arts management. Students will be introduced to various techniques and processes in technical communication with emphasis in writing. The course will help students craft and design personal documents such as letters, reports, curriculum vitae, resume, and the like.
Academic Writing by
This book helps students and researchers write better assignments, better dissertations, and better papers for publication. Characterizing academic writing as an integral part of the knowledge generation and dissemination process, it focuses on three main aspects: understanding research, documenting and sharing the process and results of research, and acknowledging the use of other people's ideas in the documentation. The authors use various samples of good as well as defective writing to illustrate the features of academic writing. They describe in detail the structure and contents of academic papers, especially conceptual and empirical research papers for journals. This lucidly written book will be a rich resource for MBA students and researchers working for MPhil and PhD degrees, especially in the fields of management, behavioural sciences and communications.
Business Writing for Technical People by
Technically-minded people can struggle with business writing and many businesses get it wrong, losing their readers in avalanches of acronyms and jungles of technical jargon. It doesn't have to be that way. In this book you'll discover how to give your communication skills an upgrade, exploring the tips and tricks that will enable you to write effectively and persuasively for any audience. You'll discover how to write for maximum impact and how to make your enthusiasm even more infectious.
Communications Writing and Design by
Communications Writing and Design is an integrated, project-based introduction to effective writing and design across the persuasive domains of communication. Build a strong foundation of core writing and design skills using professionally-designed examples that illustrate and reinforce key principles Readers learn and analyze techniques by creating 15 projects in marketing, advertising, PR, and social media with the help of strategy suggestions, practical tips, and professional production techniques Written by an experienced professional and teacher, with a focus on the cross-disciplinary nature of contemporary communication work Learning is reinforced through a variety of pedagogical features: learning objectives, helpful mnemonics, real-life projects and applications, chapter references for further study, and end-of-chapter summaries and exercises A companion website with multimedia slides, exam questions, learning videos, and design guides provides additional learning tools for students and instructors
Design discourse : composing and revising programs in professional and technical writing by
Design Discourse: Composing and Revising Programs in Professional and Technical Writing addresses the complexities of developing professional and technical writing programs. The essays in the collection offer reflections on efforts to bridge two cultures -- what the editors characterize as the "art and science of writing"--Often by addressing explicitly the tensions between them. Design Discourse offers insights into the high-stakes decisions made by program designers as they seek to "function at the intersection of the practical and the abstract, the human and the technical."--Open Textbook Library.
Handbook of Technical Communication by
The Handbook of Technical Communication brings together a variety of topics which range from the role of technical media in human communication to the linguistic, multimodal enhancement of present-day technologies. It covers the area of computer-mediated text, voice and multimedia communication as well as of technical documentation. In doing so, the handbook takes professional and private communication into account.Special emphasis is put on technical communication by means of web 2.0 technologies and its standardization in system development. In summary, the handbook deals with theoretical issues of technical communication and its practical impact on the development and usage of text and speech technologies.
Learn good business writing and communication : (collection) by
The Truth About the New Rules of Business Writing shows you how to master the art of effective business communication replacing the old standards of jargon, pomposity, and grammar drills with a simple, quick, and conversational writing style. Authors Natalie Canavor and Claire Meirowitz demonstrate how to plan and organize your content, make your point faster, tell your readers what's in it for them, construct winning documents of every kind--print, electronic, and even blog entries and text messages! The Truth about the New Rules of Business Writing brings together the field's best knowledge and shows exactly how to put it to work. With an "aha" on every page, it presents information in a clear, accessible style that's easy to understand and use. Written in short chapters, it covers the entire field, cuts to the heart of every topic, pulls back the curtain on expert secrets, and pops the bubble of commonly-held assumptions. Simply put, this book delivers easy, painless writing techniques that work.
Scientific and Technical Reports : How to Write and Illustrate. by
SCIENTIFIC AND TECHNICAL REPORTS: How to Write and Illustrate provides step-by-step advice on tackling various tasks associated with report writing like gathering information, analyzing information, preparing an outline, writing a rough draft and revising. Many examples illustrate the processes involved at various steps. A stepwise approach to computer-assisted preparation of tables and various types of figures like line drawings, bar charts, histograms, flowcharts, etc., is provided. Also presented are suggestions about how to use commonly available computer programs to give visual shape to ideas, concepts, processes and cause and effect relations described in the text. Use of readability tests is explained as a screening system for checking comprehensibility of language used. Readers are alerted to some of the common pitfalls in science writing like redundancy, overuse of nouns, noun chains, excessive use of passive voice, use of overlong sentences and ambiguity. Checklist at the end of each chapter sums up the most important points. Though the primary aim of the book is to provide help in writing reports and dissertations, it can be used as a help in tackling other forms of scientific and technical writing also.
Scientific Writing 2. 0 by
The book helps scientists write papers for scientific journals. Using the key parts of typical scientific papers (Title, Abstract, Introduction, Visuals, Structure, and Conclusions), it shows through numerous examples, how to achieve the essential qualities required in scientific writing, namely being clear, concise, convincing, fluid, interesting, and organized. To enable the writer to assess whether these parts are well written from a reader''s perspective, the book also offers practical metrics in the form of six checklists, and even an original Java application to assist in the evaluation. The focus of the book is on self- and reader-assisted assessment of the scientific journal article. It is also the first time that a book on scientific writing takes a human factor view of the reading task and the reader scientist. By revealing and addressing the physiological causes that create substantial reading difficulties, namely limited reader memory, attention span, and patience, the book guarantees that writing will gain the much coveted reader-centered quality.
The Scientist's Guide to Writing by
A concise and accessible primer on the scientific writer's craft The ability to write clearly is critical to any scientific career. The Scientist's Guide to Writing provides practical advice to help scientists become more effective writers so that their ideas have the greatest possible impact. Drawing on his own experience as a scientist, graduate adviser, and editor, Stephen Heard emphasizes that the goal of all scientific writing should be absolute clarity; that good writing takes deliberate practice; and that what many scientists need are not long lists of prescriptive rules but rather direct engagement with their behaviors and attitudes when they write. He combines advice on such topics as how to generate and maintain writing momentum with practical tips on structuring a scientific paper, revising a first draft, handling citations, responding to peer reviews, managing coauthorships, and more. In an accessible, informal tone, The Scientist's Guide to Writing explains essential techniques that students, postdoctoral researchers, and early-career scientists need to write more clearly, efficiently, and easily. Emphasizes writing as a process, not just a product Encourages habits that improve motivation and productivity Explains the structure of the scientific paper and the function of each part Provides detailed guidance on submission, review, revision, and publication Addresses issues related to coauthorship, English as a second language, and more
Technical Writing by
Engineers and scientists of all types are often required to write reports, summaries, manuals, guides, and so forth. While these individuals certainly have had some sort of English or writing course, it is less likely that they have had any instruction in the special requirements of technical writing. Filling this void, Technical Writing: A Practical Guide for Engineers and Scientists enables readers to write, edit, and publish materials of a technical nature, including books, articles, reports, and electronic media. Written by a renowned engineer and widely published technical author, this guide complements the traditional writer¿s reference manuals and other books on technical writing. It helps readers understand the practical considerations in writing technical content. Drawing on his own work, the author presents many first-hand examples of writing, editing, and publishing technical materials. These examples illustrate how a publication originated as well as various challenges and solutions.
Technical Writing for Business People by
Technical writing is about communicating key information to the people who need it. It might be a manual for an application, a guide to using heavy machinery, or a diagnostic aide for medical practitioners. It needs to be clear and it needs to be precise. This book shows you how to achieve this and more. Whatever the content or context, in this book you'll discover the essential tools and resources that you need to create technical writing that works for everyone.
Writing and Presenting in English by
The Rosetta Stone of Science is a useful and practical guide to presenting scientific research in the English language. It is written specifically for scientists who would like to improve the effectiveness with which they use the English language and improve their communicative skills in order to become published and develop more confidence in presenting their work at international conferences. Part 1 of the book covers the style preferred by today's leading journals, discusses how to prepare models for writing research papers, and provides advice for writing abstracts, proposals, and editing. Examples of cover letters are also given. Part 2 discusses the various arts and techniques used by successful presenters at scientific conferences. The content of the book is presented in a light, simple and informative manner making The Rosetta Stone of Science an entertaining and instructive read. This book will prove invaluable to all scientists, research fellows, post-docs, and graduate students whose first language is not English.
Writing business letters across languages by
Annotation Discussing the most widespread and acceptable approaches to writing business letters in a readily understandable fashion, this book explores rules and conventions based on actual contemporary practices. Emphasis is placed on types of business letters across languages, patterns of thinking, cross-cultural communication, the effect of style, tone and the mechanics of writing and grammar.
Video, Computer Graphics and Photography Techniques
VIDGRAP introduces students to the basics of video-making, computer graphics, and photography that will enable students to design effective and creative presentations. This course will also introduce students to software that can be used to develop quality materials for artistic and creative industries.
3G handy guide : digital production and editing by 
Antiglossy : fashion photography now by
Capturing contemporary trends and forecasting the look of the future, this dazzling anthology collects the work of the most cutting-edge photographers working today, this volume is an essential compilation of the most important photographic trends of the age of social media and digital publication. The interaction between photography and fashion has always been compelling--how can artists balance commercial viability against their own creative vision? Anti-Glossy collects some of the most innovative photographers working in the field of fashion, exploring the way new media is influencing the direction of photography for print. As the notion of the "fashion photographer" becomes less distinct, the industry is benefitting from the talents of artists whose influence leads the genre into a multitude of surprising, often shocking, directions. In this collection of new fashion photography, full-page color and black-and-white photographs represent an incredible range of styles and techniques. From the evolving vision of masters of the form such as Juergen Teller and Glen Luchford, to the ironic work of Sebastian Kim, to the challenges posed by young female voices like Annemarieke Van Drimmelen, Charlotte Wales, Sarah Piantadosi, Joanna Piotrowska, and Karen Knorr, the photographers featured in this exciting collection represent a cutting-edge trend in all its diversity. Paris-based author and editor Patrick Remy has selected over twenty photographers from emerging talents that hold the prospect of creating enduring fashion images and influencing the cultural and style trends of tomorrow to established figures exploring new directions.
Before-And-after Photography by
The before-and-after trope in photography has long paired images to represent change- whether affirmatively, as in the results of makeovers, social reforms or medical interventions, or negatively, in the destruction of the environment by the impacts of war or natural disasters. This interdisciplinary, multi-authored volume examines the central but almost unspoken position of before-and-after photography found in a wide range of contexts from the 19th century through to the present. Packed with case studies that explore the conceptual implications of these images, the book 's rich language of evidence, documentation and persuasion present both historical material and the work of practicing photographers who have deployed and challenged the conventions of the before-and-after pairing. Touching on issues including sexuality, race, environmental change and criminality, Before-and-After Photography examines major topics of current debate in the critique of photography in an accessible way to allow students and scholars to explore the rich conceptual issues around photography 's relationship with time and imagination.
A Companion to Photography by
The study of photography has never been more important. A look at today's digital world reveals that a greater number of photographs are being taken each day than at any other moment in history. Countless photographs are disseminated instantly online and more and more photographic images are earning prominent positions--and garnering record prices--in the rarefied realm of top art galleries. Reflecting this dramatic increase in all things photographic, A Companion to Photography presents a comprehensive collection of original essays that explore a variety of key areas of current debate around the state of photography in the twenty-first century. Essays are grouped and organized in themed sections--including photographic interpretation, markets, popular photography, documents, and fine art--and provide comprehensive coverage of the subject. Representing a diversity of approaches, essays are written by both established and emerging photographers and scholars, as well as various experts in their respective areas. A Companion to Photography offers scholars and professional photographers alike an essential and up-to-date resource that brings the study of contemporary photography into clear focus.
Computer Graphics by
Computer Graphics: Principles and Practice, Third Edition, remains the most authoritative introduction to the field. The first edition, the original "Foley and van Dam," helped to define computer graphics and how it could be taught. The second edition became an even more comprehensive resource for practitioners and students alike. This third edition has been completely rewritten to provide detailed and up-to-date coverage of key concepts, algorithms, technologies, and applications. The authors explain the principles, as well as the mathematics, underlying computer graphics-knowledge that is essential for successful work both now and in the future. Early chapters show how to create 2D and 3D pictures right away, supporting experimentation. Later chapters, covering a broad range of topics, demonstrate more sophisticated approaches. Sections on current computer graphics practice show how to apply given principles in common situations, such as how to approximate an ideal solution on available hardware, or how to represent a data structure more efficiently. Topics are reinforced by exercises, programming problems, and hands-on projects. This revised edition features New coverage of the rendering equation, GPU architecture considerations, and importance- sampling in physically based rendering An emphasis on modern approaches, as in a new chapter on probability theory for use in Monte-Carlo rendering Implementations of GPU shaders, software rendering, and graphics-intensive 3D interfaces 3D real-time graphics platforms-their design goals and trade-offs-including new mobile and browser platforms Programming and debugging approaches unique to graphics development The text and hundreds of figures are presented in full color throughout the book. Programs are written in C++, C#, WPF, or pseudocode-whichever language is most effective for a given example. Source code and figures from the book, testbed programs, and additional content will be available from the authors' website (cgpp.net) or the publisher's website (informit.com/title/9780321399526). Instructor resources will be available from the publisher. The wealth of information in this book makes it the essential resource for anyone working in or studying any aspect of computer graphics.
Computer Graphics by
Computer Graphics: Theory and Practice provides a complete and integrated introduction to this area. The book only requires basic knowledge of calculus and linear algebra, making it an accessible introductory text for students. It focuses on conceptual aspects of computer graphics, covering fundamental mathematical theories and models and the inherent problems in implementing them. In so doing, the book introduces readers to the core challenges of the field and provides suggestions for further reading and studying on various topics. For each conceptual problem described, solution strategies are compared and presented in algorithmic form. This book, along with its companion Design and Implementation of 3D Graphics Systems, gives readers a full understanding of the principles and practices of implementing 3D graphics systems.
Computer Graphics by
Complete Coverage of the Current Practice of Computer Graphics Computer Graphics: From Pixels to Programmable Graphics Hardware explores all major areas of modern computer graphics, starting from basic mathematics and algorithms and concluding with OpenGL and real-time graphics. It gives students a firm foundation in today's high-performance graphics. Up-to-Date Techniques, Algorithms, and API The book includes mathematical background on vectors and matrices as well as quaternions, splines, curves, and surfaces. It presents geometrical algorithms in 2D and 3D for spatial data structures using large data sets. Although the book is mainly based on OpenGL 3.3, it also covers tessellation in OpenGL 4.0, contains an overview of OpenGL ES 2.0, and discusses the new WebGL, which allows students to use OpenGL with shaders directly in their browser. In addition, the authors describe a variety of special effects, including procedural modeling and texturing, fractals, and non-photorealistic rendering. They also explain the fundamentals of the dominant language (OpenCL) and platform (CUDA) of GPGPUs. Web Resource On the book's CRC Press web page, students can download many ready-to-use examples of C++ code demonstrating various effects. C++ wrappers for basic OpenGL entities, such as textures and programs, are also provided. In-Depth Guidance on a Programmable Graphics Pipeline Requiring only basic knowledge of analytic geometry, linear algebra, and C++, this text guides students through the OpenGL pipeline. Using one consistent example, it leads them step by step from simple rendering to animation to lighting and bumpmapping. Key Features Covers the main aspects of modern computer graphics Explains how to create various special effects using OpenGL Describes a wide range of current topics, such as tessellation, spherical harmonics, and geometric shaders Contains practical exercises and examples as well as numerous illustrations, including several color images Offers full, cross-platform source code and examples on the book's CRC Press web page Figure slides available upon qualifying course adoption
Computer Graphics Programming in OpenGL with JAVA by
This new edition provides step-by-step instruction on modern 3D graphics shader programming in OpenGL, along with its theoretical foundations. It is appropriate both for computer science undergraduate graphics programming courses in degree programs that emphasize Java, and for professionals interested in mastering 3D graphics skills who prefer Java. It has been designed in a 4-color, "teach-yourself" format with numerous examples that the reader can run just as presented. New sections have been added covering soft shadows, performance optimization, Nsight debugging, as well as updated industry-standard libraries and steps for running the examples on a Macintosh. Includes companion files with all of the source code, models, textures, skyboxes and normal maps used in the book. Features: * Includes new sections on implementing soft shadows, performance optimization, and updated tools such as the JOML math library and the NVIDIA® Nsight(tm) debugger. * Covers modern OpenGL 4.0+ shader programming in Java/JOGL, with instructions for both PC/Windows and Macintosh. * Illustrates every technique with complete running code examples. Everything needed to install the libraries and run every example is provided and fully explained. * Includes step-by-step instruction for every GLSL programmable pipeline stage (vertex, tessellation, geometry, and fragment). * Includes companion files with code, object models, figures, and more.
Creating Video for Teachers and Trainers by
Creating Video for Teachers and Trainers This practical resource will help teachers and trainers produce professional quality training videos, even while using less than professional quality equipment and software. Author Timothy Spannaus shows how to use professional techniques with consumer-grade equipment to produce videos that work and tell the intended story, minimizing defects that get in the way of improving learning and performance. The end result is a video that can be used in classroom or labs, distributed on the web, packaged for use in learning management systems, or shared on social media sites. Praise for Creating Video for Teachers and Trainers "This is a practical, immediately usable resource, filled with concrete and creative ideas and tips. For those of us wanting to know how to plant our feet and not stumble when venturing into designing and making great videos, it's a godsend." --Len Scrogan, digital learning architect, Future-Talk Blog "The perfect roadmap for instructional professionals new to video production. Includes evidence-based guidelines on the when, why, and how of video for training purposes."--Ruth Clark, president, Clark Training and Consulting "In my 20-plus years working in the television, training, and corporate communication industry, Tim's book is the first to provide a practical and budget-conscious approach to video production for the learning professional. Comprehensive in its scope, the book's realistic examples, combined with a systematic roadmap, arms you with the tools to kickstart your videos with a quality and efficiency that we all dream about in the learning profession."--David Shulkin, Video Operations and Instructional Technology Catalyst, Bloomfield Hills Schools Digital Media Services
Digital Photography for Dummies by
Your fun guide to digital photography with any device Whether you're shooting with an inexpensive point-and-shoot camera, a smartphone or tablet, a high-priced contraption, or one of those new-fangled action cameras, it's possible to take your digital photos from good to great by applying a few simple tricks'and Digital Photography For Dummies shows you how! Packed with tips, advice, and insight you won't find in your camera's manual, this friendly guide quickly gets you up to speed on proven photography techniques to help your digital pictures say more than a thousand words! No longer a hobby or profession limited to those with access to fancy and expensive equipment, digital photography is all around us. But if you want to take your shoots a bit more seriously and produce images you'd be proud enough to give as gifts or decorate your home, this friendly guide has you covered. From figuring out how to make the most of your camera's settings to applying exposure tricks the pros use all the time, frame-worthy digital photos are a page'and a click'away. Interpret your camera's settings and apply them for better photos Shoot better portraits, action shots, and low-light photos Collect your photos in a place where you won't lose them Grasp simple digital photography techniques that apply to any kind of camera If you've been experimenting with digital photography for a while or just caught the bug, this new edition of Digital Photography For Dummies is the picture-perfect guide you'll turn to again and again.
The Essential Student Guide to Professional Photography by
This essential reference for photography students explains how to become part of the professional community. By defining professional photography today, and exploring what is expected of professional photographers, the book demystifies this often-misunderstood and misjudged career track. The easily accessible text provides readers with valuable information, inspiration, and education on topics including developing your photographic voice, finding your area of specialization, exploring the moving image, building a website, and understanding self-presentation, promotion, legal aspects, and marketing. It also features inspirational projects for students to embark on their education in photography. 　
The family of man revisited : photography in a global age by
The Family of Man is the most widely seen exhibition in the history of photography. The book of the exhibition, still in print, is also the most commercially successful photobook ever published. First shown at the Museum of Modern Art in New York in 1955, the exhibition travelled throughout the United States and to forty-six countries, and was seen by over nine million people. Edward Steichen conceived, curated and designed the exhibition. He explained its subject as `the everydayness of life' and `the essential oneness of mankind throughout the world'. The exhibition was a statement against war and the conflicts and divisions that threatened a common future for humanity after 1945. The popular international response was overwhelmingly enthusiastic. Many critics, however, have dismissed the exhibition as a form of sentimental humanism unable to address the challenges of history, politics and cultural difference. This book revises the critical debate about The Family of Man, challenging in particular the legacy of Roland Barthes's influential account of the exhibition. The expert contributors explore new contexts for understanding Steichen's work and they undertake radically new analyses of the formal dynamics of the exhibition. Also presented are documents about the exhibition never before available in English. Commentaries by critical theorist Max Horkheimer and novelist Wolfgang Koeppen, letters from photographer August Sander, and a poetic sequence on the images by Polish poet Witold Wirpsza enable and encourage new critical reflections. A detailed survey of audience responses in Munich from 1955 allows a rare glimpse of what visitors thought about the exhibition. Today, when armed conflict, environmental catastrophe and economic inequality continue to threaten our future, it seems timely to revisit The Family of Man.
Insta-perfect : creative photography for social media today by
As 21st-century technology has enabled nearly anyone to sell merchandise to an international customer base, the need for high-quality presentation has never been higher. Social media allows sellers to share images and information, but the tool is wasted if the product itself isn't presented in an engaging, attractive way. Insta- Perfect is the ultimate inspiration guide to just that, featuring bold and memorable examples of product photography and art direction for a wide range of products. In interviews throughout the book, expert marketers and successful Instagram stars share their insights on a variety of topics, including setting, image composition/framing photo editing/retouching. A gallery of visual splendor in the age of social media for amateurs and professionals alike.
Interactive computer graphics. by 
Introduction to Computer Graphics with OpenGL ES by
OpenGL ES is the standard graphics API used for mobile and embedded systems. Despite its widespread use, there is a lack of material that addresses the balance of both theory and practice in OpenGL ES. JungHyun Han's Introduction to Computer Graphics with OpenGL ES achieves this perfect balance. Han's depiction of theory and practice illustrates how 3D graphics fundamentals are implemented. Theoretical or mathematical details around real-time graphics are also presented in a way that allows readers to quickly move on to practical programming. Additionally, this book presents OpenGL ES and shader code on many topics. Industry professionals, as well as, students in Computer Graphics and Game Programming courses will find this book of importance. Key Features: Presents key graphics algorithms that are commonly employed by state-of-the-art game engines and 3D user interfaces Provides a hands-on look at real-time graphics by illustrating OpenGL ES and shader code on various topics Depicts troublesome concepts using elaborate 3D illustrations so that they can be easily absorbed Includes problem sets, solutions manual, and lecture notes for those wishing to use this book as a course text.
Introduction to visual computing : core concepts in computer vision, graphics, and image processing by
Introduction to Visual Computing: Core Concepts in Computer Vision, Graphics, and Image Processing covers the fundamental concepts of visual computing. Whereas past books have treated these concepts within the context of specific fields such as computer graphics, computer vision or image processing, this book offers a unified view of these core concepts, thereby providing a unified treatment of computational and mathematical methods for creating, capturing, analyzing and manipulating visual data (e.g. 2D images, 3D models). Fundamentals covered in the book include convolution, Fourier transform, filters, geometric transformations, epipolar geometry, 3D reconstruction, color and the image synthesis pipeline. The book is organized in four parts. The first part provides an exposure to different kinds of visual data (e.g. 2D images, videos and 3D geometry) and the core mathematical techniques that are required for their processing (e.g. interpolation and linear regression.) The second part of the book on Image Based Visual Computing deals with several fundamental techniques to process 2D images (e.g. convolution, spectral analysis and feature detection) and corresponds to the low level retinal image processing that happens in the eye in the human visual system pathway. The next part of the book on Geometric Visual Computing deals with the fundamental techniques used to combine the geometric information from multiple eyes creating a 3D interpretation of the object and world around us (e.g. transformations, projective and epipolar geometry, and 3D reconstruction). This corresponds to the higher level processing that happens in the brain combining information from both the eyes thereby helping us to navigate through the 3D world around us. The last two parts of the book cover Radiometric Visual Computing and Visual Content Synthesis. These parts focus on the fundamental techniques for processing information arising from the interaction of light with objects around us, as well as the fundamentals of creating virtual computer generated worlds that mimic all the processing presented in the prior sections. The book is written for a 16 week long semester course and can be used for both undergraduate and graduate teaching, as well as a reference for professionals.
Langford's Starting Photography by
Starting with the basics of camera control and moving on to shutter speeds, aperture, zoom and flash, Langford's Starting Photography gives you the only introduction to digital photography you'll ever need. Once you've mastered the basics, examples and projects allow you to explore the key methods for capturing a variety of subjects from portraits and pets to landscapes and sports photography, alongside straightforward advice on using editing software to get the best out of your digital shots, will have you producing unforgettable images in moments. More inspiring than a textbook, more interesting than a reference, and more in-depth than a photography class, Langford's Starting Photography is the only guide you need to start taking great images.
Making video dance : a step-by-step guide to creating dance for the screen by
Making Video Dance: A Step-by-Step Guide to Creating Dance for the Screen is the first workbook to follow the entire process of video dance production: from having an idea, through to choreographing for the screen, filming and editing, and distribution. In doing so, it explores and analyses the creative, practical, technical, and aesthetic issues that arise when making screen dance. This rigorously revised edition brings the book fully up to date from a technical and aesthetic point of view, and includes: An extended exploration of improvisation in the video dance-making process New writing about filming in the landscape Additional writing on developing a practice and working with scores and manifestos Updated information about camera use, including filming with mobile phones A step-by-step guide to digital non-linear editing of screen dance Ideas for distribution in the 21st century Insights into Katrina's own screen dance practice, with reference to specific works that she has directed and which are available to view online New and revised practical exercises New illustrations specially drawn for this edition
Motion Design Toolkit by
This book offers a comprehensive overview of techniques, processes, and professional practices in the area of Motion Design, from fundamental building blocks of organizing time and space in production to managing workflow, budgets, and client relationships. The authors provide insight into the production process from concept through execution in areas as diverse as social media to large-scale projection mapping for events and festivals. Readers will learn through real-world examples, case studies, and interviews how to effectively use their skills in various areas of Motion Design. Industry professionals provide unique perspectives on different areas of Motion Design while showcasing their outstanding and inspiring work throughout. This is a valuable resource to students who aspire to work in a broad range of visual communication disciplines and expand their practice of Motion Design.
Photographers on Photography by
Through a carefully curated selection of quotations, images, and interviews, Photographers on Photography reveals what matters most to fifty masters of photography. With enlightening text by Henry Carroll, author of the internationally bestsellingRead This If You Want To Take Great Photographs series, you'll discover how the giants of the genre developed their distinctive visual styles and the core ideas that underpin their practice. The insightful perspective from these influential artists will inspire your own photographic process and, most importantly, help determine what photography means to you. "I haven't touched my Nikon 35mm since 2008, andPhotographers on Photography: How the Masters See, Think & Shoot made me want to pick it up again. I don't know if there's any more glowing praise I can give than that."Communication Arts "This is a fantastic book that explores photography in a thoughtful way. We can all benefit from giving some thought as to why and how we photograph what we do."Fstoppers.com Interviews with Olivia Bee, Esther Teichmann, Alex Soth, Ron Jude, Broomberg & Chanarin and further inspiration from: Eddie Adams, Lisette Model, Irving Penn, Garry Winogrand, Viviane Sassen, Maisie Cousins, Harley Weir, Gillian Wearing, Dorothea Lange, Hellen Van Meene, Man Ray, David Hockney, Ansel Adams, Daido Moriyama, Ralph Gibson, Saul Leiter, Todd Hido, Richard Misrach, Tacita Dean, Amalia Ulman, Alison Jackson, Jason Fulford, James Welling, Paul Graham, Laia Abril, John Baldessari, Lars Tunbjörk, Richard Avedon, Wendy Red Star, Dana Lixenberg, Edward Weston, Roni Horn, Vik Muniz, Penelope Umbrico, Ryuji Miyamoto, Bill Henson, Alvin Langdon Coburn, Ishiuchi Miyako, Leiko Shiga, Joan Fontcuberta, Charles Sheeler, Brandon Lattu, Nobuyoshi Araki, and William Henry Fox Talbot. Titles in Henry Carroll's"Read This" series: Read This if You Want to Take Great Photographs by Henry Carroll (9781780673356) Read This if You Want to Take Great Photographs of People by Henry Carroll (9781780676241) Use This if You Want to Take Great Photographs: A Photo Journal by Henry Carroll (9781780678887) Read This if You Want to Be Great at Drawing by Selwyn Leamy (9781786270542) Read This if You Want to Be a Great Writer by Ross Raisin (9781786271976) Read This if You Want to Be Instagram Famous edited by Henry Carroll (9781780679679)
Photography and Collaboration by
Photography and Collaboration offers a fresh perspective on existing debates in art photography and on the act of photography in general. Unlike conventional accounts that celebrate individual photographers and their personal visions, this book investigates the idea that authorship in photography is often more complex and multiple than we imagine involving not only various forms of partnership between photographers, but also an astonishing array of relationships with photographed subjects and viewers. Thematic chapters explore the increasing prevalence of collaborative approaches to photography among a broad range of international artists from conceptual practices in the 1960s to the most recent digital manifestations. Positioning contemporary work in a broader historical and theoretical context, the book reveals that collaboration is an overlooked but essential dimension of the medium's development and potential.
Photography and the Contemporary Cultural Condition by
In this book, Osborne demonstrates why and how photography as photography has survived and flourished since the rise of digital processes, when many anticipated its dissolution into a generalised system of audio-visual representations or its collapse under the relentless overload of digital imagery. He examines how photography embodies, contributes to, and even in effect critiques how the contemporary social world is now imagined, how it is made present and how the concept and the experience of the Present itself is produced. Osborne bases his discussions primarily in cultural studies and visual cultural studies. Through an analysis of different kinds of photographic work in distinct contexts, he demonstrates how aspects of photography that once appeared to make it vulnerable to redundancy turn out to be the basis of its survival and have been utilised by much important photographic work of the last three decades.
Photography masterclass : creative techniques of 100 great photographers by
What makes some photographs stay in the memory forever? Sometimes it's the subject matter alone, but more often it's the skill of the artists who took them. The premise of this magnificent book is quite simple: take 100 leading examples of the work of the world's greatest photographers, and a distinguished academic will describe how they achieved their effects to allow you to recreate them yourself. You could use the same depth of field as Cartier-Bresson; experiment with the white balance settings of Diane Arbus; or explore the lighting setup of Brassai in your own compositions. The images are arranged thematically, with engaging analysis of each image and a description of its technical make-up, along with a biography of each artist. The book showcases 100 of the greatest images in the history of the art and will provide an indispensable guide to the technicalities behind the well-known masterpieces and hidden gems in the world of photography.
Practical Algorithms for 3D Computer Graphics by
Practical Algorithms for 3D Computer Graphics, Second Edition covers the fundamental algorithms that are the core of all 3D computer graphics software packages. Using Core OpenGL and OpenGL ES, the book enables you to create a complete suite of programs for 3D computer animation, modeling, and image synthesis. Since the publication of the first edition, implementation aspects have changed significantly, including advances in graphics technology that are enhancing immersive experiences with virtual reality. Reflecting these considerable developments, this second edition presents up-to-date algorithms for each stage in the creative process. It takes you from the construction of polygonal models of real and imaginary objects to rigid body animation and hierarchical character animation to the rendering pipeline for the synthesis of realistic images. New to the Second Edition New chapter on the modern approach to real-time 3D programming using OpenGL New chapter that introduces 3D graphics for mobile devices New chapter on OpenFX, a comprehensive open source 3D tools suite for modeling and animation Discussions of new topics, such as particle modeling, marching cubes, and techniques for rendering hair and fur More web-only content, including source code for the algorithms, video transformations, comprehensive examples, and documentation for OpenFX The book is suitable for newcomers to graphics research and 3D computer games as well as more experienced software developers who wish to write plug-in modules for any 3D application program or shader code for a commercial games engine.
Running a Successful Photography Business by
Running a Successful Photography Business is the definitive business bible for every professional photographer a one-stop resource covering everything you need to know to make your business a success. This handy book contains guidance on the key areas of running your business- fine-tuning your brand, attracting new clients and keeping existing ones, costing and producing shoots, professional ethics and codes of practice, contracts, preparing a business plan, operating your business effectively, legal obligations, working with agents and agencies and how to evolve and prosper in this ever changing industry. Everything a working photographer needs to know in order for their business to flourish. Written from the unique point of view of a leading photographers' agent, the author knows from first-hand experience what it takes to survive and succeed as a professional photographer. This book builds on the author's popular first book, Setting up a Successful Photography Business, aimed at those starting out in freelance photography.
Video production handbook by 
Victorian Photography, Literature and the Invention of Modern Memory by
Invented during a period of anxiety about the ability of human memory to cope with the demands of expanding knowledge, photography not only changed the way the Victorians saw the world, but also provided them with a new sense of connection with the past and a developing language with which to describe it. Analysing a broad range of texts by inventors, cultural critics, photographers, and novelists, Victorian Photography, Literature, and the Invention of Modern Memory- Already the Past argues that Victorian photography ultimately defined the concept of memory for generations to come including our own. In addition to being invaluable for scholars working within the emerging field of research at the intersection of photographic and literary studies, this book will also be of interest to students of Victorian and modernist literature, visual culture and intellectual history.
Virtual Presenting by
Responding to the widespread and continued acceleration of virtual working practices in recent years, Virtual Presenting provides a clear guide to producing, presenting, and broadcasting in a remote context. Unlike traditional studio production where a presenter is surrounded by a crew and cameras, the virtual presenter is often isolated or connected to a remote crew. Virtual Presenting explains how to make an authentic connection across great spaces, linked only via the Internet. Topics covered include how to build a virtual setup; how to appear on camera; how to appear confident and comfortable; and how to optimize your presentation voice. The authors demonstrate how to tell effective stories across the entire new media landscape of webcasting, webinars, livestreams, and virtual events. Finally, success stories and case studies from teachers, students, and professionals are interwoven to show how these guidelines translate into best practices. Virtual Presenting will be a valuable resource for students of media production and remote broadcasting as well as professionals looking to become stronger communicators and visual presenters.
Why Art Photography? by
The second edition of Why Art Photography? is an updated, expanded introduction to the ideas behind today's striking photographic images. Lively, accessible discussions of key issues such as ambiguity, objectivity, fiction, authenticity, and photography's expanding field are supplemented with new material around timely topics such as globalization, selfie culture, and photographers' use of advanced digital technologies, including CGI and virtual reality. The new edition includes: an expanded introduction extended chapters featuring emerging trends a larger selection of images, including new color images an improved and expanded bibliography. This new edition is essential for students looking to enrich their understanding of photography as a complex and multi-faceted art form.
Video, Computer Graphics and Photography Techniques
VIDGRAP introduces students to the basics of video-making, computer graphics, and photography that will enable students to design effective and creative presentations. This course will also introduce students to software that can be used to develop quality materials for artistic and creative industries.
3D user interfaces : theory and practice by
3D interaction is suddenly everywhere. But simply using 3D input or displays isn’t enough: 3D interfaces must be carefully designed for optimal user experience. 3D User Interfaces: Theory and Practice, Second Edition is today’s most comprehensive primary reference to building state-of-the-art 3D user interfaces and interactions. Five pioneering researchers and practitioners cover the full spectrum of emerging applications, techniques, and best practices. The authors combine theoretical foundations, analysis of leading devices, and empirically validated design guidelines. This edition adds two new chapters on human factors and general human-computer interaction—indispensable foundational knowledge for building any 3D user interface. It also demonstrates advanced concepts at work through two running case studies: a first-person VR game and a mobile augmented reality application.
The art of black and white photography by
Over the last few years, most books on photography have been focused on the new breed of cameras and how to master the digital imaging workflow. In The Art of Black and White Photography author and photographer Torsten Andreas Hoffmann takes a different approach, focusing on image composition and image capture, with an emphasis on the creative aspects of black and white photography rather than on the digital workflow.
After introducing the ground rules of composition, Hoffmann illustrates their applications with his own stunning black and white images that cover various photographic genres, including architecture, street photography, portraiture, and surreal photography. Also discussed are the elements of a "photographic language"', which distinguishes creative photography from random shooting. Finally, you will learn valuable post-processing techniques, mostly using Photoshop, that emphasize the functions necessary for creating outstanding black and white images.
Close-Up and Macro Photography by
Focusing on fieldcraft techniques for macro and close-up photography, Thompson covers the vital but often overlooked skills necessary to achieve consistent professional results in the field. Case studies covering a broad and often challenging group of subjects from the seashore to your back garden form the core of the lavishly illustrated book. Biology, life history, subject behaviour and ethics along with best practice approaches are discussed in detail and underpinned with photographic tips. The book is divided into four sections--Digital Fundamentals, Fieldcraft & Methodology, Portfolio Case Studies, Digital Workflow & Presentation--covering the full photographic process from capture through to editing, captioning, development and storage are discussed. Moving beyond the surface-level approach to macro instruction, this book provides readers with techniques that work in the field. Illustrated with over 250 of the author's own inspiring images, this publication is a must for photographers, naturalists and anyone interested in improving their macro skills in the field.
The Complete Guide to Blender Graphics by
Blender is a free and open source graphics program for computer modeling and animation incorporating Photorealstic Rendering, Realistic Materials, Character Rigging, Sculpting, UV Unwrapping, Compositing, Simulation, Camera and Object Tracking, Game Creation and Video Editing. The program is comprehensive. The interface is extensive. The creative experience is fantastic. The Complete Guide to Blender Graphics: Computer Modeling and Animation is a unified learning manual for beginners and a reference for advanced users. The manual introduces the basic components of the Blender program with reference to the interface using written instruction in conjunction with illustrations and examples. In this fourth edition of The Complete Guide to Blender Graphics the author has included changes to the program which eventuate as Blender is developed and improved. New subject matter has been added with examples. Key Features: Contents are structured in a building-block fashion, using content covered in early chapters to explain more complex content in later chapters. Describes the basic operations of the interface and the majority of its functions with visual references and practical examples Significantly expands discussion of advanced features providing the reader with a guide to the full potential of the program.
Computer Graphics by
Complete Coverage of the Current Practice of Computer Graphics Computer Graphics: From Pixels to Programmable Graphics Hardware explores all major areas of modern computer graphics, starting from basic mathematics and algorithms and concluding with OpenGL and real-time graphics. It gives students a firm foundation in today's high-performance graphics. Up-to-Date Techniques, Algorithms, and API The book includes mathematical background on vectors and matrices as well as quaternions, splines, curves, and surfaces. It presents geometrical algorithms in 2D and 3D for spatial data structures using large data sets. Although the book is mainly based on OpenGL 3.3, it also covers tessellation in OpenGL 4.0, contains an overview of OpenGL ES 2.0, and discusses the new WebGL, which allows students to use OpenGL with shaders directly in their browser. In addition, the authors describe a variety of special effects, including procedural modeling and texturing, fractals, and non-photorealistic rendering. They also explain the fundamentals of the dominant language (OpenCL) and platform (CUDA) of GPGPUs. Web Resource On the book's CRC Press web page, students can download many ready-to-use examples of C++ code demonstrating various effects. C++ wrappers for basic OpenGL entities, such as textures and programs, are also provided. In-Depth Guidance on a Programmable Graphics Pipeline Requiring only basic knowledge of analytic geometry, linear algebra, and C++, this text guides students through the OpenGL pipeline. Using one consistent example, it leads them step by step from simple rendering to animation to lighting and bumpmapping. Key Features Covers the main aspects of modern computer graphics Explains how to create various special effects using OpenGL Describes a wide range of current topics, such as tessellation, spherical harmonics, and geometric shaders Contains practical exercises and examples as well as numerous illustrations, including several color images Offers full, cross-platform source code and examples on the book's CRC Press web page Figure slides available upon qualifying course adoption
Computer Graphics by
Computer Graphics: Principles and Practice, Third Edition, remains the most authoritative introduction to the field. The first edition, the original "Foley and van Dam," helped to define computer graphics and how it could be taught. The second edition became an even more comprehensive resource for practitioners and students alike. This third edition has been completely rewritten to provide detailed and up-to-date coverage of key concepts, algorithms, technologies, and applications. The authors explain the principles, as well as the mathematics, underlying computer graphics-knowledge that is essential for successful work both now and in the future. Early chapters show how to create 2D and 3D pictures right away, supporting experimentation. Later chapters, covering a broad range of topics, demonstrate more sophisticated approaches. Sections on current computer graphics practice show how to apply given principles in common situations, such as how to approximate an ideal solution on available hardware, or how to represent a data structure more efficiently. Topics are reinforced by exercises, programming problems, and hands-on projects. This revised edition features New coverage of the rendering equation, GPU architecture considerations, and importance- sampling in physically based rendering An emphasis on modern approaches, as in a new chapter on probability theory for use in Monte-Carlo rendering Implementations of GPU shaders, software rendering, and graphics-intensive 3D interfaces 3D real-time graphics platforms-their design goals and trade-offs-including new mobile and browser platforms Programming and debugging approaches unique to graphics development The text and hundreds of figures are presented in full color throughout the book. Programs are written in C++, C#, WPF, or pseudocode-whichever language is most effective for a given example. Source code and figures from the book, testbed programs, and additional content will be available from the authors' website (cgpp.net) or the publisher's website (informit.com/title/9780321399526). Instructor resources will be available from the publisher. The wealth of information in this book makes it the essential resource for anyone working in or studying any aspect of computer graphics.
Computer Graphics Through OpenGL by
From geometric primitives to animation to 3D modeling to lighting, shading, and texturing, Computer Graphics Through OpenGL: From Theory to Experiments, Second Edition presents a comprehensive introduction to computer graphics that uses an active learning style to teach key concepts. Equally emphasizing theory and practice, the book provides an und
Creative black & white : digital photography tips and techniques by
Black-and-white photography poses unique challenges; without color to guide the eye, contrast, lighting, and composition take on even more importance. In Creative Black and White, 2nd Edition, renowned photographer Harold Davis explains these elements and demonstrates the basic rules of black and white photography, as well as when and how to break them. He breaks through the complexity of this photographic medium, explores opportunities for black-and-white imagery, and shows how to capitalize on each and every one of them. This new, revised, and expanded edition brings the tools up to date with extended sections on monochrome in Lightroom, Photoshop, and related plugins.
The enthusiast's guide to DIY photography : 64 projects, hacks, techniques, and inexpensive solutions for getting great photos by
If you’re a passionate photographer and you’re ready to take your work to the next level, The Enthusiast’s Guide book series was created just for you. Whether you’re diving head first into a new topic or exploring a classic theme, Enthusiast’s Guides are designed to help you quickly learn more about a topic or subject so that you can improve your photography.
The Enthusiast’s Guide to DIY Photography: 64 Projects, Hacks, Techniques, and Inexpensive Solutions for Getting Great Photos teaches you ingenious, clever, and inexpensive tricks and techniques that will help you shoot great images without breaking the bank. In this book, six chapters are broken down into 64 numbered lessons, with each lesson providing all you need to know to improve your photography. Photographer and author Mike Hagen covers lighting solutions, studio equipment, lens hacks, macro projects, and more.
Fundamentals of Computer Graphics by
Drawing on an impressive roster of experts in the field, Fundamentals of Computer Graphics, Fourth Edition offers an ideal resource for computer course curricula as well as a user-friendly personal or professional reference. Focusing on geometric intuition, the book gives the necessary information for understanding how images get onto the screen by using the complementary approaches of ray tracing and rasterization. It covers topics common to an introductory course, such as sampling theory, texture mapping, spatial data structure, and splines. It also includes a number of contributed chapters from authors known for their expertise and clear way of explaining concepts. Highlights of the Fourth Edition Include: Updated coverage of existing topics Major updates and improvements to several chapters, including texture mapping, graphics hardware, signal processing, and data structures A text now printed entirely in four-color to enhance illustrative figures of concepts The fourth edition of Fundamentals of Computer Graphics continues to provide an outstanding and comprehensive introduction to basic computer graphic technology and theory. It retains an informal and intuitive style while improving precision, consistency, and completeness of material, allowing aspiring and experienced graphics programmers to better understand and apply foundational principles to the development of efficient code in creating film, game, or web designs. Key Features Provides a thorough treatment of basic and advanced topics in current graphics algorithms Explains core principles intuitively, with numerous examples and pseudo-code Gives updated coverage of the graphics pipeline, signal processing, texture mapping, graphics hardware, reflection models, and curves and surfaces Uses color images to give more illustrative power to concepts
Introduction to Computer Graphics by
Teach Your Students How to Create a Graphics Application Introduction to Computer Graphics: A Practical Learning Approach guides students in developing their own interactive graphics application. The authors show step by step how to implement computer graphics concepts and theory using the EnvyMyCar (NVMC) framework as a consistent example throughout the text. They use the WebGL graphics API to develop NVMC, a simple, interactive car racing game. Each chapter focuses on a particular computer graphics aspect, such as 3D modeling and lighting. The authors help students understand how to handle 3D geometric transformations, texturing, complex lighting effects, and more. This practical approach leads students to draw the elements and effects needed to ultimately create a visually pleasing car racing game. The code is available at www.envymycarbook.com Puts computer graphics theory into practice by developing an interactive video game Enables students to experiment with the concepts in a practical setting Uses WebGL for code examples Requires knowledge of general programming and basic notions of HTML and JavaScript Provides the software and other materials on the book's website Software development does not require installation of IDEs or libraries, only a text editor.
Lights, Camera, Uh-Oh : How to Be Camera Savvy in a Video Driven World. by
The invaluable handbook for acing your on-camera appearance On-Camera Coach is your personal coach for becoming great on camera. From Skype interviews and virtual conferences to shareholder presentations and television appearances, this book shows you how to master the art of on-camera presentation to deliver your message clearly, effectively, and with confidence. Fear of public speaking is common, but even the most seasoned speakers freeze in front of a single lens--being on camera demands an entirely new set of skills above and beyond the usual presentation to an audience you can actually see. It requires special attention to the way you move, the way you speak, and even the way you dress. This book provides the guidance and tools you need to ace it every time. Video is powerful, and it is everywhere; corporate YouTube channels, webinars, virtual meetings, TedTalks, and more are increasingly turning the lens on those who typically remain behind the scenes. This relatively recent trend will continue to expand as media plays a larger role in business, and the ability to appear confident, authoritative, and polished is becoming a necessary job skill. This book shows you everything you need to know about being on camera, from preparation through presentation and beyond. Learn how to prepare for an on-camera appearance Tailor your presentation to on-camera demands Discover how the camera interprets wardrobe and body language Appear dynamic, confident, and engaged when the lens points your way The lens captures everything--the awkward pauses, the nervous fidgets, poor posture, and every false start and mistake is captured for posterity. Is that the image you want to present? You want to get your message across and be heard; to do that, you must portray authority, energy, and confidence--even when you don't feel it. On-Camera Coach provides the expert instruction and insider secrets that help you make your message sing.
New Dimensions in Photo Processes by
New Dimensions in Photo Processes invites artists in all visual media to discover contemporary approaches to historical techniques. Painters, printmakers, and photographers alike will find value in this practical book, as these processes require little to no knowledge of photography, digital means, or chemistry. Easy to use in a studio or lab, this edition highlights innovative work by internationally respected artists, such as Robert Rauschenberg, Chuck Close, Mike and Doug Starn, and Emmet Gowin. In addition to including new sun-printing techniques, such as salted paper and lumen printing, this book has been updated throughout, from pinhole camera and digital methods of making color separations and contact negatives to making water color pigments photo-sensitive and more. With step-by-step instructions and clear safety precautions, New Dimensions in Photo Processes will teach you how to: Reproduce original photographic art, collages, and drawings on paper, fabric, metal, and other unusual surfaces. Safely mix chemicals and apply antique light-sensitive emulsions by hand. Create imagery in and out of the traditional darkroom and digital studio. Relocate photo imagery and make prints from real objects, photocopies, and pictures from magazines and newspapers, as well as from your digitial files and black and white negatives. Alter black and white photographs, smart phone images, and digital prints. 　
Explore these full text databases dealing with Arts Management to view and download articles for your research:
